4. 关于“逐别说”的解释显示巴利原文
4. Paṭiniddesavāravaṇṇanā
1. 对“教示之理趣”进行分别的解释显示巴利原文
1. Desanāhāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
5 如此,为使理趣等易于把握,先以偈颂形式,按其自性作了标示。现在,为就这些理趣先以反释的方式加以分别,便开始了“其中,什么是教示之理趣?”等的解释。其中,“什么是”是因想解说而发出的提问。“教示之理趣”则是对所提问之法所作的说明。虽然在“释论品”中已按自性显示了教示之理趣,但这里为显示反释的范围,便以“乐味与过患”等偈颂的一部分来回顾。这个教示之理趣,既有瞻前,也有顾后。瞻前时,提出“什么是教示之理趣?”之后,便对依自性所显示的“乐味与过患”加以归结;顾后时,则对“此教示之理趣是在解说什么?”这一解说行为的作者加以说明。由此显示教示之理趣的随义名称。“解说”的意思是详细注释、广为展开。显示巴利原文
5. Evaṃ hārādayo sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ gāthābandhavasena sarūpato niddisitvā idāni tesu hāre tāva paṭiniddesavasena vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katamo desanāhāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha katamoti kathetukamyatāpucchā. Desanāhāroti pucchitabbadhammanidassanaṃ. Kiñcāpi desanāhāro niddesavāre sarūpato dassito, paṭiniddesassa pana visayaṃ dassento ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’ti gāthaṃ ekadesena paccāmasati. Ayaṃ desanāhāro pubbāparāpekkho. Tattha pubbāpekkhatte ‘‘katamo desanāhāro’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘assādādīnavatā’’ti sarūpato dassitassa nigamanaṃ hoti. Parāpekkhatte pana ‘‘ayaṃ desanāhāro kiṃ desayatī’’ti desanākiriyāya kattuniddeso hoti. Tena desanāhārassa anvatthasaññataṃ dasseti. Desayatīti saṃvaṇṇeti, vitthāretīti attho.
现在,为依自性显示应由此理趣开演的法,而说出“乐味”等。由于前面已讲述过的道理,这些意思容易明了。因此,此后我们也只解释尚未述及之处。他心中思惟:“然而,此理趣在何处详细解释了所提及的乐味等呢?”然后,以教示之理趣显示应当详加解释的法,即举出“诸比丘,我将为你们说法”等能含摄一切教法之理的、世尊的“六六”开示的一部分来显示。显示巴利原文
Idāni anena desetabbadhamme sarūpato dassento ‘‘assāda’’ntiādimāha, taṃ pubbe vuttanayattā uttānameva. Tasmā ito parampi avuttameva vaṇṇayissāma. ‘‘Kattha pana āgate assādādike ayaṃ hāro saṃvaṇṇetī’’ti anuyogaṃ manasikatvā desanāhārena saṃvaṇṇetabbadhammaṃ dassento ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādikaṃ sabbapariyattidhammasaṅgāhakaṃ bhagavato chachakkadesanaṃ ekadesena dasseti.
其中,“法”:这个“法”字在教理、真谛、定、慧、本性、福德、犯戒、所知等众多意义中,都可以看到它的使用。例如,在“在此,比丘学习法”等中,指的是教理法。在“现观法、证得法”等中,指的是真谛。在“那些世尊是如是法者”等中,指的是定。在“真实、法、坚毅、舍弃”等中,指的是慧。在“诸比丘,有生法之众生”等中,指的是本性。在“法确实保护行法者”等中,指的是福德。在“四波罗夷法”等中,指的是犯戒。在“善法、不善法”等中,指的是所知。但是在这里,应当把它看作是指教理。显示巴利原文
Tattha dhammanti ayaṃ dhamma-saddo pariyattisaccasamādhipaññāpakatipuññāpattiñeyyādīsu bahūsu atthesu diṭṭhappayogo. Tathā hi ‘‘idha, bhikkhu, dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pariyattidhamme dissati. ‘‘Diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.299; mahāva. 18) sacce. ‘‘Evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13, 145) samādhimhi. ‘‘Saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo’’ti evamādīsu (jā. 1.1.57; 1.2.147-148) paññāyaṃ. ‘‘Jātidhammānaṃ, bhikkhave, sattāna’’nti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 2.398; ma. ni. 1.131) pakatiyaṃ . ‘‘Dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.10.102; 1.15.385) puññe. ‘‘Cattāro pārājikā dhammā’’ti evamādīsu (pārā. 233) āpattiyaṃ. ‘‘Kusalā dhammā akusalādhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 1) ñeyye. Idha pana pariyattiyaṃ daṭṭhabboti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā; dha. sa. aṭṭha. cittuppādakaṇḍa 1; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 1.1).
而“vo”音,用于对格之义,如在“来吧,诸比丘,我现在向你们自恣”(《相应部》1.215)中;用于作格之义,如在“诸比丘,你们聚集时,有两件事应作”等(《中部》1.273)中;用作填充词,如在“的确,你们那些圣者,身业清净”等中;用于与格之义,如在“诸比丘,我向你们宣说”等(《增支部》7.72)中。此处亦应视为与格义。显示巴利原文
Voti pana ayaṃ vo-saddo ‘‘handa dāni, bhikkhave, pavāremi vo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.215) ettha upayogatthe āgato. ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dvayaṃ karaṇīya’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.273) karaṇatthe. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu padapūraṇe. ‘‘Ārocayāmi vo, bhikkhave’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.72) sampadānatthe. Idhāpi sampadānatthe evāti daṭṭhabbo.
由乞食、具戒等功德而称“比丘”,或由已破烦恼等功德而称比丘;又或因在轮回中观见怖畏,故称“比丘”。“诸比丘”是其称呼。以此称呼,他策励他们前来听法,使其面朝向自己。“我将开示”即是“我将讲述”。由此表明:并非以法自在之力使你们做其他什么,而是以无碍智令一切应知之法现前,故我为你们开示法——从而宣告了即将进行的说法。于“初善”等中,初始即善的,名为“初善”;或具足初始之善的,名为“初善”。其余两词同理。其中,或以戒为初善,以定为中善,以慧为后善;或以佛陀极善之觉悟为初善,以法之善法性为中善,以僧伽之善行道为后善;又或以教化利根者为初善,以教化中根者为中善,以教化可引导的补特伽罗为后善。这便是此处所崇尚之义。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogena bhikkhū, bhinnakilesatādiguṇayogena vā. Atha vā saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhantīti bhikkhū. Bhikkhaveti tesaṃ ālapanaṃ. Tena te dhammassavane niyojento attano mukhābhimukhaṃ karoti. Desessāmīti kathessāmi. Tena nāhaṃ dhammissaratāya tumhe aññaṃ kiñci kāreyyāmi, anāvaraṇañāṇena sabbaṃ ñeyyadhammaṃ paccakkhakāritāya pana dhammaṃ desessāmīti idāni pavattiyamānaṃ dhammadesanaṃ paṭijānāti. Ādikalyāṇantiādīsu ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ ādikalyāṇaṃ, ādikalyāṇametassāti vā ādikalyāṇaṃ. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha sīlena ādikalyāṇaṃ. Samādhinā majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Paññāya pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Buddhasubuddhatāya vā ādikalyāṇaṃ. Dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Atha vā ugghaṭitaññuvinayanena ādikalyāṇaṃ. Vipañcitaññuvinayanena majjhekalyāṇaṃ neyyapuggalavinayanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto.
因具足义理,故称“有义”(sātthaṃ);因具足文句,故称“有文”(sabyañjanaṃ)。或者,由于具足宣说等六种义句,所以是有义;由于具足字母等六种文句,所以是有文。此处唯取此义。由于无可增添,故是绝对圆满,称为“唯圆满”(kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ);由于无可减损,故是“清净”(parisuddhaṃ)。或以戒等五法蕴的圆满为圆满;以渡越四种瀑流、于世间利养无所希求而说清净。梵行就是至为殊胜、至为高尚之行,亦指梵天中最胜者——圣者们所行、涵盖三学的教法,称为“梵行”(brahmacariyaṃ)。我将宣说、我将阐明,这便是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Saṅkāsanādichaatthapadasamāyogato vā sātthaṃ. Akkharādichabyañjanapadasamāyogato sabyañjanaṃ. Ayamevattho idhādhippeto. Upanetabbābhāvato ekantena paripuṇṇanti kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Apanetabbābhāvato parisuddhaṃ. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhapāripūriyā vā paripuṇṇaṃ. Caturoghanittharaṇāya pavattiyā lokāmisanirapekkhatāya ca parisuddhaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ brahmūnaṃ vā seṭṭhānaṃ ariyānaṃ cariyaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanaṃ brahmacariyaṃ pakāsayissāmi paridīpayissāmīti attho.
如此,世尊所教导与阐明的教法,便是为了显示乐味等而展开。那些乐味等,成为教说之滋养所缘的对象。在诸经中凡有特别提到它们之处,便从中择取,以举例的方式引至此处显示,因此说:“其中,何等是乐味”等语。其中的“欲”,指可爱色等,亦即是三地所涉法的事欲。“于欲乐者”,即希求欲的人。“若他此成就”:意思是,这个希求的有情,若他所欲求、也就是称为欲的事物得以成就,即获得了它——如此而说。“确实喜悦意”,指绝对地生起欢喜之心。“已得”,是得到之后。“人”,指众生。“凡欲者”,是指凡有所欲求者。这是此处简略的义理,详细的则应按《义释》中的解说来了知。“此是乐味”:即期望成就,在得到所求之时生起的喜悦、欢喜心,此因为可以被品尝,故称为乐味。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavatā desito pakāsito ca sāsanadhammo yesaṃ assādādīnaṃ dassanavasena pavatto, te assādādayo desanāhārassa visayabhūtā yattha yattha pāṭhe savisesaṃ vuttā, tato tato niddhāretvā udāharaṇavasena idhānetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamo assādo’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kāmanti manāpiyarūpādiṃ tebhūmakadhammasaṅkhātaṃ vatthukāmaṃ. Kāmayamānassāti icchantassa. Tassa cetaṃ samijjhatīti tassa kāmayamānassa sattassa taṃ kāmasaṅkhātaṃ vatthu samijjhati ce, sace so taṃ labhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Addhāpītimanohotīti ekaṃsena tuṭṭhacitto hoti. Laddhāti labhitvā. Maccoti satto. Yadicchatīti yaṃ icchati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana niddese (mahāni. 1) vuttanayena veditabbo. Ayaṃ assādoti yāyaṃ adhippāyasamijjhanā icchitalābhe pītimanatā somanassaṃ, ayaṃ assādetabbato assādo.
“若彼欲乐者”:指那个人,当他希求欲、或因欲而精勤之时。“生欲者”:即已生起渴爱。“众生者”:指有情。“那些欲若衰损”:若那些事欲因某种障碍而毁坏。“如被箭刺而受苦者”:如同被铁等箭所刺中而感受痛苦——是这个意思。“此是过患”:正是由于欲的种种变易、变异,致使希求欲的众生受到伤害,生起忧恼,这就是过患。显示巴利原文
Tassa ce kāmayānassāti tassa puggalassa kāme icchamānassa, kāmena vā yāyamānassa. Chandajātassāti jātataṇhassa. Jantunoti sattassa. Te kāmā parihāyantīti te vatthukāmā kenaci antarāyena vinassanti ce. Sallaviddhova ruppatīti atha ayomayādinā sallena viddho viya pīḷiyatīti attho. Ayaṃ ādīnavoti yāyaṃ kāmānaṃ vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā kāmayānassa sattassa ruppanā domanassuppatti, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
“避开欲者”:那位比丘以镇伏或断除的方式,对于所说诸欲上的欲贪,完全予以回避。如同什么呢?“此为出离”:即以涅槃为所缘,通过圣道超越那名为渴爱的贪爱,这就是出离。显示巴利原文
Yo kāme parivajjetīti yo bhikkhu yathāvutte kāme tattha chandarāgassa vikkhambhanena vā samucchindanena vā sabbabhāgena vajjeti. Yathā kiṃ? Sappasseva padā siroti, yathā koci puriso jīvitukāmo kaṇhasappaṃ paṭipathe passitvā attano pādena tassa siraṃ parivajjeti, somaṃ…pe… samativattatīti so bhikkhu sabbaṃ lokaṃ visaritvā ṭhitattā loke visattikāsaṅkhātaṃ imaṃ taṇhaṃ satimā hutvā samatikkamatīti. Idaṃ nissaraṇanti yadidaṃ visattikāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya nibbānārammaṇena ariyamaggena samativattanaṃ, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ.
“田”指稻田等田地。“地”指家宅地基等土地。“或金”指名为迦哈巴那的钱币与名为黄金的金子。“或”字表示选择,应连接到所有词。“牛马”即牛和马。“奴仆”即男奴与仆人。“妇女”即女人。“亲属”即亲族眷属。“众多欲”指其他如可爱色等种种众多的欲处。“人若贪求”:意思是,有情一再地渴望、希求。“此为乐味”:即对田地等的贪求,这就是乐味,因为这是相对于事欲的乐味。显示巴利原文
Khettanti kedārādikhettaṃ. Vatthunti gharavatthuādivatthuṃ. Hiraññaṃ vāti kahāpaṇasaṅkhātaṃ suvaṇṇasaṅkhātañca hiraññaṃ. Vā-saddo vikappanattho, so sabbapadesu yojetabbo. Gavāssanti gāvo ca asse cāti gavāssaṃ. Dāsaporisanti dāse ca porise cāti dāsaporisaṃ. Thiyoti itthiyo. Bandhūti ñātibandhavo. Puthū kāmeti aññepi vā manāpiyarūpādike bahū kāmaguṇe. Yo naro anugijjhatīti yo satto anu anu abhikaṅkhati patthetīti attho. Ayaṃ assādoti yadidaṃ khettādīnaṃ anugijjhanaṃ, ayaṃ assādeti vatthukāme etenāti assādo.
“无力者的烦恼征服他”:对于贪求田地等诸欲的人,那些因应被善法断除而称为“无力”的烦恼,便征服他、压倒他;或者,由于缺少信力等而无力之人,这些无力的烦恼便征服他,意即因其无力而将他征服。“诸灾厄摧残他”:这个贪欲的人,在追寻诸欲并守护它们时,狮子等明显的灾厄,以及身恶行等不明显的灾厄,都来摧残他。“从此……水”:从此,被那些明显与不明显的灾厄所制伏的这个人,生、老等痛苦便随逐他,如同海水涌入破船那般地随逐,这就是它的意思。“此为过患”:即以爱欲、恶行和染污为因,相续生起的生等诸苦,这就是过患。显示巴利原文
Abalānaṃ balīyantīti khettādibhede kāme anugijjhantaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ kusalehi pahātabbattā abalasaṅkhātā kilesā balīyanti abhibhavanti, saddhābalādivirahena vā abalaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ abalā kilesā balīyanti, abalattā abhibhavantīti attho. Maddantenaṃ parissayāti enaṃ kāmagiddhaṃ kāme pariyesantaṃ rakkhantañca sīhādayo ca pākaṭaparissayā kāyaduccaritādayo ca apākaṭaparissayā maddanti. Tato naṃ…pe… dakanti tato tehi pākaṭāpākaṭaparissayehi abhibhūtaṃ taṃ puggalaṃ jātiādidukkhaṃ samudde bhinnanāvaṃ udakaṃ viya anveti anugacchatīti attho. Ayaṃ ādīnavoti yvāyaṃ taṇhāduccaritasaṃkilesahetuko jātiādidukkhānubandho, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
「因此」:如同前面所说,贪着欲者必然与苦相伴随,因此如此说。「有情」即众生。「常具念」:以前夜后夜的精勤警觉而成为具念者之后。「应避开诸欲」:通过镇伏与断除的方式,对于色等事欲,不令任何种类的烦恼欲生起,应避开诸欲,应舍断诸欲。「舍断它们后,应渡越瀑流」:如此舍断诸欲之后,依能舍断它们的圣道,渡越四种瀑流,即能渡越之意。「如汲船水而至彼岸」:如同船因进水而变沉重,有人将船中的水向外舀出,凭借变轻的船,不费多大力气即到达彼岸;同样地,将自身这艘因烦恼之水而沉重的船,舀出后,以变轻的自身到达彼岸——即通过证得阿拉汉果而到达那边的涅槃,在无余涅槃界中般涅槃,此即是义。「此为出离」:即依舍断诸欲为门,渡越四瀑流后,在无余涅槃界中的涅槃,因其出离一切有为,故称为出离。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā kāmagiddhassa vuttanayena dukkhānubandho vijjati, tasmā. Jantūti satto. Sadā satoti pubbarattāpararattaṃ jāgariyānuyogena sato hutvā. Kāmāni parivajjayeti vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena ca rūpādīsu vatthukāmesu sabbappakāraṃ kilesakāmaṃ anuppādento kāmāni parivajjaye pajaheyya. Te pahāya tare oghanti evaṃ te kāme pahāya tappahānakaraariyamaggeneva catubbidhampi oghaṃ tareyya, tarituṃ sakkuṇeyyāti attho. Nāvaṃ sitvāva pāragūti yathā puriso udakaggahaṇena garubhāraṃ nāvaṃ udakaṃ bahi siñcitvā lahukāya nāvāya appakasireneva pāragū bhaveyya, pāraṃ gaccheyya, evameva attabhāvanāvaṃ kilesūdakagarukaṃ siñcitvā lahukena attabhāvena pāragū bhaveyya, pāraṃ nibbānaṃ arahattappattiyā gaccheyya anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbānenāti attho. Idaṃ nissaraṇanti yaṃ kāmappahānamukhena caturoghaṃ taritvā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā nibbānaṃ, idaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaraṇato nissaraṇanti.
「法」指布施等福德之法。「确实」仅为语助词。「护佑法行者」:凡是不放逸地践行那个法的人,法便护佑这位法行者,保护他免受现世与来世两类无益之事的损害。「犹如雨季时的大伞」:在雨季天下雨时,就像由熟练的人撑起的大伞,保护他不被雨淋湿。此处,如同大伞保护那持伞遮盖自身的人免受雨等侵害;同样,法也以其正志而自不放逸,以法行护佑那护佑自身者,此为要义。「此……行者」:此句使所述之义更为显明,较易理解。「此为果」:即上文所说法的护佑,能使人免于现世与来世的无益之事,并成就最上、最殊胜的保护,这便是果;此果因开示而有,故名为果。显示巴利原文
Dhammoti dānādipuññadhammo. Haveti nipātamattaṃ. Rakkhati dhammacārinti yo taṃ dhammaṃ appamatto carati, taṃ dhammacāriṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikabhedena duvidhatopi anatthato rakkhati pāleti. Chattaṃ mahantaṃ yatha vassakāleti vassakāle deve vassante yathā mahantaṃ chattaṃ kusalena purisena dhāritaṃ taṃ vassatemanato rakkhati. Tattha yathā taṃ chattaṃ appamatto hutvā attānaṃ rakkhantaṃ chādentañca vassādito rakkhati, evaṃ dhammopi attasammāpaṇidhānena appamatto hutvā dhammacariyāya attānaṃ rakkhantaṃyeva rakkhatīti adhippāyo. Esā…pe… cārīti etena vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ karoti, taṃ suviññeyyameva. Idaṃ phalanti diṭṭhadhammikehi samparāyikehi ca anatthehi yadidaṃ dhammassa rakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ rakkhāvasānassa ca abbhudayassa nipphādanaṃ, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ anāmasitvā desanāya nibbattetabbatāya phalanti.
「一切法」即一切有为法。「无我」:这些法中既没有作者、受者的自性,其自身也不是“我”,故称无我。「如是」:这样。「当以慧观察时」:在那个时候,策励修习观,以名为无我随观的智慧来观察。「则于苦厌离」:由于先前已善加观察了无常性与苦性,依厌离随观,对成为观境之五蕴的苦生起厌离。「此是清净之道」:即具有上述特征的厌离随观,由于能清净一切烦恼,是名为清净的圣道之途,或者说是通往最极清净之不死界的道路,此为方法。「此为方法」:即此以无我随观为门,对一切轮回生起厌离的方法,它是证得清净的因,故称为方法。显示巴利原文
Sabbe dhammāti sabbe saṅkhatā dhammā. Anattāti natthi etesaṃ attā kārakavedakasabhāvo, sayaṃ vā na attāti anattāti. Itīti evaṃ. Yadā paññāya passatīti yasmiṃ kāle vipassanaṃ ussukkāpento anattānupassanāsaṅkhātāya paññāya passati. Atha nibbindati dukkheti atha anattānupassanāya pubbe eva aniccatādukkhatānaṃ suparidiṭṭhattā nibbidānupassanāvasena vipassanāgocarabhūte pañcakkhandhadukkhe nibbindati nibbedaṃ āpajjati. Esa maggo visuddhiyāti yā vuttalakkhaṇā nibbidānupassanā sabbakilesavisujjhanato visuddhisaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa accantavisuddhiyā vā amatadhātuyā maggo upāyo. Ayaṃ upāyoti yadidaṃ anattānupassanāmukhena sabbasmiṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ nibbindanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ visuddhiyā adhigamahetubhāvato upāyo.
“有眼之人……应当避开”这首偈颂的简要意思是:如同一个有眼睛的人,会避开所遇到的地面不平之处,或因凶猛而危险的大象等;同样地,在此世间,有智慧的人以智慧了知何为利益、何为非利益,应当避开种种罪恶与低劣的恶行。而“教令”是指:“应避开诸恶”这句话,是法王世尊的命令,故称为教令。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cakkhumā…pe… parivajjaye’’ti imissā gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yathā cakkhumā puriso sarīre vahante visamāni bhūmippadesāni caṇḍatāya vā visame hatthiādayo parivajjeti, evaṃ loke sappañño puriso sappaññatāya hitāhitaṃ jānanto pāpāni lāmakāni duccaritāni parivajjeyyāti. Ayaṃ āṇattīti yā ayaṃ ‘‘pāpāni parivajjetabbānī’’ti dhammarājassa bhagavato āṇā, ayaṃ āṇattīti.
如此,将分别出现在各部经中的果、方法与教令作为例证说明后,为显示它们如何合在一起出现,而说“以空……”这首偈颂。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ visuṃ visuṃ suttesu āgatā phalūpāyāṇattiyo udāharaṇabhāvena dassetvā idāni tā ekato āgatā dassetuṃ ‘‘suññato’’ti gāthamāha.
其中,“摩伽罗阇,你应观察世间为空”这一整句是「教令」,意思是:“摩伽罗阇,你应将整个行世间视为‘空’——或基于它不受主宰的特相,或基于随观其空无实体的方式而观为‘空’。”这是法王的话语,因其带有指令的性质,故称教令。而“常具念”则是「方法」:即唯有恒常保持正念,这种对空的观察才能成就。“拔除了我见”,是说应以二十事为基础的有身见,应当彻底拔除、斩断。“如此成为超越死亡者”,此说「果」:即依照所述的方法超越死亡、超脱死域,为此而修的前行道便是这里所开示的“果”。应当这样理解:如同「乐味」等,在经中有些地方直接显明其相,有些地方须加以拣别,有些地方分开说,有些地方合在一起说;但「果」等则不然,无论在整部经还是偈颂中,果等都应一并显示。为阐明这个道理,在把它们分开举例之后,又再以“应以空……”等方式合在一起举例说明,当如此看待。显示巴利原文
Tattha suññato lokaṃ avekkhassu, mogharājāti āṇattīti ‘‘mogharāja, sabbampi saṅkhāralokaṃ avasavattitāsallakkhaṇavasena vā tucchabhāvasamanupassanavasena vā suññoti passā’’ti idaṃ dhammarājassa vacanaṃ vidhānabhāvato āṇatti. Sabbadā satikiriyāya taṃsuññatādassanaṃ sampajjatīti ‘‘sadā satoti upāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Attānudiṭṭhiṃ ūhaccāti vīsativatthukaṃ sakkāyadassanaṃ uddharitvā samucchinditvā. Evaṃ maccutaro siyāti. Idaṃ phalanti yaṃ evaṃ vuttena vidhinā maccutaraṇaṃ maccuno visayātikkamanaṃ tassa yaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadāpaṭipajjanaṃ, idaṃ desanāya phalanti attho. Yathā pana assādādayo sutte katthaci sarūpato katthaci niddhāretabbatāya katthaci visuṃ visuṃ katthaci ekato dassitā, na evaṃ phalādayo. Phalādayo pana sabbattha sutte gāthāsu vā ekato dassetabbāti imassa nayassa dassanatthaṃ visuṃ visuṃ udāharitvāpi puna ‘‘suññato loka’’ntiādinā ekato udāharaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
6 如是,以譬喻的方式按其自性显示了乐味等之后,为说明依补特伽罗差别而作的说教区分,遂言“其中世尊”等。显示巴利原文
6. Evaṃ assādādayo udāharaṇavasena sarūpato dassetvā idāni tattha puggalavibhāgena desanāvibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
此中,略开知者:对于仅被略提、仅被开示、仅被提示而尚未作详细解释与反复分别的,他即能了知,故称略开知者。意思是,仅凭简略的提示,他就能够通达蕴含种种分类与广释的义理;或者说,ugghaṭita 意为被提起、被启动、被建立,了知此者即略开知者。因为当法被开示时,它就如同从说法者那里转移到了受法的器皿之中,此人仅凭那刚刚启动的便能了知,此为其含义;或者说,刚被扰动即 ugghaṭita。因为对于执持常见等见的所化众生,佛陀特有的教法在宣说的当下便会产生扰动,并由此辗转相续;在此,此人仅凭那种被启动、刚被扰动的心便能了知法、觉悟法,故称略开知者。对于这位略开知者,佛陀为其开示出离,仅此便足以成就他的义利。广开知者:了知被广分别、被详细开示、被详尽说明的法的人;或者说,了知那微细、渐次深入的法的人,称为广开知者。对于这位广开知者,佛陀为其开示过患与出离,因为经由不过于简略也不过于广说的教法,他的义利才能成就。应导者:必须通过反复解说方能将义理引导入心的人;或者说,显示巴利原文
Tattha ugghaṭitaṃ ghaṭitamattaṃ uddiṭṭhamattaṃ yassa niddesapaṭiniddesā na katā, taṃ jānātīti ugghaṭitaññū. Uddesamattena sappabhedaṃ savitthāramatthaṃ paṭivijjhatīti attho, ugghaṭitaṃ vā uccalitaṃ uṭṭhapitanti attho, taṃ jānātīti ugghaṭitaññū. Dhammo hi desiyamāno desakato desanābhājanaṃ saṅkamanto viya hoti, tamesa uccalitameva jānātīti attho, calitameva vā ugghaṭitaṃ. Sassatādiākārassa hi veneyyānaṃ āsayassa buddhāveṇikā dhammadesanā taṅkhaṇapatitā eva calanāya hoti, tato paramparānuvattiyā, tatthāyaṃ ugghaṭite calitamatteyeva āsaye dhammaṃ jānāti avabujjhatīti ugghaṭitaññū, tassa ugghaṭitaññussa nissaraṇaṃ desayati, tattakeneva tassa atthasiddhito. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāritaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū, vipañcitaṃ vā mandaṃ saṇikaṃ dhammaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū, tassa vipañcitaññussa ādīnavañca nissaraṇañca desayati, nātisaṅkhepavitthārāya desanāya tassa atthasiddhito. Netabbo dhammassa paṭiniddisena atthaṃ pāpetabboti neyyo, mudindriyatāya vā paṭilomaggahaṇato netabbo anunetabboti neyyo, tassa neyyassa assādaṃ ādīnavaṃ nissaraṇañca desayati, anavasesetvāva desanena tassa atthasiddhito. Tatthāyaṃ pāḷi –
何等为略开知者补特伽罗?对于某一补特伽罗,当法义被宣说的当下,他便生起法现观。此补特伽罗即称为略开知者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo ugghaṭitaññū? Yassa puggalassa saha udāhaṭavelāya dhammābhisamayo hoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ugghaṭitaññū.
什么样的人是广开知者?若有人,于略说法义,当义理被详细分别时,便生起法现观,此人即称为广开知者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo vipañcitaññū? Yassa puggalassa saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo vipañcitaññū.
什么样的人是应导者?若有人,通过领受教示、反复请问、如理作意,亲近、交往、承事善知识,如此渐次修习,便生起法现观,此人即称为应导者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamo ca puggalo neyyo? Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yonisomanasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato evaṃ anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo neyyo’’ti (pu. pa. 148-150).
然而在此,“句彼处者”并非通达之器,故应知未被《导论》所摄。此处,有乐味、过患、出离;乐味与过患;乐味与出离;过患与出离;乐味、过患与出离——此即七种安立方式。显示巴利原文
Padaparamo panettha nettiyaṃ paṭivedhassa abhājananti na gahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca assādo, ādīnavo, nissaraṇaṃ, assādo ca ādīnavo ca, assādo ca nissaraṇañca, ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca, assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañcāti ete satta paṭṭhānanayā.
在这七种方式中,第三、第六与第七种方式,因能调伏三类所化众生而被采用,其余四种则未被采用。只宣说乐味,或只宣说过患,或两者合说,并不能调伏所化众生,因为未说断除烦恼。第五种方式也只是从过患的角度宣说,并非导向出离的恰当方法。世尊的教法以解脱为味,若不触及解脱及其方法,教法便不会运转。因此,这四种方式未被举出。不过,若依某处经句或针对某类根基者,将属于杂染分、习气分或兼具二者的教法——如某部分经文或偈颂——作为这些方式的例证举出,那么七种方式也都会被收录。然而,所谓调伏所化众生,是指令其相续中生起圣道。而这只能由前面所说的三种方式来引导,并非其余方式所能达成,所以其余方式在此不予提及。显示巴利原文
Tesu tatiyachaṭṭhasattamā veneyyattayavinayane samatthatāya gahitā, itare cattāro na gahitā. Na hi kevalena assādena ādīnavena tadubhayena vā kathitena veneyyavinayanaṃ sambhavati, kilesānaṃ pahānāvacanato. Pañcamopi ādīnavāvacanato nissaraṇassa anupāyo eva. Na hi vimuttirasā bhagavato desanā vimuttiṃ tadupāyañca anāmasantī pavattati. Tasmā ete cattāro nayā anuddhaṭā. Sace pana padaparamassa puggalassa vasena pavattaṃ saṃkilesabhāgiyaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ tadubhayabhāge ṭhitaṃ desanaṃ suttekadesaṃ gāthaṃ vā tādisaṃ etesaṃ nayānaṃ udāharaṇabhāvena uddharati, evaṃ sati sattannampi nayānaṃ gahaṇaṃ bhaveyya. Veneyyavinayanaṃ pana tesaṃ santāne ariyamaggassa uppādanaṃ. Taṃ yathāvuttehi eva nayeti, nāvasesehīti itare idha na vuttā. Yasmā pana peṭake (peṭako. 23) –
其中,什么是乐味与过患?显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca?
“一个人所做的种种业,都会在自身中见到其果报;行善者得善果,行恶者得恶果(pāpaka)。”
显示巴利原文 Yāni karoti puriso, tāni attani passati; Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpaka’’nti.
其中,行善者所领受的善果,这是乐味;行恶者所领受的恶果,这是过患。显示巴利原文
Tattha yaṃ kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ assādo. Yaṃ pāpakārī pāpaṃ paccanubhoti, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
“比丘们,有这八种世间法。哪八种?得等。”其中,得、称、乐、誉,这是乐味;失、讥、苦、毁,这是过患。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhime , bhikkhave, lokadhammā. Katame aṭṭha? Lābhotiādi (a. ni. 8.6). Tattha lābho yaso sukhaṃ pasaṃsā, ayaṃ assādo. Alābho ayaso dukkhaṃ nindā, ayaṃ ādīnavo.
其中,什么是乐味与出离?显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo assādo ca nissaraṇañca?
福业的果报是快乐,心中的愿望亦能实现;
迅速证得无上寂静的涅槃。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sukho vipāko puññānaṃ, adhippāyo ca ijjhati; Khippañca paramaṃ santiṃ, nibbānamadhigacchatī’’ti. (peṭako. 23);
这就是乐味与出离。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.
“比丘们,这三十二种是大人所具备的大人相。具足这些大人相的大人,只有两种趣向,没有其他……乃至‘揭开覆盖的人’”,这便是完整的《相经》。这即是其乐味与出离。显示巴利原文
Dvattiṃsimāni, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā…pe… vivaṭacchadoti sabbaṃ lakkhaṇasuttaṃ, (dī. ni. 3.199) ayaṃ assādo ca nissaraṇañca.
在此,什么是过患与出离呢?显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?
确实,五蕴是沉重的负担,承担此负担者即是补特伽罗。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhārā have pañcakkhandhā, bhārahāro ca puggalo; Bhārādānaṃ dukhaṃ loke, bhāranikkhepanaṃ sukhaṃ. ‘‘Nikkhipitvā garuṃ bhāraṃ, aññaṃ bhāraṃ anādiya; Samūlaṃ taṇhamabbuyha, nicchāto parinibbuto’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.22);
这便是过患与出离。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca.
那么,何谓乐味、过患与出离呢?显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañca?
因为欲乐缤纷、甜蜜、悦意,以种种形相扰乱人心;
因此,大王,我已出家,因为那真实不欺的沙门性才是更殊胜的。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā, virūparūpena mathenti cittaṃ; Tasmā ahaṃ pabbajitomhi rāja, apaṇṇakaṃ sāmaññameva seyyoti. (ma. ni. 2.307; theragā. 787-788; peṭako. 23);
这就是所说的味、过患与出离。因此,那些理趣也应当在这里被择取而后了知。在“果”等中,同样可得此理趣。因为在《藏论》中说:“其中,什么是果与方便?‘依戒而住的有慧之人……’这一偈颂,即是果与方便。”显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ assādo ca ādīnavo ca nissaraṇañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā tepi nayā idha niddhāretvā veditabbā. Phalādīsupi ayaṃ nayo labbhati eva. Yasmā peṭake (peṭako. 22) ‘‘tattha katamaṃ phalañca upāyo ca? Sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño’’ti gāthā (saṃ. ni. 1.23), idaṃ phalañca upāyo ca.
什么是“果”与“教诫”?显示巴利原文
Tattha katamaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca?
若你们畏惧苦,若你们以苦为不可爱;
莫造恶业,无论公开还是秘密。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sace bhāyatha dukkhassa, sace vo dukkhamappiyaṃ; Mākattha pāpakaṃ kammaṃ, āvi vā yadi vā rahoti. (udā. 44);
这就是果与教诫。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ phalañca āṇatti ca.
其中,什么是方便与教诫?显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo upāyo ca āṇatti ca?
了知此身如瓶,令心安住如城;
以智慧为武器与魔战斗,守护所胜而不执著。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kumbhūpamaṃ kāyamimaṃ viditvā, nagarūpamaṃ cittamidaṃ ṭhapetvā; Yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhena, jitañca rakkhe anivesano siyā’’ti. (dha. pa. 40);
这便是方便与教诫。应当了知,对于果等,也依两种方式举例。在此,凡应通过出离之说而调伏者,就如“略解知者”等那样,依说法之分类而建立补特伽罗之分类;同样地,通过“世尊为略解知者开示出离”等补特伽罗之分类,也有说法分类的成立。因此,该意义便如此显示出来。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ upāyo ca āṇatti ca. Evaṃ phalādīnaṃ dukavasenapi udāharaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ettha ca yo nissaraṇadesanāya vinetabbo, so ugghaṭitaññūtiādinā yathā desanāvibhāgena puggalavibhāgasiddhi hoti, evaṃ ugghaṭitaññussa bhagavā nissaraṇaṃ desetītiādinā puggalavibhāgena desanāvibhāgo sambhavatīti so tathā dassito.
如此,依某些补特伽罗而显示了说法之分类后,为了进一步依行道之分类来分别显示那些补特伽罗,故说“四行道”等。其中,由行道与通达所成之区分,即是依行道所成之区分,因此说“四行道”。而这些行道,依止与观的修习方式来说,可分为两种。如何呢?在止的方面:从最初作意开始,直至生起各个禅那的近行为止,于此期间转起的止修习,称为“行道”;从近行开始,直至安止为止,于此期间转起的慧,则称为“通达”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yesaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena desanāvibhāgo dassito, te puggale paṭipadāvibhāgena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘catasso paṭipadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭipadābhiññākato vibhāgo paṭipadākato hotīti āha – ‘‘catasso paṭipadā’’ti. Tā panetā ca samathavipassanāpaṭipattivasena duvidhā honti. Kathaṃ? Samathapakkhe tāva paṭhamasamannāhārato paṭṭhāya yāva tassa tassa jhānassa upacāraṃ uppajjati, tāva pavattā samathabhāvanā ‘‘paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Upacārato pana paṭṭhāya yāva appanā tāva pavattā paññā ‘‘abhiññā’’ti vuccati.
然而,这种行道,对某位补特伽罗而言是「苦」的,因为执取盖等敌对法的现行,即困难地、不喜乐地修习;对另一位无此情况的补特伽罗,则是「乐」的。通达对某位有时是「迟钝」的,即羸弱、不迅速地转起;对另一位是「迅猛」的,即不羸弱、迅速地转起。因此,凡在最初镇伏烦恼时,以苦、有行、有功用、疲惫的方式镇伏,他的行道即是「苦行道」。凡已镇伏烦恼,安住于安止的近行,需经长时间方令诸支显现者,即名「迟钝通达」。凡迅速令诸支显现者,即名「迅猛通达」。凡镇伏烦恼时,以乐、不疲惫的方式镇伏,即名「乐行道」。显示巴利原文
Sā panāyaṃ paṭipadā ekaccassa dukkhā hoti nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhammasamudācāragahaṇatāya kicchā asukhasevanāti attho, ekaccassa tadabhāvena sukhā. Abhiññāpi ekaccassa dandhā hoti mandā asīghappavatti, ekaccassa khippā amandā sīghappavatti. Tasmā yo ādito kilese vikkhambhento dukkhena sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilamanto vikkhambheti, tassa dukkhā paṭipadā hoti. Yo pana vikkhambhitakileso appanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena aṅgapātubhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, tassa dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Yo khippaṃ aṅgapātubhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti, tassa khippābhiññā nāma hoti. Yo kilese vikkhambhento sukhena akilamanto vikkhambheti, tassa sukhā paṭipadā nāma hoti.
在观的部分:凡依色与非色之门着手修观者,先把握四大种,再把握所造色,把握非色;然而,在把握色与非色时,需极辛苦、极困难、疲惫地才能把握,他的行道即称「苦行道」。对于已把握了色与非色者,他住于观的近行,因证得圣道缓慢,故称「迟钝通达」。同样,有人虽把握了色与非色,但在确定名色时,亦极辛苦、极困难、疲惫地来确定;确定名色后,安住于观的近行,需经长时间方能令圣道生起,其行道亦称「苦行道,迟钝通达」。显示巴利原文
Vipassanāpakkhe pana yo rūpārūpamukhena vipassanaṃ abhinivisanto cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggahetvā upādārūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti arūpaṃ pariggaṇhāti, rūpārūpaṃ pana pariggaṇhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariggahetuṃ sakkoti, tassa dukkhā paṭipadā nāma hoti. Pariggahitarūpārūpassa pana vipassanāparivāse maggapātubhāvadandhatāya dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Yopi rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapento dukkhena kasirena kilamanto vavatthapeti, vavatthapite ca nāmarūpe vipassanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena maggaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkoti. Tassāpi dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā nāma hoti.
另有一类人,虽已确定了名色,但在把握缘时,仍是极辛苦、极困难、疲惫地把握;把握缘之后,安住于观的近行,需经长时间才能令圣道生起。如此亦称为「苦行道,迟钝通达」。显示巴利原文
Aparo nāmarūpampi vavatthapetvā paccaye pariggaṇhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariggaṇhāti, paccaye ca pariggahetvā vipassanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena maggaṃ uppādeti. Evampi dukkhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā nāma hoti.
另一类人,虽已把握了缘,却在通达诸行的行相时,历经艰辛、困苦与疲惫才得以通达;通达行相之后,他安住于观的近行,需经很长时间才令圣道生起。这同样名为「苦行道,钝通达」。显示巴利原文
Aparo paccayepi pariggahetvā lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhanto dukkhena kasirena kilamanto paṭivijjhati, paṭividdhalakkhaṇo ca vipassanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena maggaṃ uppādeti. Evampi dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā nāma hoti.
另一类人,虽已通达种种行相,当其观智锐利、勇健、极清净地运转时,却生起对观的喜贪,他在消尽这喜贪时,也是历经艰辛、困苦与疲惫才得以消尽;消尽喜贪之后,安住于观的近行,需经很长时间才令圣道生起。这同样名为「苦行道,钝通达」。用同样的方法,其余三种行道也应当了知。在此,这四种行道当知正是属于观分的部分。显示巴利原文
Aparo lakkhaṇānipi paṭivijjhitvā vipassanāñāṇe tikkhe sūre suppasanne vahante uppannaṃ vipassanānikantiṃ pariyādiyamāno dukkhena kasirena kilamanto pariyādiyati, nikantiñca pariyādiyitvā vipassanāparivāsaṃ vasanto cirena maggaṃ uppādeti. Evampi dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā nāma hoti. Imināvupāyena itarāpi tisso paṭipadā veditabbā. Vipassanāpakkhikā eva panettha catasso paṭipadā daṭṭhabbā.
「四种补特伽罗」是指依上述行道类别而分的四种行道者。为了显示这行道类别连同其因、方法与果,故说「渴爱行者」等。显示巴利原文
Cattāro puggalāti yathāvuttapaṭipadāvibhāgena cattāro paṭipannakapuggalā. Taṃ pana paṭipadāvibhāgaṃ saddhiṃ hetupāyaphalehi dassetuṃ ‘‘taṇhācarito’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
此处,“carita”指行为,意为生活方式。“渴爱行者”是指以渴爱所生的行为为其特征者,即贪性者;或者,由渴爱所转而起的行,称为渴爱行。对于“见行者”,也同此理。“迟钝”即指无明,具足无明的人称为迟钝者,即痴增盛者。显示巴利原文
Tattha caritanti cariyā, vuttīti attho. Taṇhāya nibbattitaṃ caritaṃ etassāti taṇhācarito, taṇhāya vā pavattito carito taṇhācarito, lobhajjhāsayoti attho. Diṭṭhicaritoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Mandoti mandiyaṃ vuccati avijjā, tāya samannāgato mando, mohādhikoti attho.
“Satindriyenā”指以念为增上。因为他的念根本身是明净的。由于他是渴爱行者,在前行阶段被懈怠所制伏,所以精进不强;又因为痴增盛,所以慧不强。由此二者,定也不强,因此说“他的念根是明净的”。所以又说“以念处为依止”。再者,因为他是渴爱行者,镇伏烦恼不容易,所以行道是苦的;由于智不明净,所以是迟钝通达。应将前文所说的方法连接来理解。他通过圣道从轮回之苦中出离。显示巴利原文
Satindriyenāti satiyā ādhipaccaṃ kurumānāya. Satindriyameva hissa visadaṃ hoti. Yasmā taṇhācaritatāya pubbabhāge kosajjābhibhavena na vīriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, mohādhikatāya na paññā balavatī. Tadubhayenāpi na samādhi balavā hoti, tasmā ‘‘satindriyameva hissa visadaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘satipaṭṭhānehi nissayehī’’ti. Taṇhācaritatāya cassa kilesavikkhambhanaṃ na sukaranti dukkhā paṭipadā, avisadañāṇatāya dandhābhiññāti pubbe vuttanayaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Niyyātīti ariyamaggena vaṭṭadukkhato niggacchati.
“Udattho”意为“有广大义”,即具大慧。由于获得了慧为助伴,他的定变得敏锐,在相应法中能起增上的作用。因此说“以定根”。又由于智明净,所以说“速通达”。以定为主,以诸禅那为依止,这是它的不共之处。其余情况与前述相似。见行者将非导出之道也执为导出之道,对此生起强猛的勤励,所以他的精进增盛。正是因为精进增盛,他能很容易地镇伏烦恼,所以行道是乐的;但由于智不明净,所以是迟钝通达。这便是为了说明“见行者迟钝”等义理。其余都如前文所说。显示巴利原文
Udatthoti udaattho, uḷārapaññoti attho. Paññāsahāyapaṭilābhena cassa samādhi tikkho hoti sampayuttesu ādhipaccaṃ pavatteti. Tenevāha – ‘‘samādhindriyenā’’ti. Visadañāṇattā ‘‘khippābhiññāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Samādhipadhānattā jhānānaṃ jhānehi nissayehīti ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Diṭṭhicarito aniyyānikamaggampi niyyānikanti maññamāno tattha ussāhabahulattā vīriyādhiko hoti. Vīriyādhikatāyeva cassa kilesavikkhambhanaṃ sukaranti sukhā paṭipadā, avisadañāṇatāya pana dandhābhiññāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘diṭṭhicarito mando’’tiādinā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
“Saccehī”指诸圣谛。世间圣谛是前行智遍作的对象,出世间圣谛是胜解的对象,也是道智现观的对象,因此它们都成为依止。余义如前。在此,见行者中“广大慧”者,是略说即悟者;爱行者中“迟钝”者,是可引导者;其余两种人,则是广说即悟者。就这样,先前通过三种应教化众生的类型展示了说法的分类,现在又通过行道的分类,再次展示了同样的应教化众生,应当如是理解。显示巴利原文
Saccehīti ariyasaccehi. Ariyasaccāni hi lokiyāni pubbabhāgañāṇassa sammasanaṭṭhānatāya lokuttarāni adhimuccanatāya maggañāṇassa abhisamayaṭṭhānatāya ca nissayāni hontīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Ettha ca diṭṭhicarito udattho ugghaṭitaññū. Taṇhācarito mando neyyo. Itare dvepi vipañcitaññūti evaṃ yena veneyyattayena pubbe desanāvibhāgo dassito, tadeva veneyyattayaṃ iminā paṭipadāvibhāgena dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
现在,为了把应教化众生的分类作为义理连接的范畴来显示,所以说出“两种爱行者”等。由于贪爱是定的对立面,爱行者净化时,是经由定这一门而净化,因此说“以止为前行的”。然而,依据“修习止观并行”之说,最终出离是靠具足正见的正定,并非单靠正定本身,因此也就说“以止为前行的观”。“由离贪而心解脱,称为阿拉汉果定”,这是论藏《集》中所说。而此处将要说明的是不来果定,因为那是定圆满者的果。其中,染著为义者,名为贪。此贪因之而退去,故称“离贪”,即是以彼离贪而断除贪的意思。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ veneyyupuggalavibhāgaṃ atthanayayojanāya visayaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ubho taṇhācaritā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṇhāya samādhipaṭipakkhattā taṇhācarito visujjhamāno samādhimukhena visujjhatīti āha – ‘‘samathapubbaṅgamāyā’’ti. ‘‘Samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (a. ni. 4.170; paṭi. ma. 2.1, 3) vacanato pana sammādiṭṭhisahiteneva sammāsamādhinā niyyānaṃ, na sammāsamādhinā evāti āha – ‘‘samathapubbaṅgamāya vipassanāyā’’ti. ‘‘Rāgavirāgā cetovimuttīti arahattaphalasamādhī’’ti saṅgahesu vuttaṃ. Idha pana anāgāmiphalasamādhīti vakkhati. So hi samādhismiṃ paripūrakārīti. Tattha rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo. So virajjati etāyāti rāgavirāgā, tāya rāgavirāgāya, rāgappahāyikāyāti attho.
“心解脱”:此中,“心”即是心,借此名称,在这里意指“定”,正如“修习心与慧”所说。它由止息而从敌对法中解脱,故称“解脱”;或因彼而得解脱,或从彼解脱,故名“解脱”,其实就是定。正如在世间言教中,以想和心为说法的要目——如“种种身、种种想”及“比丘,你以何心”等;同样,出世间言教中,以慧和定为上首——如“具有五智的正定”和“修习止观并行”。在此,由于贪是直接的对立面,且有“以止为前行”的表述,因此用“心”字来指称定;同理,“解脱”一词也是如此,所以说“即是定”。再者,心即是彼,解脱亦是彼,故称“心解脱”。或者如前所述,心从敌对法中解脱,就是心解脱;或者在果识中,如前所述的解脱,就是心解脱;又或者指从心的果识的敌对法中解脱,由此义而称为心解脱,也就是定。关于“慧解脱”一词,亦应依此道理,在相应之处如此联结了知。显示巴利原文
Cetovimuttiyāti cetoti cittaṃ, tadapadesena cettha samādhi vuccati ‘‘yathā cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23). Paṭippassaddhivasena paṭipakkhato vimuccatīti vimutti, tena vā vimutto, tato vimuccananti vā vimutti, samādhiyeva. Yathā hi lokiyakathāyaṃ saññā cittañca desanāsīsaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘nānattakāyā nānattasaññino’’ti (dī. ni. 3.332, 341, 357; a. ni. 7.44; 9.24) ‘‘kiṃ citto tvaṃ, bhikkhū’’ti (pārā. 135) ca, evaṃ lokuttarakathāyaṃ paññā samādhi ca. Yathāha – ‘‘pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhī’’ti (vibha. 804) ca ‘‘samathavipassanaṃ yuganaddhaṃ bhāvetī’’ti ca. Tesu idha rāgassa ujuvipaccanīkato samathapubbaṅgamatāvacanato ca cetoggahaṇena samādhi vutto. Tathā vimuttivacanena. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘samādhiyevā’’ti. Ceto ca taṃ vimutti cāti cetovimutti. Atha vā vuttappakārasseva cetaso paṭipakkhato vimutti vimokkhoti cetovimutti, cetasi vā phalaviññāṇe vuttappakārāva vimuttīti cetovimutti, cetaso vā phalaviññāṇassa paṭipakkhato vimutti vimokkho etasminti cetovimutti, samādhiyeva. Paññāvimuttiyāti etthāpi ayaṃ nayo yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbo.
见在其自身领域中,与慧的运作相似,因此见行者在净化时,通过慧门而净化,所以说“两种见行者,以观……”等。“由于离无明而有慧解脱”,这是指阿拉汉果的慧。通过把握止来确认与之对立的贪爱,通过把握观来确认无明,便能容易地显示出第一种模式的阶段,所以说“那些以止……应当被引导”。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhiyā savisaye paññāsadisī pavattīti diṭṭhicarito visujjhamāno paññāmukhena visujjhatīti āha – ‘‘ubho diṭṭhicaritā vipassanā’’tiādi. Avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttīti arahattaphalapaññā . Samathaggahaṇena tappaṭipakkhato taṇhaṃ vipassanāggahaṇena avijjañca niddhāretvā paṭhamanayassa bhūmiṃ sakkā sukhena dassetunti āha – ‘‘ye samatha…pe… hātabbā’’ti.
其中,“以止为前行的行道”指前两种行道,另一种则是“以观为前行的行道”,应当了知。“应被引导”意为应使其行进,即应被带领。修观时,会生起无常想、苦想、无我想,由于苦想还含摄了不净想,因此这四种想都得以显现。再者,通过与它们对立的四种颠倒,便能容易地显示出整个“狮子游戏”论的阶段,所以说“那些以观……应当被引导”。显示巴利原文
Tattha samathapubbaṅgamā paṭipadāti purimā dve paṭipadā, itarā vipassanāpubbaṅgamāti daṭṭhabbā. Hātabbāti gametabbā, netabbāti attho. Vipassanāya aniccadukkhaanattasaññābhāvato dukkhasaññāparivārattā ca asubhasaññāya imā catasso saññā dassitā honti. Tappaṭipakkhena ca cattāro vipallāsāti sakalassa sīhavikkīḷitanayassa bhūmiṃ sukhena sakkā dassetunti āha – ‘‘ye vipassanā…pe… hātabbā’’ti.
7 如是,通过行道的分类显示了应受教化者的分类之后,现在将用智的分类来显示。因为世尊的说法,目的唯在于教化应受教化者;而教化他们,即是次第地令他们生起闻所成等三种智慧。又,阐明世尊说法生起的情形,正是论理方法的作用,因此先问此论理最初生起的方式,再以人的分类来分解说法,并于说法中运用说法论,为显示此义而说“此论理于何处生起?”等。显示巴利原文
7. Evaṃ paṭipadāvibhāgena veneyyapuggalavibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni taṃ ñāṇavibhāgena dassento yasmā bhagavato desanā yāvadeva veneyyavinayanatthā, vinayanañca nesaṃ sutamayādīnaṃ tissannaṃ paññānaṃ anukkamena nibbattanaṃ, yathā bhagavato desanāya pavattibhāvavibhāvanañca hāranayabyāpāro, tasmā imassa hārassa samuṭṭhitappakāraṃ tāva pucchitvā yena puggalavibhāgadassanena desanābhājanaṃ vibhajitvā tattha desanāyaṃ desanāhāraṃ niyojetukāmo taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘svāyaṃ hāro kattha sambhavatī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,「凡」指已从八难中解脱、并具足倾听等成就之人。「师」:因为他随宜教诫现法利益、来世利益与最上利益,故称为师。「法」:若依教奉行,即不堕恶趣,由于能这样持守,故名为法,也就是这个法。「说」:以简略、详细等方式进行宣说。「某一」:在世尊声闻弟子中的某一位。「应尊重者」:由戒、闻等殊胜功德的和合,理应受到尊重的人。「同梵行者」:梵,于最胜义上,指全部的佛陀教法;共同行持此梵行的人,即称为同梵行者。「生起信心」:即生起这样的信心——‘彼世尊确实是正自觉者,能宣说这样的法’,因而对如来生起信心;‘此法确实是善说,如此完全圆满、完全清净’,因而对法生起信心。显示巴利原文
Tattha yassāti yo so aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vimutto sotāvadhānapariyosānāhi ca sampattīti samannāgato yassa. Satthāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ anusāsanato satthā. Dhammanti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyesu apatamāne dhāretīti dhammo, taṃ dhammaṃ. Desayatīti saṅkhepavitthāranayehi bhāsati katheti. Aññataroti bhagavato sāvakesu aññataro. Garuṭṭhānīyoti sīlasutādiguṇavisesayogena garukaraṇīyo. Sabrahmacārīti brahmaṃ vuccati seṭṭhaṭṭhena sakalaṃ satthusāsanaṃ. Samaṃ saha vā brahmaṃ carati paṭipajjatīti sabrahmacārī. Saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā yo evarūpassa dhammassa desetā’’ti tathāgate, ‘‘svākkhāto vatāyaṃ dhammo yo evaṃ ekantaparipuṇṇo ekantaparisuddho’’tiādinā dhamme ca saddhaṃ labhati uppādetīti attho.
「于此」:即于所听闻、所学得的法。「审察」:是对经文和经文义理进行审察的智慧。其余诸词是其同义词。因为在进行那样的审察时,它不退缩,由策励的特性而称为「策励」,由衡量的特性而称为「衡量」,由推度的特性而称为「推度」。或者,因为能审察,故称「审察」,即是对字句与义理加以分别考察的智慧。「策励」:由精进策励而生,能忆持法、熟悉法的智慧。「衡量」:对句与句之间,或法与法之间进行衡量、比对而把握的智慧。「推度」:引用四大教法,对经文及经文义理进行推度的智慧。希望自利利他的人所听闻者,称为「所闻」,这是因为言说随时间而无固定,如同‘duddha’一词的例子。那么它是什么呢?从作用或能力上说,当知即是教法。或者,听闻即是‘所闻’,即随顺耳门而对教法生起执持之义。由所闻为因而产生的,就是‘闻所成’。依方式而了知,称为「慧」。凡是审察,此即是闻所成慧,也应各自这样结合理解。「如是」的意思是:正如闻所成慧有审察等不同名称,以及审察等不同分类一样,思所成慧也是如此。或者,就像闻显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ yathāsute yathāpariyatte dhamme. Vīmaṃsāti pāḷiyā pāḷiatthassa ca vīmaṃsanapaññā . Sesaṃ tassā eva vevacanaṃ. Sā hi yathāvuttavīmaṃsane saṅkocaṃ anāpajjitvā ussahanavasena ussāhanā, tulanavasena tulanā, upaparikkhaṇavasena upaparikkhāti ca vuttā. Atha vā vīmaṃsatīti vīmaṃsā, sā padapadatthavicāraṇā paññā. Ussāhanāti vīriyena upatthambhitā dhammassa dhāraṇaparicayasādhikā paññā. Tulanāti padena padantaraṃ, desanāya vā desanantaraṃ tulayitvā saṃsanditvā gahaṇapaññā. Upaparikkhāti mahāpadese otāretvā pāḷiyā pāḷiatthassa ca upaparikkhaṇapaññā. Attahitaṃ parahitañca ākaṅkhantehi suyyatīti sutaṃ, kālavacanicchāya abhāvato, yathā duddhanti. Kiṃ pana tanti? Adhikārato sāmatthiyato vā pariyattidhammoti viññāyati. Atha vā savanaṃ sutaṃ, sotadvārānusārena pariyattidhammassa upadhāraṇanti attho. Sutena hetunā nibbattā sutamayī. Pakārena jānātīti paññā. Yā vīmaṃsā, ayaṃ sutamayī paññāti paccekampi yojetabbaṃ. Tathāti yathā sutamayī paññā vīmaṃsādipariyāyavatī vīmaṃsādivibhāgavatī ca, tathā cintāmayī cāti attho. Yathā vā sutamayī oramattikā anavaṭṭhitā ca, evaṃ cintāmayī cāti dasseti.
「以所闻为依」:意思是依靠所听闻的教法,或以听闻教法作为近依。此处是以‘如此这般之相’的工具格来表达,含义为‘依于所说的闻’。在「审察」等词中:「审察」是指对‘这是戒,这是定,这些是色法、无色法,这些是五蕴’等诸法的自性进行审察了解的智慧。「衡量」是指不再囿于这些法的名称含义,而是如同以秤称量一般,把握这些法的自性、作用与特相的智慧。「推度」是指不离这些法的自相,进一步对它们的无常性、生起、有因等面向,进行推理、思辨与考察的智慧;同时,对于经过如此推度的法,如同有实物现前一样,以此方式使其成为可深入省察的对象,然后以透视心持续观察,这称为「意随观」。在此,因为闻所成慧是基于对所闻佛法的忆持和熟悉而生起,带有策励的性质,故可用「策励」来描述;但思所成慧并非如此,因此这里没有使用「策励」一词。「思惟」即是‘思考’,也就是深入省察的意思。其余的解释与前相同。显示巴利原文
Sutena nissayenāti sutena pariyattidhammena pariyattidhammassavanena vā upanissayena itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ, yathāvuttaṃ sutaṃ upanissāyāti attho. Vīmaṃsātiādīsu ‘‘idaṃ sīlaṃ, ayaṃ samādhi, ime rūpārūpadhammā, ime pañcakkhandhā’’ti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvavīmaṃsanabhūtā paññā vīmaṃsā. Tesaṃyeva dhammānaṃ vacanatthaṃ muñcitvā sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇassa tulayitvā viya gahaṇapaññā tulanā. Tesaṃyeva dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇaṃ avijahitvā aniccatādiruppanasappaccayādiākāre ca takketvā vitakketvā ca upaparikkhaṇapaññā upaparikkhā, tathā upaparikkhite dhamme saviggahe viya upaṭṭhahante evametehi nijjhānakkhame katvā cittena anu anu pekkhaṇā manasānupekkhaṇā. Ettha ca yathā sutamayī paññā yathāsutassa dhammassa dhāraṇaparicayavasena pavattanato ussāhajātā ‘‘ussāhanā’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati, na evaṃ cintāmayīti idha ‘‘ussāhanā’’ti padaṃ na vuttaṃ. Cintanaṃ cintā, nijjhānanti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
「以此二慧」:指以上述两种慧为基础。唯有立足于闻慧与思慧之后,才能开始修习观。「于此二慧中」也有典籍如此记载。或者,可以加上「由它们所生、已生起的」这一省略部分来理解。「与作意相应者」:指心已恰当投入于摄受色与非色等所缘之作意的人。「所生起之智」:依前述方法,通过作意的努力,次第成就「见清净」、「度疑清净」、「道非道智见清净」与「行道智见清净」,由此精勤于观的人,所生起的、名为「智见清净」的圣道智——这种智慧,即是修所成慧。这便是前后文的逻辑连接。而此慧又分为「见」与「修」两种,因此说「在见地或修地」。问:若说是「见」,为何这里的慧是修所成慧?答:此智本质即是修所成慧,但因其初次现见涅槃,故称之为「见」。因此,具有果报的初道,属于「见地」;其余的有学与无学之法,则属于「修地」。显示巴利原文
Imāhi dvīhi paññāhīti yathāvuttāhi dvīhi paññāhi kāraṇabhūtāhi. Sutacintāmayañāṇesu hi patiṭṭhito vipassanaṃ ārabhatīti. ‘‘Imāsu dvīsu paññāsū’’tipi paṭhanti. ‘‘Tehi jātāsu uppannāsū’’ti vā vacanaseso yojetabbo. Manasikārasampayuttassāti rūpārūpapariggahādimanasikāre yuttappayuttassa. Yaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjatīti vuttanayena manasikārappayogena diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhimaggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhipaṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīnaṃ sampa ādanena vipassanaṃ ussukkantassa yaṃ ñāṇadassanavisuddhisaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayaṃ bhāvanāmayī paññāti sambandho. Taṃ pana dassanaṃ bhāvanāti duvidhanti āha – ‘‘dassanabhūmiyaṃ vā bhāvanābhūmiyaṃ vā’’ti. Yadi dassananti vuccati, kathaṃ tattha paññā bhāvanāmayīti? Bhāvanāmayameva hi taṃ ñāṇaṃ, paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato pana ‘‘dassana’’nti vuttanti saphalo paṭhamamaggo dassanabhūmi. Sesā sekkhāsekkhadhammā bhāvanābhūmi.
8 8. 现在,为以另一种方式显示这三种慧,而说「从他闻声」等。其中,「从他」意为不是从自己,而是从其他处——即从导师或从弟子。「闻声」:是从他们的说法音声,即以说法为缘的意思。或者,从他有声,故为「从他闻声」——那慧是闻所成,应如此连接。「自内所生」:是各自生起于自身之内。「如理作意」:是以如所说把握诸法自性等方便而转起的作意。「由从他闻声」:是以从他闻声为因。其余如前所说。显示巴利原文
8. Idāni imā tisso paññā pariyāyantarena dassetuṃ ‘‘paratoghosā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paratoti na attato, aññato satthuto sāvakato vāti attho. Ghosāti tesaṃ desanāghosato, desanāpaccayāti attho. Atha vā parato ghoso etissāti paratoghosā, yā paññā, sā sutamayīti yojetabbaṃ. Paccattasamuṭṭhitāti paccattaṃ tassa tassa attani sambhūtā. Yonisomanasikārāti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvapariggaṇhanādinā yathāvuttena upāyena pavattamanasikārā. Parato ca ghosenāti paratoghosena hetubhūtena. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
现在,为了说明提出这些慧是为哪类所化导的众生,便结合所化导众生的差别来显示,而说「凡此人」等。其中,先以数量说「此二」,再以自相显示它们是「闻所成与思所成」。「此人是略开知者」:此人因闻所成与思所成之慧,已成就对意乐与加行的觉悟,故仅由略说即能了知,称为「略开知者」。「此人是广演知者」:因思所成慧尚未审察其意乐,故由略说与广释而了知,是为广演知者。「此人是应引导者」:因连闻所成慧也不具足,故须由无余的广说教法来引导,是为应引导者。显示巴利原文
Idāni yadatthaṃ imā paññā uddhaṭā, tameva veneyyapuggalavibhāgaṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imā dveti gaṇanavasena vatvā puna tā sutamayī cintāmayī cāti sarūpato dasseti. Ayaṃ ugghaṭitaññūti ayaṃ sutamayacintāmayañāṇehi āsayapayogapabodhassa nipphāditattā uddesamatteneva jānanato ‘‘ugghaṭitaññū’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ vipañcitaññūti cintāmayañāṇena āsayassa aparikkhatattā uddesaniddesehi jānanato vipañcitaññū. Ayaṃ neyyoti sutamayañāṇassāpi abhāvato niravasesaṃ vitthāradesanāya netabbato neyyo.
9 如此,从教说、行道与慧的差别,将可度的三类众生分别之后,现在为了从中确定世尊法教所转起的“说法之食”并加以运用,而开始“此即法教”等。显示巴利原文
9. Evaṃ desanāpaṭipadāñāṇavibhāgehi desanābhājanaṃ veneyyattayaṃ vibhajitvā idāni tattha pavattitāya bhagavato dhammadesanāya desanāhāraṃ niddhāretvā yojetuṃ ‘‘sāyaṃ dhammadesanā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.
其中,“此”即是那。前面在“比丘们,我将为你们说法”等(《导论》5)返指句的开头,作为说法之食的行境而安立的经文,现在正是为了将说法之食应用于此,而回顾说“此即法教”。以“在说什么?”这种想说之意,问取教说的总义,再以数量加以限定,从总体上显示:“四圣谛”。因为世尊的教说没有脱离圣谛的,所以它的总义就是四圣谛。又因为所化导的“流转者”、“令流转者”、“流转之灭”与“达彼之方便”以及“安住者”都不外乎这些,因此这四者由于无颠倒性而应视作圣谛。再从自相而显示它们:“苦、集、灭、道”。显示巴利原文
Tattha sāyanti sā ayaṃ. Yā pubbe ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādinā (netti. 5) paṭiniddesavārassa ādito desanāhārassa visayabhāvena nikkhittā pāḷi, tamevettha desanāhāraṃ niyojetuṃ ‘‘sāyaṃ dhammadesanā’’ti paccāmasati. Kiṃ desayatīti kathetukamyatāvasena desanāya piṇḍatthaṃ pucchitvā taṃ gaṇanāya paricchinditvā sāmaññato dasseti ‘‘cattāri saccānī’’ti. Saccavinimuttā hi bhagavato desanā natthīti. Tassā ca cattāri saccāni piṇḍattho. Pavattipavattakanivattitadupāyavimuttassa neyyassa abhāvato cattāri aviparītabhāvena saccānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tāni ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magga’’nti sarūpato dasseti.
其中,苦:因为是众多灾祸的依托而可厌,因为不具有凡夫所计度的常、净、乐、我之性而空虚,故为苦。集:在其余条件具足时,是苦的生起之因,故为集。灭:一切趣中皆空,故此处没有那名为轮回牢狱的苦聚;或当证得此灭时,名为轮回牢狱的苦聚便不再生起,故为灭;或者因为它是令苦不再生起之灭的缘。道:以杀灭烦恼的方式而行,或为希求涅槃的修行者所追求,或为那些希求涅槃者所遵行,故为道。其中,以集为味,以苦为过患,以道与灭为出离。如此,在那些以自相宣说四圣谛的经中,便依文而取。在那些未以自相宣说四圣谛的经中,则从义理上提取四圣谛,再依它们来审察味等。在那些以自相宣说味等的地方,则不必如此;在未出现的地方,则从义理上提取味等,再依它们来审察四圣谛。然而在此,味等是以举例的方式从自相显示的,所以是依它们来审察圣谛,故说“过患”等。显示巴利原文
Tattha anekupaddavādhiṭṭhānabhāvena kucchitattā bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahena tucchattā ca dukkhaṃ. Avasesapaccayasamavāye dukkhassa uppattikāraṇattā samudayo. Sabbagatisuññattā natthi ettha saṃsāracārakasaṅkhāto dukkharodho, etasmiṃ vā adhigate saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa abhāvotipi nirodho, anuppādanirodhapaccayattā vā. Mārento gacchati, nibbānatthikehi maggiyatīti vā maggo. Tattha samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ yasmiṃ sutte cattāri saccāni sarūpato āgatāni, tattha yathārutavasena. Yattha pana sutte cattāri saccāni sarūpato na āgatāni, tattha atthato cattāri saccāni uddharitvā tesaṃ vasena assādādayo niddhāretabbā. Yattha ca assādādayo sarūpato āgatā, tattha vattabbameva natthi. Yattha pana na āgatā, tattha atthato uddharitvā tesaṃ vasena cattāri saccāni niddhāretabbāni. Idha pana assādādayo udāharaṇavasena sarūpato dassitāti tehi saccāni niddhāretuṃ ‘‘ādīnavo cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,由“略说五取蕴是苦”等语可知,除渴爱之外的三界诸法为苦谛,而这些诸法因无常等自性故为过患,其果亦应由教说而成就。其中,凡属世间者,即依此说“果亦是苦”。“味”:因渴爱与颠倒者亦欲求他们,故依他们说“味是集”。与观智俱起的圣道即是教说,而教说为证得教说之果的方便,故说“方便与教令是道”。于出离句中也应确定是圣道。不应视此谛的分别为混乱。正如在《谛分别》中,于各各理趣,以集谛之体分别“渴爱、其余烦恼、其余不善法、有漏善根、有漏善法”,而各各其余三界法以苦谛之体分别,此处也应如此看待。此为“此即四圣谛”的结语。“此即法轮”:世尊依四圣谛而为自赞叹的教说,此即法轮。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.387; ma. ni. 1.120; 3.373; vibha. 202) vacanato taṇhāvajjā tebhūmakadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, te ca aniccādisabhāvattā ādīnavo, phalañca desanāya sādhetabbaṃ. Tattha yaṃ lokiyaṃ, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘phalañca dukkha’’nti. Assādoti taṇhāvipallāsānampi icchitattā te sandhāya ‘‘assādo samudayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo desanā ca desanāphalādhigamassa upāyoti katvā ‘‘upāyo āṇatti ca maggo’’ti vuttaṃ. Nissaraṇapade cāpi ariyamaggo niddhāretabbo, na cāyaṃ saccavibhāgo ākuloti daṭṭhabbo. Yathā hi saccavibhaṅge (vibha. 208) ‘‘taṇhā avasiṭṭhā kilesā avasiṭṭhā akusalā dhammā sāsavāni kusalamūlāni sāsavā ca kusalā dhammā samudayasaccabhāvena vibhattā’’ti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ naye taṃtaṃavasiṭṭhā tebhūmakadhammā dukkhasaccabhāvena vibhattā, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbanti. Imāni cattāri saccānīti nigamanaṃ . Idaṃ dhammacakkanti yāyaṃ bhagavato catusaccavasena sāmukkaṃsikā dhammadesanā, idaṃ dhammacakkaṃ.
现在,为通过《谛分别经》显示此次说法的法轮性质,故而说了“如世尊所说”等语。其中,“此是苦”:这是以生等来分别、略摄为五取蕴、以渴爱为过患、属于三界之法;由于它是苦的立足处,并具有苦苦等状态,故称“苦圣谛”。“我”为世尊自称。“在波罗奈”:指在名为波罗奈的城市附近。“仙人堕处”:因诸独觉佛仙人从此空中降落,故名仙人堕处。“鹿野苑”:因该地施与鹿群无畏,故得名之精舍。“无上”:超越、渡越,或指最殊胜;因没有比它更殊胜的,故称“无上”;也可说无可比拟、无可匹敌。世尊的说法,虽然在众多天、人众中,为令他们通达圣谛已转动数百次,但首次是以憍陈如为首的十八位梵天众为对象,阐明四圣谛通达的法说。由于这次说法具有殊胜性,所以拥有“法轮”这一特别名称,因此说“转法轮”。显示巴利原文
Idāni tassā dhammadesanāya dhammacakkabhāvaṃ saccavibhaṅgasuttavasena (ma. ni. 3.371 ādayo) dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idaṃ dukkhanti idaṃ jātiādivibhāgaṃ saṅkhepato pañcupādānakkhandhasaṅgahaṃ taṇhāvajjaṃ tebhūmakadhammajātaṃ dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvena dukkhadukkhādibhāvena ca dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti attho. Meti bhagavā attānaṃ niddisati. Bārāṇasiyanti bārāṇasīnāmakassa nagarassa avidūre. Paccekabuddhaisīnaṃ ākāsato otaraṇaṭṭhānatāya isipatanaṃ. Migānaṃ tattha abhayassa dinnattā migadāyanti ca laddhanāme assame. Uttarati atikkamati, abhibhavatīti vā uttaraṃ, natthi etassa uttaranti anuttaraṃ. Anatisayaṃ appaṭibhāgaṃ vā. Kiñcāpi bhagavato dhammadesanā anekāsu devamanussaparisāsu anekasatakkhattuṃ tesaṃ ariyasaccappaṭivedhasampādanavasena pavattitā, tathāpi sabbapaṭhamaṃ aññāsikoṇḍaññappamukhāya aṭṭhārasaparimāṇāya brahmakoṭiyā catusaccappaṭivedhavibhāvanīyā dhammadesanā, tassā sātisayā dhammacakkasamaññāti ‘‘dhammacakkaṃ pavattita’’nti vuttaṃ.
其中,“法轮”:念处等法本身,因能转起故称为“轮”,故是法轮;或者“轮”指教令。因这法不脱离法本身,它既是法又是轮,故名法轮。以法、以理而转动,亦称法轮。如所说:“既转法又转轮,故为法轮;既转轮又转法,故为法轮;以法而转,故为法轮”等。“不退转”:因为世尊是于法中得自在的正自觉者,且此法轮为无上,故不能被遮止或否定。又为什么说它不退转呢?因而说“沙门或……”等。此处,“沙门”指达到出家状态者。“婆罗门”指种姓上的婆罗门。因那些达到究竟义的沙门、婆罗门,绝不会有违逆之心。“天”指欲界天人。“任何人”指其他任何随行大众。因此,应知八众全都被无遗地包含在内。“于世间”指在众生世间。显示巴利原文
Tattha satipaṭṭhānādidhammo eva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ, cakkanti vā āṇā. Dhammato anapetattā dhammañca taṃ cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ. Dhammena ñāyena cakkantipi dhammacakkaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakka’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 2.41-42). Appaṭivattiyanti dhammissarassa bhagavato sammāsambuddhabhāvato dhammacakkassa ca anuttarabhāvato appaṭisedhanīyaṃ. Kena pana appaṭivattiyanti āha ‘‘samaṇena vā’’tiādi. Tattha samaṇenāti pabbajjaṃ upagatena. Brāhmaṇenāti jātibrāhmaṇena. Paramatthasamaṇabrāhmaṇānañhi paṭilomanacittaṃyeva natthi. Devenāti kāmāvacaradevena. Kenacīti yena kenaci avasiṭṭhapārisajjena. Ettāvatā aṭṭhannampi parisānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Lokasminti sattaloke.
“其中”,指在这四圣谛的法说之中。“有无量文句、有无量文字”:这是随顺次第的说法,为显明大部分文字已摄于文句之内。应知此处的“文句”、“文字”、“音节”存在词性颠倒的语法现象。“其义”:即四圣谛所摄的内涵。“略说”:即应以简略方式述说的义理,此理在其他处也同样适用。而“其义”在上下文中用的是属格。至于“此亦”:其中“iti”表示方式,“pi”字表示总括;整句意为“应以此方式、以此方式来理解‘此是苦圣谛’”。借由这种表达,便可通过生等种种差别,说明前文所述的苦圣谛具有多种分类;而用来揭示这些差别的文句与文字等,也确实如前面所说,有无量之多。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tissaṃ catusaccadhammadesanāyaṃ. Aparimāṇā padā, aparimāṇā akkharāti uppaṭipāṭivacanaṃ yebhuyyena padasaṅgahitāni akkharānīti dassanatthaṃ. Padā akkharā byañjanāti liṅgavipallāso katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthassāti catusaccasaṅkhātassa atthassa. Saṅkāsanāti saṅkāsitabbākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Atthassāti ca sambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Itipidanti itīti pakārattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, imināpi imināpi pakārena idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ veditabbanti attho. Tena jātiādibhedena yathāvuttassa dukkhasaccassa anekabhedataṃ taṃdīpakānaṃ akkharapadādīnaṃ vuttappakāraṃ aparimāṇatañca samattheti.
“此是苦集”:这是指以欲爱等为分类的渴爱,乃渴爱之轮的根本;由于它是前说之苦的生起因,故名“苦集”。“此是苦灭”:这是一切有为法所出离的无为界;由于它是前说之苦的不生起、灭尽的条件,故名“苦灭”。“此是苦灭道”:这是由正见等八支所组成的集合体。它以涅槃为所缘,趣向名为苦灭的涅槃,是证得苦灭的修行道,故名“苦灭道”。对于“此亦”等文句,在集圣谛方面,应以一百零八种爱行来分别其义;在灭圣谛方面,应从我慢摧破等不同角度分别;在道圣谛方面,则应以三十七菩提分法来分别。其余部分,依前说之理而解。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti ayaṃ kāmataṇhādibhedā taṇhāvaṭṭassa mūlabhūtā yathāvuttassa dukkhassa nibbattihetubhāvato dukkhasamudayo. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti ayaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭā asaṅkhatadhātu yathāvuttassa dukkhassa anuppādanirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodho. Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādiaṭṭhaṅgasamūho dukkhanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ gacchati ārammaṇavasena tadabhimukhībhūtattā paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyāti dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā. Itipidanti padassa pana samudayasacce aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritehi, nirodhasacce madanimmadanādipariyāyehi, maggasacce sattattiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammehi attho vibhajitvā veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
如此,在“十二文句为经”的偈颂中,依整个教法的六种义句与六种文句而说的十二句特性,首先通过“诸比丘,我将为你们说法”等语,显示说法的范围,以六六法门作部分提示;为显示《转法轮经》已总摄其义,阐明世尊的一切言说皆是四圣谛之教说,其内容即是四圣谛,故以“诸比丘,我在波罗奈……此是苦”等语句略示《谛分别经》;再以“其中有无量文句”等语分别文字与义句,阐明十二句的特性。现在,为显示这些文句与义句之间以互为所缘与能缘的方式相互关联,而说“其中,世尊以文字而略说”等语。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘dvādasa padāni sutta’’nti gāthāya sakalassa sāsanassa channaṃ atthapadānaṃ channañca byañjanapadānaṃ vasena yā dvādasapadatā vuttā, tameva ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādinā desanāhārassa visayadassanavasena chachakkapariyāyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.420 ādayo) ekadesena uddisitvā dhammacakkappavattanasuttena (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) tadatthassa saṅgahitabhāvadassanamukhena sabbassāpi bhagavato vacanassa catusaccadesanābhāvaṃ tadatthassa ca catusaccabhāvaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘idaṃ dukkhanti me, bhikkhave, bārāṇasiya’’ntiādinā saccavibhaṅgasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.371 ādayo) uddesato dassetvā ‘‘tattha aparimāṇā padā’’tiādinā byañjanatthapadāni vibhajanto dvādasapadabhāvaṃ dīpetvā idāni tesaṃ aññamaññavisayivisayabhāvena sambandhabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在此,通过把握文句的组成部分而把握文句;把握了文句之后,对那些事先已了解所指的人而言,便能明了文句的义理。在这一过程中,正如通过把握文句组成部分能增进对文句的把握,通过把握文句义理的组成部分,也能增进对义句的把握,所以论师说:「以文字而略说」。然而,由于以文字简略显示的义理,在文句之中,其整句义趣并未完结,它实际上是由完整的「文句」来显示和阐明的,因此又说「以文句而阐明」。直到整个语句结束时,此义理才被完全敞开、显露出来,故说「以音节而令开显」。又因为当语句以种种方式被分析时,此义理才算被分别清楚,故说「以行相而分别」。同样,当语句的各个部分逐一以词源加以解释时,此义理便变得明了,故说「以语义解释而令明了」。当已经过词源解释的语句各部分,以详尽的方式无余开示时,便能让应调伏的众生心生欢喜、智慧变得明利,故说「以细说而令知」。在此,不应将“以文字而略说”理解为一种排他的限定,而应理解为“正是以文字来略说”。如此理解时,义句属于不同语句的情况也能成立。因此,在单显示巴利原文
Tattha padāvayavaggahaṇamukhena padaggahaṇaṃ, gahite ca pade padatthāvabodho gahitapubbasaṅketassa hoti. Tattha ca padāvayavaggahaṇena viya padaggahaṇassa, padatthāvayavaggahaṇenāpi padatthaggahaṇassa visesādhānaṃ jāyatīti āha – ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’ti. Yasmā pana akkharehi saṃkhittena dīpiyamāno attho padapariyosāne vākyassa apariyositattā padeneva pakāsito dīpito hoti, tasmā ‘‘padehi pakāsetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vākyapariyosāne pana so attho vivarito vivaṭo kato hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘byañjanehi vivaratī’’ti. Yasmā ca pakārehi vākyabhede kate tadattho vibhatto nāma hoti, tasmā ‘‘ākārehi vibhajatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā vākyāvayavānaṃ paccekaṃ nibbacanavibhāge kate so attho pākaṭo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘niruttīhi uttānīkarotī’’ti. Katanibbacanehi vākyāvayavehi vitthāravasena niravasesato desitehi veneyyānaṃ cittaparitosanaṃ buddhinisānañca kataṃ hotīti āha – ‘‘niddesehi paññapetī’’ti. Ettha ca akkharehi eva saṅkāsetīti avadhāraṇaṃ akatvā akkharehi saṅkāsetiyevāti evaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi sati atthapadānaṃ nānāvākyavisayatāpi siddhā hoti. Tena ekānusandhike sutte chaḷeva atthapadāni, nānānusandhike pana anusandhimhi anusandhimhi cha cha atthapadāni niddhāretabbāni.
通过「以文字及文句而举示」等说法,显示了文句成就其作用的方式。实际上,它们的作用正是为了调伏三类不同根机的应调伏者。然而,由于不存在“通过圣谛证悟而成为文句至上者”这种情况,所以这里没有提到文句至上者。或者应知,通过提及“应被引导者”,其实已将这一类型含摄在内,正如通过提及“有学”,也含摄了善凡夫一样。关于“以文字”等词:此处所用是作具格,表工具,而非表示原因的因格。因为文字等具有举示等意义,而不是举示等具有文字等的意义。凡是为了某个目标而作的行为,那个目标才是因,如同“以食物而住”的说法。「举示」:对于那些已经专注倾听、心得等持的应调伏者,通过简略讲述的方式,以文字施加特别的影响,令其在文句结束时,内心的意向得以醒悟;如此,以简要的方式说出或提示所欲表达的义理,这就是它的意思。「细解释」:即详细解释前面已经提示的义理。「广开演」:使其变得详尽,或者以详尽的解说方式告知、反复宣示,这就是它的意思。而在这里,所说的「举示」是指提示和指出,也就是讲说的开端,因此说“举示为始”。同样地,显示巴利原文
‘‘Akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭetī’’tiādinā byañjanapadānaṃ kiccasādhanaṃ dasseti. Veneyyattayavinayameva hi tesaṃ byāpāro. Aṭṭhānabhāvato pana saccappaṭivedhassa padaparamo na idha vutto. Neyyaggahaṇeneva vā tassāpi idha gahaṇaṃ sekkhaggahaṇena viya kalyāṇaputhujjanassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Akkharehītiādīsu karaṇasādhane karaṇavacanaṃ, na hetumhi. Akkharādīni hi ugghaṭanādiatthāni, na ugghaṭanādiakkharādiatthaṃ. Yadatthā ca kiriyā so hetu, yathā ‘‘annenavasatī’’ti. Ugghaṭetīti sotāvadhānaṃ katvā samāhitacittānaṃ veneyyānaṃ saṅkāsanavasena akkharehi visesaṃ ādahanto yathā padapariyosāne āsayappaṭibodho hoti, tathā yathādhippetaṃ atthaṃ saṅkhepena katheti uddisatīti attho. Vipañcayatīti yathāuddiṭṭhaṃ atthaṃ niddisati. Vitthāretīti vitthāraṃ karoti, vitthāraṃ katvā ācikkhati vā, paṭiniddisatīti attho. Yasmā cettha ugghaṭetīti uddisanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Uddeso ca desanāya ādi, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘ugghaṭanā ādī’’ti. Tathā vipañcanaṃ niddisanaṃ, vittharaṇaṃ paṭiniddisanaṃ, niddesapaṭiniddesā ca desanāya majjhapariyosānāti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vipañcanā majjhe, vitthāraṇā pariyosāna’’nti.
如此,通过「以文字而略说」等,显示了六种文句的作用之后,现在为了显示义句的作用,而说了「这个法与律」等语。在此,所谓「法与律」:戒等法本身就是教法义理的实质,因为它能调伏应调伏者,所以称为法与律。「被举示」:也就是正在被提示、指出。「以它」:即通过举示知者的调伏方式。「被细解释」:也就是正在被详细解说。「被广开演」:也就是正在被反复和详尽地宣示。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘akkharehi saṅkāsetī’’tiādinā channaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetvā idāni atthapadānaṃ byāpāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘soyaṃ dhammavinayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sīlādidhammo eva pariyattiatthabhūto veneyyavinayanato dhammavinayo. Ugghaṭīyantoti uddisiyamāno. Tenāti ugghaṭitaññūvinayanena. Vipañcīyantoti niddisiyamāno. Vitthārīyantoti paṭiniddisiyamāno.
10 至此,已显示了“诸比丘,我将为你们说法”这段引文的三种善妙性。现在,为了显示义与文的成就,而说“六句为义”等。这很容易理解。通过“因此世尊说”等语句,以说法之食的领域,归结性地指示出前述圣典。“出世间”等,是对“完全圆满、清净”等文句的含义解释。其中,“一切殊胜现前”:是指一切称为超人法的殊胜,或者增上戒学等殊胜的立足之处。应知此词的语法构造,如同“这是他们的善行”等说法。“这也被称为如来句”:含摄三学、作为教法梵行的这个,是由于如来香象的修行、说法、来去,覆盖了烦恼丛林后所行之道;也由此,通过行境修习、亲近而得以修习和敬奉。由于如同大金刚智与一切知智之牙所刻印,故也被称为三界诸法刻印之处,这是其含义。“且由此”:因为被称为如来句等,以此因由,梵天的、一切众生中最上者——世尊的,或最胜的梵行,便为人所知,即按前面所说的方式充分阐明而被了知。“因此世尊说”:是以归结的方式指示出前述圣典。显示巴利原文
10. Ettāvatā ‘‘dhammaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’ti uddiṭṭhāya pāḷiyā tividhakalyāṇataṃ dassetvā idāni atthabyañjanasampattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cha padāni attho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyaṃ. ‘‘Tenāha bhagavā’’tiādinā desanāhārassa visayabhāvena uddiṭṭhaṃ pāḷiṃ nigamanavasena dasseti. Lokuttarantiādi ‘‘kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddha’’nti padānaṃ atthavivaraṇaṃ. Tattha upaṭṭhitaṃ sabbavisesānanti sabbesaṃ uttarimanussadhammasaṅkhātānaṃ visesānaṃ adhisīlasikkhādivisesānaṃ vā upatiṭṭhanaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ nesaṃ padakkanta’’ntiādīnaṃ viya etassa saddasiddhi veditabbā. ‘‘Idaṃ vuccati tathāgatapadaṃ itipī’’tiādīsu idaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ tathāgatagandhahatthino paṭipattidesanāgamanehi kilesagahanaṃ ottharitvā gatamaggotipi. Tena gocarabhāvanāsevanāhi nisevitaṃ bhajitantipi. Tassa mahāvajirañāṇasabbaññutaññāṇadantehi ārañjitaṃ tebhūmakadhammānaṃ ārañjanaṭṭhānantipi vuccatīti attho. Ato cetanti yato tathāgatapadādibhāvena vuccati, ato aneneva kāraṇena brahmuno sabbasattuttamassa bhagavato, brahmaṃ vā sabbaseṭṭhaṃ cariyanti paññāyati yāvadeva manussehi suppakāsitattā yathāvuttappakārehi ñāyati. Tenāha bhagavāti yathāvuttatthaṃ pāḷiṃ nigamanavasena dasseti.
为了显示世尊的说法唯以无执取的般涅槃为目的,而说法之食唯以证得圣道为目的,故先问:“此说法是为谁?”然后答:“是为瑜伽行者。”通过四圣谛业处的修习,正在精勤、已精勤的人,称为瑜伽行者。因为他们运用此说法之食。这句话,应当知道是结集者在结集论典时,为了显示说法之食的分别,随顺联结而善加确立的状态所安立的。同样,也说了:“因此,大迦旃延长老说。”“已联结”:即从圣典中,为了味等文句的含义而确定、结合,这就是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Anupādāparinibbānatthatāya bhagavato desanāya yāvadeva ariyamaggasampāpanattho desanāhāroti dassetuṃ ‘‘kesaṃ ayaṃ dhammadesanā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘yogīna’’nti āha. Catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya yuttappayuttāti yogino. Te hi imaṃ desanāhāraṃ payojentīti. Idaṃ vacanaṃ desanāhāravibhaṅgassa yathānusandhinā sammā ṭhapitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ pakaraṇaṃ saṅgāyantehi ṭhapitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tenāha āyasmā mahākaccāyano’’ti. Niyuttoti pāḷito assādādipadatthe niddhāretvā yojitoti attho.
2. 审查句分解的注释显示巴利原文
2. Vicayahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
11 11. 其中,“什么是审查句”等,是审查句的分别。在此,对前所未释的词句作注释:“为何审查?”在此,通过“审查”一词显示审查一词的作者指示。然而,当问及“此句的范围是什么?”时,为了显示它的范围,而说“审查字句”等。其中,“审查字句”是从头到尾,直到结论,审查经中所有的字句。而且,这种审查有两种:基于语言的和基于意义的。其中,“这是名词,这是动词,这是前缀,这是小品词,这是阴性词,这是阳性词,这是中性词,这是过去时,这是未来时,这是现在时,这是作者成就,这是工具成就,这是对象成就,这是处所成就,这是主格,这是宾格,乃至这是处格,这是单数,这是复数”等等,如此分别言说,是从语言上对字句的审查。须知,这种字句审查,唯是通过对不颠倒的自性语的精准观察而成就的。而从意义上审查,是对每一个词所表达的意义进行解释。而且,如果词是以提问等方式展开的,那么其相应意义的提问等性质也应被审查。为了显示这个意思,而说“审查问题”等。显示巴利原文
11.Tattha katamo vicayo hārotiādi vicayahāravibhaṅgo. Tatthāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā – kiṃ vicinatīti ettha ‘‘vicinatī’’ti etena vicayasaddassa kattuniddesataṃ dasseti. Kinti panatthassa hārassa visayo pucchitoti taṃ tassa visayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘padaṃ vicinatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha padaṃ vicinatīti ādito paṭṭhāya yāva nigamanā suttassa sabbaṃ padaṃ vicinati. Ayañca vicayo duvidho saddato atthato ca. Tesu ‘‘idaṃ nāmapadaṃ, idaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ, idaṃ upasaggapadaṃ, idaṃ nipātapadaṃ, idaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ, idaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ, idaṃ napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ, idaṃ atītakālaṃ, idaṃ anāgatakālaṃ, idaṃ vattamānakālaṃ, idaṃ kattusādhanaṃ, idaṃ karaṇasādhanaṃ, idaṃ kammasādhanaṃ, idaṃ adhikaraṇasādhanaṃ, idaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, yāva idaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, idaṃ ekavacanaṃ, idaṃ anekavacana’’nti evamādivibhāgavacanaṃ, ayaṃ saddato padavicayo. So panāyaṃ padavicayo aviparītasabhāvaniruttisallakkhaṇeneva sampajjatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atthato pana vicayo tena tena padena vattabbaatthasaṃvaṇṇanā. Sace pana padaṃ pucchādivasena pavattaṃ, tassa tadatthassa ca pucchādibhāvo vicetabboti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘pañhaṃ vicinatī’’tiādimāha.
由于一切教法资粮皆是审查句的范围,也就是对经的审查,因此说“审查味”等。又因为此处的“随颂”(anugītī),随顺合宜的偈颂即是“随颂”,这一意义也被认可,所以为了显示在审查某一经句时,亦应从其他经文引入——或以引述义理的方式,或以引述词语的方式——来审查那些与之相应的经句,故说“他审查所有九种经”。“九种经”是指契经、祇夜等九种教法,随其所应之理而行,这是它的意趣。这便是审查句的词义解说。显示巴利原文
Yasmā ca sabbo desanāhāro vicayahārassa visayo suttassa vicayoti katvā, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘assādaṃ vicinatī’’tiādi. Yasmā pana anugītīti ettha anurūpā gīti anugītīti ayampi attho icchito, tasmā viciyamānassa suttapadassa anurūpato suttantarapadānipi atthuddhāravasena vā paduddhāravasena vā ānetvā vicetabbānīti dassento ‘‘sabbe nava suttante vicinatī’’ti āha. Nava suttanteti suttageyyādike nava sutte, yathāsambhavatoti adhippāyo. Ayaṃ vicayahārassa padatthaniddeso.
如此,在解说门中,审查句已扼要说明。为了详加解说并以反解说的方式来分析,由于对经文逐字进行字句审查极之繁重、不易成办,因此暂将此事搁置,先显示对问题解答的审查,于是说“如何会有呢?”等语。其中,“如何会有呢?”的意思是:那种审查应如何进行,那会是怎样的方式呢?也有读作“如何会有呢?”的。再者,“如同”仅是一个小品词。“尊者”是亲切的称呼。“阿逸多”是婆罗门婆和利的十六位侍者弟子之一。“彼岸”指涅槃,因为它教导了到达彼岸的方法。虽然世尊的一切教说都可称为“彼岸”,但结集者将那些含有背景偈颂、随颂偈颂等,以及《阿逸多经》等十六经命名为“彼岸”,因此说“彼岸中”。有些人读作“彼岸行者”。据说他们在出家为苦行者之前,曾学习《彼岸经》而四方游历,因此他也被称为“彼岸行者”。问:“为何要说‘他问’呢?岂不是问题已经过去了?”确实如此,然而他是以心中反复浮现的发问之相而这样说的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ niddesavāre vicayahāro saṅkhepato niddiṭṭhoti taṃ vibhāgena niddisitvā paṭiniddesavasena vibhajanto yasmā padavicayo suttassa anupadaṃ pavattetabbatāya atibhāriko na sukaro cāti taṃ anāmasitvā pañhavissajjanavicaye tāva dassento ‘‘yathā kiṃ bhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā kiṃ bhaveti yena pakārena so vicayo pavattetabbo, taṃ pakārajātaṃ kiṃ bhave, kīdisaṃ bhaveyyāti attho. ‘‘Yathā kiṃ bhaveyyā’’tipi pāṭho. Puna yathāti nipātamattaṃ. Āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ ajitoti bāvarībrāhmaṇassa paricārakabhūtānaṃ soḷasannaṃ aññataro. Pārāyaneti pāraṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ, tassa adhigamūpāyadesanattā kiñcāpi sabbaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ ‘‘pārāyana’’nti vattabbataṃ arahati, saṅgītikārehi pana vatthugāthānugītigāthādīhi saddhiṃ ajitasuttādīnaṃ (su. ni. 1038 ādayo; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 57 ādayo, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) soḷasannaṃ suttānaṃ idaṃ nāmaṃ katanti tesaññeva pārāyanasamaññāti āha ‘‘pārāyane’’ti. Keci ‘‘pārāyaniko’’ti paṭhanti. Te kira tāpasapabbajjūpagamanato pubbe pārāyanaṃ adhīyantā vicariṃsu. Tasmā ayampi pārāyanaṃ vattetīti pārāyanikoti vutto. Pucchatīti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu pucchānibbattattā atītāti? Saccametaṃ, pucchanākāraṃ pana buddhiyaṃ viparivattamānaṃ katvā evamāha.
而这所谓的问,有多种类别:显示未见之问、与所见相合之问、断疑之问、同意之问、欲说之问、应一向记之问、应分别记之问、应反问记之问、应舍置之问、以法为所依之问、以有情为所依之问。因此,应尽可能审查:“此问是显示未见之问吗?”等等。同样地,正如这里有问的类别,在审查解答时,解答的类别也应当尽可能说明,因为解答是随顺于问而相应的。在此,举断疑、以有情为所依的问为例子,为显示其中的审查方式,而说“何物覆盖世间?”等。显示巴利原文
Pucchā ca nāmesā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā vimaticchedanā anumatipucchā kathetukamyatāpucchā ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyā vibhajjabyākaraṇīyā paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyā ṭhapanīyā dhammādhiṭṭhānā sattādhiṭṭhānāti anekavidhā. Tasmā ‘‘kimayaṃ pucchā adiṭṭhajotanā’’tiādinā yathāsambhavaṃ pucchā vicetabbā. Yathā cettha pucchāvibhāgo, evaṃ vissajjanavibhāgopi vissajjanavicaye yathāsambhavaṃ vattabbo. Pucchāsabhāgena hi vissajjananti. Idha pana vimaticchedanaṃ sattādhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchaṃ udāharitvā tattha vicayanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’tiādimāha.
此处「kena」为作者格,亦即工具格。「su」仅是一个小品词;或说「su」是表示疑义的小品词,由此显示此问具有断疑的性质。「覆盖」(nivuto)指被遮蔽住。「世间」(loko)指有情世间。「如,尊者阿逸多说」是结集者的话语。「不显现」(nappakāsatī)即不为人所知。「你说它的涂抹物是什么?」意思是:你说这世间的涂抹物是什么?也有版本读作「kiṃ svābhilepanaṃ」,分解开即「kiṃ su abhilepanaṃ」。显示巴利原文
Tattha kenāti kattari karaṇavacanaṃ. Sūti nipātamattaṃ, sūti vā saṃsaye nipāto, tenassa pañhassa vimaticchedanapucchābhāvaṃ dasseti. Nivutoti paṭicchādito. Lokoti sattaloko. Iccāyasmā ajitoti saṅgītikārakavacanaṃ. Nappakāsatīti na paññāyati. Kissābhilepanaṃ brūsīti kiṃ assa lokassa abhilepanaṃ vadasi. ‘‘Kiṃ svābhilepana’’ntipi pāṭho, tassa kiṃ su abhilepananti padavibhāgo.
「句」(padāni):依此而通达义理,故称为「句」,即语句。「被问」:意谓以提问的方式说出。虽然以提问的方式说出了四个词句,但想要了知的义理其实只有一个,因此说「一个问题」。对此给出理由:「以一个事物为所摄故」。意思是说:虽然问题中包含了称为「障碍」「不显现」「涂抹」「大怖畏」的这四种含义,但它们都相对于同一世间而成为其属性,世间被作为主要方面来把握,因此依于世间而言,这只是一个问题。正因如此,接着说「以世间为所依」等。那么,那个世间是什么呢?说「世间有三种」等。显示巴利原文
Padānīti pajjati etehi atthoti padāni, vākyāni. Pucchitānīti pucchābhāvena vuttānīti attho. Eko pañhoti yadipi cattāri padāni pucchanavasena vuttāni, ñātuṃ icchito pana attho eko evāti ‘‘eko pañho’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘ekavatthupariggahā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kiñcāpi nivāraṇaappakāsanaabhilepanamahābhayasaṅkhātā pucchāya gahitā cattāro ete atthā, te panekaṃ lokaṃ patiguṇabhūtā, loko padhānabhāvena gahitoti tabbasena ekovāyaṃ pañhoti. Tenevāha ‘‘lokādhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi. Ko pana so lokoti? Āha ‘‘loko tividho’’tiādi.
其中,因贪等烦恼炽盛,欲界有情为「烦恼世间」。因禅那与神通的净化,色界有情为「有世间」。因不动定众多、诸根明利,无色界有情为「根世间」。或者另一种说法:「杂染」即「烦恼」,意为果报之苦。因此,因苦众多,堕恶趣的有情为「烦恼世间」。其余有情因成就殊胜之存在,为「有世间」。其中,那些具足成熟解脱之根的有情,当知属于「根世间」。这是依据所依之法而安立世间之名,圣者并不包含在此分类中。显示巴利原文
Tattha rāgādikilesabahulatāya kāmāvacarasattā kilesaloko. Jhānābhiññāparibuddhiyā rūpāvacarasattā bhavaloko. Āneñjasamādhibahulatāya visadindriyattā arūpāvacarasattā indriyaloko. Atha vā kilissanaṃ kileso, vipākadukkhanti attho. Tasmā dukkhabahulatāya apāyesu sattā kilesaloko. Tadaññe sattā sampattibhavabhāvato bhavaloko. Tattha ye vimuttiparipācakehi indriyehi samannāgatā sattā, so indriyalokoti veditabbaṃ. Pariyāpannadhammavasena lokasamaññāti ariyapuggalā idha na saṅgayhanti.
「世间被无明覆盖」:犹如具足四支的黑暗,无明的特相是遮蔽事物实相,它将世间覆盖、遮蔽。「疑故」(vivicchā):即以疑为因。《摄论》中说:「疑、悭吝」。「放逸故」:即以放逸为因。「渴爱为涂抹」:jappā(渴爱)即是贪爱,它是这世间的涂抹物,就像猴胶粘住猴子一般,它粘着世间,故我这样说。苦,指生等流转之苦,这是词义。其余含义从经文即可明白。这四句,即问偈中所说的内容,由答偈中的四句予以解答。如何解答?如说“第一”等,这表示问与答应依次第来理解。显示巴利原文
Avijjāya nivuto lokoti caturaṅgasamannāgatena andhakārena viya rathaghaṭādidhammasabhāvappaṭicchādanalakkhaṇāya avijjāya nivuto paṭicchādito loko. Vivicchāti vicikicchāhetu. ‘‘Vivicchā macchariya’’nti saṅgahe vuttaṃ. Pamādāti pamādahetu. Jappābhilepananti jappā taṇhā assa lokassa makkaṭālepo viya makkaṭassa abhilepanaṃ silesoti brūmi. Dukkhanti jātiādikaṃ vaṭṭadukkhanti ayaṃ padattho. Sesaṃ pāḷiyā eva viññāyati. Imāni cattāri padāni pucchāgāthāyaṃ vuttāni ‘‘imehī’’ti vissajjanagāthāyaṃ vuttehi imehi catūhi padehi vissajjitāni. Kathanti āha ‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādiṃ. Tena yathākkamaṃ pucchāvissajjanāni veditabbānīti dasseti.
现在,为依次第显示该问答的实际情形,并解释偈颂含义,而宣说「kenassu」等。此处,为更清晰阐明「nīvaraṇehī」一词所已说之义,故接着说「avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā」等。应知,此处以「yathāhā」等引述经文,是为了显示此问难辨析中的摄颂抉择。其中,「pariyāyato」意为从原因上说。被称为‘盖’的欲贪等,既是盖的因,又具有遮蔽作用,故我只说这一种盖,并非否认有其他具盖性质的法,这便是此处之义。又,当无明存在时,诸盖即存在;无明彻底无有时,诸盖亦不存在。为显示此义,故说「sabbaso」等。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ yathākkamaṃ pucchaṃ vissajjanañca sarūpato dassetuṃ gāthāya ca atthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘kenassū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘nīvaraṇehī’’ti padena vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjānīvaraṇā hi sabbe sattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādinā suttantaradassanena imasmiṃ pañhavissajjanavicaye anugītivicayaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha pariyāyatoti kāraṇato. Nīvaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ kāmacchandādīnampi kāraṇabhāvato paṭicchādanabhāvato ca ekaṃyeva nīvaraṇaṃ vadāmi, na pana aññesaṃ nīvaraṇasabhāvānaṃ abhāvāti attho. Yathā ca avijjāya sati nīvaraṇānaṃ bhāvo, evaṃ avijjāya asati na santi nīvaraṇānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbaso’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「Tenā」是指以「avijjāya nivuto loko」这一句。「paṭhamassa padassa」即指「kenassu nivuto loko」这一句。「Yuttā」意为连接,或者说合适、相应。由此可知,回答与提问相应,故此处说已显示了前后审察。通过「Yo puggalo nīvaraṇehi nivuto」等语句,说明疑与放逸是以无明为缘。因为已被覆盖的人确实不会显露。「Vivicchā」即是指疑。因此他说:「所谓vivicchā,即是称为疑。」此处对词的形成作如下解释:譬如邪见与正见,是以“常”、“无常”等决定性的执取而运作;而疑则不然。它由于非决定性的执取,以“这是常的吗?还是无常的呢?”等方式,生起种种、相违的欲求与寻求,故称为「vivicchā」。「So vicikicchanto」等,是在解释疑与放逸为不显露的原因。善法未被生起,即是不采取、不运作。「Nappakāsanti」意为,他们善法由于不在自己心续中生起,故不显现。显示巴利原文
Tenāti ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti padena. Paṭhamassa padassāti ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti padassa. Yuttāti yojitā, anurūpāti vā attho. Etena pucchānurūpatā vissajjanassa dassitāti pubbāparavicayo vuttoti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Yo puggalo nīvaraṇehi nivuto’’tiādinā vivicchāpamādānaṃ avijjāya paccayabhāvaṃ dasseti. Nivuto eva hi nappakāsati. Vivicchāti vicikicchā. Tenevāha – ‘‘vivicchā nāma vuccati vicikicchā’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ padasiddhi – yathā micchādiṭṭhisammādiṭṭhiyo ‘‘niccaṃ anicca’’ntiādinā ekaṃsaggāhabhāvena pavattanti, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana anekaṃsaggāhabhāvato ‘‘niccaṃ nu kho aniccaṃ nu kho’’tiādinā vividhaṃ viruddhaṃ vā icchati esatīti vivicchāti . ‘‘So vicikicchanto’’tiādinā appakāsanassa vivicchāpamādānaṃ kāraṇabhāvaṃ vivarati. Sukke dhamme na uppādiyatīti na samādāya vattati. Nappakāsantīti te attano santāne anuppādiyamānā kusalā dhammā taṃ puggalaṃ pakāsaṃ loke abhiññātaṃ na karontīti attho. Abhilimpatīti makkaṭālepo viya makkaṭaṃ dārusilādīsu purisaṃ rūpādivisaye allīyāpetīti attho. Āsattibahulassāti āsaṅgabahulassa. Evaṃ abhijappāti karitvāti evaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṭṭhāyinīti iminā kāraṇena. Tatthāti tāya taṇhāya. Loko abhilitto silesena makkhito viya hotīti attho.
因为令人怖畏,故称为「怖畏」(bhayaṃ)。大的怖畏称为「大怖畏」(mahabbhayaṃ)。因此他说:“苦是它的大怖畏(dukkhamassa mahabbhayaṃ)”。为将“苦、忧(dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ)”——即种种苦——作分别说明,而说了“三苦性(tisso dukkhatā)”等。「Odhaso」意为:有时以自己发起的加行为根源,有时以他人发起的加行为根源,依这些差别,那些从苦苦中解脱的众生,特指色界众生。「Tathā」也是指如此分别地,有时偶尔被牵引。从坏苦中解脱的众生,大多是恒常安住于舍等至者,特别是无色界众生。「Appābādhā」(少病)一词说明从苦苦解脱的原因。「Dīghāyukā」(长寿)是关于坏苦的,因为无色界天人在世间中寿命极长。而这种解脱亦属极点。而且,因为即使是苦受,也是有为之法,本质上属于无常等行苦,所以为作无余、完全地遍摄,而说:“然而,从行苦中(saṅkhāradukkhatāya panā)”等。显示巴利原文
Bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ. Mahantaṃ bhayaṃ mahabbhayaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘dukkhamassa mahabbhaya’’nti. Dukkhaṃ domanassanti dukkhameva vibhattanti sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tisso dukkhatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Odhasoti kadāci attūpakkamamūlāya kadāci parūpakkamamūlāyātiādinā vibhāgena dukkhadukkhatāya muccanakā visesena rūpāvacarā. Tathāti odhaso kadāci karahacīti evaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Vipariṇāmadukkhatāya muccanakā upekkhāsamāpattibahulā visesena arūpāvacarasattā. Appābādhāti padaṃ dukkhadukkhatāya muccanassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Dīghāyukāti vipariṇāmadukkhatāya. Arūpadevā hi loke visesato dīghāyukāti. Idañca muccanamaccantikaṃ. Yasmā ca dukkhā vedanāpi saṅkhatattā aniccatādisaṅkhāradukkhasabhāvā eva, tasmā yato muccanamaccantikaṃ, taṃ anavasesapariyādānavasena saṅgaṇhitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhāradukkhatāya panā’’tiādimāha.
此处,因为被执取,故名为「upādi」,指异熟的五蕴及由业所生的色法。upādi之余,称为「upādisesa」;无此余者,即「anupādisesā」,指无余涅槃界。这里的具格即是以此无余涅槃界来显示状态之相。而「涅槃界」(nibbānadhātu)唯是寂灭的意思。因此,由于行苦遍及一切世间、总摄万有,所以说「Lokassā」是表示关系的属格,由此显示出“dukkhamassā”一句的含义。如此,对于那些对世间之盖等一无所知,或因累世修习而生疑的人来说,问题必定要给予决断性的回答,故提问以有情为所依;又因无知或疑惑,以盖等为对象,所以问题分为四种情况。不过在经典中,偈颂是以世间作为盖等的依处而说,因此显示为一个问题。这便是此处的问之审察。答之审察也应当依据“显示了未见者、断除了疑惑”等道理,随顺问之审察中所明之理来理解。显示巴利原文
Tattha upādiyatīti upādi, vipākakkhandhā kaṭattā ca rūpaṃ. Upādissa sesaṃ upādisesaṃ, taṃ natthi etissāti anupādisesā, nibbānadhātu, tāya anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. Nibbānadhātūti ca nibbāyanamattaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā sakalalokabyāpinī sabbasaṅgāhinī ca saṅkhāradukkhatā, tasmā. Lokassāti sambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Tena ‘‘dukkhamassā’’ti padassa atthaṃ dasseti. Evamettha lokassa nīvaraṇādīni ajānantena, samayantaraparicayena vā tattha saṃsayapakkhandena ekaṃseneva byākātabbattā sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchā katā, sā ca ajānanassa, saṃsayassa vā nīvaraṇādivisayatāya catubbidhā. Pāḷiyaṃ pana nīvaraṇādīnaṃ loko ādhārabhāvena gāthāyaṃ vuttoti eko pañhoti dassitanti. Ayamettha pucchāvicayo. Vissajjanavicayopi adiṭṭhajotinī vissajjanā vimaticchedinī cātiādinā pucchāvicaye vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
如此,显示了单所依之问后,为显示多所依之问,而说“savanti sabbadhī”等。其中,“savanti”:流动。“sabbadhī”:于一切色等诸处中。“sotā”:渴爱等流。“Kiṃ nivāraṇaṃ”:什么是它们的遮止,什么是守护。“Saṃvaraṃ brūhi”:请说他们称为律仪的防护。“Kena sotā pidhīyare”:以何法,被遮止、被切断——这是此处的词义。其余,依圣典本身便可明了。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ekādhāraṃ pucchaṃ dassetvā idāni anekādhāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘savanti sabbadhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha savantīti sandanti. Sabbadhīti sabbesu rūpādīsu āyatanesu. Sotāti taṇhādisotā. Kiṃ nivāraṇanti tesaṃ kiṃ āvaraṇaṃ kā rakkhā. Saṃvaraṃ brūhīti taṃ nesaṃ nīvaraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ kathehi. Kena sotā pidhīyareti kena dhammena taṇhādisotā pidhiyyanti pacchijjantīti ayamettha padattho. Sesaṃ pāḷivaseneva āvi bhavissati.
“那两个问题”:此偈虽然以提问的方式生起,共有四词、四句,但所欲了知的义理有两类,因此那两个便是两个问题。为什么呢?答道:“因为是以涉及众多事物的语句而被问。”此处简要含义为:此偈所摄的义理,由于是以总括众多事物而转起的语句来发问,所以就成了两个问题。在教法中,把“一之上的多数”称为“多”,这正显示了提问有两种义理境,因此说“这样”等。其意为:为亲属衰败等所摄的杀生等,或是与成为悲惨(恶趣)之因的种种厄难平等共在,或者说,此世间已以一切方式陷入、被压倒,并以那十种烦恼事为因而被杂染了。怀想着那种陷入的状态、杂染的状态,便说:“这样陷入的,这样杂染的”。“Vodānaṃ(清净)”:通过它而变得清净,即指止与观。“Vuṭṭhānaṃ(升出)”:从此中升出,因为是由相转起而转起,即指圣道。显示巴利原文
Te dve pañhāti yadipi imissā gāthāya pucchāvasena pavattāya cattāri padāni cattāri vākyāni. Ñātuṃ icchitassa pana atthassa duvidhattā te dve pañhā. Kasmāti ce? ‘‘Imehi bahvādhivacanena pucchitā’’ti āha. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – ime etāya gāthāya gahitā atthā yasmā bahūni adhikicca pavattavacanena pucchitā, tasmā te dve pañhāti. Ekato upari bahūti hi sāsanavohāro, tameva pucchāya duvidhatthavisayataṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yāhi ñātibyasanādisaṅkhātāhi pāṇavadhādīhi eva vā duggatihetubhūtāhi āpadāhi samaṃ saha, sabbathā vā ayaṃ loko āpanno ajjhotthaṭo. Taṃnimittehi dasahi kilesavatthūhi saṃkiliṭṭho ca, tassa taṃ āpannākāraṃ saṃkiliṭṭhākārañca buddhiyaṃ katvā āha – ‘‘evaṃ samāpannassa evaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhassā’’ti. Vodāyati sujjhati etenāti vodānaṃ, samathavipassanā. Vuṭṭhāti etena nimittato pavattato cāti vuṭṭhānaṃ, ariyamaggo.
“Asamāhitassā(未定者)”:指心在各种所缘上散乱,即心未得定者。“Savanti(流转)”:即转起、流动。“Abhijjhā(贪欲)”等,是显示未得定的原因。因此他说:“这样,于未定者”。这里也通过“如同世尊所说”等来显示对摄颂的审察。诸流的流动,大部分是依随逐欣喜而行,所以说“它在悦意的色等之中流动”。此处,眼等作为诸流之门在转起,依近行方式而说,如同它们自己在流动一般。“Iti”:如此(这样)。“Sabbā”:从一切。“Sabbathā”:以一切方式。“Idaṃ vodānaṃ(这是清净)”:这里所说的“击破现行缠缚”,即是断除缠缚,便是清净。显示巴利原文
Asamāhitassāti nānārammaṇesu vikkhittacittassa. Savantīti pavattanti. Abhijjhātiādi asamādhānahetudassanaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘evaṃ asamāhitassā’’ti. ‘‘Yathāha bhagavā’’tiādinā idhāpi anugītivicayaṃ dasseti. Sotānaṃ savanaṃ yebhuyyena anurodhavasenevāti āha – ‘‘savati manāpikesu rūpesū’’ti. Ettha ca cakkhādayo sotānaṃ dvārabhāvena pavattamānā upacāravasena sayaṃ savantā viya vuttā. Itīti evaṃ. Sabbāti sabbasmā. Sabbathāti sabbappakārena. Idaṃ vodānanti idaṃ ‘‘pariyuṭṭhānavighāta’’nti vuttaṃ pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ vodānaṃ.
在回答偈中,“有念是它们的制止者”:与观相应的念,正搜寻着善与不善法的去向,这念就是诸流的制止者。“我说,这念即是诸流的律仪”。“这些流被慧遮止”:凭借能够透彻了知色等之中无常等特性的道慧,这些流在一切方面都被遮止,也就是说,由于未给予它们生起的条件而得以彻底断除——这是含义。显示巴利原文
Vissajjanagāthāya sati tesaṃ nivāraṇanti vipassanāsampayuttā sati kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamānā tesaṃ sotānaṃ nivāraṇanti. Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmīti tameva satiṃ sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi. Paññāyete pidhīyareti rūpādīsu aniccatādipaṭivedhasādhikāya maggapaññāya ete sotā sabbaso pidhiyyanti, uppajjituṃ appadānavasena samucchijjantīti attho.
“Nāviñchatī”:即不像贪欲等生起之门那样,将心相续或将那人拖走。这里所说的遮止,意指断除随眠,故说“以慧断除诸随眠”。因为随眠之相即是现行,若无随眠,现行便不会生起,所以说“于随眠”等。现在,为了以譬喻阐明此义,而说“即如拥有蕴者”等。在此亦然,由于不了知名为诸流律仪与遮止的防护,或对此有所疑惑,为求确切的结论,故依法而问。因此,问中的审察,以及与所说之理相应的答中审察,应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Nāviñchatīti abhijjhādippavattidvārabhāvena cittasantānaṃ, puggalaṃ vā nākaḍḍhati. Anusayappahānaṃ idha pidhānaṃ adhippetanti āha – ‘‘paññāya anusayā pahīyantī’’ti. Yasmā anusayanimittaṃ pariyuṭṭhānaṃ anusayābhāve na hotīti āha ‘‘anusayesū’’tiādi. Idāni tamevatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvento ‘‘taṃ yathā khandhavantassā’’tiādimāha. Etthāpi sotānaṃ nivāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṃvaraṃ pidhānañca ajānantena tattha vā saṃsayitena ekaṃsikattā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchā katāti idha pucchāvicayo vuttanayeneva vissajjanavicayo ca veditabbo.
在此,基于某种用意,于“kenassu nivuto loko”一偈中,虽然可问的尚有盖等四种法,却说为一个问题。据此,若领悟到“所问唯有诸流的律仪与遮止”,将诸流视为同一义理之依处,则因问唯有一所依,便可说是一个问题。又或者,因诸流数量众多,有多少流,便有多少问。然而,依另一用意,在“savanti sabbadhi sotā”一偈中,不以诸流本身为着眼点,而依律仪与遮止说为“两个问题”。因此应当明了:在第一偈中,虽然盖等可作为世间之所依,但不以世间为着眼点,而对盖等加以分别,那么说为四个问题,此义已被显示。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yena adhippāyena ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti gāthāya (su. ni. 1038; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1; netti. 45) satipi nivāraṇādīnaṃ catunnaṃ pucchitabbabhāve eko pañhoti vuttaṃ. Tena tāva sotānaṃyeva saṃvaro pidhānañca pucchitanti sote ekatthavasena gahetvā pucchāya ekādhiṭṭhānabhāvato eko pañhoti vattabbaṃ siyā. Sotānaṃ vā bahubhāvato bahūti yattakā sotā, tattakā pañhāti. Yena pana adhippāyena ‘‘savanti sabbadhi sotā’’ti gāthāyaṃ (su. ni. 1040; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 59, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 3; netti. 45) sote anāmasitvā saṃvarapidhānānaṃ vasena ‘‘dve pañhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena paṭhamagāthāyaṃ satipi nivāraṇādīnaṃ lokādhārabhāve lokaṃ anāmasitvā nivāraṇādīnaṃ vibhāgena cattāro pañhātipi vattabbanti ayaṃ nayo dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如今,提问者并非仅依自己先前拟定的方式发问,亦会根据说法之时所阐述法义的脉络来提问。因此,为了显示如何考察彼脉络,他在“yāni sotānī”一偈之后,紧接着说了“paññā ceva sati cā”此颂。其简略含义为:世尊所说的这种慧、这种念,以及其余那些名色,此一切于何处灭?请为我宣说这所问之义。显示巴利原文
Idāni yasmā pucchanto na kevalaṃ pubbe attanā racitaniyāmeneva pucchati, atha kho desanākāle vuttadhammassa anusandhiṃ gahetvāpi pucchati, tasmā tassa anusandhiṃ pucchāya vicetabbākāraṃ dassento ‘‘yāni sotānī’’ti gāthāya anantaraṃ ‘‘paññā ceva sati cā’’ti gāthamāha. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yāyaṃ bhagavatā vuttā paññā, yā ca sati yañca tadavasesaṃ nāmarūpaṃ, etaṃ sabbampi kattha nirujjhati, etaṃ me puṭṭho pabrūhīti.
然而在回答的偈颂中,慧与念已经含摄在名称之中,因此没有单独将其说出。这里简要的意思是:阿逸多,你问我的那个问题——‘这一切在哪里灭’,在紧接的偈颂里我便告诉你:它在何处无余灭尽。事实上,对于每一份识的灭,与此无先无后,恰恰就在那里,这一切灭尽。正是在识灭之处,因识的灭而灭,意思是这并不超越识灭之灭。提问者这样问:在此问题所依的紧接偈颂中,慧与念是连同断除诸流现行与随眠的功用一起被说出的;听闻之后,为了断除那些,慧与念得以安住;以它们为所依,必定会有名色,这样一来,轮回也就照常转起。那么,这些作为所依的慧与念,在哪里无余灭尽呢?怀着这个意图,他提出了这个问题,所以说‘这个问题……界’。其中,教说依此而被连结,故称‘连结’。显示巴利原文
Vissajjanagāthāyaṃ panassa yasmā paññāsatiyo nāmeneva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tasmā tā visuṃ na vuttā. Ayañcettha saṅkhepattho – yaṃ maṃ tvaṃ, ajita, etaṃ pañhaṃ apucchi – ‘‘katthetaṃ uparujjhatī’’ti anantaragāthāyaṃ (su. ni. 1042; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 61, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 5; netti. 11, 45), yattha taṃ asesaṃ uparujjhati, taṃ te vadāmi. Tassa tassa hi viññāṇassa nirodhena saheva apubbaṃ acarimaṃ etthetaṃ uparujjhati, ettheva viññāṇassa nirodhena nirujjhati, etaṃ viññāṇanirodhaṃ tassa nirodho nātivattatīti vuttaṃ hotīti. Ayaṃ pañhe anusandhiṃ pucchatīti anantaragāthāyaṃ sotānaṃ pariyuṭṭhānānusayappahānakiccena saddhiṃ sati paññā ca vuttā, taṃ sutvā tappahāne paññāsatīsu tiṭṭhantīsu tāsaṃ sannissayena nāmarūpena bhavitabbaṃ, tathā ca sati vaṭṭati eva. Kattha nu kho imāsaṃ sanissayānaṃ paññāsatīnaṃ asesanirodhoti iminā adhippāyena ayaṃ pucchā katāti āha – ‘‘ayaṃ pañhe…pe… dhātu’’nti. Tattha anusandhīyati desanā etāyāti anusandhi.
为说明通过哪条修习之道证得无余涅槃界,并连带说明其所缘的范围,便开示了这条名为‘四圣谛业处修习’的道,于是说‘三谛’等内容。其中,‘行’:因为是由诸缘共同聚合、一起造作出来的,所以称为‘行’。‘灭法’:指本性就是坏灭的法。苦、集、道,这是显示它们各自的特相。那么,灭又如何呢?回答说‘灭是无为’——因为它不是由任何因缘造作出来的,所以称为‘无为’。为了在具有‘能断’与‘所断’自性的圣谛中,通过能断的区分来显示所断的区分,便说‘其中,集……’等内容。显示巴利原文
Yāya paṭipadāya anupādisesaṃ nibbānadhātuṃ adhigacchanti, taṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāsaṅkhātaṃ paṭipadaṃ saha visayena dassetuṃ ‘‘tīṇi ca saccānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhatānīti samecca sambhūya paccayehi katānīti saṅkhatāni. Nirodhadhammānīti nirujjhanasabhāvāni. Dukkhaṃ samudayo maggoti tesaṃ sarūpadassanaṃ. Nirodho pana kathanti āha ‘‘nirodho asaṅkhato’’ti. So hi kenaci paccayena na saṅkhatoti asaṅkhato. Saha visayena pahātabbapahāyakasabhāvesu ariyasaccesu pahāyakavibhāgamukhena pahātabbavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha samudayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,‘无明残余’的意思,就是被见道所断之后还残余下来的无明。而这一‘残余’一词,也应当结合到欲贪、嗔恚、慢、掉举这些词来理解。因为就像无明一样,这些法也都是具有导致堕入恶趣性质的法,仅在初道便被断除了。也有‘无明无残余’的读法,这里‘无残余’一词也应当结合到所说的欲贪等词上去。因为欲贪等在前二道被断除时还留有残余,而在其余的道被断除时则无残余。‘三界中的这十种结’,这里的‘三界的’是显示这些结的活动领域,因为在那三界中,它们是以‘结’的形式在运作的。显示巴利原文
Tattha avijjāvasesāti dassanamaggena pahīnāvasesā avijjāti attho. Ayañca sesa-saddo kāmacchando byāpādo māno uddhaccanti etthāpi yojetabbo. Yathā hi avijjā, evaṃ etepi dhammā apāyagamanīyasabhāvā paṭhamamaggena pahīyanti evāti. ‘‘Avijjāniravasesā’’tipi pāṭho, etthāpi yathāvuttesu kāmacchandādipadesupi niravasesa-saddo yojetabbo . Sāvasesañhi purimamaggadvayena kāmacchandādayo pahīyanti, itarehi pana niravasesanti. Tedhātuke imāni dasa saṃyojanānīti ettha tedhātuketi saṃyojanānaṃ visayadassanaṃ. Tattha hi tāni saṃyojanavasena pavattanti.
12 「依未知当知根而住」:意思是达到了能舍弃它的道。而这里的「yaṃ」一词,是表示原因的语助词。「此尽智」:即以那智慧为因,从而了知“我的生已经灭尽”,了知自身之生的彻底灭尽。作为省察之相的阿罗汉果智,便名为「尽智」。同样地,对于“了知‘不再有后世’”这句话,也应当导入此“yaṃ”来理解,也就是以“不再有后世”而了知,这便是「无生智」。此处也同样应依前说方式,以阿罗汉果智来理解其义。然而在《殊胜义注》中说道:“尽智是指能灭尽烦恼的圣道中的智慧。无生智则是指依结生而不再生起,于各道所断烦恼的无生之终点所生起的圣果中的智慧。”但在本处,这两者都依阿罗汉果智来分别。因此他说:“这二智是已知根”,以及“因所缘的假名而得两个名称”。显示巴利原文
12.Anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāyāti taṃ pahāyakaṃ patvā. Yaṃ panāti ettha yanti hetuatthe nipāto. Idaṃ khaye ñāṇanti yena ñāṇena hetubhūtena ‘‘khīṇā me jātī’’ti attano jātiyā khīṇabhāvaṃ jānāti, idaṃ evaṃ paccavekkhaṇassa nimittabhūtaṃ arahattaphalañāṇaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ nāma. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātīti etthāpi yanti ānetabbaṃ ‘‘yaṃ nāparaṃ itthattāyāti pajānātī’’ti. Idaṃ anuppāde ñāṇanti idhāpi pubbe vuttanayeneva arahattaphalañāṇavasena attho yojetabbo. Aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. cittuppādakkaṇḍa 135-142) pana ‘‘khaye ñāṇaṃ kilesakkhayakare ariyamagge ñāṇanti vuttaṃ. Anuppāde ñāṇaṃ paṭisandhivasena anuppādabhūte taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ anuppādapariyosāne uppanne ariyaphale ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Idha pana ubhayampi arahattaphalañāṇavaseneva vibhattaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘imāni dve ñāṇāni aññātāvindriya’’nti, ‘‘ārammaṇasaṅketena dve nāmāni labbhantī’’ti ca.
已知根虽在下三果和上三道中生起,会一次又一次地生起,但并不像未知当知根那样——在初果生起时,乃至阿罗汉果生起时,以彻底不再生起的息灭而灭尽——因此他说:“而那未知当知根……”等。以此显示:如同那些应断的法一样,其余的果法在阿罗汉果生起时,亦通过见与修习,以彻底不再生起的息灭而灭尽。那么,对于三界内的那些法,还有什么可说的呢?唯一的「慧」即是「已知根」。若只是一个,为何被说为两种?于是他说“然而……”等。 「由所缘的名称」:即依于“尽”与“无生”这样的所缘共称而命名。它以「了知」为义,故称为慧;也就是前文在关闭诸漏之门的作用中所说的慧,它本性是了知,所以是慧。另一个,则依其所见、所执取的所缘,以「不漂浮」之义、「深入」之义,而称为念。显示巴利原文
Aññindriyaṃ heṭṭhimesu tīsu phalesu, uparimesu ca tīsu maggesu uppattiyā punappunaṃ uppajjamānampi anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ viya paṭhamaphaluppattiyā aggaphaluppattiyā anuppādanirodhena nirujjhatīti āha – ‘‘yañca anaññātaññassāmītindriya’’ntiādi. Etena pahātabbadhammā viya dassanabhāvanāhi aggaphaluppattiyā tadavasesaphaladhammāpi anuppādanirodhena nirujjhanti. Ko pana vādo tebhūmakadhammānanti dasseti, ekā paññā aññātāvindriyattā. Yadi ekā, kathaṃ dvidhā vuttāti āha ‘‘api cā’’tiādi. Ārammaṇasaṅketenāti khaye anuppādeti imāya ārammaṇasamaññāya. Sā pajānanaṭṭhena paññāti yā pubbe sotānaṃ pidhānakiccā vuttā paññā, sā pajānanasabhāvena paññā. Itarā pana yathādiṭṭhaṃ yathāgahitaṃ ārammaṇaṃ apilāpanaṭṭhena ogāhanaṭṭhena satīti.
13 如此解释了“慧与念”这一句的含义后,现在接着解释“名色”这一句的含义,他说:“其中,那些五取蕴,这就是名色。”为了清楚地显示名色的区分,也为了便于把握,他将显而易见的“名色”特别指明出来,而说了“其中,那些……”等。因为抓住了这些,自然也就通过俱行等方式抓住了其余的心、心所及色法。在此处,通过抓取“名”,仅仅抓取到了三蕴,所以他说“与识相应的名色”。然而,那个色是与识相应的吗?这并非依「相应缘」的关系而说。应当这样看待:这是针对一般大众不作精确区分、易于把握的自性而说的。显示巴利原文
13. Evaṃ ‘‘paññā ceva sati cā’’ti padassa atthaṃ vivaritvā idāni ‘‘nāmarūpa’’nti padassa atthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘tattha ye pañcupādānakkhandhā, idaṃ nāmarūpa’’nti āha. Nāmarūpañca vibhāgena dassento sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ pākaṭanāmarūpameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tattha ye’’tiādimāha. Taggahaṇeneva hi sahacaraṇādinā tadaññe cittacetasikā rūpadhammā ca gahitā hontīti. Nāmaggahaṇena cettha khandhattayameva gahitanti ‘‘nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇasampayutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana rūpaṃ sampayuttanti? Nayidaṃ sampayuttapaccayavasena vuttaṃ. Pacurajanassa pana avibhāgena gahaṇīyasabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
偈颂中问及「无余涅槃界」。为了显示这是通过四神足的途径、证得圣道而获得,也为了以念与慧来择定作为「神足修习」根本的诸根,他说道:“其中,念与慧即是四根。”那探求善与不善法趋向的「念」,圆满成就时必定会成就「定」。在此,通过提及「念」来突显对现起烦恼的断除,因此说“念是两种根:念根与定根”。同样,那断除随眠烦恼的「慧」,圆满成就时决不会离开四种正勤的精进,因此说“慧是两种根:慧根与精进根”。显示巴利原文
Gāthāya anupādisesā nibbānadhātu pucchitāti taṃ caturiddhipādamukhena ariyamaggādhigamena pattabbanti dassento iddhipādabhāvanāmūlabhūtāni indriyāni satipaññāhi niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha sati ca paññā ca cattāri indriyānī’’ti āha. Kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamānā sati sijjhantī ekantena samādhiṃ nipphādeti. Satiggahaṇena cettha pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ idhādhippetanti āha – ‘‘sati dve indriyāni, satindriyañca samādhindriyañcā’’ti. Tathā anusayasamugghātavidhāyinī paññā sijjhamānā na vinā catubbidhasammappadhānavīriyaṃ sijjhatīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘paññā dve indriyāni paññindriyañca vīriyindriyañcā’’ti.
「在这四根中的」:指在这念等四根中,作为依止缘而成为基底的、与它们俱生的那种「信」。也有“由这四根”的读法,那是省略了“相应”一词,表示“与这四根相应”。以对境净信为相的信,会成为具有“想要行动”本性的「欲」的殊胜助缘,因此他说:“以信为增上的心一境性,这就是「欲定」。”在“心得定时”这句话中,是以「观定」而心得定的。「断」:指能成办镇伏断的定,被称为「断」,因为藉由它而断除烦恼。也有“增上”的读法,意为最上。正如“定为一趣”所说的那样。显示巴利原文
Yā imesu catūsu indriyesūti imesu satiādīsu catūsu indriyesu nissayapaccayatāya adhiṭṭhānabhūtesu taṃsahajātā eva yā saddahanā. ‘‘Imehi catūhi indriyehī’’tipi pāḷi, tassā imehi catūhi indriyehi sampayuttāti vacanaseso, ārammaṇe abhippasādalakkhaṇā saddhā kattukāmatāsabhāvassa chandassa visesapaccayo hotīti āha – ‘‘yā saddhādhipateyyā cittekaggatā, ayaṃ chandasamādhī’’ti. Samāhite citteti vipassanāsamādhinā samāhite citte. Idaṃ pahānanti vikkhambhanappahānasādhako samādhi pahānanti vutto pajahati etenāti katvā. ‘‘Padhāna’’ntipi pāṭho, aggoti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘samādhi ekodī’’ti vuccati.
通过“入出息”等说法,以身行、语行、心行为代表,所指涉的正是能发起它们的「精进行」。由于它们在修习完成之前,始终以同一作用而被忆念和思惟,所以称为「忆念与思惟」。因为它们使“愿我的修习如是进行”的意愿,能够如其希望地展开。「那两者」:指称为「欲定」和称为「增上行的精进」这两者。正是由于这两者,通过近行法的处理,它们被说成好像是不同的东西,如同说“具有欲定及勤行神足”一样。即使是未分离的法,通过近行法的处理,也会被说成好像是分离的,例如“石女的儿子的身体”这一说法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Assāsapassāsā’’tiādinā kāyavacīcittasaṅkhārasīsena taṃsamuṭṭhāpakā vīriyasaṅkhārāva gahitā. Te hi yāva bhāvanānipphatti tāva ekarasena saraṇato saṅkappetabbato ca sarasaṅkappā’’ti vuttā ‘‘evaṃ me bhāvanā hotū’’ti yathā icchitā, tathā pavattiyā hetubhāvato. Tadubhayanti chandasamādhisaṅkhātañca padhānasaṅkhārasaṅkhātañca vīriyanti taṃ ubhayaṃ. Ubhayameva hi upacāravasena aññaṃ viya katvā ‘‘chandasamādhippadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipāda’’nti vuttaṃ. Abhinnampi hi upacāravasena bhinnaṃ viya katvā voharanti, yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti.
于此,“成就”(ijjhati)故名为“神足”(iddhi),意即圆满成就、得以产生。或者,众生依此而成就,成为有成就者、增长者、达到殊胜者,故名为“神足”;而“足”(pāda)是指藉由它而到达。依第一种含义,“神足”本身就是“足”,即神足的部分、神足的构成要素。依第二种含义,以神足为足、为安住处、为证得之方便,故称“神足”。因为藉由它,人们到达、证得那上上殊胜的神足。而“依远离”,意思是修习依彼分远离、依断远离、依出离远离的神足。也就是说,这位修习神足的瑜伽行者,在观的刹那,从作用上说,是依彼分远离;从意向上说,是依出离远离。而在道的刹那,从作用上说,是依断远离;从所缘上说,是依出离远离而修习神足。此理同样适用于“依离贪”等表述。显示巴利原文
Tattha ijjhatīti iddhi, samijjhati nipphajjatīti attho. Ijjhanti vā tāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontīti iddhi, pajjati etenāti pādo, paṭhamena atthena iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo, iddhikoṭṭhāsoti attho. Dutiyena atthena iddhiyā pādo patiṭṭhā adhigamūpāyoti iddhipādo. Tena hi uparūparivisesasaṅkhātaṃ iddhiṃ pajjanti pāpuṇanti. Vivekanissitanti tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ samucchedavivekanissitaṃ nissaraṇavivekanissitañca iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti attho. Tathā hi ayaṃ iddhipādabhāvanānuyutto yogī vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitaṃ ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ. Maggakkhaṇe pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitaṃ ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitaṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti. Esa nayo virāganissitantiādīsu.
正是由于远离,才有离贪等。而在此,“舍离”(vossaggo)唯有两种:舍弃舍离与投入舍离。其中,舍弃舍离是在观的刹那,以彼分断的形式;在道的刹那,以正断的形式,断除烦恼。投入舍离则是在观的刹那,以心倾向涅槃的形式;在道的刹那,以取涅槃为所缘的形式,投入涅槃。这两种方式在此处世间与出世间混杂的义理解说中,都得以适用。正如这样,这第一神足依前文所述的方式,既舍弃烦恼,也投入涅槃。而“转成舍离”的意思是,为舍离而转起、已转起,为舍离而成熟、已成熟。因为这位修习神足的瑜伽行者,如同第一神足为烦恼的舍弃舍离之义与涅槃的投入舍离之义而成熟、已成熟那样,如此修习它。其余神足也适用此理。不过差别在于:以欲为上首而运作的定,称为“欲定”;同样,以精进为上首而运作的定,称为“精进定”;以心为上首而运作的定,称为“心定”;以观为上首而运作的定,称为“观定”。显示巴利原文
Vivekattā eva hi virāgādayo, kevalañcettha vossaggo duvidho pariccāgavossaggo ca pakkhandanavossaggo cāti. Tattha pariccāgavossaggo vipassanākkhaṇe tadaṅgavasena, maggakkhaṇe samucchedavasena kilesappahānaṃ. Pakkhandanavossaggo vipassanākkhaṇe tanninnabhāvena, maggakkhaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇavasena nibbānapakkhandanaṃ. Tadubhayampi imasmiṃ lokiyalokuttaramissake atthasaṃvaṇṇanānaye yujjati. Tathā hi ayaṃ paṭhamiddhipādo yathāvuttena pakārena kilese pariccajati nibbānañca pakkhandati. Vossaggapariṇāminti iminā pana vacanena vossaggatthaṃ pariṇamantaṃ pariṇatañca paripaccantaṃ paripakkañcāti attho. Ayañhi iddhipādabhāvanānuyutto yogī yathā paṭhamo iddhipādo kilesapariccāgavossaggatthaṃ nibbānapakkhandanavossaggatthañca paripaccati, yathā ca paripakko hoti, tathā naṃ bhāvetīti. Sesiddhipādesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā chandaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi chandasamādhi. Evaṃ vīriyaṃ cittaṃ vīmaṃsaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattito samādhi vīmaṃsāsamādhīti.
14 为了说明不单是第四神足以定与智为根本,而是所有神足都是如此,所以说「一切定都以智为根本,以智为先导,以智随转」。既然如此,为什么唯独称它为「观定」呢?前面已经说过,是因为它是以观为上首而运作的缘故。在这里,以加行慧作为智的根本,以证得慧作为智的先导,以省察慧作为智的随转。或者,以加行慧作为智的根本,以近行慧作为智的先导,以安止慧作为智的随转。又或者,以近行慧作为智的根本,以安止慧作为智的先导,以神通慧作为智的随转,应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
14. Na kevalaṃ catutthaiddhipādo eva samādhiñāṇamūlako, atha kho sabbopīti dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbo samādhi ñāṇamūlako ñāṇapubbaṅgamo ñāṇānuparivattī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā so eva vīmaṃsāsamādhīti vuttoti? Vīmaṃsaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pavattitattāti vuttovāyamattho. Tattha pubbabhāgapaññāya ñāṇamūlako. Adhigamapaññāya ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Paccavekkhaṇapaññāya ñāṇānuparivatti. Atha vā pubbabhāgapaññāya ñāṇamūlako. Upacārapaññāya ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Appanāpaññāya ñāṇānuparivatti. Upacārapaññāya vā ñāṇamūlako. Appanāpaññāya ñāṇapubbaṅgamo. Abhiññāpaññāya ñāṇānuparivattīti veditabbaṃ.
「如前」:如同过去,因定有宿住随念智随转,于过去诸生,纵经无量劫之成坏,自他难可通达之蕴及与蕴相关者,无有不通达;同样,未来,因定有未来分智随转,于未来诸生,纵经无量劫之成坏,自他难可通达之蕴等,亦无有不通达。显示巴利原文
Yathāpureti yathā samādhissa pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇānuparivattibhāvena pure pubbe atītāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano paresañca khandhaṃ khandhūpanibaddhañca duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthi, tathā pacchā samādhissa anāgataṃsañāṇānuparivattibhāvena anāgatāsu jātīsu asaṅkhyeyyesupi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu attano paresañca khandhaṃ khandhūpanibaddhañca duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthīti attho.
「如后」:如同后来,依于定中他心智随转,未来七日之内他人之心,无有不通达;同样,过去七日之内他人之心,亦无有不通达。「如昼」:譬如白昼,阳光驱散黑暗,有眼者于在面前现起之眼所识色,极易辨识。「如夜」:同样,于夜间,纵处四支具足之暗,因定有天眼智随转,亦无难可通达之色处。显示巴利原文
Yathā pacchāti yathā samādhissa cetopariyañāṇānuparivattibhāvena anāgatesu sattasu divasesu parasattānaṃ cittaṃ duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthi, tathā pure atītesu sattasu divasesu parasattānaṃ cittaṃ duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthīti attho. Yathā divāti yathā divasabhāge sūriyālokena andhakārassa vidhamitattā cakkhumantānaṃ sattānaṃ āpāthagataṃ cakkhuviññeyyaṃ rūpaṃ suviññeyyaṃ. Tathā rattinti tathā rattibhāge caturaṅgasamannāgatepi andhakāre vattamāne samādhissa dibbacakkhuñāṇānuparivattitāya duppaṭivijjhaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ natthi.
「如夜,如昼」:正如夜间,如是白昼,于极微细、为某物所障及极远处之一切色,亦无有不通达。又,如于色处所说,由定有天耳智随转,于声处亦当类推。故言:「以无覆心……」。此中,「无覆」指不为障碍神通智之烦恼所覆,即由无覆,心得光辉。仅以此义,当知亦说定有神变智随转。「五根」乃与神足相应之有学五根,故说为「善」。言「心俱生」等,是为显示:识灭,则他们亦灭。于「名色」等亦然。此即表明:「非仅五根,名色亦以识为因,识灭则名色灭。」显示巴利原文
Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā ca rattiyaṃ tathā divāpi atisukhumaṃ kenaci tirohitaṃ yañca atidūre, taṃ sabbarūpaṃ duppaṭivijjhaṃ nāma natthi. Yathā ca rūpāyatane vuttaṃ, tathā samādhissa dibbasotañāṇānuparivattitāya saddāyatane ca netabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘iti vivaṭena cetasā’’tiādi. Tattha apariyonaddhenāti abhiññāñāṇassa pāribandhakakilesehi anajjhotthaṭena, apariyonaddhattā eva sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ. Eteneva samādhissa iddhividhañāṇānuparivattitāpi vuttā evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pañcindriyānīti iddhipādasampayuttāni sekkhassa pañcindriyāni adhippetānīti āha ‘‘kusalānī’’ti. Cittasahabhūnītiādi tesaṃ viññāṇanirodhena nirodhadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Tathā ‘‘nāmarūpañcā’’tiādi. Tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘na kevalaṃ pañcindriyāni eva, atha kho nāmarūpañca viññāṇahetukaṃ viññāṇassa nirodhā nirujjhatī’’ti.
「彼的」:指识的。「因」:指渴爱、无明等。「无食」:这是词义的解释。「不欢喜」:意为因作为欢喜的渴爱已断,故无所希求。正因如此,那不再结生的识便灭去。同样,如同识一样,名色也由于被称为识的因与缘已不存在,由于以这些为缘的诸行等也已不存在,而成为无因、无缘的。其余内容,意思已很清楚。有关问答之间的推寻推敲,当依前文所说的道理来理解。显示巴利原文
Tassāti viññāṇassa. Hetūti taṇhāavijjādiko. Anāhāranti padassa atthavivaraṇaṃ. Anabhinanditanti abhinandanabhūtāya taṇhāya pahīnattā eva apatthitaṃ. Tato eva appaṭisandhikaṃ viññāṇaṃ taṃ nirujjhati. Yathā ca viññāṇaṃ, evaṃ nāmarūpampi viññāṇasaṅkhātassa hetuno paccayassa ca abhāvā tappaccayānaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ abhāvā ahetu appaccayaṃ. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva. Pucchāvissajjanavicayopi vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
如此,在显示了带有连结之问后,前面已分别从众生所依与法所依的角度显示了各个问题;现在为了将它们合在一起显示,故开始演述「那些被数知之法」等段落。此处词义如下:「被数知之法」指以无常等角度被审视观察的法,这是阿罗汉的异名。「有学」指其余那些正在修学戒等学处的圣者们。「凡夫」指众多普通之人。「Tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ, puṭṭho pabrūhīti」的意思为:您这位智者、贤善者啊,我被问及那些有学与无学之人的行道,请您为我宣说。余下的内容,依字面即可了知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anusandhipucchampi dassetvā heṭṭhā sattādhiṭṭhānā dhammādhiṭṭhānā ca pucchā visuṃ visuṃ dassitāti idāni tā saha dassetuṃ ‘‘ye ca saṅkhātadhammāse’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ padattho – saṅkhātadhammāti aniccādivasena parivīmaṃsitadhammā, arahataṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sekkhāti sīlādīni sikkhamānā avasesā ariyapuggalā. Puthūti bahū sattajanā. Tesaṃ me nipako iriyaṃ, puṭṭho pabrūhīti tesaṃ sekhāsekhānaṃ nipako paṇḍito tvaṃ bhagavā paṭipattiṃ puṭṭho me brūhīti. Sesaṃ pāḷivaseneva viññāyati.
15 「Kissā」(为何)意为“因何之故,以何因由”。「有学与无学的观及以观为先导的断」:这是指在有学与无学中,以提问的方式,来问那些以观为前导的断——也就是提问的方式。显示巴利原文
15.Kissāti kissa hetu, kena kāraṇenāti attho. Sekhāsekhavipassanā pubbaṅgamappahānayogenāti sekhe asekhe vipassanāpubbaṅgamappahāne ca pucchanayogena, pucchāvidhināti attho.
在答复的偈颂中,「于诸欲不应贪求」是指对于事欲,不应以烦恼欲去贪求。「意应无浊」是说应舍弃如嗔恚寻思、身恶行等令心浊染的法,使心澄净无浊。然而,无学者由于已依无常等角度善加衡量一切法,故于一切法而得善巧;他藉由身念处等而具足正念;已断尽一切烦恼,达至最上的比丘身份;并于一切威仪中行持。因此之故,世尊说“善巧……应遍行”。这是简要的义理。显示巴利原文
Vissajjanagāthāyaṃ kāmesu nābhigijjheyyāti vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena na abhigijjheyya. Manasānāvilo siyāti byāpādavitakkādayo kāyaduccaritādayo ca manaso āvilabhāvakare dhamme pajahanto cittena anāvilo bhaveyya. Yasmā pana asekkho aniccatādivasena sabbadhammānaṃ paritulitattā kusalo sabbadhammesu kāyānupassanāsatiādīhi ca sato sabbakilesānaṃ bhinnattā uttamabhikkhubhāvaṃ patto ca hutvā sabbairiyāpathesu pavattati, tasmā ‘‘kusalo…pe… paribbaje’’ti āhāti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho.
此中,提问偈所提到的「nipako」(贤善者)一词,是针对世尊而说的;而世尊的贤善已达究竟圆满,应以其无碍的知见来说明。因此,为了先按业门类别阐释无碍知见,并显示有学与无学的行道,才宣说了“世尊的一切身业”等内容。由此,藉由在一切处皆无障碍的如实知见,阐明如来开示有学与无学行道的善巧。其中,「ko cāti」(于何处有谁)的意思就是“在何处,于什么所缘当中”。为指明这一所缘,随后说“于无常、苦、无我中”。意即:如实知见生起时,是以“一切有为法无常、苦,一切法无我”的方式生起;然而,在那个所缘中,若有某种因素使得如实知见无法转起,那就是「paṭighāta」(障碍)。这便显示了通达无常、苦、无我三相的困难与难得,以及不共于他人的殊胜特质。因为正是通过对这三相的阐明,智者们才能了知世尊对于四圣谛的通达与正等觉。显示巴利原文
Tattha yaṃ pucchāgāthāyaṃ ‘‘nipako’’ti padaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, bhagavato ca nepakkaṃ ukkaṃsapāramippattaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇadassanena dīpetabbanti anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ tāva kammadvārabhedehi vibhajitvā sekhāsekhapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavato sabbaṃ kāyakamma’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tena sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇadassanena tathāgatassa sekhāsekhapaṭipattidesanākosallameva vibhāveti. Tattha ko cāti kva ca, kasmiṃ visayeti attho. Taṃ visayaṃ dasseti ‘‘yaṃ anicce dukkhe anattani cā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma uppajjamānaṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅkhataṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti uppajjati, tassa pana tasmiṃ visaye yena appavatti, so paṭighātoti, etena lakkhaṇattayappaṭivedhassa durabhisambhavataṃ anaññasādhāraṇatañca dasseti. Lakkhaṇattayavibhāvanena hi bhagavato catusaccappaṭivedhaṃ sammāsambodhiñca paṇḍitā paṭijānanti.
「无知」与「无见」直接显示了那个障碍的自体。因为,覆盖六所缘自性相的痴迷,正是如实知见的障碍。所以说“于无常、苦、无我中”:如实知见本应于某一所缘中生起,却恰恰于那所缘中,必然有其障碍存在。接着,“如同这里有一个人”等,是譬喻的说明。此中譬喻的关联如下:一切世间人犹如那人,六所缘犹如那些星星的形状;世间人藉由眼识等,随各自能力认知六所缘,就如同那人看见星星的形状;然而,那人虽看见了星星的形状,却不懂得用“这些有几百颗,这些有几千颗”等计算方式来了解数目,同样地,世间人虽以某种方式认知了色法等所缘,却仍未能了悟无常、苦、无我这三相。其余义理,便很清楚了。显示巴利原文
Aññāṇaṃ adassananti taṃ paṭighātaṃ sarūpato dasseti. Chaḷārammaṇasabhāvappaṭicchādako hi sammoho ñāṇadassanassa paṭighātoti. Yasmiṃ visaye ñāṇadassanaṃ uppattirahaṃ, tattheva tassa paṭighātena bhavitabbanti āha – ‘‘yaṃ anicce dukkhe anattani cā’’ti. Yathā idha purisotiādi upamādassanaṃ. Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – puriso viya sabbo loko, tārakarūpāni viya cha ārammaṇāni, tassa purisassa tārakarūpānaṃ dassanaṃ viya lokassa cakkhuviññāṇādīhi yathārahaṃ chaḷārammaṇajānanaṃ, tassa purisassa tārakarūpāni passantassāpi ‘‘ettakāni satāni, ettakāni sahassānī’’tiādinā gaṇanasaṅketena ajānanaṃ viya lokassa rūpādiārammaṇaṃ kathañci jānantassāpi aniccādilakkhaṇattayānavabodhoti. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
接下来,为解释世尊用来为具寿阿逸多开示有学与无学行道的那些词句的意义,而说“在此,有学者”等。其中,“tattha”(在此)仅是不变词,或针对那个解答。“sekhena”(有学者):因彼具有应修学的戒行等故,称为有学;即依此有学者。“dvīsu dhammesu”(于二种法中):意指针对两种法。“pariyuṭṭhānīyesu”(应现起处):由于嗔恚等烦恼的盘踞,而应于此处转起,意指怨恨的起因。亦有人读作“paṭighaṭṭhānīyesu”(应撞击处),义同。显示巴利原文
Idāni yehi padehi bhagavatā āyasmato ajitassa sekhāsekhapaṭipadā vuttā, tesaṃ padānaṃ atthaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha sekhenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti nipātamattaṃ, tasmiṃ vā vissajjane. Sekhenāti sikkhā etassa sīlanti sekho, tena sekhena. Dvīsu dhammesūti duvidhesu dhammesūti adhippāyo. Pariyuṭṭhānīyesūti dosena pariyuṭṭhitena yattha parivattitabbaṃ, tesu āghātavatthūsūti attho. ‘‘Paṭighaṭṭhānīyesū’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho.
在此,于遮止贪求的教诫中,由于贪求存在时,以贪求为因的过失便会生起,因此亦从中确立了“应守护心令免彼过”的道理而加以宣说。然而,因世尊曾说过“于诸欲中不应贪求”(《经集》1045;《小义释·阿逸多问》64,义释8;《导论》15-17),故以“在此,那种欲求”等开头,依贪求作了说明。或者,应如此看待:在过失方面应守护心,这已由该偈的第二句宣说了;因为第二句揭示了其余的染污法与清净法。确实,为了依已生与未生的区别,以正精进的领域将一切染污法与清净法分为四类,再经由正勤的门径,将有学行道推向极致而予以显示,这才说了“有学者若贪求”等文。其中,“anāvilasaṅkappo”(无浊之思):因无欲思等浑浊的思虑,故为无浊之思。正因如此,他不贪求地精进,策发精进力。如何精进?便说“他对于未生起的……”等等。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca gedhapaṭisedhacodanāyaṃ gedhanimitto doso gedhe sati hotīti tatopi cittassa rakkhitabbatā niddhāretvā vuttā. Yasmā pana bhagavatā ‘‘kāmesu nābhigijjheyyā’’ti (su. ni. 1045; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 64, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 8; netti. 15-17) vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘‘tattha yā icchā’’tiādinā gedhavasena niddeso kato. Atha vā dosato cittassa rakkhitabbatā gāthāya dutiyapādena vuttāyevāti daṭṭhabbā. Dutiyapādena hi sesakilesavodānadhammā dassitā. Tathā hi uppannānuppannabhedato sammāvāyāmassa visayabhāvena sabbe saṃkilesavodānadhamme catudhā vibhajitvā sammappadhānamukhena sekhapaṭipadaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sekho abhigijjhanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anāvilasaṅkappoti āvilānaṃ kāmasaṅkappādīnaṃ abhāvena anāvilasaṅkappo. Tato eva ca anabhigijjhanto vāyamati, vīriyaṃ pavatteti. Kathaṃ vāyamatīti āha – ‘‘so anuppannāna’’ntiādi.
其中,“so”(他):指为了追求更上的殊胜而修行的有学者。“anuppannānaṃ”(未生起的):指尚未产生的。“pāpakānaṃ”(恶的):指低劣的。“akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ”(不善法):指从不善巧所生的诸法。“anuppādāya”(为了令不生起):目的即不令他们生起。“chandaṃ janeti”(生起欲求):生起称为“想要去做”的善法欲。“vāyamatīti”(精进):作出努力与勤行。“vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti”(策发精进):发动身心的精进力。“cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti”(策励心):以此同时生起的精进力将心提起。“padahatīti”(勤行):作出勤修的精进。而“精进”等这四句,应与习行、修习、多作、相续造作等连结而理解。对于“uppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ”(已生的恶法):指已进入“不能被称为未生起”状态的恶法。“pahānāya”(为了断除):目的是为了断舍他们。对于“anuppann显示巴利原文
Tattha soti uttarivisesatthāya paṭipajjamāno sekkho. Anuppannānanti anibbattānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānaṃ dhammānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Anuppādāyāti na uppādanatthāya. Chandaṃ janetīti kattukamyatāsaṅkhātaṃ kusalacchandaṃ uppādeti. Vāyamatīti payogaparakkamaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti kāyikacetasikavīriyaṃ karoti. Cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti teneva sahajātavīriyena cittaṃ ukkhipati. Padahatīti padhānavīriyaṃ karoti. Vāyamatītiādīni pana cattāri padāni āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammasātaccakiriyāhi yojetabbāni. Uppannānaṃ pāpakānanti anuppannāti avattabbataṃ āpannānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānanti anibbattānaṃ kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti nibbattānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthaṃ. Asammosāyāti anassanatthaṃ . Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunaṃ bhāvāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāyāti ayaṃ tāva padattho.
16 “哪些是未生起的……”这一段的开始,是为了显示不善法与善法当中,哪些是未生起的,哪些是已生起的。其中,“这些是未生起的”:这些欲寻等,或者从尚未现行的角度,或者从尚未经验所缘的角度,称为未生起。否则,在无始的轮回当中,根本就不存在所谓“未生起”的不善法。此处举出这三种寻,应看作仅是举例。而说“不善根”,是因为随眠正是一切不善法的根本,故如此说,并非仅指贪等而已。“这些是已生起的”:由于随眠可以用“已得生处而生起”“未被断除而生起”等含有“已生起”意味的同义语来描述,所以是从名称的角度称为已生起的,并非从它们正在现行的状态来说,这便是其含义。“这些是未生起的善法”:这句话是为了显示,对于正为证入流果而修行者,信等善法属于未生起;至于凡夫,更不待言。此处的“善”字,应如《婆醯迦经》中那样,视为“无过失”的同义词。“这些是已生起的善法”:对于为证入流果而修行者,在最初的圣道,信等善法便是已生起的善法。显示巴利原文
16.‘‘Katame anuppannā’’tiādi akusaladhammā kusaladhammā ca yādisā anuppannā yādisā ca uppannā, te dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Tattha ime anuppannāti ime kāmavitakkādayo asamudācāravasena vā ananubhūtārammaṇavasena vā anuppannā nāma. Aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā nāma akusalā dhammā natthi. Vitakkattayaggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Akusalamūlānīti anusayā eva sabbesaṃ akusalānaṃ mūlabhāvato evaṃ vuttā, na lobhādayo eva. Ime uppannā anusayā bhūmiladdhuppannā asamugghāṭituppannātiādiuppannapariyāyasabbhāvato nāmavasena uppannā nāma, na vattamānabhāvenāti attho. Ime anuppannā kusalā dhammāti ime sotāpannassa saddhādayo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa anuppannā kusalā dhammā nāma, ko pana vādo puthujjanānanti dasseti. Kusalasaddo cettha bāhitikasutte (ma. ni. 2.358 ādayo) viya anavajjapariyāyo daṭṭhabbo. Ime uppannā kusalā dhammāti ime paṭhamamagge saddhādayo sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa uppannā kusalā dhammā nāma.
由于修习念处能善巧制止欲寻,故说:“用来制止欲寻的,此即念根。”由于以无过失的乐为近因,心不散乱,而瞋恚寻是心的苦所依与散乱之缘,它被善巧制止,故说:“用来制止瞋恚寻的,此即定根。”由于在善法中发动精进者,能轻易克服他人的伤害,因此由精进而善巧制止害寻,故说:“用来制止害寻的,此即精进根。”为显示定等各自的对治之断除,唯具足智慧者方能成就此义,故说:“凭借此,对已生起、已生起的……”等等。显示巴利原文
Satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya suniggahito kāmavitakkoti āha – ‘‘yena kāmavitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ satindriya’’nti. Anavajjasukhapadaṭṭhānena avikkhepena cetodukkhasannissayo vikkhepapaccayo byāpādavitakko suniggahitoti vuttaṃ – ‘‘yena byāpādavitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ samādhindriya’’nti. Kusalesu dhammesu āraddhavīriyo parāparādhaṃ sukhena sahatīti vīriyena vihiṃsāvitakko suniggahitoti āha – ‘‘yena vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vāreti, idaṃ vīriyindriya’’nti. Samādhiādīnampi yathāsakaṃpaṭipakkhappahānaṃ paññavantasseva ijjhatīti imamatthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘yena uppannuppanne’’tiādi.
为显示上述已确定的五根在各自领域中居于主导地位,故说:“信根应在何处见?”等等。这容易理解。并且,为显示由于有学者的信等诸根得以成就,一切有学法皆达究竟,故以“如是,有学者……”等总结有学行道。显示巴利原文
Etesaṃ yathāniddhāritānaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ savisaye jeṭṭhakabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhindriyaṃ kattha daṭṭhabba’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva. Imesañca saddhādīnaṃ sekhānaṃ indriyānaṃ nibbattiyā sabbepi sekhā dhammā matthakappattā hontīti dassento ‘‘evaṃ sekho’’tiādinā sekhapaṭipadaṃ nigameti.
17 在解释了有学行道之后,为了阐明无学行道,而说“善巧于一切法”等。其中,“一切法”一词是指,先分析前述之法,继而为显示无学者对彼法的善巧,而说“名为世间”等。这与前文所说意义相同。由烦恼世间集起了有世间,意思是:依于欲界法,进而集起色界、无色界法。此处的“他”即指那位有学者,住于广大法,或住于小与大法。“令根成就”:即令戒与定成为抉择分,并生起能令解脱成熟的信等诸根。当这些根被修习时,通过把握色、无色等方式,对所应了知(neyya)便获得了遍知。显示巴利原文
17. Evaṃ sekhapaṭipadaṃ vibhajitvā idāni asekhapaṭipadaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘kusalo sabbadhammāna’’ntiādimāha . Tattha sabbadhammānanti iminā padena vuttadhamme tāva vibhajitvā tattha asekkhassa kosallaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘loko nāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ vuttatthameva. Kilesalokena bhavaloko samudāgacchatīti kāmāvacaradhammaṃ nissāya rūpārūpāvacaradhamme samudāgametīti attho. Soti so mahaggatadhammesu, parittamahaggatadhammesu vā ṭhito. Indriyāni nibbattetīti sīlasamādhayo nibbedhabhāgiye katvā vimuttiparipācanīyāni saddhādīni indriyāni uppādeti. Indriyesu bhāviyamānesūti yathāvuttaindriyesu vaḍḍhiyamānesu rūpārūpapariggahādivasena neyyassa pariññā bhavati.
“见遍知”即知遍知。“修遍知”即审察遍知与断遍知。以“它有两种”等略说的意义,通过“当有学者……”等加以展开。其中,“以伴随厌离之想与作意”这一句,显示强力的观。此处“有学者”一词,因其具有修学的性质,故将善凡夫也摄入“有学”之中,因而说“两种法到达善巧:见善巧与……”。此处意为:当善凡夫修习前行之道,以伴随厌离之想与作意遍知所应了知(neyya)时,他的那些观法便达到见善巧,成就初道智,与之相应。而当入流者等有学者,以所说的方法遍知所应了知时,他的那些观法便达到修善巧。显示巴利原文
Dassanapariññāti ñātapariññā. Bhāvanāpariññāti tīraṇapariññā pahānapariññā ca. ‘‘Sā duvidhenā’’tiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yadā hi sekho’’tiādinā vivarati. Tattha ‘‘nibbidāsahagatehi saññāmanasikārehī’’ti iminā balavavipassanaṃ dasseti. Yadā hi sekhoti cettha sikkhanasīlatāya kalyāṇaputhujjanopi sekhapadena saṅgahitoti katvā ‘‘dve dhammā kosallaṃ gacchanti dassanakosallañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayamettha adhippāyo – yadā kalyāṇaputhujjano pubbabhāgasikkhaṃ sikkhanto nibbidāsahagatehi saññāmanasikārehi ñeyyaṃ parijānāti, tadā tassa te vipassanādhammā dassanakosallaṃ paṭhamamaggañāṇaṃ gacchanti sampāpuṇanti tena saddhiṃ ghaṭenti. Yadā pana sotāpannādisekho vuttanayena neyyaṃ parijānāti, tadā tassa te vipassanādhammā bhāvanākosallaṃ gacchantīti.
“彼智”:指前面所说的对所应了知(neyya)的遍知,也就是遍知所应了知之智慧。“应当以五种方式了知”:这是从所缘境界的差别来显示其分类。“于诸法的自相智”:指对于色、无色等法,以坚硬、触等自相为所缘而起的智慧。然而,由于一切所应了知的事物,从因和果的差别而言,唯有两种,故说为“法无碍解及义无碍解”。显示巴利原文
Taṃ ñāṇanti yā pubbe neyyassa pariññā vuttā, taṃ neyyaparijānanañāṇaṃ. Pañcavidhena veditabbanti visayabhedena tassa bhedaṃ dasseti. Dhammānaṃ salakkhaṇe ñāṇanti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ kakkhaḷaphusanādisalakkhaṇe ñāṇaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā sabbaṃ neyyaṃ hetuhetuphalabhedato duvidhameva hoti, tasmā ‘‘dhammapaṭisambhidā ca atthapaṭisambhidā cā’’ti niddiṭṭhaṃ.
「遍知」:指审察遍知。然而,他以自相与缘已了知色、无色等法,并以善等类别把握它们之后,再以无常等方式遍知,因此说“如此了知后,那能遍知,此是善”等。其中,“如此把握的”:即这样以无常等、或以聚思维等方式所把握、所审察的。“此产生果”:此能次第生起生灭智等果;这是以相为作者而施设,正如说“能令成为圣的诸谛即是圣谛”。“对此”:即对于生灭智等。“如此把握的”:即对于如此运作的诸法。“此义”:此义是对诸谛的随觉通达。正如遍知慧对于所应审察的诸法——即在那里的诸法,审察而遍知其审察方式;同样,遍知慧也遍知那审察的果。如此作意,即显示此理趣。显示巴利原文
Pariññāti tīraṇapariññā adhippetā. Yasmā panassa rūpārūpadhamme salakkhaṇato paccayato ca abhijānitvā kusalādivibhāgehi te pariggahetvā aniccādivasena jānanā hoti, tasmā ‘‘evaṃ abhijānitvā yā parijānanā, idaṃ kusala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha evaṃgahitāti evaṃ aniccādito kalāpasammasanādivasena gahitā sammasitā. Idaṃ phalaṃ nibbattentīti idaṃ udayabbayañāṇādikaṃ phalaṃ paṭipāṭiyā uppādenti , nimittassa kattubhāvena upacaraṇato yathā ariyabhāvakarāni saccāni ariyasaccānīti. Tesanti udayabbayañāṇādīnaṃ . Evaṃgahitānanti evaṃpavattitānaṃ. Ayaṃ atthoti ayaṃ saccānaṃ anubodhapaṭivedho attho. Yathā hi pariññāpaññā sammasitabbadhamme sammasanadhamme tattha sammasanākāraṃ parijānāti, evaṃ sammasanaphalampi parijānātīti katvā ayaṃ nayo dassito.
「那些不善」:是指集谛。因为所有不善都属于集的一部分。「那些善」:指正见等道法。虽然果法也应当被证知,但由于这里强调的是四圣谛的证悟,故说“哪些法是应证知的?那就是无为”。「义善巧」:指善于缘所生的义。「法善巧」:指善于缘的诸法。或者,也可以把圣典的义与圣典的法作为义与法。「善性善巧」:指善于恰当,即善于四种理趣,或善于说法的恰当。「果性善巧」:指善于证得诸漏尽者之果。在「于入处善巧」等语句中,“入”是指增长。它分无义之损减和处所之生起两种。「于非入善巧」:“非入”指非增长。它也分义之损减和非处所之生起两种。「于方便善巧」:当有情遭遇紧急之事或怖畏时,能对治其事的恰当处所之生起因缘,对此善巧,即是此义。因为诸漏尽者已完全断除无明,达到慧的圆满,故对这些入处等皆善巧。这样从一方面说明了无学者的善巧后,为了毫无遗漏地再作显示,而说“具备广大善巧”。显示巴利原文
Ye akusalāti samudayasaccamāha. Sabbe hi akusalā samudayapakkhiyāti. Ye kusalāti maggadhammā sammādiṭṭhiādayo. Yadipi phaladhammāpi sacchikātabbā, catusaccappaṭivedhassa pana adhippetattā ‘‘katame dhammā sacchikātabbā, yaṃ asaṅkhata’’nti vuttaṃ. Atthakusaloti paccayuppannesu atthesu kusalo. Dhammakusaloti paccayadhammesu kusalo. Pāḷiatthapāḷidhammā vā atthadhammā. Kalyāṇatākusaloti yuttatākusalo, catunayakovidoti attho, desanāyuttikusalo vā. Phalatākusaloti khīṇāsavaphalakusalo. ‘‘Āyakusalo’’tiādīsu āyoti vaḍḍhi. Sā anatthahānito aṭṭhuppattito ca duvidhā. Apāyāti avaḍḍhi. Sāpi atthahānito anaṭṭhuppattito ca duvidhā. Upāyoti sattānaṃ accāyike kicce vā bhaye vā uppanne tassa tikicchanasamatthaṃ ṭhānuppattikāraṇaṃ, tattha kusaloti attho. Khīṇāsavo hi sabbaso avijjāya pahīnattā paññāvepullappatto etesu āyādīsu kusaloti. Evaṃ asekhassa kosallaṃ ekadesena vibhāvetvā puna anavasesato dassento ‘‘mahatā kosallena samannāgato’’ti āha.
对于已圆满学处的无学者,由于念的责任已经完成,更无其他所为,故说“为现法乐住”。现在,为了总结如上所说的有学与无学行道,而说“此二种行”等。其中,「所应觉」:即应当被觉悟的对象。那所应觉有四种,因为是四谛故。“他这样知道”:即以遍知现观等方式而了知的人。“此被称为”:此无学者达到了念的圆满,可纯粹地称为“念行”等。其余内容易了。此处的问答辨析,亦当前文所述之理趣来理解。显示巴利原文
Pariniṭṭhitasikkhassa asekhassa satokāritāya aññaṃ payojanaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārattha’’nti. Idāni yathāniddiṭṭhaṃ sekhāsekhapaṭipadaṃ nigamento ‘‘imā dve cariyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha bojjhanti bujjhitabbaṃ. Taṃ catubbidhanti taṃ bojjhaṃ catubbidhaṃ, catusaccabhāvato. Evaṃ jānātīti evaṃ pariññābhisamayādivasena yo jānāti. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ asekho sativepullappatto nippariyāyena ‘‘sato abhikkamatī’’tiādinā vuccatīti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Idhāpi pucchāvissajjanavicayā pubbe vuttanayānusārena veditabbā.
至此,大长老在分析审查理趣时,依据《阿耆多经》等(《经集》103等;《小部·阿耆多童子问》57等,《阿耆多童子问义释》1等)显示了问的审查与答的审查,现在为显示其他经中也有问与答审查的方法,而说“应如此问,应如此答”。其中,“如此”是指以此方法。“应问”的意思是应当提问,或应当宣说、应当分别,这便是它的含义。“应如此答”一句亦同此理。而“及于经”等语,是随颂审查的例示。“随颂”:指在义理与文句上,应与所注释的经相同,也就是说,被称为其他经教说的随颂,在义理和文句上,应与所注释的经相同、相似,或应正确地引入该经中。“义乖离”:指在义理上脱离了,或指无关联的意义,犹如“十粒榴莲”这样的语句。因此他说这“成为杂秽语”。由此,说明了应将义理等同的原因。“放置不善”:显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca mahāthero vicayahāraṃ vibhajanto ajitasuttavasena (su. ni. 103 ādayo; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 57 ādayo, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1 ādayo) pucchāvicayaṃ vissajjanavicayañca dassetvā idāni suttantaresupi pucchāvissajjanavicayānaṃ nayaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ pucchitabbaṃ, evaṃ vissajjitabba’’nti āha. Tattha evanti iminā nayena. Pucchitabbanti pucchā kātabbā, ācikkhitabbā vā, vivecetabbāti attho. Evaṃ vissajjitanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Suttassa cātiādi anugītivicayanidassanaṃ. Anugīti atthato ca byañjanato ca samānetabbāti suttantaradesanāsaṅkhātā anugīti atthato byañjanato ca saṃvaṇṇiyamānena suttena samānā sadisī kātabbā, tasmiṃ vā sutte sammā ānetabbā. Atthāpagatanti atthato apetaṃ, asambandhatthaṃ vā dasadāḷimādivacanaṃ viya. Tenevāha ‘‘samphappalāpaṃ bhavatī’’ti. Etena atthassa samānetabbatāya kāraṇamāha. Dunnikkhittassāti asammāvuttassa. Dunnayoti dukkhena netabbo, netuṃ vā asakkuṇeyyo. Byañjanupetanti sabhāvaniruttisamupetaṃ.
如此显示了随颂审查之后,为了分析在释义分中略说的“于经的审查”之义,而说“应审查经”,并为显示审查方式,说了“此经是亲说言教吗?”等语。其中,“亲说言教”:指世尊触及诸处而发出的言教,即正自觉者亲自开示的经,这就是它的意思。“随接言教”:指声闻所说的。因为它紧接于世尊的言教之后而发起,故称“随接言教”。“了义”:依据文句即可了知的意义。“未了义”:必须经过审察决断之后才能把握的意义。“杂染部分”等词的意思,将在基本分的注释中变得明了。然而,世尊的教法在十六种教法基本中,无不各有其相应部分,因此,那种审查方法也作为应审查的方式,于此被确立下来。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ anugītivicayaṃ dassetvā niddesavāre ‘‘suttassa yo pavicayo’’ti saṃkhittena vuttamatthaṃ vibhajituṃ ‘‘suttañca pavicinitabba’’nti vatvā tassa vicinanākāraṃ dassento ‘‘kiṃ idaṃ suttaṃ āhaccavacana’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āhaccavacananti bhagavato ṭhānakaraṇāni āhacca abhihantvā pavattavacanaṃ, sammāsambuddhena sāmaṃ desitasuttanti attho. Anusandhivacananti sāvakabhāsitaṃ. Tañhi bhagavato vacanaṃ anusandhetvā pavattanato ‘‘anusandhivacana’’nti vuttanti. Nītatthanti yathārutavasena ñātabbatthaṃ. Neyyatthanti niddhāretvā gahetabbatthaṃ. Saṃkilesabhāgiyantiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho paṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Yasmā pana bhagavato desanā soḷasavidhe sāsanapaṭṭhāne ekaṃ bhāgaṃ abhajantī nāma natthi, tasmā sopi nayo vicetabbabhāvena idha nikkhitto.
“于何处此经”:即这部经在何处,在开头、中间、结尾的哪一部分。“应见一切谛”:是指“苦谛应于经的何处、何部分、或何句中被见到?应加以抉择而审查;集谛、灭谛、道谛应于何处被见到、被看到?应加以抉择而审查。”如此,应提取一切谛而作审查,这就是它的用意。“经应以初、中、后审查”:是指从开头、中间和结尾,依问审查等方法来审查经。此处,问、答、前后、随颂这几种审查,在经文中即以其自身形式被显示出来。而乐味等审查,则是以谛的抉择为门径,依方法显示出来的,应依照释义分中所说的理趣来了解。而且,凭借那种审查,句的审查也得以成就。显示巴利原文
Kuhiṃ imassa suttassāti imassa suttassa kasmiṃ padese ādimajjhapariyosānesu. Sabbāni saccāni passitabbānīti dukkhasaccaṃ suttassa ‘‘kuhiṃ kasmiṃ padese kasmiṃ vā pade passitabbaṃ niddhāretvā vicetuṃ, samudayasaccaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ maggasaccaṃ kuhiṃ passitabbaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ niddhāretvā vicetu’’nti evaṃ sabbāni saccāni uddharitvā vicetabbānīti adhippāyo. Ādimajjhapariyosāneti evaṃ suttaṃ pavicetabbanti ādito majjhato pariyosānato ca evaṃ iminā pucchāvicayādinayena suttaṃ pavicitabbanti attho. Ettha ca pucchāvissajjanapubbāparānugītivicayā pāḷiyaṃ sarūpeneva dassitā. Assādādivicayo pana saccaniddhāraṇamukhena nayato dassito, so niddesavāre vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tabbicayeneva ca padavicayo siddhoti.
3. 理趣理趣分别的注释显示巴利原文
3. Yuttihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
18 其中,“什么是理趣的理趣(yuttihāro)”等,是对理趣理趣的辨析。这里,“什么连接?”(kiṃ yojayatī)是在问理趣理趣的范围。那么,什么是它的范围?那些以不如实的方式被执持的诸经义就是它的范围。因为它们应当通过理趣抉择,以特别如实的方式被连接起来。在其它的理趣中,这种理趣也同样是被需要的,但那只是如实叙述而已。然而,既然这种名为“理趣寻求”之事,离开四大教法(mahāpadesa)便无法成就,所以在分析理趣理趣时,为了先显示其特相,而说了“四大教法”(cattāro mahāpadesā)等。显示巴利原文
18.Tatthakatamo yuttihārotiādi yuttihāravibhaṅgo. Tattha kiṃ yojayatīti yuttihārassa visayaṃ pucchati. Ko panetassa visayo? Atathākārena gayhamānā suttatthā visayo, te hi tena sātisayaṃ yāthāvato yuttiniddhāraṇena yojetabbā. Itaresupi ayaṃ hāro icchito eva. Taṃ pana bhūtakathanamattaṃ hoti. Yasmā panāyaṃ yuttigavesanā nāma na mahāpadesena vinā, tasmā yuttihāraṃ vibhajanto tassa lakkhaṇaṃ tāva upadisituṃ ‘‘cattāro mahāpadesā’’tiādimāha.
这里,「大教法」(mahāpadesā),即“大依处”(mahāapadesā),是指以佛等尊者为依止而说的大因由(mahākāraṇāni)。或者,「大教法」可理解为“大处”(mahāokāsā),即说它们是法的伟大安立处。这里,词义如下:被依止的即是“依处”(apadeso);以佛为依处,故称“佛依处”(buddhāpadeso)。对其余几种,道理也一样。“我于世尊面前亲闻此法……”等,便是对于由某人所带来的教本,在判断其是法或非法时的依据。那么,什么是“教本”(tanti)?就是那样被带来的经的入经等。既然如此,为何是四种呢?这是由于所依止对象的区分。法的传承有两类:世尊与声闻。其中,声闻又依僧团、僧众、个人三种情形而有三类。因为“我从某某处领受此法”这样的所依止者有差别,所以有四种。因此说:“佛依处……乃至……单个上座依处”。那些「文句」(padabyañjanāni),即由某人所带来之经的句与文,也就是义理之句和文句。或者,是指注释者以注释方式所引用的文句。「应被置于经中显示巴利原文
Tattha mahāpadesāti mahāapadesā, buddhādayo mahante apadisitvā vuttāni mahākāraṇānīti attho. Atha vā mahāpadesāti mahāokāsā, mahantāni dhammassa patiṭṭhānānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – apadissatīti apadeso, buddho apadeso etassāti buddhāpadeso. Esa nayo sesesupi. ‘‘Sammukhā metaṃ bhagavato suta’’ntiādinā kenaci ābhatassa ganthassa dhammoti vā adhammoti vā vinicchayane kāraṇaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Tassa tathā ābhatassa suttotaraṇādi eva. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ cattāroti? Apadisitappabhedato. Dhammassa hi dve sampadāyo bhagavā sāvakā ca. Tesu sāvakā saṅghagaṇapuggalavasena tividhā. ‘‘Evamamumhā mayāyaṃ dhammo paṭiggahito’’ti apadisitabbānaṃ bhedena cattāro. Tenāha – ‘‘buddhāpadeso…pe… ekattherāpadeso’’ti. Tāni padabyañjanānīti kenaci ābhatasuttassa padāni byañjanāni ca, atthapadāni ceva byañjanapadāni cāti attho. Saṃvaṇṇakena vā saṃvaṇṇanāvasena āhariyamānāni padabyañjanāni. Sutte otārayitabbānīti sutte anuppavesitabbāni. Sandassayitabbānīti saṃsandetabbāni. Upanikkhipitabbānīti pakkhipitabbāni.
为了显示经等,而说了「在何处」(katamasmiṃ)等语。在这里,由于世尊的言语,哪怕仅仅一个偈颂也不离真实,所以为了显示「经」(sutte)一词的含义,便说“在四圣谛中”(catūsu ariyasaccesu)。而在注释书(Aṭṭhakathā)中,说三藏即是经,这与《指导论》(netti)的说法是完全一致且相合的,应当如此看待。只要是为了无取般涅槃(anupādāparinibbāna),世尊的教导就必然宣说止息贪等烦恼;为了显示「律」(vinaye)一词的含义,所以说了“在调伏贪中”(rāgavinaye)等。因为这里所意指的「律」(vinayo),正是调伏贪等的因由。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Suttādīni dassetuṃ ‘‘katamasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmā bhagavato vacanaṃ ekagāthāmattampi saccavinimuttaṃ natthi, tasmā sutteti padassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūsu ariyasaccesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tīṇi piṭakāni suttanti vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā nettivacanena aññadatthu saṃsandati ceva sameti cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yāvadeva anupādāparinibbānatthā bhagavato desanā, sā ekantena rāgādikilesavūpasamaṃ vadatīti vinayetipadassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘rāgavinaye’’tiādimāha. Vinayoti hi kāraṇaṃ rāgādivūpasamanimittaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Yathāha –
瞿昙弥,若你确知:'这些法导向贪欲,而非离贪;导向系缚,而非离系;导向积聚,而非减损;导向多欲,而非少欲;导向不知足,而非知足;导向乐群聚,而非独处;导向懈怠,而非精进;导向难奉养,而非易养。'那么,瞿昙弥,你当毫无疑惑地断定:'此非正法,此非律,此非世尊之教。'反之,瞿昙弥,若你确知:'这些法导向离贪,而非贪欲;导向离系,而非系缚;导向减损,而非积聚;导向少欲,而非多欲;导向知足,而非不知足;导向独处,而非群聚;导向精进,而非懈怠;导向易养,而非难养。'那么,瞿昙弥,你当毫无疑惑地断定:'此是正法,此是律,此是世尊之教。'(《小品》406)显示巴利原文
‘‘Ye kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi, ime dhammā sarāgāya saṃvattanti no virāgāya, saññogāya saṃvattanti no visaññogāya, ācayāya saṃvattanti no apacayāya, mahicchatāya saṃvattanti no appicchatāya, asantuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti no santuṭṭhiyā, saṅgaṇikāya saṃvattanti no pavivekāya, kosajjāya saṃvattanti no vīriyārambhāya, dubbharatāya saṃvattanti no subharatāya, ekaṃsena gotami dhāreyyāsi ‘neso dhammo, neso vinayo, netaṃ satthusāsana’nti. Ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti no sarāgāya, visaññogāya saṃvattanti no saññogāya, apacayāya saṃvattanti no ācayāya, appicchatāya saṃvattanti no mahicchatāya, santuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti no asantuṭṭhiyā pavivekāya saṃvattanti no saṅgaṇikāya, vīriyārambhāya saṃvattanti no kosajjāya, subharatāya saṃvattanti no dubbharatāya, ekaṃsena gotami dhāreyyāsi ‘eso dhammo, eso vinayo, etaṃ satthusāsana’’’nti (cūḷava. 406).
为阐明“法性”(dhammatā)一词的意义,故说“于缘起中”。缘起即是被称为“住立性、此界、法住性、法决定性”者(《增支部》3.137)。“应安放于法性中”一语,经文中原本并无,此处为显了其义而说,当如此理解。于此,若能将流转与还灭、其方法以及障碍等的决定性阐示明白,即名为“入于经”;若能毫无保留地开示调伏贪等烦恼的方法,即名为“现于律”;同样,若能远离常见与断见,通过开示同一性等理趣,将自性法的缘与缘生关系清晰剖明,即称为不违“法性”。显示巴利原文
Dhammatāyantipadassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭiccasamuppāde’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭiccasamuppādo hi ṭhitāva sā dhātu dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatāti (a. ni. 3.137) vutto. ‘‘Dhammatāyaṃ upanikkhipitabbānī’’ti idaṃ pāḷiyaṃ natthi, atthadassanavasena pana idha vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca pavattiṃ nivattiṃ tadupāyañca bādhakādibhāve niyataṃ paridīpento sutte otarati nāma. Ekantena rāgādikilesavinayaṃ vadanto vinaye sandissati nāma. Tathā sassataṃ ucchedañca vajjetvā ekattanayādiparidīpanena sabhāvadhammānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvaṃ vibhāvento dhammataṃ na vilometi nāma.
再者,如此解说即不生起欲漏等烦恼——为显此义,故提出“若于四圣谛中……”等。或有问难:缘起顺次为流转,逆次为还灭,既已含摄于四圣谛中,何以此处别别提出?诚然如是。然而此处独举者,为借由显示诸法依缘而生灭,以彰显无常相、无力相、无主宰相;既显其有生,便有灭,由此生灭而显无常性,由被生灭所迫而显苦性与无我性。如是便将结合此三相、摧破一切恶见与邪思、为他方所无的“教法成就”揭示出来。显示巴利原文
Evaṃvidho ca kāmāsavādikaṃ āsavaṃ na uppādetīti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yadi catūsu ariyasaccesū’’tiādimāha. Nanu ca anulomato paṭiccasamuppādo pavatti, paṭilomato nivattīti so cattāri ariyasaccāni anupaviṭṭho kasmā idha visuṃ gahitoti? Saccametaṃ. Idha pana visuṃ gahaṇaṃ dhammānaṃ paccayāyattavuttidassanena aniccapaccayalakkhaṇaṃ asamatthapaccayalakkhaṇaṃ nirīhapaccayalakkhaṇañca vibhāvetvā tesaṃ udayavantatā tato eva vayavantatā tadubhayena aniccatā udayabbayapaṭipīḷanena dukkhatā anattatāti tilakkhaṇasamāyogaparidīpanī sabbadiṭṭhigatakumatividdhaṃsanī anaññasādhāraṇā sāsanasampatti pakāsitā hotīti dassanatthaṃ.
于此,当知有四种:经、随顺经、师说、自意。其中,经是指三次结集所收录的三藏。随顺经是指《大教法》,即所谓“随顺的开许”。师说是指注释书。自意是指通过把握理趣,以随觉而生的己智。在这四者中,经不可违背;若违背经,即等于违背世尊。随顺的开许,只应采纳与经相符者,余皆不取。师说也只应采纳与经相符者,余皆不取。同样,自意亦复如是,然彼于诸者中最弱。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca suttaṃ suttānulomaṃ ācariyavādo attanomatīti idaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ – tattha suttaṃ nāma tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhāni tīṇi piṭakāni. Suttānulomaṃ nāma mahāpadesā, yaṃ ‘‘anulomakappiya’’nti vuccati. Ācariyavādo nāma aṭṭhakathā. Attanomati nāma nayaggāhena anubuddhiyā attano paṭibhānaṃ. Tattha suttaṃ appaṭibāhiyaṃ, taṃ paṭibāhantena satthāva paṭibāhito hoti. Anulomakappiyaṃ pana suttena samentameva gahetabbaṃ, na itaraṃ. Ācariyavādopi suttena samento eva gahetabbo, na itaro. Tathā attanomati, sā pana sabbadubbalāti.
现在,为说明此处援引四大教法的目的,故说“以四大教法……”等语。其中,“yaṃ yaṃ”意指任何所生之义理与法;“yujjati”意谓与前述四大教法相符;“yena yena”谓以任何理由;“yathā yathā”谓以任何方式。“taṃ taṃ gahetabbaṃ”是指:在注释所释之经时,依所引用的那些理由、关联及方式,从经中提取出来,以注释的形式而应被采纳。由此显示:当以不违四大教法之理路,从经中善定义理后,方行理趣之运用。显示巴利原文
Idāni yadatthaṃ idha cattāro mahāpadesā ābhatā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūhi mahāpadesehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ yanti yaṃ yaṃ atthajātañca dhammajātañca. Yujjatīti yathāvuttehi catūhi mahāpadesehi yujjati. Yena yenāti yena yena kāraṇena. Yathā yathāti yena yena pakārena. Taṃ taṃ gahetabbanti saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte ābhatena kāraṇena pasaṅgena pakārena ca suttato uddharitvā saṃvaṇṇanāvasena gahetabbanti attho. Tena catumahāpadesāviruddhāya yuttiyā suttato atthe niddhāretvā yuttihārayojanā kātabbāti dasseti.
19 现在,为显示彼理路的确定,故开示“被问问题者……”等。其中,“kati padāni”指有多少语句。为显示“pariyogāhitabbaṃ”的词义,而说“vicetabbaṃ”(应审察)。凡有多少语句表达了所预期的义理,他们语句皆因欲知彼一义理,故称为“一个问题”。于一偈颂中,纵使所有语句皆说一义,乃至仅一语句说一义,亦唯是一个问题。为显此义,而说“如果所有……”等。“taṃ”指该问题。“aññātabbaṃ”指应被了知。“什么是这些法?”等,是显示了知的方便。其中,“法”指教法,“nānatthā”指不同的义理。显示巴利原文
19. Idāni taṃ yuttiniddhāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pañhaṃ pucchitenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kati padānīti kittakāni padāni. Pariyogāhitabbanti padassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vicetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Yattakāni padāni yathādhippetaṃ atthaṃ abhivadanti, tattakāni padāni tadatthassekassa ñātuṃ icchitattā ‘‘eko pañho’’ti vuccati, tāni pana ekagāthāyaṃ yadi vā sabbāni padāni yāva yadi vā ekaṃ padaṃ ekaṃ atthaṃ abhivadati, ekoyeva so pañhoti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yadi sabbānī’’tiādinā. Tanti taṃ pañhaṃ. Aññātabbanti ājānitabbaṃ. Kiṃ ime dhammātiādi ājānanākāradassanaṃ. Tattha dhammāti pariyattidhammā. Nānatthāti nānā atthā.
在提问偈中,其义为:“kenassubbhāhato loko”指此有情世间,如同盗贼被刽子手所击杀,是被什么所击打、杀害?“kenassu parivārito”指世间如同被蔓藤攀附的树,是被什么所覆盖?“kena sallena otiṇṇo”指如同被涂毒之箭深陷体内,是被什么箭所穿透?“kissa dhūpāyito”指由于什么原因,世间被焚烧、热恼?“sadā”一词应通用于一切处。“te”指那四句,为呼应“问题”一词的词性,故以阳性词形表示。由“vissajjetī”可知:从解答中显示有三个问题。显示巴利原文
Pucchāgāthāyaṃ ayaṃ padattho – kenassubbhāhato lokoti ayaṃ sattaloko coro viya coraghātakena kena abhihato vadhīyatīti attho. Kenassu parivāritoti māluvalatāya viya nissitarukkho kena loko ajjhotthaṭo. Kena sallena otiṇṇoti kena visapītakhurappena viya sarīrabbhantaranimuggena sallena anupaviṭṭho. Kissa dhūpāyitoti kissa kena kāraṇena dhūpāyito santāpito loko. Sadāti padaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Teti cattāri padāni. Pañhasaddāpekkhāya pulliṅganiddeso. ‘‘Vissajjetī’’ti etena vissajjanato tayo pañhāti ñāyatīti dasseti.
20 在此,解答偈的第二句所说之“老”与第一句所说之“死”,这两者是有为五蕴的“有为相”,即以这些为特征,故称“有为相”。世尊曾这样说:“诸比丘,有此三种有为的有为相。哪三种?生被了知,灭被了知,住时之异变被了知。”(《增支部》3.47;《论事》214)因此说:“老即是住时之异变,死即是灭。”此中,“住时之异变”显示:此处所说老是指蕴相续的前后差异,而非刹那住。“死即是灭”则显示世间所说的世俗死,如“帝思死了,弗思死了”,而非刹那死或断灭死。显示巴利原文
20.Tatthāti vissajjanagāthāyaṃ dutiyapāde vuttā jarā ca paṭhamapāde vuttaṃ maraṇañcāti imāni dve saṅkhatassa pañcakkhandhassa ‘‘saṅkhato’’ti lakkhīyati etehīti saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, saṅkhatassa saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni. Katamāni tīṇi? Uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.47; kathā. 214). Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘jarāyaṃ ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ, maraṇaṃ vayo’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘ṭhitassa aññathatta’’nti etena khandhappabandhassa pubbāparaviseso idha jarā, na khaṇaṭṭhitīti dasseti. ‘‘Maraṇaṃ vayo’’ti iminā ca ‘‘tisso mato, phusso mato’’ti evaṃ loke vuttaṃ sammutimaraṇaṃ dasseti, na khaṇikamaraṇaṃ, samucchedamaraṇaṃ vā.
现在,为以理路显示“那三个问题”所说的意义,而说“由老……”等。在此,因为大多见到老人才死亡,对于那些不接受老与死有别的人,为显示其差异,而说“因为腹中胎儿也会死”。这是说:由于见到了没有所预期的老伴随的死亡,故老是一回事,死是另一回事。因此他说:“他们也不是老的”。此外,由于见到单纯的死亡,故老与死有别,如同诸天那样。为显示此义,而说“而且有诸天的……”等。再者,凭借无上的超人法和治疗,或可对治老,但对死却不能。因此,也应接受老与死在义理上的差异。为显示此点,而说“可能……”等。其中,“sakkate”即可能,意思是能够。“paṭikamma”即对治。难道对死也不可通过于神足修习获得自在而进行对治吗?为回应此诘难,而说:“除非具神通者的神通领域”。关于这一点,世尊曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘te tayo pañhā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ yuttivasena dassetuṃ ‘‘jarāya cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yebhuyyena jiṇṇassa maraṇadassanato jarāmaraṇānaṃ nānattaṃ asampaṭicchamānaṃ pati tesaṃ nānattadassanatthaṃ ‘‘gabbhagatāpi hi mīyantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathādhippetajarāvirahitassa maraṇassa dassanato aññā jarā aññaṃ maraṇanti. Tenevāha – ‘‘na ca te jiṇṇā bhavantī’’ti. Kiñca bhiyyo? Kevalassa maraṇassa diṭṭhattā aññāva jarā aññaṃ maraṇaṃ, yathā taṃ devānanti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘atthi ca devāna’’ntiādinā. Anuttarimanussadhammena ca tikicchanena sakkā jarāya paṭikāraṃ kātuṃ, na tathā maraṇassāti evampi jarāmaraṇānaṃ atthato nānattaṃ sampaṭicchitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘sakkatevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sakkateti sakyate, sakkāti attho. Paṭikammanti paṭikaraṇaṃ. Nanu ca maraṇassāpi paṭikāraṃ kātuṃ sakkā iddhipādabhāvanāya vasibhāve satīti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha – ‘‘aññatreva iddhimantānaṃ iddhivisayā’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
阿难,若有人修习、多修习四神足,将其作为车乘、作为基础,反复修习、培养,妥善精勤,他若愿意,便能住满一劫或一劫之余。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yassa kassaci, ānanda, cattāro iddhipādā bhāvitā bahulīkatā yānīkatā vatthukatā anuṭṭhitā paricitā susamāraddhā, so ākaṅkhamāno kappaṃ vā tiṭṭheyya kappāvasesaṃ vā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.166, 182; saṃ. ni. 5.822; kathā. 623; udā. 51).
那么,什么是“劫”?什么是“劫余”?“劫”是指寿量之劫:在任何时期,将当时人类的寿量完全活满,即称为住劫。而据经文“少一些或更多”(《长部》2.7;《增支部》7.74)所说,住世超过百岁等,则称为住劫余。若是这样,为何那些具足神通、心得自在的漏尽者,为了利益世间,却不如此住世呢?因为他们已遍知那个名为“蕴”的苦之重担,于此毫无牵挂;那些最上之人,已止息了一切关切与努力。这正是“法将军”所说——显示巴利原文
Ko panettha kappo, ko vā kappāvasesoti? Kappoti āyukappo, yasmiṃ tasmiñhi kāle yaṃ manussānaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ, taṃ paripuṇṇaṃ karonto kappaṃ tiṭṭhati nāma. ‘‘Appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.7; a. ni. 7.74) vuttaṃ pana vassasatādito atirekaṃ tiṭṭhanto kappāvasesaṃ tiṭṭhati nāma. Yadi evaṃ kasmā iddhimanto cetovasippattā khīṇāsavā lokahitatthaṃ tathā na tiṭṭhantīti? Khandhasaṅkhātassa dukkhabhārassa pariññātattā anussukkatāya ca. Paṭippassaddhasabbussukkā hi te uttamapurisāti. Vuttañhetaṃ dhammasenāpatinā –
我等待时间,就如雇工等待报酬。”(《长老偈》654;《弥兰陀问经》2.2.4)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nābhinandāmi maraṇaṃ, nābhikaṅkhāmi jīvitaṃ; Kālañca paṭikaṅkhāmi, vetanaṃ bhatako yathā’’ti. (theragā. 654; mi. pa. 2.2.4);
正如老死与渴爱在意义上彼此不同,通过这两者也显示了老死与渴爱的不同,如此,“三个问题”这说法便得以成立。为了说明这一点,他说了“然而”等以下的话。显示巴利原文
Yathā jarāmaraṇānaṃ aññamaññaṃ atthato nānattaṃ, evaṃ tehi taṇhāya ca nānatte dassite ‘‘tayo pañhā’’ti idaṃ sijjhatīti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādimāha.
其中,因为即使没有渴爱,漏尽者的相续中也存在老死,所以为了说明“老死是一事,渴爱是另一事”这个道理,而说“可以看到离贪者也在衰老、死亡”。难道渴爱不也具有衰老、坏灭的性质吗?的确如此,但这里所指的老死并非那个,这个意思已经说过了。为显示如果老死与渴爱没有差别便会有过失,而说了“如果……”等。意思是:若真是那样,则青春年华者也应无有渴爱,这并不合理。如果老死与渴爱没有差别,那么老死本身也将成为苦的集起——这便是其中的意涵。然而事实并非如此,老死并非苦的集起,渴爱才是苦的集起,因此应当了知它们在意义上有所不同——这是他的意旨。如果老死与渴爱没有差别,那么如同渴爱是道所断,老死也应成为道所断;反之,如同老死并非道所断,那么渴爱也会变成非道所断——这一推论方法亦已显示,应当了解。依此正理:即通过如上所说的这些理路。以相互不同的方式:意思是,依种种不同的成因与理趣来成立,如果在意义上确有不同的地方,那么即使在文句上有相同之处,也应当推求其差别。显示巴利原文
Tattha yasmā taṇhāya abhāvepi sati jarāmaraṇaṃ labbhati khīṇāsavasantāne, tasmā aññaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ aññā taṇhāti imamatthamāha ‘‘dissanti vītarāgā jīrantāpi mīyantāpī’’ti. Nanu ca taṇhāpi jīraṇabhijjanasabhāvāti? Saccaṃ, na idaṃ jarāmaraṇaṃ idhādhippetanti vuttovāyamattho. ‘‘Yadi cā’’tiādinā jarāmaraṇato taṇhāya anaññatte dosaṃ dasseti. Yobbanaṭṭhāpi vigatataṇhā siyuṃ, na idaṃ yuttanti adhippāyo. Jarāmaraṇampi siyā dukkhassa samudayo taṇhāya anaññatte satīti adhippāyo. Na ca siyā taṇhā dukkhassa samudayo jarāmaraṇato anaññatte satīti bhāvo. Na hi jarāmaraṇaṃ dukkhassa samudayo, taṇhā dukkhassa samudayo, tasmā veditabbaṃ etesamatthato nānattanti adhippāyo. Yathā ca taṇhā maggavajjhā, evaṃ jarāmaraṇampi siyā maggavajjhaṃ taṇhāya anaññatte sati. Yathā ca jarāmaraṇaṃ na maggavajjhaṃ, tathā taṇhāpi siyāti ayampi nayo vutto evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imāya yuttiyāti imāya yathāvuttāya upapattiyā. Aññamaññehīti aññāhi aññāhi kāraṇūpapattīhi atthato ce aññattaṃ, tadaññampi byañjanato gavesitabbanti attho.
为了阐明这些法在意义上实为同一,他以“这是不合理的”等语句加以开演。当渴爱的希求不得满足时,便说为“所求不得”。由此说明欲求与渴爱在意义上乃是同一。因此,欲求与渴爱在意义上不可能是别异的,这才合理。如同这一说法能够成立,在欲求不得满足这种“不如意”的情形中,于愤怒所起的种种事由中,忿与恨生起,此说亦能成立;然而在老与死不得满足的这种“不如意”的情形中,则不会如此。由此论证老死与渴爱在意义上另有差别。为显示此理,他说了“以此正理”等语句。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ dhammānaṃ atthato ekattanti imamevatthaṃ ‘‘na hi yujjatī’’tiādinā vivarati. Taṇhāya adhippāye aparipūramāneti icchitālābhamāha. Tena icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato ekattaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti. Etena na hi yujjati icchāya ca taṇhāya ca atthato aññattanti. Yathā idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthanaṃ hoti, evaṃ icchāvipariyāye āghātavatthūsu kodho ca upanāho ca uppajjatīti idampi samatthanaṃ hoti, na tathā jarāmaraṇavipariyāyeti jarāmaraṇataṇhānaṃ atthato aññattampi samatthitaṃ hotīti etamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘imāya yuttiyā’’tiādinā.
如果说欲求与渴爱在意义上没有差别,那么世尊为何在此偈颂中分作两种来说呢?对此,他作了回答:“然而那……”等。“那”(yaṃ)是对行为的指称。所谓“所诠说的言说”,即此所言说者,应结合外部色等所缘,或以作所缘的方式来理解。所谓“以二法”,是指以两种自性。哪两种自性呢?对于尚未获得的所缘,以寻求的方式表现为欲求;对于已经获得,或为令未获得者显现,以渴望品尝的方式表现为渴爱,这便是它们的区别。虽然如此,但为显示一切渴爱在吞没色等所缘、最终确定之后,皆借由执取而为同一性质,故说:“因为一切渴爱皆以执取为相,具有同一相”。现在以譬喻说明此义,接着说“一切火……”等,这便很容易理解。显示巴利原文
Yadi icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato anaññattaṃ, atha kasmā bhagavatā imissā gāthāya dvidhā vuttāti? Tattha parihāramāha ‘‘yaṃ panida’’ntiādinā. Tattha yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ. Abhilapitanti vuttaṃ yaṃ idaṃ abhilapanaṃ , idaṃ bāhirānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ ārammaṇavasena, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vā yojetabbaṃ. Dvīhi dhammehīti dvīhi pakatīhi. Kā pana tā pakatiyoti? Appattassa visayassa esanavasena icchā, pattassa appattassa vā pātukāmatāvasena taṇhā, ayametāsaṃ viseso. Yadipi evaṃ, tathāpi sabbā taṇhā rūpādivisayaṃ gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahaṇena ekasabhāvā evāti dassento ‘‘sabbā hi taṇhā ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇā’’ti āha. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya pakāsento ‘‘sabbo aggī’’tiādimāha, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
然而在此还欲显示,渴爱不仅依于所缘上的转起差别而仅有这两种名称,亦可以众多异门加以解说,故接着说:“叫作欲求(icchā)”等。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana na kevalaṃ taṇhā ārammaṇe pavattivisesena dvīhi eva nāmehi vuttā, atha kho anekehipi pariyāyehīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘icchāitipī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
其中:以此而渴求诸所缘,故名“欲”(icchā)。以渴望、渴求之义,故名“渴爱”(taṇhā)。因其产生逼迫且难以拔除,犹如浸毒之箭,故名“箭”(sallaṃ)。以烧灼、焦热之义,故名“烟”(dhūpāyanā)。以牵引、冲卷之义,犹如疾流,故名“急流”(saritā);或以湿润之义,故名“湿润”(saritā);即如所说:“有情之湿润、润滑、喜悦便会出现”(《法句经》341)。此中义即湿润、润滑。扩散而住,故名“扩散”(visattikā);散布而住,故名“散布”(visattikā);不平等,故名“不平等”(visattikā);极为广博,故名“广大”(visattikā);如毒作用,故名“毒害”(visattikā);诳惑欺人,故名“欺骗”(visattikā);带来伤害与毁灭,故名“带来伤害”(visattikā);有邪恶之根源,故名“邪恶根本”(visattikā);有邪恶之果报,故名“邪恶果报”(visattikā)。显示巴利原文
Tattha icchanti tāya ārammaṇānīti icchā. Taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā. Pīḷājananato duruddhāraṇato ca visapītaṃ sallaṃ viyāti sallaṃ. Santāpanaṭṭhena dhūpāyanā. Ākaḍḍhanaṭṭhena sīghasotā saritā viyāti saritā, allaṭṭhena vā saritā, ‘‘saritāni sinehitāni ca, somanassāni bhavanti jantuno’’ti (dha. pa. 341) hi vuttaṃ. Allāni ceva siniddhāni cāti ayamettha attho. Visattikāti visatāti visattikā. Visaṭāti visattikā. Visamāti visattikā. Visālāti visattikā. Visakkatīti visattikā. Visaṃvādikāti visattikā . Visaṃharatīti visattikā. Visamūlāti visattikā. Visaphalāti visattikā. Visaparibhogāti visattikā. Visatā vā pana sā taṇhā rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme kule gaṇe visatā vitthatāti visattikā.
以润泽之因,故名“润泽”(sineho)。在种种投生处产生疲劳,故名“疲劳”(kilamatho)。以缠绕之义,犹如蔓藤,故名“蔓藤”(latā);正如所说:“蔓藤生起便停著于彼”(《法句经》340)。以“我所”之执取为因,故名“执取”(maññanā)。纵相隔遥远亦能牵引束缚,故名“束缚”(bandho)。以希求之义,故名“希望”(āsā)。由渴望品尝所缘之味,故名“渴”(pipāsā)。以欢喜、热衷之义,故名“欢喜”(abhinandanā)。如是(Itīti),这些渴爱虽依所缘转起之差别而被赋予种种不同名称,然一切渴爱皆以“执取”为一相。此为对上述意义之总结。显示巴利原文
Sinehanavasena sineho. Nānāgatīsu kilamathuppādanena kilamatho. Paliveṭhanaṭṭhena latā viyāti latā. ‘‘Latā uppajja tiṭṭhatī’’ti (dha. pa. 340) hi vuttaṃ. Mamanti maññanavasena maññanā. Dūragatampi ākaḍḍhitvā bandhanaṭṭhena bandho. Āsīsanaṭṭhena āsā. Ārammaṇarasaṃ pātukāmatāvasena pipāsā. Abhinandanaṭṭhena abhinandanā. Itīti evaṃ ārammaṇe pavattivisesena anekehi nāmehi gayhamānāpi sabbā taṇhā ajjhosānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇāti yathāvuttamatthaṃ nigameti.
复次,为以广说阐明渴爱被以种种名号所指之况,故说“如同……”等语。此处“同义词”,即同义词摄之分别。关于“希望与冀求……”之偈(《导论》Netti 37;《藏论》Peṭako 11),其义将于彼处再作解释。于“未离染者”等语中:以染着之义,故名“染着”(rāgo);以欲求之义,故名“欲”(chando);以爱乐之义,故名“爱”(pemaṃ);以燃烧之义,故名“燃烧”(paridāho)——这些所说,即是“渴爱”本身。正因如此,才说:“这些皆是渴爱之同义词”。如是则能通顺(Evaṃ yujjati),其义为:因“欲求”与“渴爱”于意义上并无差别,故前文所说“三问”得以成立;即是说,此说于理上通顺、能够吻合,此为其意。显示巴利原文
Puna taṇhāya anekehi nāmehi gahitabhāvameva ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādinā upacayena dasseti. Tattha vevacaneti vevacanahāravibhaṅge. ‘‘Āsā ca pihā’’ti gāthāya (netti. 37; peṭako. 11) atthaṃ tattheva vaṇṇayissāma. Avigatarāgassātiādīsu rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, chandanaṭṭhena chando, piyāyanaṭṭhena pemaṃ, paridahanaṭṭhena paridāhoti taṇhāva vuttā. Tenevāha – ‘‘taṇhāyetaṃ vevacana’’nti. Evaṃ yujjatīti evaṃ icchātaṇhānaṃ atthato anaññattā ‘‘tayo pañhā’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ yujjati yuttiyā saṅgacchatīti attho.
21 这样,说明了在「世间被谁所扰?」(《相应部》1.66)这一偈颂中,「三问」之说何以成立之后,现在为了进一步从其他角度探求其合理性,便接着说:「一切苦的现行……」等。其中,「苦的现行」(dukkhūpacāro)指苦的转起。所谓「以欲爱、行为根本」(kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlako),意为以欲爱为缘、以行为因,此说是可以成立的。「厌离的现行」(nibbidūpacāro),指厌离的转起,即因诸欲变易而生起的不欣喜,以及由智慧所生的智厌离。所谓「以欲爱资具为根本」(kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlako),是指以那些作为欲爱资具的所缘之欲为原因。其中,被称为不欣喜的那种厌离,确实以欲爱资具为根本,但智厌离则非如此。因此,若说「一切厌离的现行都以欲爱资具为根本」,便不成立。通过这一合理性推断来展示方法。也就是说:正如对「三问」这一说法已阐明其合理性,对「苦」显示巴利原文
21. Evaṃ ‘‘kenassubbhāhato loko’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.66) gāthāya ‘‘tayo pañhā’’ti pañhattayabhāve yuttiṃ dassetvā idāni aññehi pakārehi yuttigavesanaṃ dassento ‘‘sabbo dukkhūpacāro’’tiādimāha. Tattha dukkhūpacāroti dukkhappavatti. Kāmataṇhāsaṅkhāramūlakoti kāmataṇhāpaccayasaṅkhārahetukoti yujjatīti adhippāyo. Nibbidūpacāroti nibbidāpavatti kāmānaṃ vipariṇāmaññathābhāvā uppajjamānā anabhirati ñāṇanibbidā ca. Kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti kāmataṇhāya parikkhārabhūtavatthukāmahetuko. Tattha anabhiratisaṅkhātā nibbidā kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlikā, na ñāṇanibbidāti sabbo nibbidūpacāro kāmataṇhāparikkhāramūlakoti na pana yujjatīti vuttaṃ. Imāya yuttiyāti nayaṃ dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā pañhattayabhāve yutti vuttā, yathā ca dukkhūpacāranibbidūpacāresu, evaṃ imāya yuttiyā iminā yogena nayena aññamaññehi kāraṇehi taṃtaṃpāḷippadese anurūpehi aññathā aññehi hetūhi yutti gavesitabbāti.
现在,为了将这一理趣的示范加以归纳,再展开详细分别,便开始了「就像世尊……」这一段。此处简略的含义是:对于贪行者、嗔行者、痴行者,依次为他们开示不净、慈心等为所缘的业处,因能调伏贪等,故为适合——这就是教法的合理性所在。在如此确定的前提下,如果对一位贪行者开示慈心解脱,那么这一开示便不成立,因为不适合。同样地,对于「乐行道」等也是如此。这里可能有人会问:所谓「乐行道」等,难道不是从实际修行的角度说的,而非从教说的角度吗?这话没错。但此处所说的贪行者,是指烦恼极其猛利的贪行者。他需要依苦行道修行方能成就。对于一个依苦行道修行方能成就的人,较深重的不净教法才是适合的;既然较深重的不净教法才适合他,就不能像对待烦恼轻薄者那样,为他开示较浅的教法。为了说明此意,便说:「如果去说乐行道……那么,这样的教说是不成立的。」依此道理,后面的文句也应根据具体情况来理解其义。在这里,是通过排除不合理的一显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ nayadassanaṃ saṃkhittanti vitthārato vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hi bhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – rāgadosamohacaritānaṃ yathākkamaṃ asubhamettāpaccayākārakathā rāgādivinayanato sappāyāti ayaṃ sāsanayutti. Evamavaṭṭhite yadi rāgacaritassa mettācetovimuttiṃ deseyya, sā desanā na yujjati asappāyabhāvato. Tathā sukhāpaṭipadādayoti. Nanu ca sukhāpaṭipadādayo paṭipattiyā sambhavanti, na desanāyāti? Saccametaṃ, idha pana rāgacaritoti tibbakileso rāgacaritoti adhippeto. Tassa dukkhāya paṭipadāya bhāvanā samijjhati. Yassa ca dukkhāya paṭipadāya bhāvanā samijjhati, tassa garutarā asubhadesanā sappāyā, yassa garutarā asubhadesanā sappāyā, na tassa mandakilesassa viya lahukatarāti imamatthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘sukhaṃ vā paṭipadaṃ…pe… deseyya na yujjati desanā’’ti. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi yathāsambhavaṃ attho vattabbo. Ettha ca ayuttaparihārena yuttisamadhigamoti yuttivicāraṇāya ayuttipi gavesitabbāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘yadi hi…pe… na yujjati desanā’’ti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ yaṃ kiñcītiādi yuttihārayojanāya nayadassanameva.
这里,「这样」,即以此方法。「凡任何」,指除上述之外的其他任何情况。「随顺断除」(anulomappahānaṃ),意思是契合于断除、堪能断除。对于经典中尚未完全阐述的词语意义,作逐句审察,这种审察名为「审查摄」。在对审查摄进行注释时,对于已决择的意义,再去探寻其合理性是容易做到的,故这样说:「这一切,都要先用审查摄审察清楚,再用合理性摄加以联结。」所谓「凡是智慧的境地有多广」,意思是:正在注释的阿阇梨,其智慧与辩才所及范围有多广,他运用合理性摄所进行的审察便有多广,这是此句含义。何以故?因为正法理趣无量、在一切方面都完备圆满、经得起反复推敲,且以种种不同方式说法。显示巴利原文
Tattha evanti iminā nayena. Yaṃ kiñcīti aññampi yaṃ kiñci. Anulomappahānanti pahānassa anurūpaṃ, pahānasamatthanti attho. Sutte anavasesānaṃ padatthānaṃ anupadavicāraṇā vicayo hāro, vicayahārasaṃvaṇṇanāya niddhāritesu atthesu yuttigavesanaṃ sukaranti āha – ‘‘sabbaṃ taṃ vicayena hārena vicinitvā yuttihārena yojetabba’’nti. Yāvatikā ñāṇassa bhūmīti saṃvaṇṇentassa ācariyassa yaṃ ñāṇaṃ yaṃ paṭibhānaṃ, tassa yattako visayo, tattako yuttihāravicāroti attho. Taṃ kissa hetu? Anantanayo samantabhaddako vimaddakkhamo vicittadesano ca saddhammoti.
如此,仅为显示理趣而说明了理趣的联结。现在,为了以梵住、果等至、九次第等至及自在力来分别显示,于是开演“慈住者之念……”等文。其中,“慈住者”指获得慈心住的人。“之念”意为具念者,也就是处于那种状态的人。“嗔恨”指内心的愤怒。“将遍取心而住”,意指将会压制、掌控心。然而,由于善法与不善法不会无前无后地生起,为了说明这是从等至出定后的阶段,故说“将住”。所谓“说法不成立”,是因为慈是嗔恨的对治,因此那种说法不合理,这是其含义。所谓“说法才成立”,意思是依据前面所说的理由,这种说法才合理。其余各段,也应以同样的方法来理解其含义。我们仅对不明显之处加以解说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nayadassanavaseneva yuttihārayojanā dassitāti taṃ brahmavihāraphalasamāpattinavānupubbasamāpattivasibhāvehi vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘mettāvihārissa sato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha mettāvihārissāti mettāvihāralābhino. Satoti samānassa, tathābhūtassāti attho. Byāpādoti padoso. Cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhassatīti cittaṃ abhibhavissati. Yasmā pana kusalākusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ pavatti nāma natthi, tasmā samāpattito vuṭṭhānassa aparabhāgeti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ṭhassatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na yujjati desanāti byāpādapaṭipakkhattā mettāya tādisī kathā na yuttāti attho. Byāpādo pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti yujjati desanāti yathāvuttakāraṇato eva ayaṃ kathā yuttāti. Sesavāresupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Anuttānaṃ eva vaṇṇayissāma.
“无相住者”,指以无常随观为门,证得果等至而安住的人。“追随相的人”,指追随诸行相的人。“由彼彼”,意思是对于常等颠倒中已被断除的,由那已被断除的相。“‘我是’已消失”,意为在五取蕴中,由见与慢而产生的“我是”这种妄执,已经消失。为阐明此义,而说“我不再看到‘我是这个’”。“疑与犹豫之箭”,由于悔恨也有“如何、如何”的心理活动存在,因此用“疑”这个词来作区分。所谓“说法不成立”,意思是由于疑处于已被断除的状态,所以这种说法不合理。显示巴利原文
Animittavihārissāti aniccānupassanāmukhena paṭiladdhaphalasamāpattivihārassa. Nimittānusārīti saṅkhāranimittānusārī. Tena tenevāti niccādīsu yaṃ yaṃ pahīnaṃ, tena teneva nimittena. Asmīti vigatanti pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu diṭṭhimānavasena yaṃ asmīti maññitaṃ, taṃ vigataṃ. Tamevatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘ayamahamasmīti na samanupassāmī’’ti. Vicikicchākathaṃkathāsallanti vinayakukkuccassāpi kathaṃ kathanti pavattisabbhāvato vicikicchāpadena visesitaṃ. Na yujjati desanāti vicikicchāya pahānekaṭṭhabhāvato na yuttāyaṃ kathā.
“入初禅者”,指证得初禅的人。“欲贪、嗔恨能导致进步”,这种说法不成立。因为当五盖未被断除时,连初禅的近行定也无法成就,更何况是禅那本身。因此,说欲贪、嗔恨能导致第二禅的进步,这种说法是不合理的。然而,对于已证得的初禅,若欲贪与嗔恨全面现行,则会导致退步。由此,“说法才成立”,也就是合理的说法。应当将这一方法应用于一切处。所谓“有寻伺相伴的想与作意”,是指包括其近行定在内的第二禅法。在此,“相伴”的意思是作为所缘。“导致退步”,指从初禅退失。“导致进步”,指朝向第二禅。依此方法,各处所说的“退步”与“进步”之法,都应如此理解。“有寻与伺相伴的”,指初禅法,或即欲界法。“有舍与乐相伴的”,指包括其近行定在内的第三禅法,因为这里的“舍”是指中舍。“有喜与乐相伴的”,指包括其近行定在内的第二禅法。“有舍、念与清净相伴的”,指第四禅法。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannassāti paṭhamajjhānasamaṅgino. Kāmarāgabyāpādā visesāya saṃvattantīti na yujjatīti yasmā nīvaraṇesu appahīnesu paṭhamajjhānassa upacārampi na sampajjati, pageva jhānaṃ, tasmā kāmarāgabyāpādā visesāya dutiyajjhānāya saṃvattantīti na yuttāyaṃ kathā. Yathāladdhassa pana paṭhamajjhānassa kāmarāgabyāpādā pariyuṭṭhānappattā hānāya saṃvattantīti yujjati desanā yuttā kathāti, evaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Avitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā nāma saha upacārena dutiyajjhānadhammā, ārammaṇakaraṇattho hettha sahagata-saddo. Hānāyāti paṭhamajjhānato parihānāya. Visesāyāti dutiyajjhānāya. Iminā nayena tattha tattha hānanti, visesoti ca vuttadhammā veditabbā. Vitakkavicārasahagatāti paṭhamajjhānadhammā, kāmāvacaradhammā eva vā. Upekkhāsukhasahagatāti upacārena saddhiṃ dutiyajjhānadhammā, tatramajjhattupekkhā hi idha upekkhāti adhippetā. Pītisukhasahagatāti saha upacārena tatiyajjhānadhammā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhisahagatāti catutthajjhānadhammā.
“想现行”,是指任何执行敏锐想作用的心,其生起时,也有人称之为“无所有处法”。“有想受灭相伴的”,是指为了将“进入并安住于想受灭定”而以其遍作为基础所生起的法。然而,因为这些法,只有在安住于非想非非想处等至时,才有可能进入并安住于想受灭定,从那等至退失的人是无法做到的,所以说这些法“会导致非想非非想处等至的退步”是不合理的,但说它们“会导致进步”则是合理的。因此,在提到时,即有“导致退步……的说法。”“熟习适业”,是指以堪能的状态所熟习,即对上述各种等至,以自在的状态极为熟悉。因此说“能够引导”。其余的一切都很清楚。显示巴利原文
Saññūpacārāti paṭusaññākiccaṃ karontā eva ye keci cittuppādā, ‘‘ākiñcaññāyatanadhammā’’tipi vadanti. Saññāvedayitanirodhasahagatāti ‘‘saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharissāmī’’ti tassa parikammavasena pavattadhammā. Te pana yasmā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyaṃ ṭhiteneva sakkā saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ, na tato parihīnena, tasmā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā hānāya saṃvattantīti na yuttā kathā. Visesāya saṃvattantīti pana yuttā kathāti āha – ‘‘hānāya…pe… desanā’’ti. Kallatāparicitanti samatthabhāvena paricitaṃ, yathāvuttasamāpattīsu vasibhāvena paricitanti attho. Tenevāha – ‘‘abhinīhāraṃ khamatī’’ti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ uttānameva.
而且在这里,透过‘不厌恶想’这个门径,欲贪就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘厌恶想’的相似状态,嗔恚就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘定’这个门径,昏沉睡眠就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘策励精进’这个门径,掉举就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘乐学’这个门径,恶作就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘审察两边’这个门径,疑就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘对可意与不可意平等旁观’这个门径,痴就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘自知’这个门径,于自身不被轻视的情况下,慢就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘审察’这个门径,即执取似因的非因,邪见就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘离染’的相似状态,对众生无悲悯就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘受用所允许的’的相似状态,沉溺欲乐就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘活命清净’的相似状态,不分享的习性就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘分享习性’的相似状态,邪命就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘不交际而住’的相似状态,不摄受的习性就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘摄受习性’的相似状态,不随顺的交际就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘说真实语’的相似状态,离间语就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘不说离间语’的相似状态,不愿他人得利就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘说可爱语’的相似状态,谄媚就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘说话有节制’的相似状态,不友善交谈的习性就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘友善交谈的习性’的相似状态,谄与诳就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘说呵责语’的相似状态,粗恶语就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘呵责恶行’的相似状态,专观他人过失就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘同情家族’的相似状态,悭吝家族就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘希望久住寺院’这个门径,悭吝住处就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘回避法的障碍’这个门径,悭吝法就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘乐于说法’这个门径,乐谈就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘以不粗恶语摄护徒众’这个门径,乐群聚就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘欲求福德’的相似状态,乐事就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘悚惧’的相似状态,内心焦灼就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘有信’的相似状态,不审察就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘审察’的相似状态,不信就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘以自重为主’的相似状态,对师长们的教诫不虚心接受就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘以法为主’的相似状态,对同梵行者不恭敬就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘以世间为主’的相似状态,对自身与法的轻视就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘修习慈’这个门径,贪就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘修习悲’的相似状态,忧就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘修习喜而住’的相似状态,嬉笑就来欺诳,这是合理的;透过‘修习舍而住’的相似状态,于善法无欲求就来欺诳,这是合理的。像这样,对于与经教相似的、与证得相似的等等,也应当根据道理来了知它们那种种欺诳的本质。应当随顺经教,如此地寻求道理。显示巴利原文
Api cettha appaṭikkūlasaññāmukhena kāmacchando vañcetīti yujjati. Paṭikkūlasaññāpatirūpatāya byāpādo vañcetīti yujjati. Samādhimukhena thinamiddhaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Vīriyārambhamukhena uddhaccaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Sikkhākāmatāmukhena kukkuccaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Ubhayapakkhasantīraṇamukhena vicikicchā vañcetīti yujjati. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhasamupekkhanamukhena sammoho vañcetīti yujjati. Attaññutāmukhena attani aparibhavane māno vañcetīti yujjati. Vīmaṃsāmukhena hetupatirūpakapariggahena micchādiṭṭhi vañcetīti yujjati. Virattatāpatirūpakena sattesu adayāpannatā vañcetīti yujjati. Anuññātapaṭisevanapatirūpatāya kāmasukhallikānuyogo vañcetīti yujjati. Ājīvapārisuddhipatirūpatāya asaṃvibhāgasīlatā vañcetīti yujjati. Saṃvibhāgasīlatāpatirūpatāya micchājīvo vañcetīti yujjati. Asaṃsaggavihāritāpatirūpatāya asaṅgahasīlatā vañcetīti yujjati. Saṅgahasīlatāpatirūpatāya ananulomikasaṃsaggo vañcetīti yujjati. Saccavāditāpatirūpatāya pisuṇavācā vañcetīti yujjati. Apisuṇavāditāpatirūpatāya anatthakāmatā vañcetīti yujjati. Piyavāditāpatirūpatāya cāṭukamyatā vañcetīti yujjati. Mitabhāṇitāpatirūpatāya asammodanasīlatā vañcetīti yujjati. Sammodanasīlatāpatirūpatāya māyā sāṭheyyañca vañcetīti yujjati. Niggayhavāditāpatirūpatāya pharusavācatā vañcetīti yujjati. Pāpagarahitāpatirūpatāya paravajjānupassitā vañcetīti yujjati. Kulānuddhayatāpatirūpatāya kulamacchariyaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Āvāsaciraṭṭhitikāmatāmukhena āvāsamacchariyaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Dhammaparibandhapariharaṇamukhena dhammamacchariyaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Dhammadesanābhiratimukhena bhassārāmatā vañcetīti yujjati. Apharusavācatāgaṇānuggahakaraṇamukhena saṅgaṇikārāmatā vañcetīti yujjati. Puññakāmatāpatirūpatāya kammārāmatā vañcetīti yujjati. Saṃvegapatirūpena cittasantāpo vañcetīti yujjati. Saddhālutāpatirūpatāya aparikkhatā vañcetīti yujjati. Vīmaṃsanāpatirūpena assaddhiyaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Attādhipateyyapatirūpena garūnaṃ anusāsaniyā appadakkhiṇaggāhitā vañcetīti yujjati. Dhammādhipateyyapatirūpena sabrahmacārīsu agāravaṃ vañcetīti yujjati. Lokādhipateyyapatirūpena attani dhamme ca paribhavo vañcetīti yujjati. Mettāyanāmukhena rāgo vañcetīti yujjati. Karuṇāyanāpatirūpena soko vañcetīti yujjati. Muditāvihārapatirūpena pahāso vañcetīti yujjati. Upekkhāvihārapatirūpena kusalesu dhammesu nikkhittachandatā vañcetīti yujjati. Evaṃ āgamapatirūpakaadhigamapatirūpakādīnampi tathā tathā vañcanasabhāvo yuttito veditabbo. Evaṃ āgamānusārena yuttigavesanā kātabbāti.
第四 近依处摄的解释显示巴利原文
4. Padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
22 其中,“什么是近依处摄?”等,是近依处摄的解释。在此,因为近依处摄的特相,是阐明“这是这个的近依处,这是那个的近依处”,即辨识那些作为彼彼诸法近依处的法。所以,以作为生命流转根本的无明为起点,为了简择诸真实法的近依处(即近因),并解释了无明自性:“无明,具有对一切法不如实通达的相状。”这句话的意思是:由于它,一切法的不颠倒自性才不被通达,所以称为“对一切法不如实通达”。这就是它的相状,因此无明被这样描述。通过这句话,阐明了无明的相状是“遮蔽法的自性”。或者,正确通达即是“证知”,而“不证知”是对“正确通达即是证知”的否定。那么,这个“不证知”是在何处被称为证知的对立面呢?他说:“对一切……的相状。”而且,因为在“不净中认为是净”等颠倒存在时,那里的愚痴只会不断增上而不会减退,所以说“那些颠倒是它的近依处”。显示巴利原文
22.Tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārotiādi padaṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha yasmā ‘‘idaṃ imassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, idaṃ imassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtadhammavibhāvanalakkhaṇo padaṭṭhāno hāro, tasmā pavattiyā mūlabhūtaṃ avijjaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabhāvadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇaṃ niddhārento avijjāya sabhāvaṃ niddisati ‘‘sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedhalakkhaṇā avijjā’’ti. Tassattho – sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo na sampaṭivijjhīyati etenāti sabbadhammayāthāvaasampaṭivedho. So lakkhaṇaṃ etissāti sā tathā vuttā. Etena dhammasabhāvappaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā avijjāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā sammā paṭivedho sampaṭivedho. Tassa paṭipakkho asampaṭivedho. Kattha pana so sampaṭivedhassa paṭipakkhoti āha – ‘‘sabba…pe… lakkhaṇā’’ti. Yasmā pana asubhe subhantiādivipallāse sati tattha sammoho uparūpari jāyatiyeva na hāyati, tasmā ‘‘tassā vipallāsā padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
“可爱形”与“可乐形”:指应被爱著之类和可意之类,是贪爱的近因。因为经中确实说过:“世间中,凡是可爱形、可乐形,此贪爱生起时,便于此处生起。”(《长部》2.400;《中部》1.133;《分别论》203)“不与取”:指不与取的思。此思即使仅生起一次,由于不见过患,也会成为贪生起的原因,因此说它是贪的近因。嗔以杀生为近因,痴以邪行道为近因——这里也应依此理路来理解其含义。所谓“执取颜色、形状、细节的特征”,即执取相与随相的特征。对于乐想,触的现前是其特征,这说的正是以触为缘。因为经中确实说过:“触缘而有受、想。”(《相应部》4.93)“味著”:指贪爱。有为的特征是生、灭、变异性。通常执取常是依于识而说的,这是说常想以识为近因。确实,那位比丘认为“正是这个识在流转轮回”,这宣说的正是他对常的执取,其对象仅仅是识的境界。如果对五蕴的无常性与苦性已善巧观照,则我想与乐想便无机会生起,因此说:“我想”的特征显示巴利原文
Piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti piyāyitabbajātiyaṃ iṭṭhajātiyañca padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.400; ma. ni. 1.133; vibha. 203) hi vuttaṃ. Adinnādānanti adinnādānacetanā. Sā hi ekavāraṃ uppannāpi anādīnavadassitāya lobhassa uppattikāraṇaṃ hotīti tassa padaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Dosassa pāṇātipāto padaṭṭhānaṃ, mohassa micchāpaṭipadā padaṭṭhānanti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānabyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇāti nimittānubyañjanaggahaṇalakkhaṇā. Sukhasaññāya phassassa upagamanalakkhaṇatā phassapaccayatāva vuttā. ‘‘Phuṭṭho sañjānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.93) hi vuttaṃ . Assādoti taṇhā. Saṅkhatalakkhaṇāni uppādavayaññathattāni. Yebhuyyena niccaggahaṇaṃ viññāṇādhīnanti niccasaññāya viññāṇapadaṭṭhānatā vuttā. Tathā hi so bhikkhu taṃyeva viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsaratīti viññāṇavisayameva attano niccaggāhaṃ pavedesi. Pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ yadi aniccatā dukkhatā ca sudiṭṭhā, attasaññā sukhasaññā anavakāsāti āha – ‘‘aniccasaññādukkhasaññāasamanupassanalakkhaṇā attasaññā’’ti. ‘‘Yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) hi vuttaṃ.
通常,对“我”的执著发生在无色法上,因此说:“它的近因是名身。”所谓“一切应知的”,就是指四圣谛,因为在四圣谛之外,更无所应知。收摄心的散乱,即镇伏掉举。“不净”:指不净随观,或即作为似相存在的不净本身;因其对治贪爱,所以说奢摩他的不净是其近因。由于能减弱贪欲,故离不与取被说为无贪的近因。同样地,由于能减弱嗔恚,离杀生被说为无嗔的近因。于事不倒转,即对境的自性通达;正确的行道,即戒与定的具足,或依厌患智而生起的不乐智如此转起。把一切受都视为“苦”,是因为它们具有苦苦等性质,所以说:“‘苦想’以受为近因”。“法想”:即“唯有法”这样的想。显示巴利原文
Yebhuyyena attābhiniveso arūpadhammesūti āha – ‘‘tassā nāmakāyo padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Sabbaṃ neyyanti cattāri saccāni catusaccavinimuttassa ñeyyassa abhāvato. Cittavikkhepapaṭisaṃharaṇaṃ uddhaccavikkhambhanaṃ. Asubhāti asubhānupassanā, paṭibhāganimittabhūtā asubhā eva vā, taṇhāpaṭipakkhattā samathassa asubhā padaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ. Abhijjhāya tanukaraṇato adinnādānāveramaṇī alobhassa padaṭṭhānanti vuttā. Tathā byāpādassa tanukaraṇato pāṇātipātāveramaṇī adosassa padaṭṭhānanti vuttā. Vatthuavippaṭipatti visayasabhāvapaṭivedho, sammāpaṭipatti sīlasamādhisampadānaṃ nibbidāñāṇena anabhiratiñāṇameva vā tathā pavattaṃ. Sabbāpi vedanā dukkhadukkhatādibhāvato dukkhanti katvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘dukkhasaññāya vedanā padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Dhammasaññāti dhammamattanti saññā.
在有情的身体中,尚未离贪的状态依于五种内处而存在,因此说:“‘色贪’的近因,是色的五根。”此处,身体即指色法。特别是在成为禅那所依的意处上,也会有喜著,因此说:“‘有贪’的近因,是第六处。”“愿不要生起这样的色法,愿不要生起这样的感受”——像这样转起的对色法等事物的欢喜,即是期求生起“有”的随观。所谓“业自作智见”:因为如理作意的人,宿住随念能成为业自作智的因,非不如理作意之人。为阐明此义,应引《摩诃那罗陀迦叶本生经》及《梵网经》中“一分常住论”为例子。通过“信解的特征”等语句,显示了信与净信等的差别。但须知,那只是信的不同阶段。其中,“信解”是指通过相信的方式,沉入并确定对象。“无浊”即没有不信,故心无混浊。“胜求解”即信。“证净”指与慧相伴、已达圣者之境的殊胜净信。“不漂泛”指不忘失,或如沉入般深入对象。于此,应知所谓信等的净信、正勤、念住、禅支,依次作为其近因,这是说者依据阶段差别,说明它们成为近因的状态。或者,念显示巴利原文
Sattānaṃ kāye avītarāgatā pañcannaṃ ajjhattikāyatanānaṃ vasena hotīti āha – ‘‘pañcindriyāni rūpīni rūparāgassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Kāyo hi idha rūpanti adhippeto. Visesato jhānanissayabhūte manāyatane ca nikanti hotīti āha – ‘‘chaṭṭhāyatanaṃ bhavarāgassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Edisaṃ mā rūpaṃ nibbattatu, mā edisī vedanāti evaṃ pavattā rūpādiabhinandanā nibbattabhavānupassitā. Ñāṇadassanassāti kammassakataññāṇadassanassa. Yonisomanasikāravato hi pubbenivāsānussati kammassakataññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, na ayoniso ummujjantassa. Imassa ca atthassa vibhāvanatthaṃ mahānāradakassapajātakaṃ (jā. 2.22.1153 ādayo), brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.38 ādayo) ekaccasassatavādo ca udāharitabbo. ‘‘Okappanalakkhaṇā’’tiādinā saddhāpasādānaṃ visesaṃ dasseti. So pana saddhāyayeva avatthāviseso daṭṭhabbo. Tattha okappanaṃ saddahanavasena ārammaṇassa ogāhaṇaṃ nicchayo. Anāvilatā assaddhiyāpagamena cittassa akālussiyatā. Abhipatthiyanā saddahanameva. Aveccapasādo paññāsahito āyatanagato abhippasādo. Apilāpanaṃ asammoso nimujjitvā viya ārammaṇassa ogāhaṇaṃ vā, ettha ca saddhādīnaṃ pasādasaddhāsammappadhānasatipaṭṭhānajhānaṅgāni yathākkamaṃ padaṭṭhānanti vadantena avatthāvisesavasena padaṭṭhānabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Satisamādhīnaṃ vā kāyādayo satipaṭṭhānāti. Vitakkādayo ca jhānānīti padaṭṭhānabhāvena vuttā.
「味著之作意」:即于诸结法中随观味著。「后有之再萌发」:指为了后有而生起,具有能感得后有的异熟法性。「再生招感的特征」:指以再生有之体性而生起的自性。「名身、色身和合的特征」:指无色身与色身聚合的状态。「根的差别」:指眼等六根各自安立的状态。「再生招感性」:指能引生再有诸蕴者。「依」:即是有身。当愚人思惟自己亲爱之人逝去时,忧愁便会生起,因此说死亡是忧愁的近因。「焦灼」:指内心的烧灼。「投入」:即专注地安立。所谓‘令自己的所依焦灼,那即是“有”’,为说明“有”,而说了“有这些”等语。其中,“有之分”与“有的部分”即是“有分”。在这些当中,烦恼是“有之分”,业与异熟的轮转是“有的部分”。所谓‘和合’,是指一切。在蕴、处等之中,前后无间地相续流转,即是轮回。由往昔生生世世所生的烦恼等轮转,正是其因,所以说:「“轮回”的近因是有。」着眼于能令到达的因性,故说:「“灭”的近因是道。」显示巴利原文
Assādamanasikāro saṃyojanīyesu dhammesu assādānupassitā. Punabbhavavirohaṇāti punabbhavāya virohaṇā, punabbhavanibbattanārahatā vipākadhammatāti attho. Opapaccayikanibbattilakkhaṇanti upapattibhavabhāvena nibbattanasabhāvaṃ. Nāmakāyarūpakāyasaṅghātalakkhaṇanti arūparūpakāyānaṃ samūhiyabhāvaṃ. Indriyavavatthānanti cakkhādīnaṃ channaṃ indriyānaṃ vavatthitabhāvo. Opapaccayikanti upapattikkhandhanibbattakaṃ. Upadhīti attabhāvo. Attano piyassa maraṇaṃ cintentassa bālassa yebhuyyena soko uppajjatīti maraṇaṃ sokassa padaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ. Ussukkaṃ cetaso santāpo. Odahananti avadahanaṃ. Attano nissayassa santapanameva bhavassāti vuttaṃ bhavaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhavassa aṅgāni bhavasaṅkhātāni ca aṅgāni bhavaṅgāni. Tesu kilesā bhavassa aṅgāni. Kammavipākavaṭṭaṃ bhavasaṅkhātāni aṅgāni. Samaggānīti sabbāni. Khandhāyatanādīnaṃ aparāparuppattisaṃsaraṇaṃ saṃsāro. Tassa purimapurimajātinipphannaṃ kilesādivaṭṭaṃ kāraṇanti āha – ‘‘bhavo saṃsārassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Sampāpakahetubhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘maggo nirodhassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
对深入业处者而言,多闻是其入处,故称渡口;如理亲近承事此渡口,即是知渡口。与法相应的喜悦称为‘饮’;由听闻适宜之法生起此喜后,令业处增长,即是知饮。修行时,能了知即使微细的沉没与掉举,即是知量。如实了知自己具足五种精进支,即是知人;其中,前者为后者的近因,此义易解。只有曾作福者才有可能住于适当之处,而非其他人,因此说:“曾作福是住于适当地方的近因。”与摄持俱起的如实知见,即是稚嫩的观智。厌患即是强有力的观智。离贪即是道。解脱即是果。如是,正如由‘那些颠倒的近因’等说而开示无明等之近因,依此理趣,凡是任何一种作为强有力缘的亲依止缘,或是任何其余的缘,这一切都应视为近因,即原因。也有读作‘如是,任何亲依止,从理与缘’的。其中,‘亲依止’指原因;‘从理’指从合理性而言;‘从缘’指仅就其为缘这一事实而言——应如此理解其义。至于此处未从义理上详加辨析的内容,其本身极为浅显易懂。显示巴利原文
Kammaṭṭhānogāhakassa otaraṇaṭṭhānatāya bahussuto titthaṃ nāma, tassa sammāpayirupāsanā titthaññutā. Dhammūpasañhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ pītaṃ nāma, sappāyadhammassavanena taṃ uppādetvā kammaṭṭhānassa brūhanā pītaññutā, bhāvanāya thokampi layāpattiyā uddhaṃpattiyā ca jānanā pattaññutā. Attano pañcahi padhāniyaṅgehi samannāgatassa jānanā attaññutā, tesu purimānaṃ purimānaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa padaṭṭhānabhāvo suviññeyyo eva. Katapuññasseva patirūpadesavāso sambhavati , na itarassāti ‘‘pubbekatapuññatā patirūpadesavāsassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassanaṃ saha adhiṭṭhānena taruṇavipassanā. Nibbidāti balavavipassanā. Virāgoti maggo. Vimuttīti phalaṃ. Evanti yadidaṃ ‘‘tassā vipallāsā padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā avijjādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ, iminā nayena athāpi yo koci upanissayo balavapaccayoti yo koci avasesapaccayo, sabbo so padaṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ yā kāci upanisā yogato ca paccayato cā’’tipi paṭhanti. Tattha upanisāti kāraṇaṃ, yogatoti yuttito, paccayatoti paccayabhāvamattatoti attho veditabbo. Yaṃ panettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
5. 相论的解释显示巴利原文
5. Lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
23 23. 其中,何为相论?……即是相论的解释。其中,‘何为被相所标记者?’是询问相论的所行境。先以‘诸法’等简要开示相论后,为以诸例详加分别,遂开始‘眼’等经文。于此,应知由‘以杀害者的含义等为同一相’此语,也宣说了以不稳定性等为同一相性。显示巴利原文
23.Tatthakatamo lakkhaṇo hārotiādi lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha kiṃ lakkhayatīti lakkhaṇahārassa visayaṃ pucchati. ‘‘Ye dhammā’’tiādinā lakkhaṇahāraṃ saṅkhepato dassetvā taṃ udāharaṇehi vibhajituṃ ‘‘cakkhu’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘vadhakaṭṭhena ekalakkhaṇānī’’ti iminā anavaṭṭhitabhāvādināpi ekalakkhaṇatā vuttā evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
如此,从“处”的角度说明了它们具有同一相之后,现在为了从“蕴”等角度来说明,便引用了“罗陀,于过去色无顾念”等经。在《双论教说经》(《相应部》3.85)中,以“杀者”的意义说明了同一相,所以该经中出现“不如实知色是杀者、色是杀者”等文。“Itīti”的意思是:在这首偈颂中所说的身至念,由于念处具有同一相,因此也就是受随观念住、心随观念住与法随观念住,这是意趣所在。至于“已见”等的含义,将在后面解释。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ āyatanavasena ekalakkhaṇataṃ dassetvā idāni khandhādivasena dassetuṃ ‘‘atīte, rādha, rūpe anapekkho hotī’’tiādi suttaṃ ābhataṃ. Yamakovādasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.85) vadhakaṭṭhena ekalakkhaṇā vuttāti tasmiṃ sutte ‘‘vadhakaṃ rūpaṃ vadhakaṃ rūpanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātī’’tiādinā āgatattā vuttaṃ. Itīti evaṃ, imissaṃ gāthāyaṃ kāyagatāya satiyā vuttāya sati vedanāgatā sati cittagatā sati dhammagatā ca sati vuttā bhavati satipaṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti adhippāyo. Diṭṭhantiādīnaṃ atthaṃ parato vaṇṇayissāma.
“住于身随观身”这一句中,“身”指色身。在此,色身因肢体的各部分及头发等的聚合义而被称为“身”;也因其为极可厌恶之物的来处(āya)而称为“身”。来处即生起之处。其词义可这样解释:它们从此处而来,故称为“来”(āyo)。什么从此处而来?头发等可厌的污秽之物。因此,污秽之物的来处,就名为“身”。显示巴利原文
Kāyekāyānupassī viharāhīti ettha kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca samūhaṭṭhena kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena, evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo, āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo, iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo.
“身随观”指具有随观身的惯习,或正在随观身。在说了“身”之后再次说“身随观”,是为了显示不混杂的界定、破除密集等目的。由此,他不是在身中随观受、随观心或随观法,而恰恰只是随观身。在名为“身”的所依中,仅显露身随观的行相,即显示了不混杂的界定。同样地,他并非在身中观察脱离诸支分的单一法,也不是脱离头发、身毛等而观察女人、男人。显示巴利原文
Kāyānupassīti kāyaṃ anupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno. ‘‘Kāye’’ti ca vatvā puna ‘‘kāyānupassī’’ti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī cittadhammānupassī vā, atha kho kāyānupassī evāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī.
而这里所谓发、毛等,由大种与所造色之集合所构成的身体,也并非脱离大种与所造色而观察某一单独的法。恰恰相反,他如同检查车辆部件的人,观察的是诸部分的总聚;如同观察城市构造的人,观察的是发、毛等的集合;如同剥离芭蕉树干层层叶鞘的人,又如解开空拳的人那般,观察的只是大种与所造色的集合。如此,以种种方式,仅仅通过集合来展示名为‘身’的所依,便揭示了(对密集的)剖析。因为在此处,除了上述这样的集合之外,并没有所谓的身或其他任何法显现,然而众生恰恰对上述这些法的集合,以种种方式生起了错误的执著。所以古德说:显示巴利原文
Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthapi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī , atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibbhujjako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassī evāti nānappakārato samūhavaseneva kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati, yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatte eva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
‘他所看到的,并非(被执取为整体的)所见;那被(分析地)见到的,他却看不到。愚者不见(实相)而被束缚,被束缚者不得解脱。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati;
(出处:《长部注》2.373;《中部注》1.106;《无碍解道注》1.1.36;《大义注》3)
显示巴利原文 Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.106; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.36; mahāni. aṭṭha. 3);
“密集的解构等所示之义”——其中“等”字应如此理解:因为在此身中,他只是身随观者,并非随观其他法。显示巴利原文
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti ādisaddena ayamattho veditabbo. Ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī.
此中所说之义为:如同在无水的阳焰中,也会有人将其随观为水;但此处并非如此——对这本来无常、苦、无我、不净的身,他并不随观为常、乐、我、净,而是作为身随观者,随观那无常、苦、无我、不净等相的集合。或者,另一种含义:无论是《大念处经》中从入出息开始,直至“粉末骨”、以骨为终极所说的身,还是《无碍解道》中所说的身:“有人于此,随观地身为无常,随观水身、火身、风身、发身……乃至骨髓身”,对于这一切身,只在这身之中修习随观,故称为“于身随观身”。此处亦应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattaasubhabhūte eva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhaattasubhabhāvānupassī , atha kho kāyānupassī aniccadukkhaanattaasubhākārasamūhānupassīti attho. Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.374 ādayo) assāsapassāsādicuṇṇikajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati, āpokāyaṃ tejokāyaṃ vāyokāyaṃ kesakāyaṃ…pe… aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.34 ādayo) kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者,又可这样理解:因为于身中,并无任何可执取为“我”或“我所”之物,故不做那样的随观,而是随观毛发等种种法的集合;因此,对于那由毛发等诸法所构成的身,应视为“身随观者”之义。再者,依《无碍解道》中依次所说“对此身随观为无常,非随观为常”等方法,由于随观那由无常相等种种相之集所成的身,故称为“于身随观身”。这便是其中的意思。显示巴利原文
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā gahetabbassa kassaci ananupassanato, tassa pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhāte kāyānupassīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Api ca ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati no niccato’’tiādinā anukkamena paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.34 ādayo) āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādikassa ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti attho.
「安住」(viharāti)即指“他安住”。「热忱者」(ātāpī):意为以热忱烧尽三有(三界)中的烦恼,故称热忱;具足此热忱者,即是热忱者。「正知者」(sampajāno):指具备名为“正知”的智慧。「具念者」(satimā):指具备能执取身体的念。然而,此处是先以念执取所缘,再以慧随观;没有念,便没有随观。因此,世尊说:“诸比丘,我说念在一切处都是必要的。”(Saṃ. Ni. 5.234)而且,没有热忱的人,内心便会畏缩,产生障碍,令禅修业处无法成就。所以,为明示那些依之能成就业处的法,遂说“热忱者”等。显示巴利原文
Viharāhīti vattāhi. Ātāpīti tīsu bhavesu kilese ātāpetīti ātāpo, so assa atthīti ātāpī. Sampajānoti sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati, na hi sativirahitā anupassanā atthi, tenevāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Anātāpino ca anto saṅkoco antarāyakaro hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati. Tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati, taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这里,「已调伏」(vineyya)是指用部分性的调伏或镇伏性的调伏来加以调伏。 「世间」(loke)就是指这个身体;这里,身体因为会坏灭,所以被称为世间。文中用「贪欲」(abhijjhā)一词来代表爱欲,用「忧」(domanassa)来代表瞋恚,这样通过显示在诸盖中这两种最有力的法被断除,来说明诸盖的断除,也就是显示了身随观念处的‘断除支’。而「热忱者」等则显示了‘相应支’。为了说明这个道理,才说了「热忱者」等。在这里,贪忧的平息是直接的敌对面,因此,当说‘已调伏世间中的贪忧’时,正好显示了定根。所以注释书说:‘已调伏世间中的贪忧——这就是定根。’(saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.367) ‘由于四根具有同一相’:正如凭精进根、慧根、定根使身随观念处成就,同样,也凭它们使受随观、心随观、法随观念处成就。因此,在成就四念处上,这些根没有自性上的差异,而具有相同的特征,所以当说到它们时,其他念处也同样被包含在内,这就是这里的意思。显示巴利原文
Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi tasmiṃyeva kāye. Kāyo hi idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti adhippeto. Abhijjhāggahaṇena cettha kāmacchando, domanassaggahaṇena byāpādo gahitoti nīvaraṇesu balavadhammadvayappahānadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttanti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassitaṃ. ‘‘Ātāpī’’tiādinā pana sampayogaṅgaṃ dassitanti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ātāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhijjhādomanassānaṃ samatho ujupaṭipakkhoti abhijjhādomanassavinayo vuccamāno samādhindriyaṃ dīpetīti āha – ‘‘vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti samādhindriya’’nti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.367). Ekalakkhaṇattā catunnaṃ indriyānanti yathā vīriyapaññāsamādhindriyehi kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ ijjhati, evaṃ vedanācittadhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānānipi tehi ijjhantīti catusatipaṭṭhānasādhane imesaṃ indriyānaṃ sabhāvabhedābhāvato samānalakkhaṇattā itarāni satipaṭṭhānānipi vuttāni eva hontīti attho.
24 24. 现在,为了显示当念处被把握时,所有菩提分法也就被把握了,所以说了‘于四念处中’等。 这里,「觉支」(bodhaṅgamā):意思是‘走向觉悟’,即走向圣道智,所以称为觉支。 「菩提分」(bodhipakkhiyā):意思是‘属于前面所说觉悟的部分’,所以称为菩提分。 「以导出相」(neyyānikalakkhaṇena):这里,‘导出’(niyyāna)指的是从所缘的相和转起中出离;而‘导出者’(neyyānika)则指从事于那种导出的人,就像‘守门人’的构词方式一样。或者,也可以理解为:能配得上‘导出’这个果的法,就是导出者。又或者,以‘导出’作为目标的法,是导出者。也有读作‘neyyānikā’的,此时意思是‘它们具有导出’。还有读作‘niyyāniyā’的,意思应理解为‘它们导出’(niyyanti)。总之,‘以导出相’就是‘以导出的自性’。显示巴利原文
24. Idāni satipaṭṭhānesu gahitesu sabbesaṃ bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ gahitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bodhaṅgamāti bodhaṃ ariyamaggañāṇaṃ gacchantīti bodhaṅgamā. Yathāvuttassa bodhassa pakkhe bhavāti bodhipakkhiyā. Neyyānikalakkhaṇenāti ettha nimittato pavattato ca vuṭṭhānaṃ niyyānaṃ, niyyāne niyuttāti neyyānikā, yathā dovārikoti. Niyyānasaṅkhātaṃ vā phalaṃ arahantīti neyyānikā. Niyyānaṃ payojanaṃ etesanti vā neyyānikā. ‘‘Niyyānikā’’tipi pāṭho, tattha niyyānaṃ etesaṃ atthīti niyyānikāti attho. ‘‘Niyyāniyā’’tipi pāṭho, tassa niyyantīti niyyāniyāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Niyyānikalakkhaṇenāti niyyānikasabhāvena.
同样地,对于不善法,也应当像先前判定善法那样,从“同一相”的角度来安立。如何安立呢?为了显示它们都以“应当被断除”为共义,故说“断除归于消逝”。接下来,为了阐明此断除,又说“于四念处中”等。此处,当修习身随观等四念处时,将不净执为净等四种颠倒便会断除;与此同时,他能遍知段食等四种食,而障碍此遍知的欲贪等随眠则会被彻底根除。何以故?因为这些应被断除的法都具有同一相。如此,此理可遍及一切处。是故注释书说:“如是,不善法亦因同一相而断除,归于消逝。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ akusalāpi dhammāti yathā kusalā dhammā ekalakkhaṇabhāvena niddhāritā, evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇaṭṭhena niddhāretabbā. Kathaṃ? Pahānekaṭṭhatāvasenāti dassento ‘‘pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti āha. Idāni taṃ pahānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘catūsu satipaṭṭhānesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāyānupassanādīsu catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu bhāviyamānesu asubhe subhantiādayo cattāro vipallāsā pahīyanti, kabaḷīkārāhārādayo cattāro āhārā cassa pariññaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ parijānanassa paribandhino kāmarāgādayo byantīkatā hontīti attho, kasmā? Tehi pahātabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti. Evaṃ sabbattha attho yojetabbo. Tenevāha – ‘‘evaṃ akusalāpi dhammā ekalakkhaṇattā pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchantī’’ti.
现在,为了以另一种方式举出“相引摄”的例证,故说“或凡于……”等。这里,“于任何处”(yattha):指在那段开示中。“或”(vā)字表示选择。“而”(pana)为填充词。“色根”(rūpindriya):指具有变坏自性的八种根。“彼处”(tattha):在那段开示中。“色界”(rūpadhātu):指具有变坏自性的十种界。“色处”(rūpāyatana):指具有变坏自性的十种处,也就是十种有色处的意思。由于它们都以“变坏”为相而具有同一相,因此这些法被集在一起开示,这便是此处的意趣。在此,乐根与喜根也因同具“乐受”性而具有同一相,这便是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
Idāni aññenapi pariyāyena lakkhaṇahārassa udāharaṇāni dassetuṃ ‘‘yattha vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yatthāti yassaṃ desanāyaṃ. Vā-saddo vikappattho. Panāti padapūraṇo. Rūpindriyanti ruppanasabhāvaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ indriyaṃ. Tatthāti tassaṃ desanāyaṃ. Rūpadhātūti ruppanasabhāvā dasa dhātuyo. Rūpāyatananti ruppanasabhāvaṃ dasāyatanaṃ, rūpīni dasāyatanānīti attho. Ruppanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā imāni desitānīti adhippāyo. Desitaṃ tattha sukhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ sukhavedanābhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti adhippāyo.
“苦集圣谛”:这是就不善的喜悦而说,也适用于有漏的善的喜悦。而“整个缘起亦被开示”一句,是承接上文。之所以这样说,是因为在感受不苦不乐受时,有“无明随眠”随逐。正如经中所说:“无明随眠随逐于不苦不乐受。”(ma. ni. 1.465)又说:“于不苦不乐受,无明随眠潜伏。”如此,通过把握“不苦不乐受”,就等于显示了“无明”。进而,为表明一旦把握了无明,整个缘起也就被开示了,故接着说“无明为缘而有行”等。这里的“而”(ca)字是表差别的,它指出缘起有顺、逆两种方式,这是接下来要讲的差别。其中,依顺次缘起,如前所示,应当从有贪、有瞋、有痴的杂染方面来断除。而依逆次缘起,正如经中(ma. ni. 3.126; mahāva. 1)所说“由无明的无余离贪灭尽……”等,对于这种缘起,则说“应当以离贪、离瞋、离痴的圣法来断除”。显示巴利原文
Dukkhasamudayo ca ariyasaccanti idaṃ akusalassa somanassassa vasena vuttaṃ, sāsavakusalassāpi vasena yujjati eva. Sabbo ca paṭiccasamuppādo desitoti sambandho. Avijjānusayitattā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465). Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘adukkhamasukhāya hi vedanāya avijjā anusetī’’ti. Etena adukkhamasukhāvedanāggahaṇena avijjā gahitāti dasseti. Sati ca avijjāggahaṇe sabbo paṭiccasamuppādo desitoti dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So cāti ettha ca-saddo byatirekattho, tena so paṭiccasamuppādo anulomapaṭilomavasena duvidhoti imaṃ vakkhamānavisesaṃ joteti. Tesu anulomato paṭiccasamuppādo yathādassito sarāgasadosasamohasaṃkilesapakkhena hātabboti vutto, paṭilomato pana paṭiccasamuppādo yo ‘‘avijjāyatveva asesavirāganirodhā’’tiādinā pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.126; mahāva. 1) vutto, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘vītarāgavītadosavītamohaariyadhammehi hātabbo’’ti vuttaṃ.
现在,为了通过阐明‘同一相’的道理来显示‘相引摄’的运用方法,所以说‘如是,凡那些法’等。此处,「以作用」:指如地等、触等的色法与非色法,由于支持、结合等作用而归为一类;或从这些缘法对各自缘生法所起的‘缘的作用’来归类。「以相」:指依粗、触等自性而归类。「以共性」:指依变坏、弯曲等共性,无常等共性,或蕴、处等范畴的共性而归类。「以生灭」:指有为法的灭与生,或以同时灭、同时生来归类。此外,这里的‘而’字还包含了‘俱行’、同因性、同果性、同地性、同境性、同所缘性等义,应当这样来理解。其余内容,其义甚明。显示巴利原文
Idāni ekalakkhaṇatāvibhāvanena lakkhaṇahārayojanāya nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ ye dhammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kiccatoti pathavīādīnaṃ phassādīnañca rūpārūpadhammānaṃ sandhāraṇasaṅghaṭṭanādikiccato, tesaṃ tesaṃ vā paccayadhammānaṃ taṃtaṃpaccayuppannadhammassa paccayabhāvasaṅkhātakiccato. Lakkhaṇatoti kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāvato. Sāmaññatoti ruppananamanādito aniccatādito khandhāyatanādito ca. Cutūpapātatoti saṅkhatadhammānaṃ bhaṅgato uppādato ca, samānanirodhato samānuppādato cāti attho. Ettha ca sahacaraṇaṃ samānahetutā samānaphalatā samānabhūmitā samānavisayatā samānārammaṇatāti evamādayopi ca-saddena saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
6. 关于“四阵列引摄”的分别注释显示巴利原文
6. Catubyūhahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
25 其中,什么是‘四阵列摄句’?这就是对‘四阵列摄句’的分别解说。在这当中,通过音声来探寻经文的词源、意欲、起因以及前后衔接,如此简略地显示了四阵列。而‘以音声’这一句,表明这些摄句都属于对经文音声的推求,因此应当从音声层面来辨明这些四阵列摄句的句义。‘词源’即是‘词句’,即作解释、作训释的意思。‘词句’本身就是‘词源’。因此这样说:‘此词句聚’。它的意思是:这里所说的‘词句’就是指‘词源’。那么,什么是‘词句’呢?‘句聚’:指在句中聚集、相应;通过性、数、时、格、人称等特殊关联,对于每一种应当述说的意义,都以其本然的语言形式来表达,这就叫做‘自性词句’。正如所说:‘依名称而对诸法生起了……’显示巴利原文
25.Tattha katamo catubyūho hāroti catubyūhahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha byañjanena suttassa neruttañca adhippāyo ca nidānañca pubbāparasandhi ca gavesitabboti saṅkhepena tāva catubyūhaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Byañjanenā’’ti iminā hārānaṃ suttassa byañjanavicayabhāvato byañjanamukheneva ete catubyūhahārapadatthā niddhāretabbāti dasseti. Neruttanti niruttaṃ nibbacananti attho. Niruttameva neruttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘yā niruttipadasaṃhitā’’ti. Tassattho – yā nirutti, idaṃ neruttaṃ. Kā pana sā nirutti? Padasaṃhitāti padesu saṃhitā yuttā, liṅgavacanakālasādhanapurisādivisesayogena yo yo attho yathā yathā vattabbo, tathā tathā pavattasabhāvaniruttīti attho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṃ dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa’’nti.
此处,「yaṃ」是一个表原因的不变词,指‘以此为因’。‘诸法’是指所应了知的法。‘以名称’:比如‘地、触、蕴、界、三触’等,通过这些名称的特殊性而生起智,这就叫做‘自性词句’。因为,当人们执取了‘地’等这些音声之后,通过约定俗成的途径,对其中意义的理解正是依于执取那些各自固定的施设而生起的。另一种解释:‘词句聚’是指由句所集成。因为通过句,才能了知句中的意义。而这种了知,只有在执取了作为意义生起之相的施设之后才会产生;而这种施设又和被称为词源的句结合在一起,从而令句义显现,因此称为‘词句聚’。接着,以‘当比丘……’等语句,来阐明‘对诸法以名称而了知’这一句的意义。显示巴利原文
Tattha yanti hetuatthe nipāto, yāya kāraṇabhūtāyāti attho. Dhammānanti ñeyyadhammānaṃ. Nāmasoti pathavī phasso khandhā dhātu tisso phussoti evamādināmavisesena ñāṇaṃ pavattati, ayaṃ sabhāvanirutti nāma. Pathavīti hi evamādikaṃ saddaṃ gahetvā tato paraṃ saṅketadvārena tadatthapaṭipatti taṃtaṃaniyatanāmapaññattiggahaṇavaseneva hotīti. Atha vā padasaṃhitāti padena saṃhitā . Padato hi padatthāvabodho. So panassa atthe pavattinimittabhūtāya paññattiyā gahitāya eva hotīti sā pana paññatti niruttisaṅkhātapadena saṃhitā padatthaṃ bodhetīti padasaṃhitāti vuttā. ‘‘Yadā hi bhikkhū’’tiādinā ‘‘dhammānaṃ nāmaso ñāṇa’’nti padassa atthaṃ vivarati.
此处,“义”指音声所诠表的意义。“知名称”指藉由名称的施设而了知“这是此名称”。“法”指自性法。“如实地予以安立”:对种种义与法,随其所应称呼的方式,即如实地以名称、言说来安立、开示。至此,这位比丘便堪称“善巧于义,乃至善巧于多种说”,应如此衔接。显示巴利原文
Tattha atthassāti saddābhidheyyassa atthassa. Nāmaṃ jānātīti nāmapaññattivasena ayaṃ nāmāti nāmaṃ jānāti. Dhammassāti sabhāvadhammassa. Tathātathā naṃ abhiniropetīti yo yo attho dhammo ca yathā yathā ca voharitabbo, tathā tathā naṃ nāmaṃ vohāraṃ abhiniropeti desetīti attho. Ettāvatā ca ayaṃ bhikkhu atthakusalo yāva anekādhivacanakusaloti vuccatīti sambandhitabbaṃ.
其中,“善巧于义”指善巧于圣典之义。“善巧于法”指善巧于圣典本身。“善巧于词句”指善巧于字与句。“善巧于词源”指善巧于释义。“善巧于前后”指善巧于教说的前后关联。“善巧于教说”指善巧于法的开示。“善巧于过去称”指善巧于过去的施设。未来、现在等,亦同此理。一切方俗语词,即众生世间所使用的种种言语,在经中皆应尽可能以解说词源的方式来安立表述;同时,也当恰如其分地处理一切方俗语词。因为经中说:“不应逾越共许的称名”。的确,正是经由世俗谛,才能证得胜义谛。显示巴利原文
Tattha atthakusaloti pāḷiatthe kusalo. Dhammakusaloti pāḷiyaṃ kusalo. Byañjanakusaloti akkharesu ca vākyesu ca kusalo. Niruttikusaloti nibbacane kusalo. Pubbāparakusaloti desanāya pubbāparakusalo. Desanākusaloti dhammassa desanāya kusalo. Atītādhivacanakusaloti atītapaññattikusalo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Evaṃ sabbāni kātabbāni, janapadaniruttānīti yattakāni sattavohārapadāni, tāni sabbāni yathāsambhavaṃ sutte nibbacanavasena kātabbāni vattabbānīti attho. Sabbā ca janapadaniruttiyoti sabbā ca lokasamaññāyo yathārahaṃ kātabbā. ‘‘Samaññaṃ nātidhāveyyā’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Tathā hi sammutisaccamukheneva paramatthasaccādhigamo hotīti.
在“意趣品”中,毫无隐晦不明之处。显示巴利原文
Adhippāyakaṇḍe anuttānaṃ nāma natthi.
27 在“起因品”中,“以此事”(iminā vatthunā):意即以这种称为“儿子”“牛”等的叙述作为原因。在这里,“事”(vatthu)即是原因,故也称为“起因”。应当依此方法类推,理解一切处如何确定起因。显示巴利原文
27. Nidānakaṇḍe iminā vatthunāti iminā puttagavādikittanasaṅkhātena kāraṇena. Kāraṇañhettha vatthu nidānanti ca vuttaṃ. Iminā nayena sabbattha nidānaniddhāraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“被欲所盲”:指被烦恼欲蒙蔽了双眼。“被网所覆”:指被渴爱之网所缠覆。“被爱暗所蔽”:指被名为渴爱的黑暗所覆蔽。“被系缚所缚”:指被名为五欲的束缚所系缚。也有“放逸所缚”的版本,意思是因为放逸而被束缚。“前后”:指在前或在后的教导之间,即说法之间隙。“相应”:即连接、契合,意指完全一致。“以这些词句为现行”:即以上述那些偈颂的词句,作为显示渴爱现行的标志。“彼爱即是”:意为前一偈中所说的那个爱,就是指这同一个爱。通过“无论何所爱”等说法,贯通两首偈颂的义理,从而阐明其前后关联。“以方式”:指以其表现方式。因此,意思是:渴爱在其生起的那个生命相续中,不允许它脱离,反而用种种所缘诱惑它,以种种烦恼彻底占据心识并盘踞其中。正因如此,就烦恼层面与现行层面而言,它才被称为爱的束缚。显示巴利原文
Kāmandhāti kilesakāmena andhā. Jālasañchannāti taṇhājālapaliguṇṭhitā. Taṇhāchadanachāditāti taṇhāsaṅkhātena andhakārena pihitā. Bandhanābaddhāti kāmaguṇasaṅkhātena bandhanena baddhā. ‘‘Pamattabandhanā’’tipi pāṭho, pamādenāti attho. Pubbāparenāti pubbena vā aparena vā desanantarenāti adhippāyo. Yujjatīti yogaṃ upeti, sametīti attho. Imehi padehipariyuṭṭhānehīti imehi yathāvuttehi gāthāpadehi taṇhāpariyuṭṭhānadīpakehi. Sāyeva taṇhāti yā purimagāthāya vuttā, sāyeva taṇhā. ‘‘Yañcāhā’’tiādinā dvinnampi gāthānaṃ atthasaṃsandanena pubbāparaṃ vibhāveti. Payogenāti samudācārena. Tasmāti yattha sayaṃ uppannā, taṃ santānaṃ nissarituṃ adentī nānārammaṇehi palobhayamānā kilesehi cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhati. Tasmā kilesavasena ca pariyuṭṭhānavasena ca taṇhābandhanaṃ vuttā.
「戏论」:因为它们令人在轮回中长久滞留,故称戏论。「住」:众生依这些而住,故名为住。从具有束缚的意义来说,它犹如系绳,故称「系绳」。由于它能阻断进入涅槃之城,犹如门闩,故称「门闩」。以无余断除渴爱,称「无渴爱者」。因如实观照自利与利他、此世与他世,故名「牟尼」。应当如此理解这首偈颂的句义。而关于戏论等的含义,在经典中已有详尽的分析。若某人的这些戏论等已彻底灭尽无余,他便连一丝一毫的渴爱都不复存在。正因如此才说:“凡是完全超越这一切的人,即称为无渴爱者。”显示巴利原文
Papañcenti saṃsāre ciraṃ ṭhapentīti papañcā. Tiṭṭhanti etāhīti ṭhitī. Bandhanaṭṭhena sandānaṃ viyāti sandānaṃ. Nibbānanagarappavesassa paṭisedhanato palighaṃ viyāti palighaṃ. Anavasesataṇhāpahānena nittaṇho. Attahitaparahitānaṃ idhalokaparalokānañca munanato munīti evaṃ gāthāya padattho veditabbo. Papañcādiatthā pana pāḷiyaṃ vibhattā evāti. Tattha yassete papañcādayo abbhatthaṃ gatā, tassa taṇhāya lesopi na bhavati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘yo etaṃ sabbaṃ samatikkanto, ayaṃ vuccati nittaṇho’’ti.
28 「现行」:即经典中所说的“爱的现行”,指渴爱展现出的种种游走表现。「行」:即经典中所说的“被它造作出来的诸行”,指以渴爱、恶见、我慢为根本原因而产生的造作。然而,在七个速行心的思心所中,第一个速行的思,只要因缘具足,便会在这一生(即当前的生命体)中产生果报;最后一个速行的思,会在紧接着的下一生中产生果报;而位于中间的那些速行之思,则会在未来的某一世中产生果报。因此,为依果报成熟的处所而作分别,才说“现法受”等。再者,由于与各类思心所相应的渴爱,也如思心所那样分为现法受等三种,所以才说“如此,渴爱会给出三种果报”。「前后相合」的意思是:前面关于诸行有现法受等的说法,与后面这里关于业有现法受等的说法,彼此契合贯通,恰如恒河水与耶牟那河水汇流交融一般,意指完全一致。显示巴利原文
28.Pariyuṭṭhānanti ‘‘taṇhāya pariyuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttāni taṇhāvicaritāni. Saṅkhārāti ‘‘tadabhisaṅkhatā saṅkhārā’’ti vuttā taṇhādiṭṭhimānahetukā saṅkhārā. Te pana yasmā sattasu javanacetanāsu paṭhamacetanā sati paccayasamavāye imasmiṃyeva attabhāve phalaṃ deti. Pacchimacetanā anantare attabhāve. Ubhinnaṃ vemajjhacetanā yattha katthaci phalaṃ deti, tasmā vipaccanokāsavasena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃtaṃcetanāsampayuttā taṇhāpi cetanā viya diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādivasena tidhā hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ taṇhā tividhaṃ phalaṃ detī’’ti. Pubbāparena yujjatīti yaṃ pubbaṃ purimaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyatādivacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā aparena kammassa diṭṭhadhammavedanīyatādivacanena yujjati gaṅgodakaṃ viya yamunodakena saṃsandati sametīti attho.
「行由见力」:是指在五种心的生起状态中——即四种与恶见相应的心,以及一种与疑相应的心——这些行,是依初道慧的力量而断除的。而「三十六爱行由修力」:这是就初道断除后所剩余的部分而说,并非指要对治所有的三十六种爱行。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhārā dassanabalenāti catūsu diṭṭhigatasampayuttesu vicikicchāsampayutte cāti pañcasu cittuppādesu saṅkhārā paṭhamamaggapaññābalena. Chattiṃsa taṇhāvicaritāni bhāvanābalenāti paṭhamamaggena pahīnāvasesavasena vuttaṃ, na sabbesaṃ vasena.
「相续而转起」:指以渴爱等不间断的连续生起方式而运作。「Yo cāpi papañco」等偈颂,是将此处义理与《罗陀经》中「papañceti」等说法所表达的内容进行会通。正因如此,才说“这是同一义理”。但为显示虽然在义理上相同,而在教导的方式上却有差别,故说「api ca」等语。“如是”:即依刚才所说方式。“以经”:即依正在注释的这部经。“余经”:指其他经典段落。将其“会通”,就是将种种义理结合,令法义毫无矛盾。“与前后连接”:就是从义理上将它与前后经文相连,建立法义上的关联。如此,已阐述的义理便更为清晰,借由展示其他经典的相似说法,该经的含义即被清楚地指示并详细展开。显示巴利原文
Anubandhoti taṇhādīnaṃ anuppabandhena pavatti. Yo cāpi papañcotiādinā ‘‘papañcetī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ rādhasuttañcasaṃsandati. Tenevāha – ‘‘idaṃ ekattha’’nti. Yadipi atthato ekaṃ, desanāya pana viseso vijjatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘api cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evanti iminā vuttappakārena. Suttenāti saṃvaṇṇiyamānena suttena. Suttanti suttantaraṃ. Saṃsandayitvāti vimissitvā atthato abhinnaṃ katvā. Pubbāparena saddhiṃ yojayitvāti pubbena vā aparena vā suttena saddhiṃ atthato sambandhaṃ yojetvā. Vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti tena suttassa attho niddiṭṭho hoti vitthārito suttantaradassanena.
为了显示前后连接并非仅限于诸经的会通,还有其他连接方式存在,故说「so cāyaṃ」等语。此处,“义理连接”是指从动作、行为者等角度,对义理所做的关联。然而,这种连接主要是就简说等六种义理句而言的,因为一切个别词句的含义最终都摄在这六种之中。显示巴利原文
Na kevalaṃ suttantarasaṃsandanameva pubbāparasandhi, atha kho aññopi atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘so cāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha atthasandhīti kiriyākārakādivasena atthassa sambandho. So pana yasmā saṅkāsanādīnaṃ channaṃ atthapadānaṃyeva hoti, sabbassāpi padatthassa tadavarodhato.
再者,“连接”本身并非某种独立存在的实法,故说“义理连接为六句”等。“言辞连接”是指一个词与另一个词之间的关联。由于一切名词等词类,无不被摄在六种言辞句之中,故说“言辞连接为六句”等。显示巴利原文
Sambandho ca nāma na koci attho. Tasmā ‘‘atthasandhi chappadānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Byañjanasandhīti padassa padantarena sambandho. Yasmā pana sabbampi nāmādipadaṃ chahi byañjanapadehi asaṅgahitaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘byañjanasandhi chappadānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
「教法衔接」:是将如前所说的种种教说,与后续的教法连接贯通起来。「不依于地」:意思是不把称为「境」的地当作依止,即不攀缘地的概念。「禅修者」:是指以果等至的禅那而入定的人。因为他以果等至禅那入定,所缘是出离一切行的涅槃,而不是依地而修定,所以被称为「不依地禅修」。其余各句亦同此理。这里,所有欲有和色有的生命形态都依于四大所造色而运转,因此已被涵盖在内;无色有则以它自身的形态被直接包含。如此穷尽一切世间之后,为了再用另一种方式表述,才又说出了「na ca imaṃ lokaṃ」等经句。因为一切世间,总括起来无非就是「此世间」和「他世间」这两部分。然而,「此世间」特指处于现法状态的有情相续,「他世间」是指归入另一生存界的有情相续;而脱离这两者、不被感官所缚的物质性相续,便是经中「yamidaṃ ubhayamantarena」等语所指的对象。显示巴利原文
Desanāsandhīti yathāvuttadesanantarena desanāya saṃsandanaṃ. Na ca pathaviṃ nissāyāti pathaviṃ visayasaṅkhātaṃ nissayaṃ katvā, pathaviṃ ālambitvāti attho. Jhāyīti phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyī. So hi sabbasaṅkhāranissaṭaṃ nibbānaṃ ālambitvā samāpajjanavasena jhāyati, na pathaviṃ nissāya jhāyatīti vutto. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca catūhi mahābhūtehi rūpappaṭibaddhavuttitāya sabbo kāmabhavo rūpabhavo ca gahitā. Arūpabhavo pana sarūpeneva gahitoti sabbaṃ lokaṃ pariyādiyitvā puna aññenapi pariyāyena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na ca imaṃ loka’’ntiādimāha. Sabbo hi loko idhaloko paraloko cāti dveva koṭṭhāsā honti. Yasmā pana ‘‘idhaloko’’ti visesato diṭṭhadhammabhūto sattasantāno vuccati. ‘‘Paraloko’’ti bhavantarasaṅkhepagato sattasantāno tadubhayavinimutto anindriyabaddho rūpasantāno. Tasmā taṃ sandhāya ‘‘yamidaṃ ubhayamantarenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
然而,有些人执取「两者之间」(ubhayamantarena)这句话,便主张存在「中有」(antarābhava),这是邪谬的。因为中有在阿毗达摩中已被否定。「所见」:指色处。「所闻」:指声处。「所感」:指经由接触而可取的香处、味处和触处。「所识」:指其余属于法所缘的色。「所得」:通过寻求或不通过寻求而已经得到的。「所寻」:对已得或未得的事物进行寻求。「所寻思、所伺察」:通过寻思和推度而攀缘的对象。「以意随虑」:用心反复思虑。「这位(漏尽者)……以无所依着的心,在含天神的世间中不被了知地禅修」:这位漏尽者以果等至禅那禅修时,由于先前已彻……显示巴利原文
Ye pana ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti vacanaṃ gahetvā antarābhavaṃ icchanti, tesaṃ taṃ micchā. Antarābhavo hi abhidhamme paṭikkhittoti. Diṭṭhanti rūpāyatanaṃ . Sutanti saddāyatanaṃ. Mutanti patvā gahetabbato gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanañca. Viññātanti avasiṭṭhaṃ dhammārammaṇapariyāpannarūpaṃ. Pattanti pariyesitvā vā apariyesitvā vā pattaṃ. Pariyesitanti pattaṃ vā appattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ. Vitakkitaṃ vicāritanti vitakkanavasena anumajjanavasena ca ālambitaṃ. Manasānucintitanti cittena anu anu cintitaṃ. Ayaṃ sadevake…pe… anissitena cittena na ñāyati jhāyantoti ayaṃ khīṇāsavo phalasamāpattijhānena jhāyanto pubbeva taṇhādiṭṭhinissayānaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā sadevake loke…pe… manussāya yattha katthacipi anissitena cittena jhāyati nāma. Tato eva loke kenacipi na ñāyati ‘‘ayaṃ idaṃ nāma nissāya jhāyatī’’ti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te nābhijānāma, kiṃ tvaṃ nissāya jhāyasī’’ti. (netti. 104);
现在,为了通过《瞿低迦经》与《婆迦梨经》阐明漏尽者之心在任何地方都无所依着的状态,而说“yathā māro”等。
「遍寻识」:在般涅槃之后向上遍寻识。以‘超越了戏论’等说明不可见的原因。
‘以无所依着之心,他们正在禅修而不被了知’:不仅是在无余涅槃界时,魔王等不知道漏尽者的心之趣向,就是在有余涅槃界时,他们同样也不知道它——这是它的意思。
这就是开示连接,意思是,如同《瞿低迦经》与《婆迦梨经》等诸经那样,义理的相互合会,便称为开示连接。显示巴利原文
Idāni khīṇāsavacittassa katthacipi anissitabhāvaṃ godhikasuttena (saṃ. ni. 1.159) vakkalisuttena (saṃ. ni. 3.87) ca vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā māro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Viññāṇaṃ samanvesantoti parinibbānato uddhaṃ viññāṇaṃ pariyesanto. ‘‘Papañcātīto’’tiādinā adassanassa kāraṇamāha. Anissitacittā na ñāyanti jhāyamānāti na kevalaṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā khīṇāsavassa cittagatiṃ mārādayo na jānanti, api ca kho saupādisesāyapi nibbānadhātuyā tassa taṃ na jānantīti attho. Ayaṃ desanāsandhīti godhikasuttavakkalisuttānaṃ viya suttantānaṃ aññamaññaatthasaṃsandanā desanāsandhi nāma.
「释义连接」:释义的连接就是释义连接,或是通过释义进行的连接。它的意思是,通过前面对该经的释义,连接后面的释义;或是通过后面的释义,连接前面的释义。
为了显示这一点,因为世尊大多时候先展示轮转,再展示还灭,所以说了“nissitacittā”等。其中,如果依人而说,‘这些人的心有所依着’(nissitaṃ cittaṃ etesanti),那么‘有所依心者’(nissitacittā)就是指那些补特伽罗;这是依于人施设的教示中应当解释的,这是它的意趣。如果是依法施设的教示,则是‘此中存在有所依着的心’(nissitaṃ cittaṃ etthāti),那么‘有所依心之处’(nissitacittā)就是指具有所依心之状态的经句,即那些依于渴爱与见的依着而转起的经句。其余的一切,都是明白易解的了。显示巴利原文
Niddesasandhīti niddesassa sandhi niddesasandhi, niddesena vā sandhi niddesasandhi. Purimena suttassa niddesena tasseva pacchimassa niddesassa, pacchimena vā purimassa sambandhananti attho. Taṃ dassetuṃ yasmā bhagavā yebhuyyena paṭhamaṃ vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā pacchā vivaṭṭaṃ dasseti, tasmā ‘‘nissitacittā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nissitaṃ cittaṃ etesanti nissitacittā, puggalā, niddisitabbā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāyāti adhippāyo. Dhammādhiṭṭhānāya pana nissitaṃ cittaṃ etthāti nissitacittā, nissitacittavanto taṇhādiṭṭhinissayavasena pavattā suttapadesā. Sesamettha sabbaṃ pākaṭameva.
7. 轮转(Āvaṭṭa)义之分别注释显示巴利原文
7. Āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
29 29. 其中,“何为轮转?”是轮转义之分别。
其中,「当策励」(ārambhathā)的意思是:应当修习名为策励界的精进。
「当发勤」(nikkamathā)的意思是:因为从懈怠分中出离,所以应当修习名为出勤界的、更为殊胜的精进。
「当致力于佛陀教法」(yuñjatha buddhasāsaneti):由于戒律的防护、诸根门上的守护、于食知量、正念正知——对这些法已得确立的人,因实行警寤精勤,策励与出勤二界便得成就,因此,在那个名为如是止与观的世尊教法中,你们应成为正精勤之人。
「当摧破死魔之军,犹如大象摧苇屋」(dhunātha maccuno senaṃ, naḷāgāraṃva kuñjaro):这样行道的人,其含义是:统领三界的死王能统驭众生,而名为他的军队的、无力而虚弱的烦恼聚,就像一头具足力量的大象瞬间摧毁芦苇所造的屋子一样;同样地,你们应当摧破、粉碎、毁坏这烦恼聚(相应部注 1.1.185)。显示巴利原文
29.Tatthakatamo āvaṭṭo hāroti āvaṭṭahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha ārambhathāti ārambhadhātusaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ karotha. Nikkamathāti kosajjapakkhato nikkhantattā nikkamadhātusaṅkhātaṃ taduttarivīriyaṃ karotha. Yuñjatha buddhasāsaneti yasmā sīlasaṃvaro indriyesu guttadvāratā bhojane mattaññutā satisampajaññanti imesu dhammesu patiṭṭhitānaṃ jāgariyānuyogavasena ārambhanikkamadhātuyo sampajjanti, tasmā tathābhūtasamathavipassanāsaṅkhāte bhagavato sāsane yuttappayuttā hotha. Dhunātha maccuno senaṃ, naḷāgāraṃva kuñjaroti evaṃ paṭipajjantā ca tedhātuissarassa maccurājassa vasaṃ satte netīti tassa senāsaṅkhātaṃ abalaṃ dubbalaṃ yathā nāma balūpapanno kuñjaro naḷehi kataṃ agāraṃ khaṇeneva viddhaṃseti, evameva kilesagaṇaṃ dhunātha vidhamatha viddhaṃsethāti attho (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.185).
现在,为说明这首偈颂正是为此目的而安立,便将意义结合起来展示,因此说:「当策励,当发勤」——这是精进的立足处等等。在此,「当策励,当发勤」这句话是精进的立足处,是精进努力的因,因为它激励人们着手精进;正如“勤修定慧生”(《法句经》282)所说的,勤修即是修习。这里,由于此后将讲到观修习,所以说明此处是指定修习,因此说:「当致力于佛陀的教法」——这是定的立足处。对于被称为“死魔之军”的烦恼军,正确地摧破它唯有依靠智慧才能做到,所以说:「当摧破……」——这是智的立足处。再者,为了显示在精进、定、慧相应这些法中,它们作为增上的作用,具有断除戏论、切断轮回之根、导向出离的能力,于是又说:「当策励,当发勤」——这是精进根的立足处等等。这些立足处就是指教说本身——也就是“那些精进的立足处等所讲的关于精进等的立足处”,其意思是:这是“当策励,当发勤”等的教说,并非指精进策励的具体事项等。正如注释所说的那样。显示巴利原文
Idāni yadatthaṃ ayaṃ gāthā nikkhittā, taṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ārambhatha nikkamathāti idaṃ vacanaṃ vīriyassa padaṭṭhānaṃ vīriyapayogassa kāraṇaṃ vīriyārambhe niyojanato, ‘‘yogā ve jāyatī bhūrī’’ti (dha. pa. 282) vacanato yogo bhāvanā. Tattha vipassanābhāvanāya vakkhamānattā samādhibhāvanā idhādhippetāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘yuñjatha buddhasāsaneti samādhissa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. ‘‘Maccuno sena’’nti vuttāya kilesasenāya sammā dhunanaṃ ñāṇeneva hotīti āha – ‘‘dhunātha…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Puna yathāvuttavīriyasamādhipaññāsampayuttesu ādhipaccakiccatāya papañcappahānasamatthā vaṭṭamūlaṃ chinditvā vivaṭṭaṃ pāpenti cāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ārambhatha nikkamathāti vīriyindriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Imāni padaṭṭhānāni desanāti ‘‘yānimāni vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā vīriyādīnaṃ padaṭṭhānāni vuttāni, sā ārambhatha nikkamathāti ādidesanā, na vīriyārambhavatthuādīnīti attho. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ.
如此,根据已安立的教说,依立足处的方式确定了意义之后,现在,为了以同类法与异类法的方式进行轮转,显示其基础,便说:“对于尚未致力于修习的众生,或已致力于修习的众生,这教说的策励……”等等。其含义是:对那些尚未致力于修习,或虽已致力于修习但智慧尚未成熟的众生,为令其未来能依习行的方式而了知,故有此教说的策励;又或是为了那些智慧已经成熟者。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yathānikkhittāya desanāya padaṭṭhānavasena atthaṃ niddhāretvā idāni taṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammavasena āvaṭṭetukāmo tassa bhūmiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayuñjantānaṃ vā sattānaṃ yoge yuñjantānaṃ vā ārambho’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yoge bhāvanāyaṃ taṃ ayuñjantānaṃ vā sattānaṃ aparipakkañāṇānaṃ vāsanābhāgena āyatiṃ vijānanatthaṃ ayaṃ desanārambho yuñjantānaṃ vā paripakkañāṇānanti.
「此放逸有二种」:这种放逸使人不专心修习,它由于自身原因的不同而有二种。「由无知所覆蔽」:被那会覆盖五蕴自相与共相的愚痴所覆蔽。「应知处」:指应被了知的对象,同时也是如“这是色,这是色的集起”等智慧生起的处所,故称应知处。因为不善法有多种,与之相应,放逸也有多种;但若约其根本——无明而言,则只有一种,故说「无明之一种」。对利得的决断、执取与悭吝,都包含在寻求、守护、受用之中。「欲贪与联结即是渴爱」:即使那些以渴爱为根的各种法,也都被摄归于此,故说「渴爱之三种」。显示巴利原文
So pamādo duvidhoti yena pamādena bhāvanaṃ nānuyuñjanti, so pamādo attano kāraṇabhedena duvidho. Aññāṇenāti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭicchādakena sammohena. Nivutoti chādito. Ñeyyaṭṭhānanti ñeyyañca taṃ ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, iti rūpassa samudayo’’tiādinā ñāṇassa pavattanaṭṭhānañcāti ñeyyaṭṭhānaṃ. Anekabhedattā pāpadhammānaṃ tabbasena anekabhedopi pamādo mūlabhūtāya avijjāya vasena eko evāti āha – ‘‘ekavidho avijjāyā’’ti. Lābhavinicchayapariggahamacchariyāni pariyesanāārakkhāparibhogesu antogadhāni. Chandarāgajjhosānā taṇhā evāti taṇhāmūlakepi dhamme ettheva pakkhipitvā ‘‘tividho taṇhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
「于有色之有」:是指色法。「联结」:即是渴爱的执著。这揭示了“渴爱以色身为立足处”这句话的含义。在无始的轮回中,男女对彼此色身都有贪爱,此义可依《心为所遍取经》(《增支部》1.1-10)来说明。而在无色法中,「痴」是指:因为触等诸法的本性极其微细,且以相续、作用和所缘的密集方式呈现,难以分解,因此对无色法产生愚痴,其中还隐含“众生依止于此”的意思。如此,对已确定为色身与名身所包含的五取蕴,以作为所缘的方式而存在的渴爱与无明,依四种取来分别解说,是为了显示那些蕴与取的苦集性质,以及应遍知与应断除的体性,因此说:「其中,色身……」等等。显示巴利原文
Rūpīsu bhavesūti rūpadhammesu. Ajjhosānanti taṇhābhiniveso. Etena ‘‘taṇhāya rūpakāyo padaṭṭhāna’’nti padassa atthaṃ vivarati. Anādimati hi saṃsāre itthipurisā aññamaññarūpābhirāmā, ayañcattho cittapariyādānasuttena (a. ni. 1.1-10) dīpetabbo. Arūpīsu sammohoti phassādīnaṃ atisukhumasabhāvattā santatisamūhakiccārammaṇaghanavinibbhogassa dukkarattā ca arūpadhammesu sammoho, sattānaṃ patiṭṭhitoti vacanaseso. Evaṃ niddhārite rūpakāyanāmakāyasaṅkhāte upādānakkhandhapañcake ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattaṃ taṇhañca avijjañca avisesena vuttaṃ catupādānānaṃ vasena vibhajitvā tesaṃ khandhānaṃ upādānānañca dukkhasamudayabhāvena sahapariññeyyapahātabbabhāvaṃ dasseti ‘‘tattha rūpakāyo’’tiādinā.
30 30. 这样,以放逸为入口确定了前二谛之后,再以放逸为入口来确定后二谛,故说:“其中,有……”等等。此处,「彼之」指放逸。「善通达」:即正确而完全地了知,是通过对味等的了知。「守护回摄」:指守护自心,称为放逸的回摄;即以它的对立面——不放逸的精勤修习来舍弃它。这称为「止」:从作用而言,它表示定。这是依离垢分的异类法而进行的轮转。“当人了知诸欲……的功德”这句话,则显示了证得止的方法。显示巴利原文
30. Evaṃ pamādamukhena purimasaccadvayaṃ niddhāretvā pamādamukheneva aparampi saccadvayaṃ niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha yo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti tassa pamādassa. Sampaṭivedhenāti sammā parijānanena assādādīnaṃ jānanena. Rakkhaṇā paṭisaṃharaṇāti attano cittassa rakkhaṇasaṅkhātā pamādassa paṭisaṃharaṇā, tappaṭipakkhena saṅkocanā appamādānuyogena yā khepanā. Ayaṃ samathoti kiccena samādhiṃ dasseti. Ayaṃ vodānapakkhavisabhāgadhammavasena āvaṭṭanā. ‘‘Yadā jānāti kāmānaṃ…pe… ānisaṃsa’’nti iminā samathādhigamassa upāyaṃ dasseti.
此处,「诸欲」:指事欲与烦恼欲。「于味而作味」:即对于缘于诸欲而生起的、名为乐与喜悦的味,由于执著于味而仅将其认作味。「过患」:如“诸欲乐少苦多”等(《中部》1.236)所说的过患、过失。「出离」:指初禅。正如所说:“这就是诸欲的出离,即所谓的出离”(《如是语》72)。「卑劣」:低劣的状态。「染污」:即令染污。确实,因诸欲故,众生被染污。「清净」:即令清净。而出离中的功德,即具备断除五盖等功德的特质。在此,当所说的止现前时。「彼种种察」:即慧。正如所说:“诸比丘,比丘心得定者,能如实了知”(《相应部》5.1071)。正如渴爱伴随无明,成为诸行的缘;同样,无明伴随渴爱,成为取的缘。当此二法被灭除时,取等也就不复存在。为了显示由断除渴爱与无明,整个轮回之苦便悉皆灭尽,故说“当这二法被断除时……”等等。其主旨为:这四圣谛是依据异类法与同类法的轮转而确定的。显示巴利原文
Tattha kāmānanti vatthukāmānañca kilesakāmānañca. Assādañca assādatoti kāme paṭicca uppajjamānaṃ sukhasomanassasaṅkhātaṃ assādaṃ assādatāya assādamattato. Ādīnavanti ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.236) vuttaṃ ādīnavaṃ dosaṃ. Nissaraṇanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhamma’’nti (itivu. 72). Okāranti lāmakabhāvaṃ. Saṃkilesanti saṃkilissanaṃ. Kāmahetu hi sattā saṃkilissanti. Vodānanti visujjhanaṃ. Nekkhamme ca ānisaṃsanti nīvaraṇappahānādiguṇavisesayogaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ yathāvutte samathe sati. Yā vīmaṃsāti yā paññā. ‘‘Samāhito, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1071) hi vuttaṃ. Yathā taṇhāsahitāva avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo, evaṃ avijjāsahitāva taṇhā upādānānaṃ paccayo. Tāsu niruddhāsu upādānādīnaṃ abhāvo evāti taṇhāavijjāpahānena sakalavaṭṭadukkhanirodhaṃ dassento ‘‘imesu dvīsu dhammesu pahīnesū’’tiādimāha. Imāni cattāri saccāni visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritānīti adhippāyo.
如此,在放下清净分的论述之后,为显示依其异类法与同类法而轮转,现在又放下染污分的论述,同样为显示依其异类法与同类法而轮转,而说出“犹如于根……”这首偈颂。其义为:犹如那被称为“根”、作为安立之因并隐藏于地下的部分,若未被斧砍等所中断、未被破坏,且自身坚固稳定,那么即使枝干被砍去,如同菩提树那样的树仍会再生;同样,若那名为渴爱随眠的根——即有身之树的根,未被道智的斧头彻底斩断,那么这种苦便会一再地、以后后之体相续生起,不会止息。为否定欲爱等,故说「有爱」。此法的缘:对于这称为有爱的法,由于通过覆盖有(生存)的过患等方式而执取乐,以此作为缘。正如所说:“诸比丘,若于可结之法观察乐味,渴爱便会增长”(《相应部》2.57)。因此他说:“因为无明缘,有爱生起”。此处,止与观即指道定与道慧,故说“以何彻底拔除渴爱随眠……”等。这四圣谛是由异类法与同类法的轮转而确定的。其余则如前所述。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vodānapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetvā idāni saṃkilesapakkhaṃ nikkhipitvā tassa visabhāgadhammavasena sabhāgadhammavasena ca āvaṭṭanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāpi mūle’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – yathā nāma patiṭṭhāhetubhāvena mūlanti laddhavohāre bhūmigate rukkhassa avayave pharasuchedādiantarāyābhāvena anupaddave tato eva daḷhe thire sati khandhe chinnepi assatthādirukkho ruhati, evameva taṇhānusayasaṅkhāte attabhāvarukkhassa mūle maggañāṇapharasunā anupacchinne tayidaṃ dukkhaṃ punappunaṃ aparāparabhāvena nibbattati na nirujjhatīti. Kāmataṇhādinivattanatthaṃ ‘‘bhavataṇhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etassa dhammassa paccayoti etassa bhavataṇhāsaṅkhātassa dhammassa bhavesu ādīnavappaṭicchādanādivasena assādaggahaṇassa paccayo. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘saṃyojanīyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.57). Tenevāha – ‘‘avijjāpaccayā hi bhavataṇhā’’ti. Idha samatho vipassanā ca maggasamādhi maggapaññā ca adhippetāti āha – ‘‘yena taṇhānusayaṃ samūhanatī’’tiādi. Imāni cattāri saccānīti visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritānīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
现在,不仅以已确定的异类、同类法而轮转,更依据经典圣典中所提到的那些法而轮转,为了显示“轮转义”而说出“诸恶莫作”的偈颂。此处,「诸恶」:指一切不善。「莫作」:即不令生起。「善」:指四地所摄的善法。「具足」:即获得。「自心清净」:令自心清净,此由阿拉汉果成就。如此,以戒防护而断除一切恶,以止与观而圆满成就善,以阿拉汉果令心清净——这便是诸佛的教法、教诫与教授。这是简略的释义,详细义理则可从经典本身明了。显示巴利原文
Idāni na kevalaṃ niddhāriteheva visabhāgasabhāgadhammehi āvaṭṭanaṃ, atha kho pāḷiāgatehipi tehi āvaṭṭanaṃ āvaṭṭahāroti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti gāthamāha . Tattha sabbapāpassāti sabbākusalassa. Akaraṇanti anuppādanaṃ. Kusalassāti catubhūmakakusalassa. Upasampadāti paṭilābho. Sacittapariyodāpananti attano cittavodānaṃ, taṃ pana arahattena hoti. Iti sīlasaṃvarena sabbapāpaṃ pahāya samathavipassanāhi kusalaṃ sampādetvā arahattaphalena cittaṃ pariyodapetabbanti etaṃ buddhāna sāsanaṃ ovādo anusiṭṭhīti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho, vitthārato pana attho pāḷito eva viññāyati.
在此,‘一切恶’等经文中所说的‘以嗔为源’,是指以嗔作为其源头,故称‘以嗔为源’,并非说嗔本身就是源头。因为离间语也可能依贪而生起。配合‘身恶行’一词,‘以嗔为源’使用的是中性词形。‘以贪为源’、‘以痴为源’等表述,道理亦同。而‘杂秽语’由掉举之心所引发,正因如此,才说它‘以痴为源’。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘sabbapāpaṃ nāmā’’tiādīsu dosasamuṭṭhānanti doso samuṭṭhānameva etassāti dosasamuṭṭhānaṃ, na doso eva samuṭṭhānanti. Lobhasamuṭṭhānāyapi pisuṇavācāya sambhavato. Kāyaduccaritanti padaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘dosasamuṭṭhāna’’nti napuṃsakaniddeso. Lobhasamuṭṭhānaṃ mohasamuṭṭhānanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Samphappalāpo uddhaccacittena pavattayatīti adhippāyena tassa mohasamuṭṭhānatā vuttā.
这样,通过恶行、不善业道和对业的分类,把「一切恶」里所说的“恶”作了区分之后,现在为了再展示依据不善根而来的非行道的分类,就开始说「不善根」等等。其中,「不善根导向加行」的意思是:贪等不善根会导引身和语的加行,也就是会引发身和语的加行。所谓「欲」,指的是以欲为原因。凡是“因欲而走向非行道”的,这种非行道的行径,就是「以贪为源」。对其余的表述,也应当按照这个道理来理解。至此,已经显示了「一切恶不作」里的“恶”,接下来要显示如何“不作”:通过「无贪……智慧……」这三善根,以断除三不善根的方式,来显示一切恶的不作、不令它生起。同样地,也通过「以舍断贪」等句所表达的梵住来说明。其中,喜能够平息不乐,而由于喜断除了作为其根本的痴,所以经中说:「痴因喜而被断除、被灭尽」。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ duccaritaakusalakammapathakammavibhāgena ‘‘sabbapāpa’’nti ettha vuttapāpaṃ vibhajitvā idānissa akusalamūlavasena agatigamanavibhāgampi dassetuṃ ‘‘akusalamūla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha akusalamūlaṃ payogaṃ gacchantanti lobhādiakusalāni kāyavacīpayogaṃ gacchantāni, kāyavacīpayogaṃ samuṭṭhāpentānīti attho. Chandāti chandahetu. Yaṃ chandā agatiṃ gacchati, idaṃ lobhasamuṭṭhānanti chandā agatiṃ gacchatīti yadetaṃ agatigamanaṃ, idaṃ lobhasamuṭṭhānanti. Evaṃ sesesupi attho daṭṭhabbo. Ettāvatā ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’nti ettha pāpaṃ dassetvā idāni tassa akaraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘lobho…pe… paññāyā’’ti tīhi kusalamūlehi tiṇṇaṃ akusalamūlānaṃ pahānavasena sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ anuppādanamāha. Tathā lobho upekkhāyātiādinā brahmavihārehi. Tattha aratiṃ vūpasamentī muditā tassā mūlabhūtaṃ mohaṃ pajahatīti katvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘moho muditāya pahānaṃ abbhatthaṃ gacchatī’’ti.
31 31. 现在,再用另一种方式来显示恶、以及不作恶,并借着解释其余词句的意义,来展示与法相应及不相应的回转,于是说道「一切恶,即是八种邪」等等。通过「不作、不造、不违行」这三个词,都是在说:不让那些邪法生起。反过来,通过「作、造、违行」这三个词,则都是在说:让它们生起。所谓「违行」,是指决意之后去造作。所谓「过去的道」,是指因为存在、运行了很长时间,所以称为古旧的道。所谓「道」,是指圣道。这也正如经中所说:「‘旧道’、‘古道’,就是这八支圣道的别名。」(《相应部》)或者,也可以从过去毗婆尸世尊所证悟、所教导的状态这个角度,来理解为「过去的道」。因为这首巴帝摩卡诵偈,正是正自觉者毗婆尸世尊的。显示巴利原文
31. Idāni aññenapi pariyāyena pāpaṃ tassa akaraṇañca dassetvā sesapadānañca atthavibhāvanamukhena sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbapāpaṃ nāma aṭṭha micchattānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Akiriyā akaraṇaṃ anajjhācāroti tīhipi padehi micchattānaṃ anuppādanameva vadati. Tathā kiriyā karaṇaṃ ajjhācāroti tīhipi padehi uppādanameva vadati. Ajjhācāroti adhiṭṭhahitvā ācaraṇaṃ. Atītassāti cirakālappavattivasena purāṇassa. Maggassāti ariyamaggassa. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘purāṇamaggaṃ purāṇaṃ añjasanti kho ariyassetaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.65 atthato samānaṃ). Atītena vā vipassinā bhagavatā yathādhigataṃ desitabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘atītassa maggassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vipassino hi ayaṃ bhagavato sammāsambuddhassa pātimokkhuddesagāthāti.
“由证悟而清净”的意思是:以遍知现观故。“它所清净的,这就是灭”:虽然无为界本身并不被任何一种染污所染污,但这是从证得者的角度而说的。因为只要该证得者的染污尚未完全消失,无为界对他来说便被称为“尚未清净”。正如证得涅槃时,应当止息的诸蕴依其是否还有残余,而分别称为“有余依”与“无余依”一样,此处也应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ paṭivedhenāti yassa pariññābhisamayena. Yaṃ pariyodāpitaṃ, ayaṃ nirodhoti yadipi asaṅkhatā dhātu kenaci saṃkilesena na saṃkilissati, adhigacchantassa pana puggalassa vasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa hi yāva saṃkilesā na vigacchanti, tāva asaṅkhatā dhātu apariyodapitāti vuccati. Yathā nibbānādhigamena ye khandhā vūpasametabbā, tesaṃ sesabhāvena asesabhāvena ca ‘‘saupādisesā’’ti ca, ‘‘anupādisesā’’ti ca vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这些四圣谛,是通过经典中所记载的、与法相应及不相应法的转起而确定的。为了再次通过这种经典所载的、与法相应及不相应法的转起来显示“转轮”,便诵出了“法确实会守护”这首偈颂。偈颂的词义前面已经解释过了。这里的“法”,特指福德之法。为了分别解说,便说:“所谓法,有两种:根律仪和道。”在此,应理解以根律仪为首,已经涵盖了所有的戒。而一切的“再生”,因为都与苦苦等苦相连,故都是苦的归宿,因此称为“苦趣”。就前面所说的两种法,为了显示第一种法如何被妥善修习,以及它如何守护人、将人安立于何处,于是进一步说明:“其中,那在律仪戒中从不违犯……”等等。现在,为了阐明此法必定能守护人免于恶趣,便引用了《伽弥尼相应》(《相应部》)中的《剑带之子经》。显示巴利原文
Imāni pāḷiāgatadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritāni cattāri saccāni punapi pāḷiāgatadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanena āvaṭṭahāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammo have rakkhatī’’ti gāthamāha. Tassā padattho pubbe vutto eva. Dhammoti puññadhammo idhādhippeto. Taṃ vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘dhammo nāma duvidho indriyasaṃvaro maggo cā’’ti āha. Indriyasaṃvarasīsena cettha sabbampi sīlaṃ gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Sabbā upapattiyo duggati dukkhadukkhatādiyogena dukkhā gatiyoti katvā. Yathāvutte duvidhe dhamme paṭhamo dhammo yathā suciṇṇo hoti, yato ca so rakkhati, yattha ca patiṭṭhāpeti, taṃ sabbaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yā saṃvarasīle akhaṇḍakāritā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idāni tassa dhammassa apāyato rakkhaṇe ekantikabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ gāmaṇisaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 4.358) asibandhakaputtasuttaṃ ābhataṃ.
在这里,“如此方式”的“如此”,指的就是这个方式。其中的“ca”字表合集,意思是:也应当以此方式来了解这个道理。“剑带之子”意为剑带的儿子。因为他在村中是长者,所以称为“村长”。“后地人”指后地地区的居民。“持水器者”指手里拿着自己水罐的人。“以水草为璎珞者”指那些清晨就从水中采集水草及青莲等,做成花环戴在身上,以此来检验水是否洁净的人。“入水者”指那些傍晚和早晨都到水中沐浴的人。“令投生”意为让他们投生到上界。“令正确地行”意为正确地引导他们。“进入天界”意为他们围绕着那人,一边说着:“去吧,贤者,去梵天世界吧!去吧,贤者,去梵天世界吧!”,一边就这样引导他进入天界。显示巴利原文
Tattha evanti pakārena. Ca-saddo sampiṇḍane, imināpi pakārena ayamattho veditabboti adhippāyo. Asibandhakaputtoti asibandhakassa nāma putto. Gāme jeṭṭhakatāya gāmaṇī. Pacchābhūmakāti pacchābhūmivāsino. Kāmaṇḍalukāti sakamaṇḍaluno. Sevālamālikāti pātova udakato sevālañceva uppalādīni ca gahetvā udakasuddhibhāvajānanatthaṃ mālaṃ katvā piḷandhanakā. Udakorohakāti sāyaṃ pātaṃ udakaṃ orohaṇakā. Uyyāpentīti upariyāpenti. Saññāpentīti sammā yāpenti. Saggaṃ nāma okkāmentīti parivāretvā ṭhitāva ‘‘gaccha, bho, brahmalokaṃ, gaccha, bho, brahmaloka’’nti vadantā saggaṃ pavesenti.
“不应随行”指不应追随他而去。“浮出”指从水中站起。“漂浮”指浮在水面。“登上陆地”指爬上干燥的陆地。“在那里,如果有……”意谓在那个地方,假使有的话。“碎石瓦片”即碎石或碎陶片。“它会下沉”是说那物会向下沉没,成为下沉之物。“向下沉去”即沉入水底。“道的”指圣道。“锋利性”就是锐利。然而,这里的锋利并非如刀剑般磨砺的锐利,而是指感官机能的敏锐,为说明此点,故说“增上性”。或有问难:“难道圣道不是能将自身所应断的烦恼毫无残余地彻底断尽吗?既然如此,又为何说存在‘极锋利’这回事?”诚然如是,然而,依据“如同见至者一样”的说法,信解脱者与见至者在断除烦恼上,仍可说存在某种微细的差别。不过,此处重点并不在此,因为这里的目的是要说明能超越一切再生。圣道是分阶段断除烦恼的,这种断除方式又取决于道法中根的迟钝、敏锐或极敏锐的状态差异。因此,在如同金刚喻法的诸道法中,达至顶点的最上道法所具有的那种“极敏锐的状态”,正是显示巴利原文
Anuparisakkeyyāti anuparigaccheyya. Ummujjāti uṭṭhaha. Uplavāti jalassa upariplava. Thalamuplavāti thalaṃ abhiruha. Tatra yāssāti tatra yaṃ assa, yaṃ bhaveyya. Sakkharakaṭhalanti sakkharā vā kaṭhalā vā. Sā adhogāmī assāti sā adho gaccheyya, heṭṭhāgāmī bhaveyya. Adho gaccheyyāti heṭṭhā gaccheyya. Maggassāti ariyamaggassa. Tikkhatāti tikhiṇatā. Sā ca kho na satthakassa viya nisitakaraṇatā, atha kho indriyānaṃ paṭubhāvoti dassetuṃ ‘‘adhimattatā’’ti āha. Nanu ca ariyamaggo attanā pahātabbakilese anavasesaṃ samucchindatīti atikhiṇo nāma natthīti? Saccametaṃ, tathāpi no ca kho ‘‘yathā diṭṭhippattassā’’ti vacanato saddhāvimuttadiṭṭhippattānaṃ kilesappahānaṃ pati atthi kāci visesamattāti sakkā vattuṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso na idhādhippeto, sabbupapattisamatikkamanassa adhippetattā. Yasmā pana ariyamaggena odhiso kilesā pahīyanti, tañca nesaṃ tathāpahānaṃ maggadhammesu indriyānaṃ apāṭavapāṭavatarapāṭavatamabhāvena hotīti yo vajirūpamadhammesu matthakappattānaṃ aggamaggadhammānaṃ paṭutamabhāvo. Ayaṃ idha maggassa tikkhatāti adhippetā. Tenevāha – ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo suciṇṇo sabbāhi upapattīhi rakkhatī’’ti. ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’tiādinā suttantarena (udā. 32) sugatisaññitānampi upapattīnaṃ duggatibhāvaṃ sādheti.
32 32. 现在,为了以简别的方式,将前文所说的法——贪爱与无明等异分法,以及止与观等同分法——应用于回转轮而加以显示,于是说:“其中,恶趣的因是贪爱与无明……”云云。由于前面已经说明过其理趣,所以这很容易理解。“这被称为梵行”意思是:这被称为圣者的、由止与观所组成的道梵行。“它守护”意思是:对于从一切恶趣中守护的人来说,作为圣道所缘的灭,被说成犹如守护一般,这是以相为主动者所作的譬喻。其用意在于:这四圣谛是通过异分法与同分法的回转方式而被简别出来的。显示巴利原文
32. Idāni yathāvuttassa dhammassa visabhāgadhammānaṃ taṇhāvijjādīnaṃ sabhāgadhammānañca samathavipassanādīnaṃ niddhāraṇavasena āvaṭṭahāraṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha duggatīnaṃ hetu taṇhā ca avijjā cā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ pubbe vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva. Idaṃ vuccati brahmacariyanti idaṃ ariyaṃ samathavipassanāsaṅkhātaṃ maggabrahmacariyanti vuccati. Yaṃ rakkhatīti sabbāhi duggatīhi rakkhantassa ariyamaggassa ārammaṇabhūto nirodho rakkhanto viya vutto, nimittassa kattubhāvena upacaritattā. Imāni cattāri saccāni visabhāgasabhāgadhammāvaṭṭanavasena niddhāritānīti adhippāyo.
第八节,「分别轮」的分别解释。显示巴利原文
8. Vibhattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
33 33. 其中,什么是分别理趣?即对分别理趣的解释。其中,法分别、地分别、足处分别,这是三种分别。在这三种分别中,因为一旦诸法被分别阐明,从中可得的“地分别”与“足处分别”在说明时便容易理解,所以先说明法分别。在说明法分别时,为了指出在十六种发趣中,哪些经典是特别应加以分别的依据,而说:“有两部经:熏习分和通达分。”其中,熏习是福德的修习,它的部分或类别是熏习分,对其有益的即是熏习分经。通达是突破、摧毁贪蕴等,它的部分是通达分,其余的解释与前面类似。于何经中教导了三种福行事,彼经即为熏习分。于何经中教导了有学与无学,彼经即为通达分。而这个意义,在圣典原文中将会出现。显示巴利原文
33.Tatthakatamo vibhattihāroti vibhattihāravibhaṅgo. Tattha dhammavibhattibhūmivibhattipadaṭṭhānavibhattīti tividhā vibhatti. Tāsu yasmā dhammesu vibhāgato niddiṭṭhesu tattha labbhamāno bhūmivibhāgo padaṭṭhānavibhāgo ca niddisiyamāno suviññeyyo hoti, tasmā dhammavibhattiṃ tāva niddisanto soḷasavidhe paṭṭhāne yesaṃ suttānaṃ vasena visesato vibhajitabbā, tāni suttāni dassetuṃ ‘‘dve suttāni vāsanābhāgiyañca nibbedhabhāgiyañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha vāsanā puññabhāvanā, tassā bhāgo koṭṭhāso vāsanābhāgo, tassa hitanti vāsanābhāgiyaṃ, suttaṃ. Nibbijjhanaṃ lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ padālanaṃ nibbedho, tassa bhāgoti sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Yasmiṃ sutte tīṇi puññakiriyavatthūni desitāni, taṃ suttaṃ vāsanābhāgiyaṃ. Yasmiṃ pana sekkhāsekkhā desitā, taṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. Ayañca attho pāḷiyaṃyeva āgamissati.
「福分」:指属于福分。同样,「果分」应知为属于果分。而「果」则指沙门果。「防护戒」:指巴帝摩卡防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护,这五种防护为防护戒。「断戒」:指彼分断、镇伏断、正断、安息断、出离断,这五种断。于这些断中,应知依除出离断外的四种断而成立断戒。「他」:指那位受持熏习分经的人。「以彼梵行」:意思是以那称为防护戒的殊胜修行为因,成为梵行者。这里并未否定八等至梵行;但有人读作「即以彼梵行」,若依其理解,则可能有否定之意。显示巴利原文
Puññabhāgiyāti puññabhāge bhavā. Tathā phalabhāgiyā veditabbā. Phalanti pana sāmaññaphalaṃ. Saṃvarasīlanti pātimokkhasaṃvaro, satisaṃvaro, ñāṇasaṃvaro, khantisaṃvaro, vīriyasaṃvaroti pañca saṃvarā saṃvarasīlaṃ. Pahānasīlanti tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ, nissaraṇappahānanti pañcappahānāni. Tesu nissaraṇappahānavajjānaṃ pahānānaṃ vasena pahānasīlaṃ veditabbaṃ. Soti yo vāsanābhāgiyasuttasampaṭiggāhako, so. Tena brahmacariyenāti tena saṃvarasīlasaṅkhātena seṭṭhacariyena kāraṇabhūtena brahmacārī bhavati. Ettha ca aṭṭhasamāpattibrahmacariyassa na paṭikkhepo, keci pana ‘‘teneva brahmacariyenā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ matena siyā tassa paṭikkhepo.
「住于断戒者」:意思是,依正断与安息断而住于断戒。「以彼梵行」:意思是,以彼殊胜的断戒,即道梵行。然而,那些读作「即以彼梵行」者,其经文为:「名为熏习分的经典,即是布施论、戒论、生天论、福报论」。而读作「以彼梵行」者,其经文为:「名为熏习分的经典,即是布施论、戒论、生天论、诸欲的过患、出离的功德」。那么,何种读法更为合理?应知后一种读法更为合理。因为后面将说「名为通达分的经典,即是宣说四圣谛」,大长老说法是不会有保留的。显示巴利原文
Pahānasīle ṭhitoti samucchedapaṭippassaddhippahānānaṃ vasena pahānasīle ṭhito. Tena brahmacariyenāti tena pahānasīlena visesabhūtena maggabrahmacariyena. Ye pana ‘‘teneva brahmacariyenā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ ayaṃ pāṭho ‘‘vāsanābhāgiyaṃ nāma suttaṃ dānakathā, sīlakathā, saggakathā, puññavipākakathā’’ti. Ye pana ‘‘tena brahmacariyenā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ ayaṃ pāṭho – ‘‘vāsanābhāgiyaṃ nāma suttaṃ dānakathā, sīlakathā, saggakathā kāmānaṃ ādīnavo nekkhamme ānisaṃso’’ti. Tattha katamo pāṭho yuttataroti? Pacchimo pāṭhoti niṭṭhaṃ gantabbaṃ. Yasmā ‘‘nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ nāma suttaṃ yā catusaccappakāsanā’’ti vakkhati, na hi mahāthero sāvasesaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desesīti.
通过「没有知」等文句,说明这两部经之所以超胜且不相混杂的原因。其中,「知」:是指作为圣道基础、能导向出离的观慧。「这四部经」:是指此熏习分与通达分,以及接下来要说的杂染分和无学分,合为四部经。「以说法」:即依说法的方式。「以一切方式的观察理趣审察后」:意思是,以全面的方式,将其安置于十一处中,用观察理趣审察之后。「应以合理理趣连结」这句话,说明了观察理趣与合理理趣是分别理趣的前行准备。「凡是智慧所及的范围」这句话,则说明了分别理趣的广大范围。显示巴利原文
‘‘Natthi pajānanā’’tiādinā ubhinnaṃ suttānaṃ sātisayaṃ asaṅkarakāraṇaṃ dasseti. Tattha pajānanāti ariyamaggassa padaṭṭhānabhūtā vuṭṭhānagāminī vipassanāpaññā. Imāni cattāri suttānīti imesaṃ suttānaṃ vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyānaṃ vakkhamānānañca saṃkilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyānaṃ vasena cattāri suttāni. Desanāyāti desanānayena. Sabbato vicayena hārena vicinitvāti sabbatobhāgena ekādasasu ṭhānesu pakkhipitvā vicayena hārena vicinitvā. ‘‘Yuttihārena yojetabbānī’’ti etena vicayahārayuttihārā vibhattihārassa parikammaṭṭhānanti dasseti. ‘‘Yāvatikā ñāṇassa bhūmī’’ti iminā vibhattihārassa mahāvisayataṃ dasseti.
34 如此,先依据“熏习分”和“决择分”的性质,对法作了部分分别之后;现在为了进一步用“杂染分”与“无学分”、“共”与“不共”等性质来分别它们,于是展开了“其中,哪些法是共的?”等探讨。其中,“哪些法”是指哪些具有自性的法。“共的”:意思是并非特殊独有的,指“共通、相同”。“二法”:指两种性质。因为此处的“法”字,是作“性质”来理解的,如同《无碍解道》里所说的“有生法的众生”那样。“名称共”:即名称上共通,意思是“善与不善”这类,有相同的名称。“所依共”:是依所依(色身)而共通,意思是由于它们生起在同一个相续的身心中,所以说有相同的所依。进一步来说,在杂染这一边,那些在断除烦恼时扮演同样角色的,就是“名称共”;那些在生起时伴随在一起的,就是“所依共”。同理,其他的共通性,也可以从“生起方式”、“作用”、“条件”或“对立面”等方面来归纳理解。“对于邪定性和不定性的人”:这句话是“凡夫”的标志。所以,所有类型的凡夫,譬如持常见者、持断见者等显示巴利原文
34. Evaṃ vāsanābhāgiyanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvehi dhamme ekadesena vibhajitvā idāni tesaṃ kilesabhāgiyaasekkhabhāgiyabhāvehi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhāvehi vibhajituṃ ‘‘tattha katame dhammā sādhāraṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha katame dhammāti katame sabhāvadhammā. Sādhāraṇāti avisiṭṭhā, samānāti attho. Dve dhammāti duve pakatiyo. Pakatiattho hi ayaṃ dhamma-saddo ‘‘jātidhammānaṃ sattāna’’ntiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.33) viya. Nāmasādhāraṇāti nāmena sādhāraṇā, kusalākusalāti samānanāmāti attho. Vatthusādhāraṇāti vatthunā nissayena sādhāraṇā, ekasantatipatitatāya samānavatthukāti attho. Visesato saṃkilesapakkhe pahānekaṭṭhā nāmasādhāraṇā, sahajekaṭṭhā vatthusādhāraṇā. Aññampi evaṃ jātiyanti kiccapaccayapaṭipakkhādīhi samānaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatānanti idaṃ puthujjanānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ. Tasmā sassatavādā ucchedavādāti ādiko sabbo puthujjanabhedo āharitvā vattabbo. Dasanappahātabbā kilesā sādhāraṇā micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatānaṃ eva ca sambhavato sammattaniyatānaṃ asambhavato ca. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo.
“圣弟子”:这里是指有学圣者。他所有的那类定,都是与未离染者共通的:这是指诸如世间定、色界定、无色界定、天住、梵住、初禅等至等,通过这些不同的方式表明它们是共通的。然而,善等至若从这个角度讲,可能会变成不共的。看到了这一过失,有些人便读作“无论哪种……那一切定,都是与未离染者共通的”。为什么有时被特别指出,有时又应被特别指出?而这类法究竟是如何“共通”的?带着这个问题仔细思考之后,为了厘清此义,论师接着说明:“共通的法,确实是如此相互的”等等。其意思是:正如前文所说,烦恼为邪定性和不定性的人所共有,这些“共通的法”并不是对“一切众生”普遍共有的。为什么呢?因为这些法是相互的、对各自的领域不会逾越。也就是说,它们活动的范围有着严格的限定;如果不是这样,那样的称谓根本不可能成立。并且,正因为这些法有这样的限定范围,所以论中说:“凡是被这些法所具足的人,他就不会超越那个法的范畴”。因为,并非邪定性和不定性的人就没有见道所断的烦恼,也不是说其他类型的人才会有。顺着这个逻辑,剩显示巴利原文
Ariyasāvakoti sekkhaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sabbā sā avītarāgehi sādhāraṇāti lokiyasamāpatti rūpāvacarā arūpāvacarā dibbavihāro brahmavihāro paṭhamajjhānasamāpattīti evamādīhi pariyāyehi sādhāraṇā. Kusalasamāpatti pana iminā pariyāyena siyā asādhāraṇā , imaṃ pana dosaṃ passantā keci ‘‘yaṃ kiñci…pe… sabbā sā avītarāgehi sādhāraṇā’’ti paṭhanti. Kathaṃ te odhiso gahitā, atha odhiso gahetabbā, kathaṃ sādhāraṇāti? Anuyogaṃ manasikatvā taṃ visodhento āha – ‘‘sādhāraṇā hi dhammā evaṃ aññamañña’’ntiādi. Tassattho – yathā micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatānañca sādhāraṇāti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sādhāraṇā dhammā na sabbasattānaṃ sādhāraṇatāya sādhāraṇā, kasmā? Yasmā aññamaññaṃ paraṃ paraṃ sakaṃ sakaṃ visayaṃ nātivattanti. Paṭiniyatañhi tesaṃ pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, itarathā tathā vohāro eva na siyāti adhippāyo. Yasmā ca ete eva dhammā evaṃ niyatā visayā, tasmā ‘‘yopi imehi dhammehi samannāgato na so taṃ dhammaṃ upātivattatī’’ti āha. Na hi micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatānañca dassanena pahātabbā kilesā na santi, aññesaṃ vā santīti evaṃ sesepi vattabbaṃ.
所谓“不共法”,是指各各人自身独有的法。在圣者中,依有学与无学法而寻求;在非圣者中,依一切无法被断除的方式而寻求,因为此外的状态都无法这样被指出。而且,正是由于它不具有共通性,才会随各各人而随顺所说的教法。为了显示这一意义,而说:“哪些法是不共的?乃至依教法而应被寻求:有学、无学、能者、不能者”。“第八者”:指为了亲证入流果而正在修行的人。“法性”:即法的自性,第一个是道位,第二个是果位。或者,第一个是正在被断除的烦恼之性,第二个是已断除的烦恼之性。再者,“第八者”:指处于不来道的人。“名为”:即称为有学。“法性”:即各个的道位与下一层的果位。“行道者”:即拥有道的人。“名为”:即称为行道者。如此,以“第八者”等显示了圣者个人中的不共法之后,为了在其他类人中显示此理,而说“如此,观察殊胜者”等。因为只有在世间法中才有低劣等状态。其中,“观察殊胜者”:即观察不共法的人。对于决定堕入邪道的人,不决定随转的法是共通的,决定随邪道而转的法是不共的。即使在决定邪道的人当中,对于持有定邪见的人显示巴利原文
Asādhāraṇo nāma dhammo tassa tassa puggalassa paccattaniyato ariyesu sekkhāsekkhadhammavasena anariyesu sabbābhabbapahātabbavasena gavesitabbo, itarassa tathā niddisitabbabhāvābhāvato. So ca kho sādhāraṇāvidhuratāya taṃ taṃ upādāya tathāvuttadesanānusārenāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘katame dhammā asādhāraṇā yāva desanaṃ upādāya gavesitabbā sekkhāsekkhā bhabbābhabbā’’ti iminā. Aṭṭhamakassāti sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa. Dhammatāti dhammasabhāvo paṭhamassa maggaṭṭhatā dutiyassa phalaṭṭhatā. Paṭhamassa vā pahīyamānakilesatā. Dutiyassa pahīnakilesatā. Puna aṭṭhamakassāti anāgāmimaggaṭṭhassa. Nāmanti sekkhāti nāmaṃ. Dhammatāti taṃtaṃmaggaṭṭhatā heṭṭhimaphalaṭṭhatā ca. Paṭipannakānanti maggasamaṅgīnaṃ. Nāmanti paṭipannakāti nāmaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhamakassā’’tiādinā ariyapuggalesu asādhāraṇadhammaṃ dassetvā itaresu nayadassanatthaṃ ‘‘evaṃ visesānupassinā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Lokiyadhammesu eva hi hīnādibhāvo. Tattha visesānupassināti asādhāraṇadhammānupassinā. Micchattaniyatānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā micchattaniyatā dhammā asādhāraṇā. Micchattaniyatesupi niyatamicchādiṭṭhikānaṃ aniyatā dhammā sādhāraṇā. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhi asādhāraṇāti iminā nayena visesānupassinā veditabbā.
如此,以种种方法开示了法的分别后,现在为分别开示地的分类与立足处的分类,而说“见地”等。其中,“见地”:即初道。因为在初道的刹那,圣弟子称为正在入正定,自此之后称为已入正定,故说“见地是入正定的立足处”。虽然每一个较低的道都是获得更高道的因——若不先断舍有身见等,则不能断除欲贪、嗔恚等——但为了显示圣道是自己果的殊胜因与近因,而说“修习地是获得更上果的立足处”。“乐行道速通智”:当与之相应的种种缘和合时,这是上等智慧者所有,故称为“观的立足处”。然而,其他三种行道亦能带来止。其中,由于显示了四种行道中最柔软的一种,其余几种也就一并被显示了,因此说“苦行道迟通智是止的立足处”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nānānayehi dhammavibhattiṃ dassetvā idāni bhūmivibhattiṃ padaṭṭhānavibhattiñca vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dassanabhūmī’’tiādimāha. Tattha dassanabhūmīti paṭhamamaggo. Yasmā pana paṭhamamaggakkhaṇe ariyasāvako sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamanto nāma hoti, tato paraṃ okkanto , tasmā ‘‘dassanabhūmi niyāmāvakkantiyā padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi heṭṭhimo heṭṭhimo maggo upariuparimaggādhigamassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīni appahāya kāmarāgabyāpādādippahānassa asakkuṇeyyattā. Tathāpi ariyamaggo attano phalassa visesakāraṇaṃ āsannakāraṇañcāti dassetuṃ ‘‘bhāvanābhūmiuttarikānaṃ phalānaṃ pattiyā padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sukhā paṭipadā khippābhiññā ñāṇuttarassa tathāvidhapaccayasamāyoge ca hotīti sā vipassanāya padaṭṭhānanti vuttā. Itarā pana tissopi paṭipadā samathaṃ āvahanti eva. Tāsu sabbamudutāya dassitāya sesāpi dassitā evāti āha – ‘‘dukkhā paṭipadā dandhābhiññā samathassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti.
“施所成福行事”:布施即是施所成,因能感得应供养的果报,故为福;此应行,故为行;为勤行成就等之依处,故为事;是名施所成福行事。“他闻”:即闻法。“共的”:并非如种子于芽,亦非如见地等于入正定那般专属,而是共通的,即意指即使有其他因缘也能令听闻发生。对此,有些人说,施主随喜己施成为习惯,故布施是听闻的缘。然而,施主为了希求布施的清净,当听闻布施、戒等种种殊胜功德时,善能精勤努力,因此布施被说为听闻佛法的因。显示巴利原文
Dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthūti dānameva dānamayaṃ, pujjaphalanibbattanaṭṭhena puññaṃ, tadeva kattabbato kiriyā, payogasampattiyādīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vatthu cāti dānamayapuññakiriyavatthu. Paratoghosassāti dhammassavanassa. Sādhāraṇanti na bījaṃ viya aṅkurassa, dassanabhūmiādayo viya vā niyāmāvakkantiādīnaṃ āveṇikaṃ, atha kho sādhāraṇaṃ, tadaññakāraṇehipi paratoghosassa pavattanatoti adhippāyo. Tattha keci dāyakassa dānānumodanaṃ āciṇṇanti dānaṃ paratoghosassa kāraṇanti vadanti. Dāyako pana dakkhiṇāvisuddhiṃ ākaṅkhanto dānasīlādiguṇavisesānaṃ savane yuttappayutto hotīti dānaṃ dhammassavanassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
“戒所成”:由于具足戒者无悔,心得等持,能思择法,故戒为思所成慧之因,因此说“戒所成”等。“修所成”:即名为奢摩他的修所成。“对于修所成者”:是指对于更高层次的禅那以及名为毗婆舍那的修所成而言。因为前者总是后者的立足处。然而,布施、持戒及世间修习,不仅如前所说为他闻等之因,依其渐次,亦为通达教理、多闻、修行业处、圣道、正见等之缘。为显此义,再以“施所成”等广为说明。同样,为显“居住于适当处等,是身远离、心远离等之因”这一道理,而说了“居住于适当的地方”等。其中,“于善思察”:即于省察观照。由“舍弃不善”一句,说明的是断遍知。“对于定根”:即对于道定根。其余内容皆易理解。显示巴利原文
Sīlasampanno vippaṭisārābhāvena samāhito dhammacintāsamattho hotīti sīlaṃ cintāmayañāṇassa kāraṇanti āha ‘‘sīlamaya’’ntiādi. Bhāvanāmayanti samathasaṅkhātaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ. Bhāvanāmayiyāti uparijhānasaṅkhātāya vipassanāsaṅkhātāya ca bhāvanāmayiyā. Purimaṃ purimañhi pacchimassa pacchimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Idāni yasmā dānaṃ sīlaṃ lokiyabhāvanā ca na kevalaṃ yathāvuttaparatoghosādīnaṃyeva, atha kho yathākkamaṃ pariyattibāhusaccakammaṭṭhānānuyogamaggasammādiṭṭhīnampi paccayā honti, tasmā tampi nayaṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘dānamaya’’ntiādinā desanaṃ vaḍḍhesi. Tathā patirūpadesavāsādayo kāyavivekacittavivekādīnaṃ kāraṇaṃ hotīti imaṃ nayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘patirūpadesavāso’’tiādimāha. Tattha kusalavīmaṃsāyāti paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya. Akusalapariccāgoti iminā pahānapariññā vuttāti. Samādhindriyassāti maggasamādhindriyassa. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
9. 转起分释义显示巴利原文
9. Parivattanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
35 35. 什么是“转起的纲要”?即对“转起分”的解说。在此,于解释经文时,针对所开示的善法与不善法,将作为其对立面的不善与善法,从应断除等角度加以拣择,这便是从对立面进行的“转起”。因此,经文最初说道:“对于具足正见的人,邪见已被摧毁”等等。其中,“正见”:即殊胜的见解,因具此见而称正见,此指具有正见之人。他的正见,应当理解或为前行部分的正见,或为出世间的正见。“邪见已被摧毁”:在前一种情况下,为观正见所断,即镇伏之义;在后一种情况下,为初道正见所断,即彻底正断之义。显示巴利原文
35.Tatthakatamo parivattano hāroti parivattanahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha yasmā saṃvaṇṇiyamāne sutte yathāniddiṭṭhānaṃ kusalākusaladhammānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūte akusalakusaladhamme pahātabbabhāvādivasena niddhāraṇaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘sammādiṭṭhissa purisapuggalassa micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavatī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha sammā pasatthā, sundarā diṭṭhi etassāti sammādiṭṭhi, tassa. Sā panassa sammādiṭṭhitā pubbabhāgasammādiṭṭhiyā vā lokuttarasammādiṭṭhiyā vā veditabbā. Micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā bhavatīti purimanaye vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiyā pahīnā hoti, vikkhambhitāti attho. Pacchimanaye paṭhamamaggasammādiṭṭhiyā pahīnā samucchinnāti attho.
“那些以邪见为缘的”:以邪执取为因,诸如不欲见圣者等的贪、嗔等,以及杀生等众多不善法——因其卑劣而称为“罪恶”,由不善巧所生而称为“不善”——这些都可能生起。这是相对于已开始修观者及圣者而言的。“法”:指止观法,或三十七菩提分法,即未生的得以生起,已生的得以修行圆满。“正思惟”等词句,也应以同样方式理解。不过,有一差别:关于“正解脱”等,“邪解脱”是指并非真实解脱,却自以为“我们已解脱”;或于非解脱处生起解脱之想。此处,依字面义,因这种解脱、这种脱离是错误、邪恶的,故称“邪解脱”。而八重邪解脱,如前所述,由邪执取力生起,具有落于两边的特征。“正解脱”则是果位上的法,或者也可指由于亲近邪见者而产生的邪脱离或邪解脱门。至于“邪解脱的如实知见”,则是以邪解脱与邪见为执取核心而生起的不善心念,乃至极微细者——即便造了恶,却自以为“我作了善事”时。显示巴利原文
Ye cassa micchādiṭṭhipaccayāti micchābhinivesahetu ye ariyānaṃ adassanakāmatādayo lobhādayo pāṇātipātādayo ca aneke lāmakaṭṭhena pāpakā akosallasambhūtaṭṭhena akusalā dhammā uppajjeyyuṃ. Imassa āraddhavipassakassa ariyassa ca. Dhammāti samathavipassanādhammā, sattattiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammā vā anuppannā vā sambhavanti uppannā, bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Sammāsaṅkappassātiādīnampi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – sammāvimuttiādīnaṃ micchāvimutti avimuttāva samānā ‘‘vimuttā maya’’nti evaṃsaññino avimuttiyaṃ vā vimuttisaññino. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – micchā pāpikā vimutti vimokkho etassāti micchāvimutti. Aṭṭhaṅgā ca micchāvimutti yathāvuttenākārena micchābhinivesavasena ca pavattā antadvayalakkhaṇā. Sammāvimutti pana phaladhammā, micchādiṭṭhike samāsevato micchāvimokkho vā micchāvimutti. Micchāvimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana micchāvimokkhe micchādiṭṭhiyā ca sāranti gahaṇavasena pavatto akusalacittuppādo antamaso pāpaṃ katvā ‘‘sukataṃ mayā’’ti paccavekkhato uppannamoho ca. Sammāvimuttiñāṇadassanassāti ettha sekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ sammāvimuttiñāṇadassananti adhippetaṃ. Tañhi uttaribhāvanāpāripūriyā saṃvattati.
36 如此,先以正见等为开头说明了邪见等之后,为进一步显示通过远离杀生、不与取、欲邪行等来转变杀生等恶行,而开始“于他……”等开示。其中,“适时而说者”是说明其特相的言辞。意思是:他说话适时、有理据、有节制、与义相应;这样,他便是为了断除绮语而如此修道之人。显示巴利原文
36. Evaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādimukhena micchādiṭṭhiādiṃ dassetvā puna pāṇātipātaadinnādānakāmesumicchācārādito veramaṇiyādīhi pāṇātipātādīnaṃ parivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yassā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kālavādissāti lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Kālena sāpadesaṃ pariyantavatiṃ atthasañhitanti so samphappalāpassa pahānāya paṭipanno hotīti vuttaṃ.
又通过“然而,任何那些……”等开示,以另一种方式说明:正是以正见等为首,来转化邪见等。其中,“现见的”即现前可见的;“有理由的”指具有正当理由;“应受责备的”指应当受到谴责;“论诤及随诤”即论诤以及随之而起的论诤;也有读作“论诤随逐”的,意思是论诤的相续;“应受供养的”指值得供养;“应受赞叹的”指值得赞叹。显示巴利原文
Puna ‘‘ye ca kho kecī’’tiādinā sammādiṭṭhiādimukheneva micchādiṭṭhiādīhi eva parivattanaṃ pakārantarena dasseti. Tattha sandiṭṭhikāti paccakkhā. Sahadhammikāti sakāraṇā. Gārayhāti garahitabbayuttā. Vādānuvādāti vādā ceva anuvādā ca. ‘‘Vādānupātā’’tipi pāṭho, vādānupavattiyoti attho. Pujjāti pūjanīyā. Pāsaṃsāti pasaṃsitabbā.
又通过“然而,任何那些……”等,显示以中道来转化两个极端。其中,“应当受用”等四词,应联系事欲(所缘欲)来理解;而“应当修习”“应当多修习”这两个词,则应联系烦恼欲来理解。他们的非法:对他们而言,应修习的才是法,而诸欲正是他们所应修习、所期望的,离欲则是诸欲的对立面;如此一来,离欲便成了他们的非法——这是其意旨所在。显示巴利原文
Puna ‘‘ye ca kho kecī’’tiādinā majjhimāya paṭipattiyā antadvayaparivattanaṃ dasseti. Tattha bhuñjitabbātiādīni cattāri padāni vatthukāmavasena yojetabbāni. Bhāvayitabbā bahulīkātabbāti padadvayaṃ kilesakāmavasena. Tesaṃ adhammoti bhāvetabbo nāma dhammo siyā, kāmā ca tesaṃ bhāvetabbā icchitā, kāmehi ca veramaṇī kāmānaṃ paṭipakkho, iti sā tesaṃ adhammo āpajjatīti adhippāyo.
“导向出离的法”指伴随观的圣道。“苦”指那种认为“我们将通过折磨身体来消除恶业”而发起的苦身之行。“乐”指由无过失的缘所生的受用乐。在这些情形中,也应以已经叙述过的方式来说明如何成为非法。接着,为了显示以不净想等为首,来转化净想等,而说了“或者,正如……”等。对于一个已着手修观的人,由于烦恼不净的渗漏,三界诸行都显现为不净,因此说:“安住于对一切行观不净者”。又通过“而任何那些……”等,阐明对立面的相状。其中,“已进入”的意思是已违犯、已深入,即已遍知。显示巴利原文
Niyyāniko dhammoti saha vipassanāya ariyamaggo. Dukkhoti pāpaṃ nijjarāpessāmāti pavattitaṃ sarīratāpanaṃ vadati. Sukhoti anavajjapaccayaparibhogasukhaṃ. Etesupi vāresu vuttanayeneva adhammabhāvāpatti vattabbā. Idāni asubhasaññādimukhena subhasaññādiparivattanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āraddhavipassakassa kilesāsucipaggharaṇavasena tebhūmakasaṅkhārā asubhato upaṭṭhahantīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasaṅkhāresu asubhānupassino viharato’’ti. ‘‘Yaṃ yaṃ vā panā’’tiādinā paṭipakkhassa lakkhaṇaṃ vibhāveti. Tattha ajjhāpannoti adhiāpanno, abhiupagato pariññātoti attho.
第十、同义词分释义显示巴利原文
10. Vevacanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
37 什么是“同义词的引导”?即对同义词引导的分别。为显示同义词的开示方式,此处说:“世尊以一种法,用种种相互的同义词来开示。”“同义词”即异门之词,词义如前已释。那么,世尊为何要以多种异门开示同一种法?答言:为在开示时及于未来,令某些人能以某种方式领悟其义,故用异门语;为令心意散乱、心不在焉者,借另一异门领悟其义,故用异门语;为令钝根者反复了知而不忘失——纵使同一言辞重复宣说,他们亦可能由此通达,故用异门语;为避免同一文句可能产生的多义误解——因同一文句可含多义——故用异门语;为令众人依种种不同的认知了知种种意义,如辞典中所明,故用异门语;为令说法者易于成就经义的联结与广博通达,故用异门语;为显示自己证得法无碍解与词无碍解,或为于可教化者心田播下种子,世尊即以异门语而作开示。显示巴利原文
37.Tatthakatamo vevacano hāroti vevacanahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha yathā vevacananiddeso hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ bhagavā dhammaṃ aññamaññehi vevacanehi niddisatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vevacanehīti pariyāyasaddehīti attho. Padattho pubbe vutto eva. Kasmā pana bhagavā ekaṃ dhammaṃ anekapariyāyehi niddisatīti? Vuccate – desanākāle āyatiñca kassaci kathañci tadatthapaṭibodho siyāti pariyāyavacanaṃ, tasmiṃ khaṇe vikkhittacittānaṃ aññavihitānaṃ aññena pariyāyena tadatthāvabodhanatthaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ. Teneva padena puna vacane tadaññesaṃ tattha adhigatatā siyāti mandabuddhīnaṃ punappunaṃ tadatthasallakkhaṇe asammosanatthaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ. Anekepi atthā samānabyañjanā hontīti yā atthantaraparikappanā siyā, tassā parivajjanatthampi pariyāyavacanaṃ anaññassa vacane anekāhi tāhi tāhi saññāhi tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ ñāpanatthampi pariyāyavacanaṃ seyyathāpi nighaṇṭusatthe. Dhammakathikānaṃ tantiatthupanibandhanaparāvabodhanānaṃ sukhasiddhiyāpi pariyāyavacanaṃ. Attano dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāppattiyā vibhāvanatthaṃ, veneyyānaṃ tattha bījāvāpanatthaṃ vā pariyāyavacanaṃ bhagavā niddisati.
简而言之,因正自觉者于法界善能通达,于一切义无碍智行,于一切言说亦然,故能以无量异门令悟同一义,于义不迟疑、不繁冗,亦不损减法的开示。为显示“此乃诸佛不共之法”,便从“期望(āsā)”等开始说明异门开示。释义时说:“期望,是对未来可希求义的渴爱。”此处“未来义”指尚未到来、可希求的利益。以“必当到来”等说明其生起。面向未至之义的渴爱是“期望”;面向未至及现在之义的渴爱则是“希求(pihā)”,此是二者差别。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ bahunā yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā sammāsambuddhā yathā sabbasmiṃ atthe appaṭihatañāṇācārā, tathā sabbasmiṃ saddavohāreti ekampi atthaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi bodheti, na tattha dandhāyitattaṃ vitthāyitattaṃ atthassa. Nāpi dhammadesanāhāni, āveṇikovāyaṃ buddhadhammoti pariyāyadesanaṃ dassento ‘‘āsā’’tiādimāha. Tattha atthaṃ dassento ‘‘āsā nāma vuccati yā bhavissassa atthassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha bhavissassa atthassāti anāgatassa icchitabbassa atthassa. ‘‘Avassaṃ āgamissatī’’tiādinā tassā pavattiyākāraṃ dasseti. Anāgatatthavisayā taṇhā āsā. Anāgatapaccuppannatthavisayā taṇhā pihāti ayametāsaṃ viseso.
“等待利益成就”,是指以那种心念等待所愿之事的成就,或守护、保护已成就之事。这称为“欢喜”(abhinandanā),也就是对已得之利的耽著(kelāyanā)。为了从众生诸行的角度分别显示这种利益的成就,世尊说:“所爱的亲戚”等。其中,“法”指色等所缘。对于极可爱的所缘,便生起欢喜;为了显示即使对不可爱的所缘也会欢喜,世尊说“或对不厌恶的(所缘)也欢喜”。这是由于以颠倒的力量,众生将本来可厌的诸行当作不可厌的来欢喜。显示巴利原文
Atthanipphattipaṭipālanāti yāya icchitassa atthassa nipphattiṃ paṭipāleti āgameti, yāya vā nipphannaṃ atthaṃ paṭipāleti rakkhati. Ayaṃ abhinandanā nāma, yathāladdhassa atthassa kelāyanā nāmāti attho. Taṃ atthanipphattiṃ sattasaṅkhāravasena vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘piyaṃ vā ñāti’’ntiādimāha . Tattha dhammanti rūpādiārammaṇadhammaṃ, atiiṭṭhārammaṇaṃ abhinandati, aniṭṭhārammaṇehipi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appaṭikkūlato vā abhinandatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭikkūlepi hi vipallāsavasena sattaṃ, saṅkhāraṃ vā appaṭikkūlato abhinandati.
在那诸多界中生起的渴爱,被称为“在诸多界中的贪流”。为了将此诸界予以分别而显示,故说“眼界”等。虽然在《界分别》等中,也提到了欲界等其他许多种界,但为了表明它们也都包含于此处,所以这里只举出十八界。所谓“有些人倾向于色”等,即是显示渴爱在这些界中的活动方式。这其中,由于五种内入处界、七种识界以及法界都已含摄在法所缘之中,因此应当了知:举出十八界之后,实际上只是区别出六种渴爱的生起处。属于渴爱的那一部分,即使是由出离所生起的忧之伺察,也会在那些对无上解脱生起渴求的人心中生起,正如经典所说“以希求为缘而有忧”,何况是由世俗所生起的忧之伺察呢?因此,这二十四个方面,被称为“渴爱的部分”。而基于世俗的舍,由于是无智慧之舍的状态,会成为如其执取般的条件,因此说“这六种世俗的舍,属于见解的一部分”。显示巴利原文
Yāsu anekadhātūsu pavattiyā taṇhā ‘‘anekadhātūsu sarā’’ti vuttā, tā dhātuyo vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhudhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kiñcāpi dhātuvibhaṅgādīsu (vibha. 172 ādayo) kāmadhātuādayo aññāpi anekadhātuyo āgatā, tāsampi ettheva samavarodhoti dassanatthaṃ aṭṭhārasevettha dassitā. Keci rūpādhimuttātiādi tāsu dhātūsu taṇhāya pavattidassanaṃ. Tattha yasmā pañca ajjhattikā dhātuyo satta ca viññāṇadhātuyo dhammadhātu ca dhammārammaṇeneva saṅgahitā, tasmā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo uddisitvā chaḷeva taṇhāya pavattiṭṭhānāni vibhattānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṇhāpakkhā nekkhammassitāpi domanassupavicārā tassa anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati ‘‘pihapaccayā domanassa’’nti vacanato, ko pana vādo gehassitesu domanassupavicāresūti imāni catuvīsati padāni ‘‘taṇhāpakkho’’ti vuttaṃ. Gehassitā pana upekkhā aññāṇupekkhatāya yathābhinivesassa paccayo hotīti ‘‘yā cha upekkhā gehassitā, ayaṃ diṭṭhipakkho’’ti vuttaṃ.
38 现在,为了显示那些伺察的渴爱之同义语,世尊说道:“正是那种以渴望为形态的法喜”等。另一方面,为了以“心、慧、世尊、法、僧、戒、施”这些同义语的抉择,来分别阐明同义词的引导之理,所以开始阐述“心、意、识”等。其中,对于“慧”,应当了知还有这样一组同义词:“慧、了知、简择、审择、法简择、总相把握、别相把握、对别相的再把握、聪敏、善巧、明彻、明辨、思考、遍察、广慧、深慧、导引、观、正知、刺棍、慧、慧根、慧力、慧刀、慧殿、慧光、慧明、慧炬、慧宝、不迷”等。显示巴利原文
38. Idāni tesaṃ upavicārānaṃ taṇhāpariyāyaṃ dassento ‘‘sāyeva patthanākārena dhammanandī’’tiādimāha. Puna cittaṃ paññā bhagavā dhammo saṅgho sīlaṃ cāgoti imesaṃ pariyāyavacananiddhāraṇena vevacanahāraṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘cittaṃ mano viññāṇa’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘aññampi evaṃ jātiya’’nti iminā paññā pajānanā vicayo pavicayo dhammavicayo sallakkhaṇā upalakkhaṇā paccupalakkhaṇā paṇḍiccaṃ kosallaṃ nepuññaṃ vebhabyā cintā upaparikkhā bhūrī medhā pariṇāyikā vipassanā sampajaññaṃ patodo paññā paññindriyaṃ paññābalaṃ paññāsatthaṃ paññāpāsādo paññāāloko paññāobhāso paññāpajjoto paññāratanaṃ amohoti (mahāni. 149) evamādīnampi paññāya pariyāyasaddānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“五出世根”是指“尽智”等五根,它们是出世间的,意思是,这些是出世间慧的同义词。“一切慧”是指用其余同义词所说的一切慧,包含了世间与出世间的和合慧。“又以……”等文字,显示了还可以用这种方式来安立同义词。“以增上的意义”是指,在具有胜解之相中,成就了增上的意义。正如在佛随念的解说中所述,即“依照‘彼世尊即是阿拉汉……世尊’等经典,应当以众多同义词随念世尊”——抓住了这句话后,应当如此理解其关联:依此道理,从达到力的成就、得证无所畏,一直到作法的光明与炬火,对于佛陀世尊的这些同义词,应当在佛随念中予以阐述。然而,这些也仅仅是世尊的少部分同义词而已。因为佛陀的功德无量无数,而世尊的一切名号,也都是依其功德而安立的。正如法将(舍利弗尊者)所说:显示巴利原文
Pañcindriyānilokuttarānīti khaye ñāṇantiādīni pañcindriyāni lokuttarāni, lokuttarapaññāya vevacanānīti attho. Sabbā paññāti itarehi vevacanehi vuttā sabbā paññā lokiyalokuttaramissikāti attho. ‘‘Api cā’’tiādinā imināpi pariyāyena vevacanaṃ vattabbanti dasseti. Ādhipateyyaṭṭhenāti adhimokkhalakkhaṇe ādhipateyyaṭṭhena. Yathā ca buddhānussatiyaṃvuttanti yathā buddhānussatiniddese (visuddhi. 1.123) ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā pāḷiyā so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ…pe… itipi bhagavāti anekehi vevacanehi bhagavā anussaritabboti vuttaṃ. Imināva nayena balanipphattigato vesārajjappatto yāva dhammobhāsapajjotakaroti, etehi pariyāyehi buddhassa bhagavato vevacanaṃ buddhānussatiyaṃ vattabbanti padaṃ āharitvā sambandho veditabbo. Etānipi katipayāni eva bhagavato vevacanāni. Asaṅkhyeyyā hi buddhaguṇā guṇanemittakāni ca bhagavato nāmāni. Vuttañhetaṃ dhammasenāpatinā –
具足功德的大牟尼,其名号数量不可计;纵依功德举出千名,也仍只是众多名号中的一部分。
于法随念中,对“无为”等词的解释如下:不依任何因缘而造作,故称“无为”;无边际与灭坏,故称“无边”;不为诸漏所缘,故称“无漏”;具有无颠倒的自性,故称“真谛”;为轮回的彼岸,故称“彼岸”;是最微细智的境界,且自性微细,故称“微细”;未积集智慧资粮者不能见,故称“极难见”;不为生、老所逼,故称“不老”;本性坚固,故称“恒常”;不为老死所破坏,故称“不坏”;不能由肉眼及天眼所见,故称“无示现”;远离贪等戏论,故称“无戏论”;是烦恼与诸行寂止之因,故称“寂静”。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāma sahassato’’ti. (udā. aṭṭha. 53);
为甘露因,且无灭坏,故称“不死”;具最上义与无热义,故称“胜妙”;无刀剑、业、烦恼、异熟等轮回,故称“吉祥”;不为四种系缚所害,故称“安稳”;渴爱于此耗尽,故称“爱尽”;纵是修诸福德者亦仅偶尔得见,故称“稀有”;前所未有,故称“未曾有”;无有障碍,故称“无伤”;是无障碍之因,故称“无伤法”。显示巴利原文
Dhammānussatiyaṃ ‘‘asaṅkhata’’ntiādīsu na kenaci paccayena saṅkhatanti asaṅkhataṃ. Natthi etassa anto vināsoti anantaṃ. Āsavānaṃ anārammaṇato anāsavaṃ. Aviparītasabhāvattā saccaṃ. Saṃsārassa paratīrabhāvato pāraṃ. Nipuṇañāṇavisayattā sukhumasabhāvattā ca nipuṇa. Anupacitañāṇasambhārehi daṭṭhuṃ na sakkāti sududdasaṃ. Uppādajarāhi anabbhāhatattā ajajjaraṃ. Thirabhāvena dhuvaṃ. Jarāmaraṇehi apalujjanato apalokitaṃ. Maṃsacakkhunā dibbacakkhunā ca apassitabbattā anidassanaṃ. Rāgādipapañcābhāvena nippapañcaṃ. Kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ vūpasamahetutāya santaṃ.
由于是甘露之因,且无灭坏,故称不死;具最上义与无热义,故称胜妙;无刀剑、业、烦恼、异熟之轮回,故称吉祥;不为四轭所危害,故称安稳;渴爱在此耗尽,故称爱尽;即使造作福德之人亦仅偶尔得见,故称稀有;因前所未有,故称未曾有;因无障碍,故称无伤;为无障碍之因,故称无伤法。(《相应尼迦耶注》3.5.377-409)显示巴利原文
Amatahetutāya bhaṅgābhāvato ca amataṃ. Uttamaṭṭhena atappakaṭṭhena ca paṇītaṃ. Asivānaṃ kammakilesavipākavaṭṭānaṃ abhāvena sivaṃ. Catūhi yogehi anupaddavabhāvena khemaṃ. Taṇhā khīyati etthāti taṇhakkhayo. Katapuññehipi kadācideva passitabbattā acchariyaṃ. Abhūtapubbattā abbhutaṃ. Anantarāyattā anītikaṃ. Anantarāyabhāvahetuto anītikadhammaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.377-409).
有不生之自性,故称‘不生’。由此,故称‘无有’。此二皆示无有生起。不为一切所恼害,故称‘无恼害’。不由任何缘所造作,故称‘非所作’。此处无有忧,故称‘无忧’。忧因离去,故称‘离忧’。不为一切所逼迫,故称‘无逼迫’。为无逼迫之因,故称‘无逼迫法’。显示巴利原文
Anibbattisabhāvattā ajātaṃ. Tato eva abhūtaṃ. Ubhayenāpi uppādarahitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kenaci anupaddutattā anupaddavaṃ. Na kenaci paccayena katanti akataṃ. Natthi ettha sokoti asokaṃ. Sokahetuvigamena visokaṃ. Kenaci anupasajjitabbattā anupasaggaṃ. Anupasaggabhāvahetuto anupasaggadhammaṃ.
甚深智所行境,故称‘甚深’;若无正道,则不能见、不能得,故称‘难见’;超越一切世间而住,故称‘超越’;更无超越者,故称‘无上’;无等同、相似者,故称‘无等’;无对等者,故称‘无等对者’;以最上义,故称‘胜’,或以最可赞叹故称‘胜’;轮回苦所逼迫者所应依止,故称‘窟宅’;由此守护,故称‘救护’;无尘劳,故称‘无尘’;无瑕疵,故称‘无瑕’;无过失,故称‘无秽’;贪等垢尽,故称‘无垢’;不为四瀑流所没,故称‘洲渚’;因轮回寂止之乐,故称‘乐’;无有限量之法,故称‘无量’,亦以不可计量故称‘无量’;于轮回大海中不沉没之依止处,故称‘依止处’;无贪等执取、无摄受,故称‘无所’——应如此了知这些词义。显示巴利原文
Gambhīrañāṇagocarato gambhīraṃ. Sammāpaṭipattiṃ vinā passituṃ pattuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā duppassaṃ. Sabbalokaṃ uttaritvā ṭhitanti uttaraṃ. Natthi etassa uttaranti anuttaraṃ. Samassa sadisassa abhāvena asamaṃ. Paṭibhāgābhāvena appaṭisamaṃ. Uttamaṭṭhena jeṭṭhaṃ, pāsaṃsatamattā vā jeṭṭhaṃ. Saṃsāradukkhaṭṭitehi letabbato leṇaṃ. Tato rakkhaṇato tāṇaṃ. Raṇābhāvena araṇaṃ. Aṅgaṇābhāvena anaṅgaṇaṃ. Niddosatāya akācaṃ. Rāgādimalāpagamena vimalaṃ. Catūhi oghehi anajjhottharaṇīyato dīpo. Saṃsāravūpasamasukhatāya sukhaṃ. Pamāṇakaradhammābhāvato appamāṇaṃ, gaṇetuṃ etassa na sakkāti ca appamāṇaṃ. Saṃsārasamudde anosīdanaṭṭhānatāya patiṭṭhā. Rāgādikiñcanābhāvena pariggahābhāvena ca akiñcananti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
在僧随念中,「众生之坚实」:因具足戒坚实等诸坚实功德,于众生中为坚实者。「众生之醍醐」:如同乳制品中的醍醐,于众生中为醍醐。「众生之提拔者」:即以坚实功德之力,应从众生中被提拔者。「众生之柱」:因功德有不动之性,故为众生之柱。「香花」:因功德光辉照耀,于众生中,如诸有情的香花。显示巴利原文
Saṅghānussatiyaṃ sattānaṃ sāroti sīlasārādisāraguṇayogato sattesu sārabhūto. Sattānaṃ maṇḍoti gorasesu sappimaṇḍo viya sattesu maṇḍabhūto. Sāraguṇavaseneva sattesu uddharitabbato sattānaṃ uddhāro. Niccalaguṇatāya sattānaṃ esikā. Guṇasobhāsurabhibhāvena sattānaṃ pasūnaṃ surabhi kusumanti attho.
诸功德中以慧为最上首,戒是令慧增辉之因,故说戒为「最上首的庄严」。戒中圆满行者,无有未成就之功德,故说「戒为宝藏,以能超越一切恶趣故」。此义可依《若希望经》(中部1.64等)而明。又言:「诸比丘,有戒者之心誓愿成就,因清净故。」(长部3.337;相应部4.352;增支部8.35)所言「技艺」指弓术等;「财谷」指应被谷物所利益之物。「因法观察性」谓以止观等法观察之状态。「观察的意义」:譬如立于七层高楼之上,立于戒之后,能以神通智眼观察世间。而戒随转于一切地,四地善法亦随此而转。余者易明。显示巴利原文
Guṇesu uttamaṅgaṃ paññā tassā upasobhāhetutāya sīlaṃ uttamaṅgopasobhanaṃ vuttaṃ. Sīlesu paripūrakārino anijjhantā nāma guṇā natthīti ‘‘nidhānañca sīlaṃ sabbadobhaggasamatikkamanaṭṭhenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayañca attho ākaṅkheyyasuttena (ma. ni. 1.64 ādayo) dīpetabbo. Aparampi vuttaṃ – ‘‘ijjhati, bhikkhave, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.337; saṃ. ni. 4.352; a. ni. 8.35). Sippanti dhanusippaṃ. Dhaññanti dhanāyitabbaṃ. Dhammavolokanatāyāti samathavipassanādidhammassa volokanabhāvena . Volokanaṭṭhenāti sattabhūmakādipāsāde viya sīle ṭhatvā abhiññācakkhunā lokassa voloketuṃ sakkāti vuttaṃ. Sabbabhūmānuparivatti ca sīlaṃ catubhūmakakusalassāpi tadanuvattanato. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
11. 施设之句分别注释显示巴利原文
11. Paññattihāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
39 其中,何为「施设之句」?即是施设之句的分别。问:什么是「施设」?答:「即自然说法的开示。」意思是:不像开示之句等那样特别拣择味等句义,而是世尊本性法谈的开示。对此法的安立,名为施设之句。然而,世尊为随顺所化众生之相续,依其所欲表达之义而安置此法,故亦称为「安置」。此句能令苦等所计之部分以种种方式被了知,或令他们无有混杂而安立,故说为「安置施设」。如是略说「自然说法开示」之义。为详细分别,更问:「何为自然说法的开示?」由此从「四圣谛」等开始解说。显示巴利原文
39.Tatthakatamo paññattihāroti paññattihāravibhaṅgo. Tattha kā panāyaṃ paññattīti? Āha ‘‘yā pakatikathāya desanā’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā desanāhārādayo viya assādādipadatthavisesaniddhāraṇaṃ akatvā bhagavato sābhāvikadhammakathāya desanā. Yā tassā paññāpanā, ayaṃ paññattihāro. Yasmā pana sā bhagavato tathā tathā veneyyasantāne yathādhippetamatthaṃ nikkhipatīti nikkhepo. Tassa cāyaṃ hāro dukkhādisaṅkhāte bhāge pakārehi ñāpeti, asaṅkarato vā ṭhapeti, tasmā ‘‘nikkhepapaññattī’’ti vutto. Iti pakatikathāya desanāti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vitthārena vibhajituṃ ‘‘kā ca pakatikathāya desanā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘cattāri saccānī’’tiādimāha.
此中,“这是苦”——此是一种施设。对于具有粗、触等自性的色法与非色法,它们虽依过去等差别而被分成众多类别,但不加区分,取其逼迫、有为、烧灼、变易的共性,以及从鄙劣性等角度,作为将它们概括为一类而执取的依据,即是施设。那是什么施设呢?即是依名称施设而起的彼所生施设。另有说者:“即是伴有表识变化的声音。”依照这一方法,于一切处应了知施设的意义。而“五蕴”等,则是显示这种施设所执取的对象。所谓“十根”,就是八种色根、意根、受根,共这十根。由于领受的共性,受被立为一根;同样,信等道支也是如此。显示巴利原文
Tattha idaṃ dukkhanti ayaṃ paññattīti kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāve rūpārūpadhamme atītādivasena anekabhedabhinne abhinditvā pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhatāsāmaññena yā kucchitabhāvādimukhena ekajjhaṃ gahaṇassa kāraṇabhūtā paññatti, kā pana sāti? Nāmapaññattinibandhanā tajjāpaññatti. ‘‘Viññattivikārasahito saddo evā’’ti apare. Iminā nayena tattha tattha paññattiattho veditabbo. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ khandhāna’’ntiādinā tassā paññattiyā upādānaṃ dasseti. Dasannaṃ indriyānanti aṭṭha rūpindriyāni manindriyaṃ vedanindriyanti evaṃ dasannaṃ. Anubhavanasāmaññena hi vedanā ekamindriyaṃ katā, tathā saddhādayo ca maggapakkhiyāti.
“团食”:由于被做成团状,故称团食,这是从事相上所作的解说。它指众生赖以活命的食素。因为此食素能摄取第八食素色,故名为食。“有”:因未被道断除,故存在。“贪”:因有染着义,故为贪。“喜”:因有欢喜义,故为喜。“渴爱”:因有渴求义,故为渴爱。这些全都是贪的别名。“识安住并生长于彼处”:指使业速行之后,具备牵引结生的能力,故识得以安住并生长。“于彼处”:指三界轮回中的处所,或上述一切词句所指之处。“于彼处有行的增长”:这是针对安住在此异熟轮之中、成为未来增长之因的行而说的,即“于彼处有未来再生的再生”,也就是说在那个地方有未来再生的再生。“于彼处有未来的生、老、死”:于纳受结生之处,有以诸蕴再生为相的生,有以成熟为相的老,有以坏灭为相的死。这就是苦与集的起源施设:以上开示是苦圣谛与集圣谛的生起施设,也是异熟轮的行以渴爱为缘而被解说的意思。显示巴利原文
Kabaḷaṃ karīyatīti kabaḷīkāroti vatthuvasena ayaṃ niddeso. Yāya ojāya sattā yāpenti, tassāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sā hi ojaṭṭhamakassa rūpassa āharaṇato āhāro. Atthīti maggena asamucchinnatāya vijjati. Rāgoti rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo. Nandanaṭṭhena nandī. Taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhā. Sabbānetāni lobhasseva nāmāni. Patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ viruḷhanti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya patiṭṭhitañceva viññāṇaṃ viruḷhañca. Yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe bhummaṃ, sabbattha vā purimapurimapade etaṃ bhummaṃ. Atthi tattha saṅkhārānaṃ vuddhīti ye imasmiṃ vipākavaṭṭe ṭhitassa āyatiṃ vaḍḍhanahetukā saṅkhārā, te sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattī’’ti yasmiṃ ṭhāne āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti atthi. Atthi tattha āyatiṃjātijarāmaraṇanti yattha paṭisandhiggahaṇaṃ, tattha khandhānaṃ abhinibbattilakkhaṇā jāti, paripākalakkhaṇā jarā, bhedanalakkhaṇaṃ maraṇañca atthi. Ayaṃ pabhāvapaññatti dukkhassa ca samudayassa cāti ayaṃ yathāvuttā desanā dukkhasaccassa samudayasaccassa ca samuṭṭhānapaññatti, vipākavaṭṭassa saṅkhārānañca taṇhāpaccayaniddesatoti adhippāyo.
“无贪”:由于修习最上道而断除,故无贪。“识于彼处不安住、不生长”:因为没有让业速行后牵引结生的能力,所以识不安住亦不生长。此义应依据上述对立之理来理解。显示巴利原文
Natthi rāgoti aggamaggabhāvanāya samucchinnattā natthi ce rāgo. Appatiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ aviruḷhanti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāyābhāvena appatiṭṭhitañceva aviruḷhañcāti vuttapaṭipakkhanayena attho veditabbo.
以“这是遍知施设”等说明:道正见唯由一次现观即在四圣谛中生起。“修习施设”:对于依门与所缘而在六门中生起的诸法,进行无常随观,这是道的修习施设。“灭施设”即灭的施设:对于名为“障覆”(rodha)的爱,以道作无余灭的施设。“生起施设”:安立已生起者。“处所施设”:安立位置。“提取施设”:引出之施设。“卵”:于牛等伤口处,被蓝蝇产下的卵,称为卵。在此,对某个生起它的有情而言,因为它成为该有情的损害与灾难之因,所以如同卵,即指烦恼;对它们的击破施设,就是根除施设。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayaṃ pariññāpaññattī’’tiādinā ekābhisamayavaseneva maggasammādiṭṭhi catūsu ariyasaccesu pavattatīti dasseti. Ayaṃ bhāvanāpaññattīti ayaṃ dvārārammaṇehi chadvārappavattanadhammānaṃ aniccānupassanā maggassa bhāvanāpaññatti. Nirodhapaññatti nirodhassāti rodhasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya maggena anavasesanirodhapaññatti. Uppādapaññattīti uppannassa paññāpanā. Okāsapaññattīti ṭhānassa paññāpanā. Āhaṭanāpaññattīti nīharaṇapaññatti. Āsāṭikānanti gunnaṃ vaṇesu nīlamakkhikāhi ṭhapitaaṇḍakā āsāṭikā nāma. Ettha yassa uppannā, tassa sattassa anayabyasanahetutāya āsāṭikā viyāti āsāṭikā, kilesā, tesaṃ āsāṭikānaṃ. Abhinighātapaññattīti samugghātapaññatti.
41 如是,以流转与还灭为门,亦即通过思惟取蕴之门,显示了关于圣谛的施设分别之后,现在为以三转的方式显示,而开始说:“比丘们,此是苦……”等。其中,以见义为“眼”,以如实了知义为“智”,以通达义为“慧”,以已知义为“明”,以照耀义为“光”——这一切都是慧的同义语,是同义语施设。作证施设:即现前所作的施设。显示巴利原文
41. Evaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭamukhena sammasanaupādānakkhandhamukheneva saccesu paññattivibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni teparivaṭṭavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ ‘dukkha’nti me, bhikkhave’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu. Yathāsabhāvato jānanaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ. Paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena paññā. Viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. Obhāsanaṭṭhena āloko. Sabbaṃ paññāvevacanameva. Ayaṃ vevacanapaññatti. Sacchikiriyāpaññattīti paccakkhakaraṇapaññatti.
“已衡量与未衡量”之偈:对多数人而言,由于现见而被衡量、被限定,故称为“已衡量”,即欲界。不是已衡量的,就是“未衡量”;又因没有其他世间业能与它相似,故称未衡量,指大业。或者,欲界与色界业为已衡量,无色界业为未衡量;又或者,少报者为已衡量,多报者为未衡量。依此而生起,故曰“生起”,即成为生起之因。“有行”:令有形成。“舍弃”:即释放。“牟尼”:指佛陀牟尼。“内乐者”:乐于自身内。“入定者”:依近行定与安止定而得定。“如铠甲般突破”:犹如突破铠甲。“自身所生”:于自身中生起的烦恼。这是说:他以有报之义为“生起”、以形成有之义为“有行”而得名的、称为已衡量与未衡量的世间业,悉皆舍弃;正如在战场前线的大勇士突破铠甲,乐于内、已入定者,突破了自身所生的烦恼。显示巴利原文
Tulamatulañcāti gāthāya pacurajanānaṃ paccakkhabhāvato tulitaṃ paricchinnanti tulaṃ, kāmāvacaraṃ. Na tulanti atulaṃ, tulaṃ vā sadisamassa aññaṃ lokiyakammaṃ natthīti atulaṃ, mahaggatakammaṃ. Kāmāvacararūpāvacarakammaṃ vā tulaṃ, arūpāvacaraṃ atulaṃ, appavipākaṃ vā tulaṃ. Bahuvipākaṃ atulaṃ. Sambhavati etenāti sambhavaṃ, sambhavahetubhūtaṃ. Bhavasaṅkhāraṃ punabbhavasaṅkharaṇakaṃ. Avassajīti vissajjesi. Munīti buddhamuni. Ajjhattaratoti niyakajjhattarato . Samāhitoti upacārappanāsamādhivasena samāhito. Abhindi kavacamivāti kavacaṃ viya bhindi. Attasambhavanti attani sañjātaṃ kilesaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – savipākaṭṭhena sambhavaṃ bhavābhisaṅkharaṇaṭṭhena bhavasaṅkhāranti ca laddhanāmaṃ tulātulasaṅkhātaṃ lokiyakammañca ossaji, saṅgāmasīse mahāyodho kavacaṃ viya attasambhavaṃ kilesañca ajjhattarato samāhito hutvā abhindīti.
又,“已衡量”即正在称量、判断。“未衡量与生起”:指涅槃与生。“有行”:即趣向于有的业。“牟尼舍弃”:谓佛陀牟尼以“五取蕴是无常,他们之灭为涅槃,是常”等理趣(如《无碍解道》所说)进行衡量,见到有中的过患与涅槃中的利益后,以令业尽灭的圣道,舍弃了作为蕴之根本的“有行”业。如何舍弃?由“内乐”而舍。他确实依观而内乐,依止而成就定;像铠甲般裹覆有身、因自身中生起而名为“自身所生”的一切烦恼品类,他悉皆突破。烦恼既无,业便不再结生,故说为舍弃——即是说,因烦恼的灭尽而弃舍了业。显示巴利原文
Atha vā tulanti tulayanto tīrento. Atulañca sambhavanti nibbānañceva sambhavañca. Bhavasaṅkhāranti bhavagāmikammaṃ. Avassaji munīti ‘‘pañcakkhandhā aniccā, tesaṃ nirodho nibbānaṃ nicca’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.38 atthato samānaṃ) nayena tulayanto buddhamuni bhave ādīnavaṃ nibbāne ānisaṃsañca disvā taṃ khandhānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ bhavasaṅkhāraṃ kammakkhayakarena ariyamaggena avassaji. Kathaṃ? Ajjhattarato. So hi vipassanāvasena ajjhattarato samathavasena samāhito kavacamiva attabhāvaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ attani sambhavattā ‘‘attasambhava’’nti laddhanāmaṃ sabbaṃ kilesajātaṃ abhindi, kilesābhāve kammaṃ appaṭisandhikattā avassaṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, kilesābhāvena kammaṃ jahīti attho (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.169; udā. aṭṭha. 51).
由于不存在离于有为界与无为界的应遍知法,故说“已衡量……乃至……诸法”。以此表明法无碍解,故说“安立施设是法无碍解”。就有行中的集谛分,说“遍舍施设”;依苦谛分,说“遍知施设”;依具等持的内乐状态,说“修习施设”即身至念。然而,应知依具内乐性的等持状态,说“住立施设”即心一境性。“厌离施设是心的”:依舍弃寿行的方式,是心的导出施设。“取着施设”:即执取施设。“具一切智性”:即成为正自觉者的状态。以此显示,非正自觉者没有寿行的舍弃。为了显示世尊因无烦恼而舍弃业,说“破发施设”即是对无明蛋壳的施设。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatadhātuvinimuttassa abhiññeyyassa abhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘tula…pe… dhammāna’’nti. Tena dhammapaṭisambhidā vuttā hotīti āha – ‘‘nikkhepapaññatti dhammapaṭisambhidāyā’’ti. Bhavasaṅkhāre samudayapakkhiyaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘pariccāgapaññattī’’ti. Dukkhasaccapakkhiyavasena ‘‘pariññāpaññattī’’ti. Samādhānavisiṭṭhassa ajjhattaratabhāvassa vasena ‘‘bhāvanāpaññatti kāyagatāya satiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ajjhattaratatāvisiṭṭhassa pana samādhānassa vasena ‘‘ṭhitipaññatti cittekaggatāyā’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Abhinibbidāpaññatti cittassāti āyusaṅkhārossajjanavasena cittassa abhinīharaṇapaññatti. Upādānapaññattīti gahaṇapaññatti. Sabbaññutāyāti sammāsambuddhabhāvassa. Etena asammāsambuddhassa āyusaṅkhārossajjanaṃ natthīti dasseti. Kilesābhāvena bhagavā kammaṃ jahatīti dassento ‘‘padālanāpaññatti avijjaṇḍakosāna’’nti āha.
“见苦及其从何因”等:谓已着手修观者,见到、照见三地的一切苦,并见到彼苦从何因、以何为因——即见到贪爱为其因。如是行道之人,怎么可能还以任何方式倾向于、贴近所依诸欲与烦恼欲?实无此理。何以故?因为已知“世间诸欲是结缚”。于此世间,无有像诸欲那样的系缚。世尊亦曾言:“智者说彼缚非坚固……”等。因此,以诸行之触为义而了知其为结缚后,诸具念者应为调伏他们而修学。即由修习身至念而具念,为令诸欲寂静,应于三学中不放逸而学。此是含义。显示巴利原文
Yo dukkhamaddakkhi yatonidānanti yo āraddhavipassako sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ dukkhaṃ adakkhi passi, tañca yatonidānaṃ yaṃ hetukaṃ, tampissa kāraṇabhāvena taṇhaṃ passi. Kāmesu so jantu kathaṃnameyyāti so evaṃ paṭipanno puriso savatthukāmesu kilesakāmesu yena pakārena nameyya abhinameyya, so pakāro natthi. Kasmā? Kāmā hi loke saṅgoti ñatvā. Yasmā imasmiṃ loke kāmasadisaṃ bandhanaṃ natthi. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘na taṃ daḷhaṃ bandhanamāhu dhīrā’’tiādi (dha. pa. 345; saṃ. ni. 1.121; netti. 106; peṭako 15), tasmā saṅkhāre āsajjanaṭṭhena saṅgoti viditvā. Tesaṃ satīmā vinayāya sikkheti kāyagatāsatiyogena satimā tesaṃ kāmānaṃ vūpasamāya tīsupi sikkhāsu appamatto sikkheyyāti attho.
「同义语施设」,即是对蕴等教法所安立的同义别名。又因与「见」一词相连接,故进而说「这是对苦的遍知施设」等。「从敌对角度而见的施设」,意指因其能造成不利与损害,故从敌对的角度予以说明。「似火堆」,比喻如同正在炽燃的大火堆一般。「似悬崖与蛇的譬喻」,即是悬崖的譬喻与蛇的譬喻。显示巴利原文
Vevacanapaññattīti khandhādīnaṃ vevacanapaññatti. Adakkhīti pana padena sambandhattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāpaññatti cā’’ti. Paccatthikato dassanapaññattīti anatthajananato paccatthikato dassanapaññatti. Pāvakakappāti jalitaaggikkhandhasadisā. Papātauragopamāti papātūpamāuragopamā ca.
「世间为愚痴所结缚」:此世间乃是被以无明为因的种种结缚所束缚。「看似贤善」:意谓内心虽已败坏,却借幻术与欺诳覆藏真相,将自己表现得仿佛具有贤善禀赋一般。「愚者为依所缚,为黑暗所笼罩」:当那愚者如此显现时,因被愚痴的黑暗所笼罩,于五欲功德不见过患,遂为烦恼与诸行的结缚所系缚。并且,此愚者实为不祥之辈,在智者看来,他如同没有吉祥,现前唯以不祥之相示现。这一切,皆因愚者内心有贪等杂染;而对以智慧之眼观察的智者而言,则全无杂染——此为简略要义。由于举出「愚痴」即兼带说明了种种颠倒,故注释者说:「这是对颠倒的言说施设。」「颠倒施设」,即是对以颠倒方式呈现的事物所作的说明。显示巴利原文
Mohasambandhano lokoti ayaṃ loko avijjāhetukehi saṃyojanehi bandho. Bhabbarūpova dissatīti vipannajjhāsayopi māyāya sāṭheyyena ca paṭicchāditasabhāvo bhabbajātikaṃ viya attānaṃ dasseti. Upadhibandhano bālo, tamasā parivāritoti tassa pana bālassa tathā dassane sammohatamasā parivāritattā kāmaguṇesu anādīnavadassitāya kilesābhisaṅkhārehi bandhattā. Tathā bhūto cāyaṃ bālo paṇḍitānaṃ assirī viya khāyati alakkhiko eva hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ bālassa sato rāgādikiñcanato. Paṇḍitassa pana paññācakkhunā passato natthi kiñcananti ayaṃ saṅkhepattho. Mohasīsena vipallāsā gahitāti āha – ‘‘desanāpaññatti vipallāsāna’’nti. Viparītapaññattīti viparītākārena upaṭṭhahamānassa paññāpanā.
「有涅槃」,仅是沙门、婆罗门之间的一种言说所依而已。「无涅槃」,则是那些邪行修行者认为涅槃在究竟意义上为不可得的自性。为破斥这些邪说,世尊教示道:「诸比丘!有非生、非有、非造作、非有为之法。」为说明其缘由,又接着说:「诸比丘,若不如此……」等等。其含义是:诸比丘,若那无为界不存在,则此处一切有为的出离便不可能。因为,以涅槃为所缘而生起的正见等圣道法,能彻底断除一切烦恼,由此便不再有于三界之中流转。显示巴利原文
Atthi nibbānanti samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ vācāvatthumattameva. Natthi nibbānanti paramatthato alabbhamānasabhāvattāti vippaṭipannānaṃ micchāvādaṃ bhañjituṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ akataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti. Tattha hetuṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘no cetaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – bhikkhave, yadi asaṅkhatā dhātu na abhavissa, na idha sabbassa saṅkhatassa nissaraṇaṃ siyā. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānā sammādiṭṭhiādayo maggadhammā anavasesakilese samucchindanti, tato tividhassapi vaṭṭassa appavattīti.
这里所要表达的旨趣是:正如对尚有上分、应被遍知的欲界与色界,能了知它们的对立面——那具去除他们自性之出离;同样,对于具同样自性的有为法,也必然存在一种以对立面、具去除他们自性为本质的出离,这出离即是无为界。进而,以有为法为所缘的观智与随顺智,并不能以断除的方式彻底放下烦恼;以世俗谛为所缘的初禅等智,也仅是暂时镇伏烦恼,而非彻底断除。能彻底断除、彻底放下烦恼的,是圣道智;圣道智的所缘必然与有为法、世俗谛相反,那便是无为界。同样,在某种语境中,“涅槃”一词应理解为不颠倒的意义,因为有以近似比喻而宣说的情形,如同“狮子音”一词那样。显示巴利原文
Tatthāyamadhippāyo – yathā pariññeyyatāya sauttarānaṃ kāmānaṃ rūpānañca paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tabbidhurasabhāvaṃ nissaraṇaṃ paññāyati, evaṃ taṃsabhāvānaṃ saṅkhabhadhammānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtena tabbidhuratāsabhāvena nissaraṇena bhavitabbaṃ, yañca taṃ nissaraṇaṃ. Sā asaṅkhatā dhātu. Kiñca bhiyyo? Saṅkhatadhammārammaṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Api ca anulomañāṇaṃ kilese na samucchedavasena pajahituṃ sakkoti. Sammutisaccārammaṇampi paṭhamajjhānādīsu ñāṇaṃ vikkhambhanamattameva karoti, kilesānaṃ na samucchedaṃ, samucchedappahānakarañca ariyamaggañāṇaṃ, tassa saṅkhatadhammasammutisaccaviparītena ārammaṇena bhavitabbaṃ, sā asaṅkhatā dhātu. Tathā nibbāna-saddo katthaci visaye aviparītattho veditabbo, upacāravuttisabbhāvato, yathā taṃ ‘‘sīhasaddo’’ti.
再者,世尊所说“比丘们!有非生、非有、非造作、非有为”(《优陀那》73)等语,其义完全不颠倒,因为这是世尊所说。凡世尊所说,其义皆不颠倒。正如“一切行无常,一切行是苦,一切法无我”那样,依循此理,便可了知无为界在胜义上是实有的。又何需仅凭理推?世尊已多所开示:“比丘们!有非生、非有、非造作、非有为”,“无缘法、无为法”,以及“比丘们!我当为汝等宣说无为与趣向无为之道”等,以此教导无余涅槃界于胜义中真实存在。其中,“引摄施设”是从对立面对牵引之因所作的安立;“照明施设”是为令所认定的义理得以成立而作的阐明。显示巴利原文
Atha vā ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ akataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti (udā. 73) vacanaṃ aviparītatthaṃ, bhagavatā bhāsitattā. Yañhi bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ, taṃ aviparītatthaṃ. Yathā taṃ ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā, sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.353, 356; kathā. 753; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4; paṭi. ma. 1.31; netti. 5; dha. pa. 277-279), evampi yuttivasena asaṅkhatāya dhātuyā paramatthato sabbhāvo veditabbo. Kiṃ vā etāya yutticintāya? Yasmā bhagavatā ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ akataṃ asaṅkhatanti (udā. 73), appaccayā dhammā asaṅkhatā dhammāti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 7-8) ca, asaṅkhatañca vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi asaṅkhatagāminiñca paṭipada’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 4.366-367, 377) ca anekehi suttapadehi nibbānadhātuyā paramatthato sabbhāvo desitoti. Tattha upanayanapaññattīti paṭipakkhato hetuupanayanassa paññāpanā. Jotanāpaññattīti paṭiññātassa atthassa siddhiyā pakāsanāpaññatti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyameva.
12. 入处理释义广解显示巴利原文
12. Otaraṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
42 那么,何为“入处理”?这便是入处理的释义。其中,“无学的解脱”是指于三界中离贪的无学果解脱。“它们即是”指无学解脱中的信等诸根。“此为由根而入”是说,依无学解脱中所确立的信等诸根,通过解说而进入。显示巴利原文
42.Tattha katamo otaraṇo hāroti otaraṇahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha asekkhā vimuttīti ayaṃ tedhātuke vītarāgatā asekkhā phalavimutti. Tāniyevāti tāni asekkhāyaṃ vimuttiyaṃ saddhādīni . Ayaṃ indriyehi otaraṇāti asekkhāya vimuttiyā niddhāritehi saddhādīhi indriyehi saṃvaṇṇanāya otaraṇā.
“五根即是明”的意思是:正如正思惟有助于正见,信等四根也有助于明(即慧蕴),因此它们依归入之义而称为明。“属于行”是说在五蕴中,它们被摄在行蕴里。“那些无漏的行”特指那种行蕴,因为这里指的是最上果——阿拉汉果。也正因如此,它们不是有分(潜在识)。“摄在法界中”是指在十八界中,它们属于法界。前面虽已显示了无学的离贪解脱,但为了显示其行道,这里又宣说了“不观我即是”的见道。为说明此义,才说了“不观我即是”等语句。这一切都依前文所说的道理。显示巴利原文
Pañcindriyāni vijjāti sammāsaṅkappo viya sammādiṭṭhiyā upakārakattā paññākkhandhe saddhādīni cattāri indriyāni vijjāya upakārakattā saṅgaṇhanavasena vuttāni. Saṅkhārapariyāpannānīti pañcasu khandhesu saṅkhārakkhandhe antogadhāni. Ye saṅkhārā anāsavāti taṃ saṅkhārakkhandhaṃ viseseti, aggaphalassa adhippetattā. Tato eva ca no bhavaṅgā. Dhammadhātusaṅgahitāti aṭṭhārasadhātūsu dhammadhātusaṅgahitā. Yadipi pubbe vītarāgatā asekkhā vimutti dassitā, tassā pana paṭipattidassanatthaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ ahamasmīti anānupassī’’ti dassanamaggo idha vuttoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ ahamasmīti anānupassī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabbaṃ vuttanayameva.
43 “依止者动摇”是指因贪与见的力量,业行不能安住。“死此生彼”是说一再地死去和再生。为了揭示“依止”一词中所含的依赖义,他说:“所谓依止”。“贪依止”是指对贪的执著。因为对于贪行者来说,贪即成为他的立足处,所以这样说。见依止也应当如此理解。“染著者的思”:因为思是主导,所以以思为首而说的即是贪。因此他说:“这是贪依止”。然而,由于颠倒的执著唯有在愚痴强盛时才会生起,所以又说:“愚痴者的思,这是见依止”。显示巴利原文
43.Nissitassa calitanti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena kammaṃ anavaṭṭhānaṃ. Cutūpapātoti aparāparaṃ cavanaṃ upapatanañca. Nissitapade labbhamānaṃ nissayanaṃ uddharanto āha – ‘‘nissayo nāmā’’ti. Taṇhānissayoti taṇhābhiniveso. So hi taṇhācaritassa patiṭṭhābhāvena tathā vutto. Evaṃ diṭṭhinissayopi daṭṭhabbo. Rattassa cetanāti cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhadhammānaṃ cetanāsīsena taṇhaṃ eva vadati. Tenevāha – ‘‘ayaṃ taṇhānissayo’’ti. Yasmā pana viparītābhiniveso mohassa balavabhāve eva hoti, tasmā ‘‘yā mūḷhassa cetanā, ayaṃ diṭṭhinissayo’’ti vuttaṃ.
这样以思为首讲完贪和见之后,现在为了在此以非譬喻的方式直接把握思本身,他说:“然而,思就是行”。“染著者的受,这是乐受”:这是依于对乐受有贪随眠而说的。同样,依于对不苦不乐受有无明随眠,他说:“愚痴者的受,这是不苦不乐受”。这里是以受为首来把握思。“于贪”是指贪。“于见”是指见。或者,如同当其他诸法以贪为依止时,此人即被称为依止于贪;同理,当贪成为其他诸法的缘时,此人也被称为依止于贪,因此说:“不依止于贪”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ cetanāsīsena taṇhādiṭṭhiyo vatvā idāni tattha nippariyāyena cetanaṃyeva gaṇhanto ‘‘cetanā pana saṅkhārā’’ti āha. Yā rattassa vedanā, ayaṃ sukhā vedanāti sukhāya vedanāya rāgo anusetīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tathā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya avijjā anusetīti āha – ‘‘yā sammūḷhassa vedanā, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanā’’ti. Idha vedanāsīsena cetanā vuttā. Taṇhāyāti taṇhaṃ. Diṭṭhiyāti diṭṭhiṃ. Yathā vā sesadhammānaṃ taṇhāya nissayabhāve puggalo taṇhāya nissitoti vuccati. Evaṃ taṇhāya sesadhammānaṃ paccayabhāve puggalo taṇhāya nissitoti vuccatīti āha – ‘‘taṇhāya anissito’’ti.
“轻安”是指不安的止息。“身轻安”是依于身的轻安。“心轻安”是依于心的轻安。然而,这种不安的止息要在身心得乐时才会明显,因此为了显示以果为名的轻安是无倾动的因,而说“身轻安者”等。“他”是指这样心解脱的漏尽者。“于色灭尽而解脱”是指在色的灭尽——即涅槃中得解脱。“不会认为有”:不会以贪或见的执取而认为“我与世间是常”。“不会认为无”:不会执取“无常”。“不会认为亦有亦无”:不会执取“一部分常、一部分无常”。“不会认为非有非无”:不会以矫乱论的方式执取。“甚深”:因为没有使心肤浅的烦恼之因,故甚深。“寂止”:由于平息了“有”等执取的烦恼,而般涅槃、清凉。显示巴利原文
Passaddhīti darathapaṭippassambhanā. Kāyikāti karajakāyasannissitā. Cetasikāti cittasannissitā. Yasmā pana sā darathapaṭippassaddhi kāyacittānaṃ sukhe sati pākaṭā hoti, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ kāyikaṃ sukha’’ntiādinā phalūpacārena vuttāya passaddhiyā natiabhāvassa kāraṇabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘passaddhakāyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Soti evaṃ vimuttacitto khīṇāsavo. Rūpasaṅkhaye vimuttoti rūpānaṃ saṅkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne vimutto. Atthītipi na upetīti sassato attā ca loko cātipi taṇhādiṭṭhiupayena na upeti na gaṇhāti. Natthīti asassatoti. Atthi natthīti ekaccaṃ sassataṃ ekaccaṃ asassatanti. Nevatthi no natthīti amarāvikkhepavasena. Gambhīroti uttānabhāvahetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvena gambhīro. Nibbutoti atthītiādinā upagamanakilesānaṃ vūpasamena parinibbuto sītibhūto.
“来此”是指从他世来到此世。“去”是指从此世前往他世。这就是再有,故说“后有”。“在此成为”显示了门与所缘诸法,因此用“在两者之间”这一句来显示在门中转起的法,他说:“在依触而生起的诸法中”。这句话的意思是:在与触俱生、以触为因而生起的识、受、想、思、寻、伺等诸法中。“不见我”:由于那些法本来无我,故不见其中有我。通过“厌离、依离贪而解脱”等词,显示了出世间法的缘起性质。为了说明此义,说它是“出世间的”等,并借此扼要说明戒等道支的缘起关系。显示巴利原文
Idhāgatīti paralokato idha āgati. Gatīti idhalokato paralokagamanaṃ. Taṃ pana punabbhavoti āha ‘‘peccabhavo’’ti. Idha huranti dvārārammaṇadhammā dassitāti ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti padena dvārappavattadhamme dassento ‘‘phassasamuditesu dhammesū’’ti āha. Tassattho – phassena saddhiṃ phassena kāraṇabhūtena ca samuditesu sambhūtesu viññāṇavedanāsaññācetanāvitakkavicārādidhammesu. Attānaṃ na passatīti tesaṃ dhammānaṃ anattabhāveneva tattha attānaṃ na passati. Virajjati virāgā vimuccatīti padehi lokuttaradhammānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādabhāvaṃ dassento tadatthatāya sīlādīnampi pariyāyena tabbhāvamāha ‘‘lokuttaro’’tiādinā.
44 “与名相应”是指与名和合。“有余涅槃界”是指阿拉汉果。这又是以慧为增上,所以说:“有余涅槃界即是明”。其余一切,义理易解。显示巴利原文
44.Nāmasampayuttoti nāmena missito. Saupādisesā nibbānadhātūti arahattaphalaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tañca paññāpadhānanti āha – ‘‘saupādisesā nibbānadhātu vijjāti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ uttānameva.
13. 「净化分别释」显示巴利原文
13. Sodhanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
45 这里,什么是“净化方法”?即净化方法的分别解说。世尊净化词句:当世尊宣说“世间被无明覆盖”(《经集》1039;《小部·阿逸多学童所问》58,《阿逸多学童所问释义》2)时——这是为了解答具寿阿逸多所问的“世间被什么覆盖?”(《经集》1038;《小部·阿逸多学童所问》57,《阿逸多学童所问释义》1)而说的——通过揭示其含义而加以净化,便称为“净化”。但这并非指初始,即尚未净化的初始,因为所欲了解的意义尚未完备。“清净的开始”则指所欲了解的意义已被阐明,因此初始得以净化,这是它的意思。对于陷入无知或生起疑惑的人,他们所提问的领域,犹如未经整理的稠密丛林、崎岖险阻的危路,幽暗不明。然而,当世尊或世尊的贤智弟子们,通过开显贯穿词句的深义,解开纠缠、清除丛林而解答问题时,那领域便如同被一头大香象踏破并摧毁的丛林地带,驱散黑暗,清晰现前,这时便称为“被净化”了。显示巴利原文
45.Tattha katamo sodhano hāroti sodhanahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha bhagavā padaṃ sodhetīti ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko’’ti (su. ni. 1039; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 58, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 2) vadanto bhagavā – ‘‘kenassu nivuto loko’’ti (su. ni. 1038; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchā 57, ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 1) āyasmatā ajitena pucchāvasena vuttaṃ padaṃ sodheti nāma, tadatthassa vissajjanato. No ca ārambhanti na tāva ārambhaṃ sodheti, ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa apariyositattā. Suddho ārambhoti ñātuṃ icchitassa atthassa pabodhitattā sodhito ārambhoti attho. Aññāṇapakkhandānaṃ dveḷhakajātānaṃ vā pucchanakāle pucchitānaṃ pucchāvisayo avijaṭaṃ mahāgahanaṃ viya mahāduggaṃ viya ca andhakāraṃ avibhūtaṃ hoti. Yadā ca bhagavatā paṇḍitehi vā bhagavato sāvakehi apade padaṃ dassentehi nijjaṭaṃ nigumbaṃ katvā pañhe vissajjite mahatā gandhahatthinā abhibhavitvā obhaggapadālito gahanappadeso viya vigatandhakāro vibhūto upaṭṭhahamāno visodhito nāma hoti.
14. 「决意方法的分别解说」的解释显示巴利原文
14. Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
46 这里,什么是“决意的方法”?即决意方法的分别解说。其中,“应当这样持取”:应当依单一性与差异性所摄的共相与别相来持取,而不应于此作任何分别,这是其意趣。不应分别的原因,已如解说品注释中所述。“道”:追寻种种果、求取果,故名为道;或以求果之人追寻它、求取它,故名为道。“地狱”:以无乐、无味之义,故称地狱。“畜生”:指向上而行,然后横向蜿蜒而行,故为畜生;畜生即意味着畜生道。“饿鬼”:由饿鬼的状态,意指死后由此处离去而存在的状态,故称饿鬼;饿鬼也就是饿鬼界。“阿修罗”:他们不闪耀、不言语、不嬉戏,故为阿修罗;阿修罗即指阿修罗道。“天”:因色等天界之物极为美妙殊胜,故名为天。“人”:以心的功能特别发达,故称为人。“涅槃”:贪爱名为‘vāna’,其中无此贪爱,故称涅槃。“堕地狱者”指趣向地狱。其余词句依此类推。“阿修罗道”:指为投生阿修罗道所做之利益,即产生阿修罗种姓的意思。“生天者”指能导致生天的业。“人生者”指趣向人道,即趣向人界。显示巴利原文
46.Tatthakatamo adhiṭṭhāno hāroti adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha tathā dhārayitabbāti ekattavemattatāsaṅkhātasāmaññavisesamattato dhārayitabbā, na pana tattha kiñci vikappetabbāti adhippāyo. Avikappetabbatāya kāraṇaṃ niddesavāravaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttameva. Taṃ taṃ phalaṃ maggati gavesatīti maggo, tadatthikehi maggīyati gavesīyatīti vā maggo. Niratiyaṭṭhena nirassādaṭṭhena ca nirayo. Uddhaṃ anugantvā tiriyaṃ añcitāti tiracchānā. Tiracchānāva tiracchānayoni. Petatāya petti, ito pecca gatabhāvoti attho. Petti eva pettivisayo. Na suranti na bhāsanti na dibbantīti asurā. Asurā eva asurayoni. Dibbehi rūpādīhi suṭṭhu aggāti saggā. Manassa ussannatāya manussā. Vānaṃ vuccati taṇhā, taṃ tattha natthīti nibbānaṃ. Nirayaṃ gacchatīti nirayagāmī. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Asurayoniyoti asurayoniyā hito, asurajātinibbattanakoti attho. Saggaṃ gametīti saggagāmiyo. Manussagāmīti manussalokagāmī. Paṭisaṅkhānirodhoti paṭisaṅkhāya paṭipakkhabhāvanāya nirodho, paṭipakkhe vā tathā appavatte uppajjanārahassa paṭipakkhavuttiyā anuppādo. Appaṭisaṅkhānirodhoti saṅkhatadhammānaṃ sarasanirodho, khaṇikanirodhoti attho.
47 “色”是单一性。“四大种及所造色”是差异性。“所造色”是单一性。“眼处……乃至……抟食”是差异性。同样地,“大种色”是单一性。“地界……乃至……风界”是差异性。“地界”是单一性。“二十种行相”是差异性。“水界”是单一性。“十二种行相”是差异性。“火界”是单一性。“四种行相”是差异性。“风界”是单一性。“六种行相”是差异性。为阐明此义,而说“以两种行相把握诸界”等。显示巴利原文
47. Rūpanti ekattatā. Bhūtānaṃ upādāyāti vemattatā. Upādārūpanti ekattatā. Cakkhāyatanaṃ…pe… kabaḷīkāro āhāroti vemattatā. Tathā bhūtarūpanti ekattatā. Pathavīdhātu …pe… vāyodhātūti vemattatā. Pathavīdhātūti ekattatā. Vīsati ākārā vemattatā. Āpodhātūti ekattatā. Dvādasa ākārā vemattatā. Tejodhātūti ekattatā. Cattāro ākārā vemattatā. Vāyodhātūti ekattatā. Cha ākārā vemattatāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘dvīhi ākārehi dhātuyo pariggaṇhātī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,「发」:所谓“发”,是位于所执受身体上的部位,以坚硬为相,在此身体中属于地界的个别部分。「毛」……乃至……「脑」:所谓“脑”,是位于身体上的部位,以坚硬为相,在此身体中属于个别的部分。这体现了其差异性。对于水界等部分,如「胆汁」等,道理亦然。不过,此处有一特别之处:「由于它」,即由于那被扰乱的该火界。「身体发热」:此身体发热,由一日之热等状况而生起灼热。「由于它而衰老」:由于它,此身体衰老,达到根器缺损、力量衰减、皱纹与白发等状态。「由于它而燃烧」:由于那被扰乱的该火界,此身体燃烧,而那人呼喊着“我烧得慌、我烧得慌”,并渴望百次精炼的酥油、牛黄、檀香等涂敷之物,以及棕榈扇扇出的风。「由于它,所食、所饮、所嚼、所尝得以正确地消化」:所食指米饭等,所饮指饮料等,所嚼指面粉类硬食等,所尝指芒果、熟果、蜂蜜、糖浆等,这些得以正确地完全成熟,成为味等而被分解、离散,这便是它的意义。在这里,前三种火界是四因所生,最后一种消化火唯是业所生。显示巴利原文
Tattha kesāti kesā nāma upādinnakasarīraṭṭhakā kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā imasmiṃ sarīre pāṭiyekko pathavīdhātukoṭṭhāso. Lomā nāma…pe… matthaluṅgaṃ nāma sarīraṭṭhakaṃ kakkhaḷalakkhaṇaṃ imasmiṃ sarīre pāṭiyekko koṭṭhāsoti ayaṃ vemattatā. Āpodhātūtiādikoṭṭhāsesu pittādīsu eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yena cāti yena tejodhātunā kupitena. Santappatīti ayaṃ kāyo santappati ekāhikajarādibhāvena usumajāto hoti. Yena ca jīrīyatīti yena ayaṃ kāyo jarīyati. Indriyavekallataṃ balakkhayaṃ valittacapalitādiñca pāpuṇāti. Yena ca pariḍayhatīti yena kupitena ayaṃ kāyo ḍayhati, so ca puggalo ‘‘ḍayhāmi ḍayhāmī’’ti kandanto satadhotasappigosītacandanādilepanaṃ tālavaṇṭavātañca paccāsīsati. Yena ca asitapītakhāyitasāyitaṃ sammā pariṇāmaṃ gacchatīti asitaṃ vā odanādi, pītaṃ vā pānakādi, khāyitaṃ vā piṭṭhakhajjakādi, sāyitaṃ vā ambapakkamadhuphāṇitādi sammā paripākaṃ gacchati, rasādibhāvena vivekaṃ gacchatīti attho. Ettha ca purimā tayo tejodhātū catusamuṭṭhānā. Pacchimo kammasamuṭṭhānova.
「向上行风」:是引起打嗝、呕吐等作用的向上运行的风。「向下行风」:是排出大便、小便等作用的向下运行的风。「腹内肠外风」:是在肠子外面的风。「腹内肠内风」:是在肠子里面的风。「肢节随行风」:是沿着血管网遍布全身一切肢节,引起屈伸等活动的风。「入息」:是进入鼻腔的风。「出息」:是出离鼻腔的风。在这里,前面所有的风都是四因所生,入出息唯是心所生。像这样,通过显示差异的方式分别说明了四界,并以不净作意总摄之,故而说“以此四十二种行相”等。其中,「不应被执取」的意思是:不应去执取。「由于自性而存在」的意思是:由于自性相而存在。显示巴利原文
Uddhaṅgamā vātāti uggārahikkārādipavattakā uddhaṃ ārohanavātā. Adhogamā vātāti uccārapassāvādinīharaṇakā adho orohanavātā. Kucchisayā vātāti antānaṃ bahivātā. Koṭṭhāsayā vātāti antānaṃ antovātā. Aṅgamaṅgānusārino vātāti dhamanijālānusārena sakalasarīre aṅgamaṅgāni anusaṭā samiñjanapasāraṇādinibbattakā vātā. Assāsoti antopavisananāsikavāto. Passāsoti bahinikkhamananāsikavāto. Ettha ca purimā sabbe catusamuṭṭhānā. Assāsapassāsā cittasamuṭṭhānā eva. Evaṃ vemattatādassanavasena vibhāgena udāhaṭā catasso dhātuyo paṭikkūlamanasikāravasena upasaṃharanto ‘‘imehi dvācattālīsāya ākārehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha na gayhūpaganti na gahaṇayoggaṃ. Sabhāvabhāvatoti sabhāvalakkhaṇato.
如此显示了不净作意后,接着,为再以经文本身显示此中的遍察运作,世尊便说“因此,世尊又说……”等。那些内容都很容易理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭikkūlamanasikāraṃ dassetvā puna tattha sammasanacāraṃ pāḷivaseneva dassetuṃ ‘‘tenāha bhagavā yā ceva kho panā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyaṃ.
48 如此,以谛、道、色、法显示了决意的方法之后,现在再以无明、明等来显示它,而说“无明”等。其中,所谓“于苦无知”等:因为无明覆盖、遮蔽着苦圣谛的真实本质相,使人无法了知、无法通达,所以称为“于苦无知”。同样,因为无明覆盖、遮蔽着苦集、苦灭、苦灭道的真实本质相,使人无法了知、无法通达,所以称为“于苦灭道无知”。所谓“前际”,即是过去时的蕴、处、界。“后际”则是未来时的蕴、处、界。“前际后际”则是这两者的合称。“此缘性”即指诸行的因,也就是无明等。“缘生法”则指由无明等所生的诸行等法。显示巴利原文
48. Evaṃ saccamaggarūpadhammavasena adhiṭṭhānahāraṃ dassetvā idāni avijjāvijjādīnampi vasena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjāti ekattatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādīsu yasmā avijjā dukkhasaccassa yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’nti vuccati. Tathā yasmā dukkhasamudayassa dukkhanirodhassa dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya aññāṇa’’nti vuccati. Pubbanto atītaddhabhūtā khandhāyatanadhātuyo. Aparanto anāgataddhabhūtā. Pubbantāparanto tadubhayaṃ. Idappaccayatā saṅkhārādīnaṃ kāraṇāni avijjādīni. Paṭiccasamuppannā dhammā avijjādīhi nibbattā saṅkhārādidhammā.
在此,因为此无明覆盖、遮蔽着过去的蕴等,乃至缘生法的真实本质相,使人无法了知、无法通达,所以称为“于前际无知,乃至对缘生法无知”。这样,此无明便从作用与生起的角度得到了说明。事实上,此无明对于这八个方面,都不能使人了知、通达,因此从作用上说明;而当它生起时,也正是在这八个方面中生起,因此从生起上说明。虽然已经从作用和生起作了说明,但唯有从特征上说明,才能说得透彻,因此为了显示特征而说“无知”等。显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ avijjā yasmā atītānaṃ khandhādīnaṃ yāva paṭiccasamuppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘pubbante aññāṇaṃ yāva paṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇa’’nti vuccati, evāyaṃ avijjā kiccato jātitopi kathitā. Ayañhi imāni aṭṭha ṭhānāni jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na detīti kiccato kathitā. Uppajjamānāpi imesu aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu uppajjatīti jātito kathitā. Evaṃ kiccato jātito ca kathitāpi lakkhaṇato kathite eva sukathitā hotīti lakkhaṇato dassetuṃ ‘‘aññāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,智能让利益与非利益、因与非因、四谛法得以了知、得以显现。但此无明生起后,却阻碍那些已了知、已显现的法被了知和显现,因此它是与智对立的“无知”。“见”也是慧,它照见那个相。而无明生起后,却不让照见,所以是“无见”。“现观”也是慧,它现观那个相。无明生起后,却不让现观,所以是“无现观”。“随觉”、“正觉”、“通达”也是慧,它随觉、正觉、通达那个相。无明生起后,却不让随觉、正觉、通达,所以是“无随觉”、“无正觉”、“无通达”。同样,“总察”、“别察”、“各别察”、“平等察”也是慧,它总察、别察、各别察、平等而正确地观察。无明生起后,却不让那样观察,所以称为“无总察”、“无别察”、“无各别察”、“无平等察”。显示巴利原文
Tattha ñāṇaṃ atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ pana avijjā uppajjitvā taṃ viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ na detīti ñāṇapaccanīkato aññāṇaṃ. Dassanantipi paññā, sā hi taṃ ākāraṃ passati. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā passituṃ na detīti adassanaṃ. Abhisamayotipi paññā, sā taṃ ākāraṃ abhisameti. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā taṃ abhisametuṃ na detīti anabhisamayo. Anubodho sambodho paṭivedhotipi paññā, sā taṃ ākāraṃ anubujjhati sambujjhati paṭivijjhati. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā taṃ anubujjhituṃ sambujjhituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na detīti ananubodho asambodho appaṭivedho. Tathā sallakkhaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ paccupalakkhaṇaṃ samapekkhaṇantipi paññā, sā taṃ ākāraṃ sallakkhati upalakkhati paccupalakkhati samaṃ sammā ca apekkhati. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā tassa tathā kātuṃ na detīti asallakkhaṇaṃ anupalakkhaṇaṃ apaccupalakkhaṇaṃ asamapekkhaṇanti ca vuccati.
它没有任何现前可见的业,自身也不作省察而造业,故称“无现前业”。愚蒙之状态即是“愚蒙性”。愚痴之状态即是“愚痴性”。“正知”即是慧,它能正知利益与非利益、因与非因,以及四谛法。然而,无明生起后,便不令了知那些因,故为“无正知”。因行迷惑,故为“痴”;因行昏昧,故为“昏昧”;因行迷乱,故为“迷乱”。了知不应了知之事,不了知应了知之事,故为“无明”。于轮回中沉陷、陷入,故为“无明暴流”。于轮回中结缚连结,故为“无明轭”。以未曾断除及一再随转生起为义,故为“无明随眠”。如同潜伏路侧的盗贼劫掠旅人,它于心中现行而劫夺善心,故为“无明缠”。犹如城门的横闩脱落,人们入城的道路即被阻断;同样,此无明横闩若落于某人的身见城中,其证得涅槃的智慧通路便被遮断,故名为“无明闩”。它是不善,又是根,或为不善之根,故为“不善根”。此不善根并非他物,正是此处所说的“痴”,因此,“痴不善根”即是无明含义的单句解说。这些即是差别:这便是无明的种种差别相。显示巴利原文
Nāssa kiñci paccakkhakammaṃ atthi, sayañca appaccavekkhitvā katakammanti appaccakkhakammaṃ. Dummedhānaṃ bhāvo dummejjhaṃ. Bālānaṃ bhāvo bālyaṃ. Sampajaññanti paññā, sā atthānatthaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ sampajānāti. Avijjā pana uppajjitvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ pajānituṃ na detīti asampajaññaṃ. Mohanavasena moho. Pamohanavasena pamoho. Sammohanavasena sammoho. Avindiyaṃ vindati, vindiyaṃ na vindatīti avijjā. Vaṭṭasmiṃ ohanati otaratīti avijjogho. Vaṭṭasmiṃ yojetīti avijjāyogo. Appahīnaṭṭhena ceva punappunaṃ uppajjanato ca avijjānusayo. Magge pariyuṭṭhitacorā viya addhike kusalacittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti viluppatīti avijjāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā nagaradvāre palighasaṅkhātāya laṅgiyā patitāya manussānaṃ nagarappaveso pacchijjati, evameva yassa sakkāyanagare ayaṃ patitā, tassa nibbānasampāpakaṃ ñāṇagamanaṃ pacchijjatīti avijjālaṅgī nāma hoti. Akusalañca taṃ mūlañca, akusalānaṃ vā mūlanti akusalamūlaṃ. Taṃ pana na aññaṃ, idhādhippeto mohoti moho akusalamūlanti ayaṃ ekapadiko avijjāya atthuddhāro. Ayaṃ vemattatāti ayaṃ avijjāya vemattatā.
“明”:以了知应了知为义,故称为明;以具穿透义,故称为明;以令了知为义,故称为明。所谓“于苦中智”等:因其了知、彻见、通达苦圣谛的真实本质相,故当以苦圣谛为所缘时,此智即说为“于苦中智”。对其余圣谛,也是如此类推。“慧”:以令种种义理显了为义,故称为慧;或以无常等种种方式了知诸法,故称为慧。了知之相即是“了知”。“择”:能择取无常等义。“审择”:能以种种方式作择取。“择法”:能择取四谛法。“总察”:以总察无常等为相。“各别察”:对一一诸法以各别察为相。“聪慧性”即是“聪慧”。“善巧性”即是“善巧”。“微细性”即是“微细”。“显了”:以说明无常等为相。“思”:以思惟那些诸法为相。“审察”:能审察无常等。“广慧”:此是大地之名,此慧具有柔和与广大之义,犹如大地,故称“广慧”。由此可知,“广慧”乃指大地,因具有如大地般平等、广大的慧,故称广慧者。而且,“广慧”亦是慧的同义词。以爱乐真实法义,故称为广慧。显示巴利原文
Vijjāti vindiyaṃ vindatīti vijjā, vijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, viditakaraṇaṭṭhena vijjā. ‘‘Dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādīsu dukkhasaccassa yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ jānāti passati paṭivijjhatīti dukkhe ariyasacce visayabhūte ñāṇaṃ ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Paññāti tassa tassa atthassa pākaṭakaraṇasaṅkhātena paññāpanaṭṭhena paññā, tena tena vā aniccādinā pakārena dhamme jānātīti paññā. Pajānanākāro pajānanā. Aniccādīni vicinatīti vicayo. Pakārehi vicinatīti pavicayo. Catusaccadhamme vicinatīti dhammavicayo. Aniccādīnaṃ sallakkhaṇavasena sallakkhaṇā. Tesaṃyeva pati pati upalakkhaṇavasena paccupalakkhaṇā. Paṇḍitabhāvo paṇḍiccaṃ. Kusalabhāvo kosallaṃ. Nipuṇabhāvo nepuññaṃ. Aniccādīnaṃ vibhāvanavasena vebhabyā. Tesaṃyeva cintanavasena cintā. Aniccādīni upaparikkhatīti upaparikkhā. Bhūrīti pathaviyā nāmaṃ, ayampi saṇhaṭṭhena vitthataṭṭhena ca bhūrī viyāti bhūrī. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhūrī vuccati pathavī, tāya pathavisamāya vitthatāya paññāya samannāgatoti bhūripañño’’ti (mahāni. 27). Api ca bhūrīti paññāyevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhūte atthe ramatīti bhūrī.
「慧」:折磨烦恼,或以快速执持、忆持为义,所以称为慧。当它生起后,引导那有情进入利益的行为,或者带领相应者通达真实相,所以称为「引导者」。以无常等观照诸法,所以称为「观」。以正确的方式了知无常等,所以称为「正知」。如同刺棒是为了将走入邪道的马引回正道,它刺入那在邪道上奔驰的虚妄心,引回正道,所以如同刺棒,称为「刺棒」。在见相中起根的作用,所以称为「根」,慧所成的根就是「慧根」。不被无明所动摇,所以称为「慧力」。以断烦恼为义,慧即是剑,所以称为「慧剑」。以高耸为义,慧即是宫殿,所以称为「慧宫殿」。以照明为义,慧即是光,所以称为「慧光」。显示巴利原文
Kilese medhati hiṃsatīti medhā, khippaṃ gahaṇadhāraṇaṭṭhena vā medhā. Yassuppajjati, taṃ sattaṃ hitapaṭipattiyaṃ sampayuttaṃ vā yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhe pariṇetīti pariṇāyikā. Aniccādivasena dhamme vipassatīti vipassanā. Sammā pakārehi aniccādīni jānātīti sampajaññaṃ. Uppathapaṭipanne sindhave vīthiāropanatthaṃ patodo viya uppathe dhāvanakūṭacittaṃ vīthiāropanatthaṃ vijjhatīti patodo viyāti patodo. Dassanalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhaṃ kāretīti indriyaṃ, paññāsaṅkhātaṃ indriyaṃ paññindriyaṃ. Avijjāya na kampatīti paññābalaṃ. Kilesacchedanaṭṭhena paññāva satthaṃ paññāsatthaṃ. Accuggataṭṭhena paññāva pāsādo paññāpāsādo. Ālokanaṭṭhena paññāva āloko paññāāloko.
慧以照耀为义,故称“慧光明”。慧以照亮为义,故称“慧灯”。慧以令喜悦、令得喜、能生喜、为人恭敬、难得出现、无比、为无上者所受用等义,故称“慧宝”。众生不因它而迷,或它自身于所缘不迷,故称“无痴”。“择法”之义如前所说。为何复说?为显示无痴是与痴相对立之法。由此说明:此无痴并非仅是异于痴的别法,而是与痴相对立、名为择法的无痴,此处所指正是此。“正见”:即真实、能导向出离的善见。以择法为名的殊胜美妙觉支,即“择法觉支”。“道支”:是圣道的支分、因,故称道支。因含摄于圣道中,故为“道所摄”。显示巴利原文
Obhāsanaṭṭhena paññāva obhāso paññāobhāso. Pajjotanaṭṭhena paññāva pajjoto paññāpajjoto. Ratikaraṇaṭṭhena ratidāyakaṭṭhena ratijanakaṭṭhena cittīkataṭṭhena dullabhapātubhāvaṭṭhena atulaṭṭhena anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhena ca paññāva ratanaṃ paññāratanaṃ. Na tena sattā muyhanti, sayaṃ vā ārammaṇe na muyhatīti amoho. Dhammavicayapadaṃ vuttatthameva. Kasmā panetaṃ puna vuttanti? Amohassa mohapaṭipakkhabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Tenetaṃ dīpeti – yvāyaṃ amoho, so na kevalaṃ mohato añño dhammo, mohassa paṭipakkho dhammavicayasaṅkhāto amohova idhādhippetoti. Sammādiṭṭhīti yāthāvaniyyānikakusaladiṭṭhi. Dhammavicayasaṅkhāto pasattho sundaro vā bojjhaṅgoti dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo. Maggaṅganti ariyamaggassa aṅgaṃ kāraṇanti maggaṅgaṃ. Ariyamaggassa antogadhattā maggapariyāpannanti.
“无想定”:由修习离想之力而生起、能导致生于无想有的定。无佛出世时,有外道出家者,以风遍为业处,证得第四禅那,出定后见想之过患:因有想故,便有断手等苦及一切怖畏,乃作是念:“此想已足矣!无想方为寂静。”如此见想之过患已,以离想的方式证得第四禅那,于禅那不退失中命终,转生无想有情天。他们的心,仅于彼死心灭时,于此间即不再转起,唯色蕴在那里生起。显示巴利原文
Asaññāsamāpattīti saññāvirāgabhāvanāvasena pavattitā asaññabhavūpapattinibbattanasamāpatti. Anuppanne hi buddhe ekacce titthāyatane pabbajitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā jhānā vuṭṭhāya saññāya dosaṃ passanti, saññāya sati hatthacchedādidukkhañceva sabbabhayāni ca honti, ‘‘alaṃ imāya saññāya, saññābhāvo santo’’ti evaṃ saññāya dosaṃ passitvā saññāvirāgavasena catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃ katvā asaññīsu nibbattanti. Cittaṃ nesaṃ cuticittanirodheneva idha nivattati, rūpakkhandhamattameva tattha nibbattati.
他们正如被弓弦弹射出去的箭,随弓弦之力有多强,便在空中飞行多远;同样地,这些众生以禅那之力投生后,随禅那之力有多强,便安住那么久。当禅那力耗尽时,彼处的色蕴即消失,而此地的结生之想则生起。正是对此而说:“能生无想有结生的定”。所谓“识无边处定”即是“显了想定”。彼之所以名为“显了想”,是因它能令初无色的识显了,亦令初无色的想显了。或有读作“显了色想”者,依他们见,所谓“显了色定”即指其余的无色定。其余诸定则易于了知。显示巴利原文
Te yathā nāma jiyāvegukkhitto saro yattako jiyāvego, tattakameva ākāse gacchati, evamevaṃ jhānavegukkhittā upapajjitvā yattako jhānavego, tattakameva kālaṃ tiṭṭhanti. Jhānavege pana parikkhīṇe tattha rūpakkhandho antaradhāyati, idha paṭisandhisaññā uppajjati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘asaññabhavūpapattinibbattanasamāpattī’’ti. Vibhūtasaññāsamāpattīti viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpatti. Sā hi paṭhamāruppaviññāṇassa paṭhamāruppasaññāyapi vibhāvanato ‘‘vibhūtasaññā’’ti vuccati. Keci ‘‘vibhūtarūpasaññā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ matena vibhūtarūpasamāpatti nāma sesāruppasamāpattiyo. Sesā samāpattiyo suviññeyyāva.
「非学非无学禅修者」即已获得禅那的凡夫。「良骏禅修者」即阿拉汉,或泛指一切圣者。「劣马禅修者」指如同劣马般的禅修者。犹如那匹劣马不肯接受调教,随心所欲四处乱跑;同样地,某位获得神通的凡夫,耽着神通,心中思维:「这已足矣,应作已作」,便不再为更高的调御而精进,反而以那神通心到处奔驰流转——这就是所谓的「劣马禅修者」。「见增上禅修者」即持恶见而获得禅那者。「慧增上禅修者」即通过观察诸行之相而修习禅那者,或泛指一切以智慧为增上的禅修者。显示巴利原文
Nevasekkhanāsekkho jhāyīti jhānalābhī puthujjano. Ājāniyo jhāyīti arahā, sabbepi vā ariyapuggalā. Assakhaluṅko jhāyīti khaluṅkassasadiso jhāyī. Tathā hi khaluṅko asso damathaṃ na upeti ito cito ca yathāruci dhāvati, evamevaṃ yo puthujjano abhiññālābhī, so abhiññā assādetvā ‘‘alamettāvatā, katamettāvatā’’ti uttaridamathāya aparisakkanto abhiññācittavasena ito cito ca dhāvati pavattati, so ‘‘assakhaluṅko jhāyī’’ti vutto. Diṭṭhuttaro jhāyīti jhānalābhī diṭṭhigatiko. Paññuttaro jhāyīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena jhāyī, sabbo eva vā paññādhiko jhāyī.
「有诤定」即不善心的一境性,或指一切有漏的定。「无诤定」即一切善与无记的定,或唯出世间定。「有嗔定」即带有嗔心的一境性。「无嗔定」即慈心解脱。在「无间双论」中,也是同样的解释方法。「有染定」即世间定,因其尚未超越轮回的染着与世间的染着,故称有染定。「无染定」即出世间定。「有行定」即那些“苦行道而迟通达者”和“乐行道而迟通达者”之定。要证得这种定,必须靠有加行、有精勤的心,费尽力气、艰辛地镇伏敌对之法才能证得。与此相反的便是「无行定」。「一分修习定」即纯粹修观行者的定。「二分修习定」即修止行者的定。「两边修习之修习定」即身证者与俱分解脱者之定,因其由止、观两方面修习,故称两边修习之修习定。显示巴利原文
Saraṇo samādhīti akusalacittekaggatā, sabbopi vā sāsavo samādhi. Araṇo samādhīti sabbo kusalābyākato samādhi, lokuttaro eva vā. Savero samādhīti paṭighacittesu ekaggatā. Avero samādhīti mettācetovimutti. Anantaradukepi eseva nayo. Sāmiso samādhīti lokiyasamādhi. So hi anatikkantavaṭṭāmisalokāmisatāya sāmiso. Nirāmiso samādhīti lokuttaro samādhi. Sasaṅkhāro samādhīti dukkhāpaṭipado dandhābhiñño sukhāpaṭipado ca dandhābhiñño. So hi sasaṅkhārena sappayogena cittena paccanīkadhamme kicchena kasirena niggahetvā adhigantabbo. Itaro asaṅkhāro samādhi. Ekaṃsabhāvito samādhīti sukkhavipassakassa samādhi. Ubhayaṃsabhāvito samādhīti samathayānikassa samādhi. Ubhayato bhāvitabhāvano samādhīti kāyasakkhino ubhatobhāgavimuttassa ca samādhi. So hi ubhayato bhāgehi ubhayato bhāvitabhāvano.
「沉溺行」即沉迷于欲乐的行为方式,意谓放纵感官享乐。「烧燃行」即因为沉迷于欲乐而自我消耗、以疲惫持续着的行为,意谓自我折磨的苦行。关于「不忍行」等词:在精勤修行时,无法忍受寒冷等外境之人的行为,称为「不忍行」,因为他对这些不堪忍;而能够忍受之人的行为,则称为「能忍行」,因为他堪忍这些。「寂静行」:依照“对已生起的欲寻,不予接受随顺”等方法,平息错误的寻思,故称寂静行。「调伏行」:善于调伏以意门为首的六根,故称调伏行。显示巴利原文
Āgāḷhapaṭipadāti kāmānaṃ orohanapaṭipatti, kāmasukhānuyogoti attho. Nijjhāmapaṭipadāti kāmassa nijjhāpanavasena khedanavasena pavattā paṭipatti, attakilamathānuyogoti attho. Akkhamā paṭipadātiādīsu padhānakaraṇakāle sītādīni asahantassa paṭipadā, tāni nakkhamatīti akkhamā. Sahantassa pana tāni khamatīti khamā. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.14; 6.58) nayena micchāvitakke sametīti samā. Manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni dametīti damā paṭipadā.
“如此”:即以上述方式。“任何法”:指任何一个具有生等性质的法。“对于某法”:指对于与之不同的、具有老等性质的法。“相同状态”:指在苦等性质上状态相同。“以单一性”:由于在苦等性质上的共同性,即这些苦等性质合而为一。“成为一体”:即使数目上是多个,但因为都可以用“苦”等同一个名称来指称,所以成为一体。这说明了单一性的相。“又以何种差异”:指某一法在哪些方面与另一法不相似。“则以彼彼方式达至差别”:即通过那些方面,此法对于彼法达到差别性,也就是不相似性;意思是,虽然在苦的性质上是相同的,但生等于老等,在生起等方面具有殊异性。这说明了差别性的相。显示巴利原文
Evanti iminā vuttanayena. Yo dhammoti yo koci jātiādidhammo. Yassa dhammassāti tato aññassa jarādidhammassa. Samānabhāvoti dukkhādibhāvena samānabhāvo. Ekattatāyāti samānatāya dukkhādibhāvānaṃ ekībhāvena. Ekī bhavatīti anekopi ‘‘dukkha’’ntiādinā ekasaddābhidheyyatāya ekī bhavati. Etena ekattatāya lakkhaṇamāha. Yena yena vā pana vilakkhaṇoti yo dhammo yassa dhammassa yena yena bhāvena visadiso. Tena tena vemattaṃ gacchatīti tena tena bhāvena so dhammo tassa dhammassa vemattataṃ visadisattaṃ gacchati, dukkhabhāvena samānopi jātiādiko abhinibbattiādibhāvena jarādikassa visiṭṭhataṃ gacchatīti attho. Iminā vemattatāya lakkhaṇamāha.
现在,为了先引导进入单一性与差别性的范畴而作开示,故说“在经中或记说中”等。其中,“所问”是指以提问方式、依所说经而说出的内容,并非由于基理之网的提问范畴。其余部分浅显易懂。显示巴利原文
Idāni tāva ekattavemattatāvisaye niyojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sutte vā veyyākaraṇe vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pucchitanti pucchāvasena desitasuttavasena vuttaṃ, na pana adhiṭṭhānahārassa pucchāvisayatāya. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
「基理之网(Adhiṭṭhānahāra)解析」的注释已完毕。显示巴利原文
Adhiṭṭhānahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
15. 资具之网(Parikkhārahāra)解析的注释显示巴利原文
15. Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
49 49. 其中,什么是“资具之网”?这便是资具之网的辨析。此处先简要说明资具之相:若某一法产生某一法,则前者便是后者的资具。为了详细开显此相,故说“以何为相”等。其中,“因”:指能使自身之果达到酬报状态的法。“缘”:指果依之而生起的法。虽然因和缘这两个词都表示原因,但为了详细显示其间的差别,故说“有不共相”等。“自性因”:指以具有相同自性的种子为因。(问:)“难道种子与芽等不相似吗?”(答:)并非不相似,因为若非如此,就不会有那样的芽等生起。显示巴利原文
49.Tatthakatamo parikkhāro hāroti parikkhārahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha yo dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ janayati, tassa so parikkhāroti saṅkhepato parikkhāralakkhaṇaṃ vatvā taṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃlakkhaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hinoti attano phalaṃ paṭikāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatīti hetu. Paṭicca etasmā phalaṃ etīti paccayo. Kiñcāpi hetupaccayasaddehi kāraṇameva vuccati, tathāpi tattha visesaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘asādhāraṇalakkhaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sabhāvo hetūti samānabhāvo bījaṃ hetu. Nanu ca bījaṃ aṅkurādisadisaṃ na hotīti? No na hoti, aññato hi tādisassa anuppajjanato.
“又或如同”等语句,也是通过展示其他譬喻来辨析因与缘的差别。其中,“牛奶”指乳汁。“成为凝乳”:这是依同一性的道理,或是假立无差别而说的,并非别有情况。因为牛奶并不真的变成凝乳。因此说:“牛奶与凝乳没有同一时间的共存。”或者,壶中的牛奶变成凝乳,凝乳是在不同时间由其他缘和合而生起的,因此牛奶与凝乳由于味道、乳性、成熟等自性不同,没有同一时间的共存。“同样地”:如同作为因的牛奶与作为果的凝乳没有同一时间的共存,其他任何因与果也没有同一时间的共存,但缘则不如此,因为缘并非必定与果有时间差异。这样便能了知因与缘的差别,这是所说意旨。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā vā panā’’tiādināpi udāharaṇantaradassanena hetupaccayānaṃ visesameva vibhāveti. Tattha duddhanti khīraṃ. Dadhi bhavatīti ekattanayena abhedopacārena vā vuttaṃ, na aññathā. Na hi khīraṃ dadhi hoti. Tenevāha – ‘‘na catthi ekakālasamavadhānaṃ duddhassa ca dadhissa cā’’ti. Atha vā ghaṭe duddhaṃ pakkhittaṃ dadhi bhavati, dadhi tattha kālantare jāyati paccayantarasamāyogena, tasmā na catthi ekakālasamavadhānaṃ duddhassa ca dadhissa ca rasakhīravipākādīhi bhinnasabhāvattā. Evamevanti yathā hetubhūtassa khīrassa phalabhūtena dadhinā na ekakālasamavadhānaṃ, evamaññassāpi hetussa phalena na ekakālasamavadhānaṃ, na tathā paccayassa, na hi paccayo ekantena phalena bhinnakālo evāti. Evampi hetupaccayānaṃ viseso veditabboti adhippāyo.
显示了外在的因缘差别之后,现在为显示内在的,而说“因为此轮回”等。其中,若说“无明是无明之因”,难道在一个心识生起中有多个无明吗?答道:“前无明是后无明之因。”以此证成在同一时间中,因与果没有共存。其中,以“前无明”等显示了作为因与果的无明的差别。“犹如种子与芽”等,显示了这样的意义:如同种子作为芽的因,以无间因性而成为因;而种子所生的果,种子又以辗转因性而成为因。同样地,无明作为因的道理也应这样来理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bāhiraṃ hetupaccayavibhāgaṃ dassetvā idāni ajjhattikaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañhi saṃsāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘avijjā avijjāya hetū’’ti vutte kiṃ ekasmiṃ cittuppāde anekā avijjā vijjantīti? Āha ‘‘purimikā avijjā pacchimikāya avijjāya hetū’’ti. Tena ekasmiṃ kāle hetuphalānaṃ samavadhānaṃ natthīti etamevatthaṃ samattheti. Tattha ‘‘purimikā avijjā’’tiādinā hetuphalabhūtānaṃ avijjānaṃ vibhāgaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Bījaṅkuro viyā’’tiādinā imamatthaṃ dasseti – yathā bījaṃ aṅkurassa hetu hontaṃ samanantarahetutāya hetu hoti. Yaṃ pana bījato phalaṃ nibbattati, tassa bījaṃ paramparahetutāya hetu hoti. Evaṃ avijjāyapi hetubhāve daṭṭhabbanti.
“又或如同”等,也是显示因与缘的差别。其中,“灯盏”即灯碟,“无火”即没有火,“点燃”意为使之燃烧。由此,“自性因”:如同在点燃油灯等情形中,火等与油灯相似的那种因,便是自性因。“他性缘”:于彼处,灯碟、安置的油等,与火不同的其他自性,便是缘。“内在的”:指属于自身的内在,即在自己内在产生的。“外在的”:指其之外的。“能生的”:指能产生者。“能摄的”:指能支持者。“不共的”:指特有的。“共的”:指对于其他所生果亦是共同的。显示巴利原文
Puna ‘‘yathā vā panā’’tiādināpi hetupaccayavibhāgameva dasseti. Tattha thālakanti dīpakapallikā. Anaggikanti aggiṃ vinā. Dīpetunti jāletuṃ. Iti sabhāvo hetūti evaṃ padīpujjālanādīsu aggiādipadīpasadisaṃ kāraṇaṃ sabhāvo hetu. Parabhāvo paccayoti tattheva kapallikāvaṭṭitelādisadiso aggito añño sabhāvo paccayo. Ajjhattikoti niyakajjhattiko niyakajjhatte bhavo. Bāhiroti tato bahibhūto. Janakoti nibbattako. Pariggāhakoti upatthambhako. Asādhāraṇoti āveṇiko. Sādhāraṇoti aññesampi paccayuppannānaṃ samāno.
此处,由于“资具(parikkhāro)”被说为因,而因性(kāraṇabhāva)是观待于果的,因此为了阐明因之所以为因的因性如何成立、什么是果及其差别、以及因与果的关系,便说了“不断绝义(avupacchedattho)”等。其中,以因果关系而关联的即是相续(santati)。那么,在此何为关联,何为因果关系呢?那就是不断绝义。若一个果灭去后,不再成为其他法的因,便称为“断绝(vupacchinno)”,犹如阿拉汉的死心(cuticitta)。然而,若一法灭去后,成为与自己相应的果之因,则称为“不断绝(anupacchinno)”。正因为因与果的关联存在,所以说:“不断绝义即是相续义。”显示巴利原文
Idāni yasmā kāraṇaṃ ‘‘parikkhāro’’ti vuttaṃ, kāraṇabhāvo ca phalāpekkhāya, tasmā kāraṇassa yo kāraṇabhāvo yathā ca so hoti, yañca phalaṃ yo ca tassa viseso, yo ca kāraṇaphalānaṃ sambandho, taṃ sabbaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘avupacchedattho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāraṇaphalabhāvena sambandhatā santati. Ko ca tattha sambandho, ko kāraṇaphalabhāvo ca? So eva avupacchedattho. Yo phalabhūto aññassa akāraṇaṃ hutvā nirujjhati, so vupacchinno nāma hoti, yathā taṃ arahato cuticittaṃ. Yo pana attano anurūpassa phalassa hetu hutvā nirujjhati, so anupacchinno eva nāma hoti, hetuphalasambandhassa vijjamānattāti āha – ‘‘avupacchedattho santatiattho’’ti.
又由于只有从因所生的才称为果,而非未生的,所以说“产生义(nibbattiattho)即果义(phalattho)”。然而,因为依前生而有后生的结生(paṭisandhi)而转起的那些再生蕴(upapattikkhandhā)即是后有(punabbhavo),所以说:“结生义(paṭisandhiattho)即后有义(punabbhavattho)”。同样地,对于某位补特伽罗(puggala),当烦恼(kilesā)生起时,便会缠缚(palibundhenti)他,使他不能正确行道;而这些烦恼只要未被道彻底断除,便称为随眠(anusenti),因此说:“障碍义(palibodhattho)即缠缚义(pariyuṭṭhānattho),未断除义(asamugghātattho)即随眠义(anusayattho)”。当以遍知通达(pariññābhisamaya)彻底了知(pariññāta)之后,它就永远不会再成为那个名色(nāmarūpa)之芽的因了,所以说:“未遍知义(apari…显示巴利原文
Yasmā ca kāraṇato nibbattaṃ phalaṃ nāma, na anibbattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘nibbattiattho phalattho’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana purimabhavena anantarabhavapaṭisandhānavasena pavattā upapattikkhandhā punabbhavo, tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘paṭisandhiattho punabbhavattho’’ti. Tathā yassa puggalassa kilesā uppajjanti, taṃ palibundhenti sammā paṭipajjituṃ na denti. Yāva ca maggena asamugghātitā, tāva anusenti nāma, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘palibodhattho pariyuṭṭhānattho, asamugghātattho anusayattho’’ti. Pariññābhisamayavasena pariññāte na kadāci taṃ nāmarūpaṅkurassa kāraṇaṃ hessatīti āha – ‘‘apariññātattho viññāṇassa bījattho’’ti. Yattha avupacchedo tattha santatīti yattha rūpārūpappavattiyaṃ yathāvutto avupacchedo, tattha santativohāro . Yattha santati tattha nibbattītiādi paccayaparamparadassanaṃ hetuphalasambandhavibhāvanameva.
“或者又如‘缘于眼和……’”等,是以分别说明的方式,来显示“自性是因(sabhāvo hetu)”这一已说的意义。其中,“依止性(sannissayatā)”即是亲依止缘性(upanissayapaccayatā)。“作意(manasikāro)”指唯作意界(kiriyāmanodhātu),因为它与眼识(cakkhuviññāṇa)的识性(viññāṇabhāva)种类相同,所以自性是因。“行(saṅkhārā)是识的缘,自性是因”,意思是:福行、非福行等(puññādiabhisaṅkhārā)是结生识(paṭisandhiviññāṇa)的缘,其中的自性即是因。这里所说的“行”,是指一切世间的善与不善的心生起。依照这个道理,其余各句的意义也应理解。如此,任何亲依止缘(upanissayo)即是资具(parikkhāro),意思是:如上所述分类的任何缘(paccayo),都因为它能资助、构造自己的果而称为资具。将它择取出来而说,即是资具之网(parikkhāro hāro)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā vā pana cakkhuñca paṭiccā’’tiādinā ‘‘sabhāvo hetū’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāgena dasseti. Tattha sannissayatāyāti upanissayapaccayatāya. Manasikāroti kiriyāmanodhātu. Sā hi cakkhuviññāṇassa viññāṇabhāvena samānajātitāya sabhāvo hetu. Saṅkhārā viññāṇassa paccayo sabhāvo hetūti puññādiabhisaṅkhārā paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccayo, tattha yo sabhāvo, so hetūti. Saṅkhārāti cettha sabbo lokiyo kusalākusalacittuppādo adhippeto. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo. Evaṃ yo koci upanissayo sabbo so parikkhāroti yathāvuttappabhedo yo koci paccayo, so sabbo attano phalassa parikkharaṇato abhisaṅkharaṇato parikkhāro. Tassa niddhāretvā kathanaṃ parikkhāro hāroti.
资具网分别注释(Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)结束了。显示巴利原文
Parikkhārahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
16. 补装修网分别注释(Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā)显示巴利原文
16. Samāropanahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
50 什么是“补装修网”(samāropano hāro)?这就是对补装修网的分别。这里说的“于一所依处”(padaṭṭhāna),是指经中把握了任何一个作为因的法。“凡是其他所依处进入”(otaranti),是指其他作为因的法都汇入那个法中。“所有那些都应补装修”(samāropayitabbāni),意思是所有那些所依处的法,都应以抉择的方式提取出来,然后安立于教说中,如同它们本就记载在教说中那样来解说。正如在“转向网”(āvaṭṭe hāre)中所说:“于一所依处,寻求余所依处”,这话指示应对众多所依处进行寻求;同样,此处为了显示对众多所依处进行补装修,故说“如转向网”。为了表明补装修不仅仅依所依处而行,亦可依异名(vevacana)、修习(bhāvanā)、断除(pahāna)而行,故又说:“其中,补装修有四种”等。显示巴利原文
50.Tatthakatamo samāropano hāroti samāropanahāravibhaṅgo. Tattha ekasmiṃ padaṭṭhāneti yasmiṃ kismiñci ekasmiṃ kāraṇabhūte dhamme suttena gahite. Yattakāni padaṭṭhānāni otarantīti yattakāni aññesaṃ kāraṇabhūtāni tasmiṃ dhamme samosaranti. Sabbāni tāni samāropayitabbānīti sabbāni tāni padaṭṭhānāni padaṭṭhānabhūtā dhammā sammā niddhāraṇavasena ānetvā desanāya āropetabbā, desanāruḷhe viya katvā kathetabbāti attho. Yathā āvaṭṭe hāre ‘‘ekamhi padaṭṭhāne, pariyesati sesakaṃ padaṭṭhāna’’nti (netti. 4 niddesavāra) vacanato anekesaṃ padaṭṭhānānaṃ pariyesanā vuttā, evamidhāpi bahūnaṃ padaṭṭhānānaṃ samāropanā kātabbāti dassento ‘‘yathā āvaṭṭe hāre’’ti āha. Na kevalaṃ padaṭṭhānavaseneva samāropanā, atha kho vevacanabhāvanāpahānavasenapi samāropanā kātabbāti dassento ‘‘tattha samāropanā catubbidhā’’tiādimāha.
此处为何采用所依处的异名?在“所依处异名网”中不是已经阐明此义了吗?确实如此。然而,此处采用所依处的异名,旨在显示修习与断除的所依境界,并展示它们的异名分类。如此,则修习与断除易于理解,亦便于教导。所谓“这是所依处”,即此三种善行,乃诸佛的教诫与教示的领域及所依,因此名为所依处。其中,由“身善行”等三种善行,抉择并显示了戒等三蕴、止与观,以及第三果与第四果,这确实易于理解。“被贪求故,称为林”;或由“vanati”、“vanute”而得名。其中,五种欲功德是欲爱的因,取相是取随形好的因,内外处是与欲贪等相连的因,随眠是缠缚的因,故为显示此义,而举出“五种欲功德”等。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha padaṭṭhānavevacanāni gahitāni, nanu padaṭṭhānavevacanahāre eva ayamattho vibhāvitoti? Saccametaṃ, idha pana padaṭṭhānavevacanaggahaṇaṃ bhāvanāpahānānaṃ adhiṭṭhānavisayadassanatthañceva tesaṃ adhivacanavibhāgadassanatthañca. Evañhi bhāvanāpahānāni suviññeyyāni honti sukarāni ca paññāpetuṃ. Idaṃ padaṭṭhānanti idaṃ tividhaṃ sucaritaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanassa ovādassa visayādhiṭṭhānabhāvato padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kāyika’’ntiādinā tīhi sucaritehi sīlādayo tayo khandhe samathavipassanā tatiyacatutthaphalāni ca niddhāretvā dasseti, taṃ suviññeyyameva. Vanīyatīti vanaṃ, vanati, vanute iti vā vanaṃ. Tattha yasmā pañca kāmaguṇā kāmataṇhāya, nimittaggāho anubyañjanaggāhassa, ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni tappaṭibandhachandarāgādīnaṃ, anusayā ca pariyuṭṭhānānaṃ kāraṇāni honti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pañca kāmaguṇā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
51 这是以异名所作的补装修:即由“离欲贪的心解脱是有学果、不来果、超越欲界”这些异门语来解说第三果;同样,由“离无明的慧解脱是无学果、最上果、阿拉汉果、超越三界”这些异门语来解说第四果;以及由“慧根”等异门语来解说慧——这就是以异名所作的补装修。显示巴利原文
51.Ayaṃ vevacanena samāropanāti yo ‘‘rāgavirāgā cetovimutti sekkhaphalaṃ, anāgāmiphalaṃ, kāmadhātusamatikkamana’’nti etehi pariyāyavacanehi tatiyaphalassa niddeso, tathā yo ‘‘avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti asekkhaphalaṃ, aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ, tedhātukasamatikkamana’’nti etehi pariyāyavacanehi catutthaphalassa niddeso, yo ca ‘‘paññindriya’’ntiādīhi pariyāyavacanehi paññāya niddeso, ayaṃ vevacanehi ca samāropanā.
是故,比丘,你应于身随观身而住等,当依相网分别注释中所说之理而解。唯此一别:彼处以同一相故,为显未曾言说者亦具言说之义而引述;此处则依修习而安立,此即差异所在。身随观,特指不净随观,正是对治欲贪及其同地烦恼的绝对对治法。为令此义显明而说:“于身随观身而住者,能断这些恶不善法——即不净想、于段食遍知作障碍之烦恼、欲取、欲轭、贪欲身系、欲漏、欲暴流、贪刺,以及于色法遍知作对治之烦恼、于色之贪、随欲而行,是故如是宣说。显示巴利原文
Tasmātiha tvaṃ, bhikkhu, kāye kāyānupassī viharāhītiādi lakkhaṇahāravibhaṅgavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Kevalaṃ tattha ekalakkhaṇattā avuttānampi vuttabhāvadassanavaseneva āgataṃ, idha bhāvanāsamāropanavasenāti ayameva viseso. Kāyānupassanā visesato asubhānupassanā eva kāmarāgatadekaṭṭhakilesānaṃ ekantapaṭipakkhāti asubhasaññā kabaḷīkārāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesā kāmupādānaṃ kāmayogo abhijjhākāyagantho kāmāsavo kāmogho rāgasallaṃ rūpadhammapariññāya paṭipakkhakilesā rūpadhammesu rāgo chandāgatigamananti etesaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahānāya saṃvattatīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharanto’’tiādinā.
同样,受随观(vedanānupassanā),特别是作为苦随观(dukkhānupassanā),它——显示巴利原文
Tathā vedanānupassanā visesato dukkhānupassanāti, sā –
“他于乐受见其苦,于苦受见其如箭;
他将不苦不乐的寂静见为无常。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, adakkhi naṃ aniccato’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253; itivu. 53) –
同样地,受随观中特以苦随观为要。正如最初所说:“他把乐视为苦,把苦视为箭;对那不苦不乐的寂静,则见其为无常。”如此将一切受作“苦”观照者,能断除如下种种:障碍乐想与受因遍知的烦恼,即认为依牛戒等可以清净“有”,并缘受味而转起的、称为戒禁取与有取的执取;缘受而转起“他曾对我不利”等的瞋恚身系与瞋箭;唯缘受味而转起的、称为有轭、有流、有暴流的“有贪”,即障碍有遍知的烦恼;以及以受为所缘的贪与瞋恚趣行。为显示此义,故说“于受,随观受”等。显示巴利原文
Ādivacanato sabbaṃ vedanaṃ ‘‘dukkha’’nti passantī sukhasaññāya vedanāhetupariññāya paribandhakilesānaṃ gosīlādīhi bhavasuddhi hotīti vedanāssādena pavattassa bhavupādānasaṅkhātassa sīlabbatupādānassa vedanāvasena ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādinayappavattassa (dī. ni. 3.340; a. ni. 9.29; 10.79; dha. sa. 1237; vibha. 909, 960) byāpādakāyaganthassa dosasallassa vedanāssādavaseneva pavattassa bhavayogabhavābhavabhavoghasaṅkhātassa bhavarāgassa bhavapariññāya paribandhakakilesānaṃ vedanāvisayassa rāgassa dosāgatigamanassa ca pahānāya saṃvattatīti etamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘vedanāsu vedanānupassī’’tiādinā.
同样地,心随观中特以无常随观为要。当修习者以“心是无常”而观照时,因多数众生于心生常想,故能断除如下种种:障碍常想与识食遍知的烦恼;作为常执之对治的邪见,即称为见取、见轭、戒禁取身系、见漏、见流;以常想为因、转起“我是更优秀者”等的慢箭;障碍想遍知的对治烦恼,也就是对想的贪;以及由于见执著未断而可能生起的怖畏趣行。为显示此义,故说“于心,随观心”等。显示巴利原文
Tathā cittānupassanā visesato aniccānupassanāti, sā cittaṃ ‘‘anicca’’nti passantī tattha yebhuyyena sattā niccasaññinoti niccasaññāya viññāṇāhārapariññāya paribandhakilesānaṃ niccābhinivesapaṭipakkhato eva diṭṭhupādānaṃ diṭṭhiyogasīlabbataparāmāsakāyaganthadiṭṭhāsavadiṭṭhoghasaṅkhātāya diṭṭhiyā niccasaññānimittassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinayappavattassa (dha. sa. 1239; vibha. 832, 866, 962) mānasallassa saññāpariññāya paṭipakkhakilesānaṃ saññāya rāgassa diṭṭhābhinivesassa appahīnattā uppajjanakassa bhayāgatigamanassa ca pahānāya saṃvattatīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘citte cittānupassī’’tiādinā.
同样,法随观——特别是无我想。当修习者在诸行中观照无我时,能断除如下诸法:障碍我想与意思食遍知的对治烦恼,即有身见;以“唯有此是真理”而转起的邪执著;因邪执著所生、所谓无明轭、无明漏、无明流、痴箭的无明;障碍行遍知的烦恼,即对行的贪;以及无明趣行。为示此义,故说“于诸法,随观法而安住”等。其余文义,显而易见。显示巴利原文
Tathā dhammānupassanā visesato anattasaññāti, sā saṅkhāresu attasaññāya manosañcetanāhārapariññāya paṭipakkhakilesānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 202-203; 3.27) pavattassa micchābhinivesassa micchābhinivesahetukāya avijjāyogaavijjāsavaavijjoghamohasallasaṅkhātāya avijjāya saṅkhārapariññāya paribandhakilesānaṃ saṅkhāresu rāgassa mohāgatigamanassa ca pahānāya saṃvattatīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘dhammesu dhammānupassī viharanto’’tiādinā. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
1. 说法网集注释显示巴利原文
1. Desanāhārasampātavaṇṇanā
犹如在精心平整的大地上遍撒各色盛开的鲜花;犹如在善巧匠师指导下,将闪耀着种种光芒的宝珠镶嵌于精工打磨的纯金饰品之上;犹如翻转大地,令人咀嚼嫩叶薄片;犹如压榨一个由旬大的蜜团,畅饮其极为甘甜的蜜汁——同样,大迦旃延尊者从各处引述经文段落,将十六种相摄分别解说之后,如今为将它们统合于同一部经典中而开显,遂展开了“相摄集”的论述。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ suparikammakatāya bhūmiyā nānāvaṇṇāni muttapupphāni pakiranto viya susikkhitasippācariyavicāritesu surattasuvaṇṇālaṅkāresu nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalāni vividhāni maṇiratanāni bandhanto viya mahāpathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ khādāpento viya yojanikamadhugaṇḍaṃ pīḷetvā sumadhurasaṃ pāyento viya ca āyasmā mahākaccāno nānāsuttapadese udāharanto soḷasa hāre vibhajitvā idāni te ekasmiṃyeva sutte yojetvā dassento hārasampātavāraṃ ārabhi. Ārabhanto ca yāyaṃ niddesavāre –
“十六理趣为初”,先以方向之眼观察诸方后……显示巴利原文
‘‘Soḷasa hārā paṭhamaṃ, disalocanato disā viloketvā.
Saṅkhipiya aṅkusena hi, nayehi tīhi niddise sutta’’nti. –
以上偈颂已经解说。理趣分别品因为范围散漫,且对理趣的考察在其中有所间断,所以并不适用。的确,理趣分别品仅仅是在许多经句中显示理趣的分别。然而,理趣会遇品则适用它,因为在同一经句中运用十六种理趣之后,便紧接着开示了理趣的生起。因此,忆念“十六理趣为第一”的偈颂后,说道:“其解释应于何处见?即于理趣会遇中。”意思是:“那首偈颂的解释应于何处见?”以此表明:在诸经中结合理趣而显示理趣,正是这理趣会遇品。“理趣会遇”一词的意义至此已经说明。显示巴利原文
Gāthā vuttā. Yasmā taṃ hāravibhaṅgavāro nappayojeti, vippakiṇṇavisayattā, nayavicārassa ca antaritattā . Anekehi suttapadesehi hārānaṃ vibhāgadassanameva hi hāravibhaṅgavāro. Hārasampātavāro pana taṃ payojeti, ekasmiṃyeva suttapadese soḷasa hāre yojetvāva tadanantaraṃ nayasamuṭṭhānassa kathitattā. Tasmā ‘‘soḷasa hārā paṭhama’’nti gāthaṃ paccāmasitvā ‘‘tassā niddeso kuhiṃ daṭṭhabbo, hārasampāte’’ti āha. Tassattho – ‘‘tassā gāthāya niddeso kattha daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Etena suttesu hārānaṃ yojanānayadassanaṃ hārasampātavāroti dasseti. Hārasampātapadassa attho vutto eva.
‘未守护之心’:指在眼门等处缺乏念的防护而未加守护的心。‘被邪见所害’:指被常见等邪执所染污的心。‘被昏沉睡眠所征服’:指被具有心与身不适业特征的昏沉、睡眠所压伏的心。‘趣入魔罗的统治’:即成为烦恼魔等的随意支配对象。这是该偈颂的词义。显示巴利原文
Arakkhitenacittenāti cakkhudvārādīsu satiārakkhābhāvena aguttena cittena. Micchādiṭṭhihatenāti sassatādimicchābhinivesadūsitena. Thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti cittassa kāyassa ca akalyatālakkhaṇehi thinamiddhehi ajjhotthaṭena. Vasaṃ mārassa gacchatīti kilesamārādīnaṃ yathākāmaṃ karaṇīyo hotīti ayaṃ tāva gāthāya padattho.
「放逸」:「无守护的心」一句,说明了在六门中以舍弃正念为特征的放逸。「那是死魔的领域」:由于那放逸能杀害善德,因而成为被称为“死”的魔的支配处。因此,结合第一句与第四句显示:“以无守护的心,趣入魔的统治”。所谓“颠倒”,就是将无常五蕴执为“常”的见解,这就是颠倒,也就是颠倒执取。所以说:“以颠倒执取为相者,即是颠倒”。在总括一切颠倒的共相之后,问:“什么颠倒?”根据共相所摄的特殊类别,便说:“想、心、见”。这些应与“颠倒”一词相连。其中,想颠倒最为微细,只是将无常等境以错误的方式呈现而执取其相,如同幼鹿对草人执为“人”而生起想一样。心颠倒比它更强,当境把非宝等显现为宝等相时,心就那样决定,例如决定为常等。见颠倒则最强,对于任何所缘如何显现,便以常见等固执“唯此真实,余皆虚妄”而转起。其中,想颠倒是心颠倒的因,心颠倒是见颠倒的因。显示巴利原文
Pamādanti ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ chasu dvāresu sativosaggalakkhaṇaṃ pamādaṃ katheti. Taṃ maccuno padanti taṃ pamajjanaṃ guṇamāraṇato maccusaṅkhātassa mārassa vasavattanaṭṭhānaṃ, tena ‘‘arakkhitena cittena, vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti paṭhamapādaṃ catutthapādena sambandhitvā dasseti. So vipallāsoti yaṃ aniccassa khandhapañcakassa ‘‘nicca’’nti dassanaṃ, so vipallāso vipariyesaggāho. Tenevāha – ‘‘viparītaggāhalakkhaṇo vipallāso’’ti. Sabbaṃ vipallāsasāmaññena gahetvā tassa adhiṭṭhānaṃ pucchati ‘‘kiṃ vipallāsayatī’’ti. Sāmaññassa ca viseso adhiṭṭhānabhāvena voharīyatīti āha – ‘‘saññaṃ cittaṃ diṭṭhimitī’’ti. Taṃ ‘‘vipallāsayatī’’ti padena sambandhitabbaṃ. Tesu saññāvipallāso sabbamuduko, aniccādikassa visayassa micchāvasena upaṭṭhitākāraggahaṇamattaṃ migapotakānaṃ tiṇapurisakesu purisoti uppannasaññā viya. Cittavipallāso tato balavataro, amaṇiādike visaye maṇiādiākārena upaṭṭhahante tathā sanniṭṭhānaṃ viya niccādito sanniṭṭhānamattaṃ. Diṭṭhivipallāso pana sabbabalavataro yaṃ yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ yathā yathā upaṭṭhāti, tathā tathā naṃ sassatādivasena ‘‘idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti abhinivisanto pavattati. Tattha saññāvipallāso cittavipallāsassa kāraṇaṃ, cittavipallāso diṭṭhivipallāsassa kāraṇaṃ hoti.
现在为了显示颠倒的活动处和境,说:‘它在何处颠倒?在四种有身事中。’其中,‘有身事’就是五取蕴。因为‘我、我所’依之而住著,所以称为‘我’,在这里生起觉知和言说为‘我’,所以是‘有身’,它又是净等颠倒的基础,因此是‘事’,所以称为‘有身事’。以‘观色为我’等说明它们是一切颠倒之根——有身见的活动处后,再以颠倒的活动方式与境分别显示:‘色为第一颠倒事,于不净为净’等。这一切容易理解。再以根本原因分别颠倒,说:‘二法为心的染污’等。其中,虽然无明不伴的渴爱不存在,且无明也是净、乐想等的缘,但为了显示渴爱是它们的强缘,所以说:‘被渴爱所覆……于苦为乐’。「被见所覆」就是以见为首说无明,所以是‘被无明所覆’。虽然在渴爱不伴的地方见也不存在,且渴爱也是见的缘。但为了显示痴是特殊的缘,所以说:‘被见所覆……于无我为我’等。显示巴利原文
Idāni vipallāsānaṃ pavattiṭṭhānaṃ visayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so kuhiṃ vipallāsayati, catūsu attabhāvavatthūsū’’ti āha. Tattha attabhāvavatthūsūti pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu. Te hi āhito ahaṃ māno etthāti attā, ‘‘attā’’ti bhavati ettha buddhi vohāro cāti attabhāvo, so eva subhādīnaṃ vipallāsassa ca adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vatthu cāti ‘‘attabhāvavatthū’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā tesaṃ sabbavipallāsamūlabhūtāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā pavattiṭṭhānabhāvena attabhāvavatthutaṃ dassetvā puna vipallāsānaṃ pavattiākārena saddhiṃ visayaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ paṭhamaṃ vipallāsavatthu asubhe subha’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyaṃ. Puna mūlakāraṇavasena vipallāse vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dve dhammā cittassa saṃkilesā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kiñcāpi avijjārahitā taṇhā natthi, avijjā ca subhasukhasaññānampi paccayo eva, tathāpi taṇhā etāsaṃ sātisayaṃ paccayoti dassetuṃ ‘‘taṇhānivutaṃ…pe… dukkhe sukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhinivutanti diṭṭhisīsena avijjā vuttāti avijjānivutanti attho. Kāmañcettha taṇhārahitā diṭṭhi natthi, taṇhāpi diṭṭhiyā paccayo eva. Taṇhāpi ‘‘niccaṃ attā’’ti ayoniso ummujjantānaṃ tathāpavattamicchābhinivesassa moho visesapaccayoti dassetuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhinivutaṃ…pe… attā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“见颠倒”是指“于无常为常,于无我为我”这两种颠倒,故说:“他观过去色……观过去识为我”。由此显示,十八种前际论也是依后两种颠倒而生。“爱颠倒”是以爱为根的颠倒,指“于不净为净,于苦为乐”这两种颠倒,故说:“欢喜未来色”:即对未来色,以见与爱喜而欢喜。对未来受、想、行、识欢喜,亦同此理。由此显示,四十四种后际论也大多依前两种颠倒而生。“二法是心的随染”:如此特别显示了最应呵责的颠倒之根本因,即渴爱与无明——这两种法正是心的随染,由此显示其自性。“依此,清净的心得以清净”:也通过其对立面说明它们确实是随染,因为若渴爱与无明断除,则一切杂染法无不灭尽。而且,如同颠倒以渴爱、无明为根本因,整个轮回也是如此,故为了以相应的理趣而结束偈颂,说“他们的”等。其中,“他们的”是指那些心无守护且被邪见所害者。“以无明为盖……”等句则说明,由于落入魔的统治,他们在无始轮回中流转。显示巴利原文
Yo diṭṭhivipallāsoti ‘‘anicce niccaṃ, anattani attā’’ti pavattampi vipallāsadvayaṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘so atītaṃ rūpaṃ…pe… atītaṃ viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti. Etena aṭṭhārasavidhopi pubbantānukappikavādo pacchimānaṃ dvinnaṃ vipallāsānaṃ vasena hotīti dasseti. Taṇhāvipallāsoti taṇhāmūlako vipallāso. ‘‘Asubhe subhaṃ, dukkhe sukha’’nti etaṃ vipallāsadvayaṃ sandhāya vadati. Anāgataṃ rūpaṃ abhinandatīti anāgataṃ rūpaṃ diṭṭhābhinandanavasena abhinandati. Anāgataṃ vedanaṃ, saññaṃ, saṅkhāre, viññāṇaṃ abhinandatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Etena catucattālīsavidhopi aparantānukappikavādo yebhuyyena purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ vipallāsānaṃ vasena hotīti dasseti. Dve dhammā cittassa upakkilesāti evaṃ paramasāvajjassa vipallāsassa mūlakāraṇanti visesato dve dhammā cittassa upakkilesā taṇhā ca avijjā cāti te sarūpato dasseti. Tāhi visujjhantaṃ cittaṃ visujjhatīti paṭipakkhavasenapi tāsaṃ upakkilesabhāvaṃyeva vibhāveti, na hi taṇhāavijjāsu pahīnāsu koci saṃkilesadhammo na pahīyatīti. Yathā ca vipallāsānaṃ mūlakāraṇaṃ taṇhāvijjā, evaṃ sakalassāpi vaṭṭassa mūlakāraṇanti yathānusandhināva gāthaṃ niṭṭhapetuṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tesanti yesaṃ arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ micchādiṭṭhihatañca, tesaṃ. ‘‘Avijjānīvaraṇāna’’ntiādinā mārassa vasagamanena anādimatisaṃsāre saṃsaraṇanti dasseti.
“被昏沉睡眠征服”:这里以“何等为昏沉?”等显示昏沉、睡眠的自性。因为它们征服心的状态是容易了知的,所以不细说,仅以烦恼魔这一摄取,便已摄取了以它为因的行蕴魔、蕴魔、死魔,所以说“以及烦恼魔和有情魔”,或通过“及”字显示也摄取它们。“他因被覆蔽而朝向轮回”:他落入魔的统治,正是由于被烦恼所覆;只要未断魔缚,他便总是朝向轮回,而非朝向涅槃。这是此处的意旨。这些是世尊所教导的两种真谛。如何教导的呢?显示巴利原文
Thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti ettha ‘‘thinaṃ nāmā’’tiādinā thinamiddhānaṃ sarūpaṃ dasseti. Tehi cittassa abhibhūtatā suviññeyyāvāti taṃ anāmasitvā kilesamāraggahaṇeneva taṃnimittā abhisaṅkhāramārakhandhamāramaccumārā gahitā evāti ‘‘kilesamārassa ca sattamārassa cā’’ti ca-saddena vā tesampi gahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. So hi nivuto saṃsārābhimukhoti so māravasaṃ gato, tato eva nivuto kilesehi yāva na mārabandhanaṃ chijjati, tāva saṃsārābhimukhova hoti, na visaṅkhārābhimukhoti adhippāyo. Imāni bhagavatā dve saccāni desitāni. Kathaṃ desitāni?
此处有两种解说:依阿毗达摩之说与依经之说。其中,依阿毗达摩之说:“无守护的心”是指染著的心为无守护,嗔恚的心为无守护,愚痴的心为无守护。其中,染著的心应知依八种贪俱生心的生起;嗔恚的心应知依二种嗔俱生心的生起;愚痴的心应知依二种痴俱生心的生起。当依这些心生起时,诸根未守护、未保护、未看管、未防护,念舍离,放逸,心无抑制,这样的心即是无守护。“被邪见所害”的心,应知依四种见相应心的生起。“被昏沉睡眠征服”的心,应知依五种有行不善心的生起。如此,总摄尚未包括的,便成为十二不善心。这些应按照《心生起品》中对不善心生起的教导,即“何等法是不善?若于某时不善心生起……”等广说。“魔”:这里指五魔。其中,烦恼魔可依四漏、四暴流、四轭、四缚、四取、八盖、十烦恼事,如《漏双论》等中所说的方法进行分析;也可依“生慢、族慢、无病慢”等,如《小事分别》中所说的七种烦恼,加以分别。这是此处依阿毗达摩之说。显示巴利原文
Tattha duvidhā kathā abhidhammanissitā ca suttantanissitā ca. Tāsu abhidhammanissitā nāma arakkhitena cittenāti rattampi cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ, duṭṭhampi cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ, mūḷhampi cittaṃ arakkhitaṃ. Tattha rattaṃ cittaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ lobhasahagatacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ, duṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ dvinnaṃ paṭighacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ, mūḷhaṃ cittaṃ dvinnaṃ momūhacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ. Yāva imesaṃ cittuppādānaṃ vasena indriyānaṃ agutti agopāyanā apālanā anārakkhā sativosaggo pamādo cittassa asaṃvaro, evaṃ arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāma cittaṃ catunnaṃ diṭṭhisampayuttacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ, thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ nāma cittaṃ pañcannaṃ sasaṅkhārikākusalacittuppādānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi aggahitaggahaṇena dvādasa akusalacittuppādā honti. Te ‘‘katame dhammā akusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye akusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā cittuppādakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 365) akusalacittuppādadesanāvasena vitthārato vattabbā. Mārassāti ettha pañca mārā. Tesu kilesamārassa catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ catunnaṃ oghānaṃ catunnaṃ yogānaṃ catunnaṃ ganthānaṃ catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ dasannaṃ kilesavatthūnaṃ vasena āsavagocchakādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 14-19, 1102) vuttanayena, tathā ‘‘jātimado gottamado ārogyamado’’tiādinā khuddakavatthuvibhaṅge (vibha. 832) āgatānaṃ sattannaṃ kilesānañca vasena vibhāgo vattabbo. Ayaṃ tāvettha abhidhammanissitā kathā.
依经所说:‘无守护的心’:眼见色后,执取总体相,执取细部相,由此因缘,若他安住于不防护眼根,贪、忧等不善法便会流入、渗入;他不为防护而行道,不守护眼根,于眼根不成就防护。耳……鼻……舌……身……意根亦然。如是,心即无守护。‘被邪见所害’:被邪见所害的心,是指由于对前际的分别、或后际的分别、或前后际的分别而执取邪见——即不如理作意者所生起的‘世间是常……如来死后非有非无’等见,被这些邪见所侵害与毁损。又如《梵网经》与《中部》等中所说的六十二邪见:四种常住论……五种现法涅槃论,应以这些邪见说明心被邪见所害。显示巴利原文
Suttantanissitā (ma. ni. 1.347; a. ni. 11.17) pana arakkhitena cittenāti cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hoti anubyañjanaggāhī, yatvādhikaraṇamenaṃ cakkhundriyaṃ asaṃvutaṃ viharantaṃ abhijjhādomanassā pāpakā akusalā dhammā anvāssaveyyuṃ, tassa saṃvarāya na paṭipajjati, na rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye na saṃvaraṃ āpajjati. Sotena …pe… ghānena… jivhāya… kāyena… manasā…pe… manindriyena saṃvaraṃ āpajjati (ma. ni. 1.347, 411, 421; 2.419; 3.15, 75). Evaṃ arakkhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Micchādiṭṭhihatena cāti micchādiṭṭhihataṃ nāma cittaṃ pubbantakappanavasena vā aparantakappanavasena vā pubbantāparantakappanavasena vā micchābhinivisantassa ayoniso ummujjantassa ‘‘sassato lokoti vā…pe… neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti (vibha. 937; paṭi. ma. 1.140) vā yā diṭṭhi, tāya hataṃ upahataṃ. Yā ca kho ‘‘imā cattāro sassatavādā…pe… pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā’’ti brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.30 ādayo) pañcattaye (ma. ni. 3.21 ādayo) ca āgatā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo, tāsaṃ vasena cittassa micchādiṭṭhihatabhāvo kathetabbo.
‘被昏沉与睡眠所征服’:昏沉是心的不适业性,睡眠是受等三蕴的不适业性。同样,昏沉是精进的僵滞,睡眠是无力。如是,心被昏沉与睡眠所征服、所笼罩、所损恼,变得蜷缩,陷入迟钝。‘趣入魔罗的掌控’:‘掌控’即欲、贪、意图、乐求、渴望、命令、教敕。‘魔罗’指五种魔:蕴魔、行魔、死魔、天子魔、烦恼魔。‘趣入’即趣向、进入、接近、实行、随顺,不超越它们的掌控、欲……教敕。是故说‘趣入魔罗的掌控’。显示巴利原文
Thinamiddhābhibhūtenāti thinaṃ nāma cittassa akammaññatā. Middhaṃ nāma vedanādikkhandhattayassa akammaññatā. Tathā thinaṃ anussāhasaṃhananaṃ. Middhaṃ asattivighāto. Iti thinena middhena ca cittaṃ abhibhūtaṃ ajjhotthaṭaṃ upaddutaṃ saṅkocanappattaṃ layāpannaṃ. Vasaṃ mārassa gacchatīti vaso nāma icchā lobho adhippāyo ruci ākaṅkhā āṇā āṇatti. Māroti pañca mārā – khandhamāro abhisaṅkhāramāro maccumāro devaputtamāro kilesamāroti. Gacchatīti tesaṃ vasaṃ icchaṃ…pe… āṇattiṃ gacchati upagacchati upeti vattati anuvattati nātikkamatīti. Tena vuccati – ‘‘vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti.
其中,如前所述的不善法,或单单是渴爱与无明,即是集谛。那个被称为‘趣入魔罗掌控’者,是基于五取蕴而施设的,彼五蕴即是苦谛。如此,世尊于此开示了二谛,故说:‘苦与集。’为更清晰地阐明世尊说法是为了遍知它们及为了断除它们这一已说之义,故说‘为了遍知苦,为了断除集’。若问:如何说法?显示巴利原文
Tattha yathāvuttā akusalā dhammā, taṇhāvijjā eva vā samudayasaccaṃ. Yo so ‘‘vasaṃ mārassa gacchatī’’ti vutto, so ye pañcupādānakkhandhe upādāya paññatto, te pañcakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ. Evaṃ bhagavatā idha dve saccāni desitāni. Tenevāha – ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayo cā’’ti. Tesaṃ bhagavā pariññāya ca pahānāya ca dhammaṃ desetīti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘dukkhassa pariññāya samudayassa pahānāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ desetīti ce –
因此,防护心者,当以正思惟为行境;
将正见置于前导,了知生灭之后;
比丘克服昏沉与睡眠,当断一切恶趣。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tasmā rakkhitacittassa, sammāsaṅkappagocaro; Sammādiṭṭhiṃ purakkhatvā, ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ; Thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu, sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti. (udā. 32) –
此是以偈颂说明。其含义为:若心不防护,便会落入魔罗的掌控,因此,应通过正念的防护——即防护含意在内的六根——成为具足防护心的人。「以正思惟为行境」:以欲思惟等邪思惟为行境者,会不如理作意地分别后,执取种种邪见;正因如此,其心为邪见所害,而趣入魔罗的掌控。是故,行如理作意业者,应成为以出离思惟等正思惟为行境之人。「令正见居于前」:因以正思惟为行境,故舍弃邪见,将具足业自性相与如实智相的正见作为前导,精勤修习戒与定。由此,「了知生灭」之后:于五取蕴中,以五十种行相了知生灭之后,策励修观,次第证得圣道。依最上道而征服昏沉睡眠的比丘,应如是断尽一切恶趣。其含义是:因烦恼已全然断尽,作为漏尽者的比丘,依于与三种苦性相应的力量,断除一切名为恶趣的趣,并安住于彼一切之彼岸——涅槃。显示巴利原文
Gāthāya . Tassattho – yasmā arakkhitena cittena vasaṃ mārassa gacchati, tasmā satisaṃvarena manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ rakkhaṇena rakkhitacitto assa. Sammāsaṅkappagocaroti yasmā kāmasaṅkappādimicchāsaṅkappagocaro tathā tathā ayoniso vikappetvā nānāvidhāni micchādassanāni gaṇhāti. Tato eva ca micchādiṭṭhihatena cittena vasaṃ mārassa gacchati, tasmā yonisomanasikārena kammaṃ karonto nekkhammasaṅkappādisammāsaṅkappagocaro assa. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ purakkhatvāti sammāsaṅkappagocaratāya vidhutamicchādassano kammassakatālakkhaṇaṃ yathābhūtañāṇalakkhaṇañca sammādiṭṭhiṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā sīlasamādhīsu yuttappayutto. Tato eva ca ñatvāna udayabbayaṃ pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu samapaññāsāya ākārehi uppādaṃ nirodhañca ñatvā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā anukkamena ariyamagge gaṇhanto aggamaggena thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhu sabbā duggatiyo jaheti evaṃ sabbaso bhinnakilesattā bhikkhu khīṇāsavo yathāsambhavaṃ tividhadukkhatāyogena duggatisaṅkhātā sabbāpi gatiyo jaheyya, tāsaṃ parabhāge nibbāne tiṭṭheyyāti attho.
断除渴爱与无明,即是灭;由于此断除为灭的缘,故无为界亦被称为断与灭。此四圣谛中:前一偈颂说前二谛,后一偈颂说后二谛,即由这两首偈颂宣说了这四圣谛。其中,由集谛当知味,由苦谛当知患,由道谛与灭谛当知出离。断一切趣为果;防护心等之法为方法;以遮止不防护心等方式,劝导修习防护心等,是世尊的教令。应如此确定教法之义理(如味等)。故说:「此即教法之义理相应」。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ taṇhāya avijjāya ca pahānaṃ, ayaṃ nirodhoti pahānassa nirodhassa paccayabhāvato asaṅkhatadhātu pahānaṃ nirodhoti ca vuttā. Imāni cattāri saccānīti purimagāthāya purimāni dve, pacchimagāthāya pacchimāni dveti dvīhi gāthāhi bhāsitāni imāni cattāri ariyasaccāni. Tesu samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇaṃ, sabbagatijahanaṃ phalaṃ, rakkhitacittatādiko upāyo, arakkhitacittatādinisedhanamukhena rakkhitacittatādīsu niyojanaṃ bhagavato āṇattīti. Evaṃ desanāhārapadatthā assādādayo niddhāretabbā. Tenevāha – ‘‘niyutto desanāhārasampāto’’ti.
2. 抉择理趣相应的释义显示巴利原文
2. Vicayahārasampātavaṇṇanā
53 53. 如是展示了开示理趣相应之后,今为展示抉择理趣相应,因对开示理趣句义的抉择即是抉择理趣,故为通过将开示理趣中被确定为颠倒之因的渴爱,作善等分类抉择,以显示抉择理趣相应,而开始宣说「其中,渴爱有两种」等语。其中,「善」是指以善法为所缘的渴爱。此处「善」一词,应如《巴希提聚经》中那样,理解为「无过失」之意。然而,为何于此处从善的角度提出渴爱?先前于开示理趣中,已以颠倒之因的方式提出渴爱,并依其力显示杂染部分。然而,由于如来具有种种辩才,此处亦欲以渴爱为门显示清净部分,故从善的角度提出渴爱。其中,「令趋向轮回」即趣向轮回,意为轮回的引导者。「令趋向损减、趋向涅槃」即趣向损减者。问:渴爱如何能成为趣向损减者?答:即所谓「断除渴爱」,此为彼分断等之因的渴爱。问:具足过失的渴爱,又如何具有善的性质?答:从应修习的角度而言。如同渴爱,慢亦有两种,即善与不善,并非唯渴爱如此。故以渴爱为例而说到慢。显示巴利原文
53. Evaṃ desanāhārasampātaṃ dassetvā idāni vicayahārasampātaṃ dassento yasmā desanāhārapadatthavicayo vicayahāro, tasmā desanāhāre vipallāsahetubhāvena niddhāritāya taṇhāya kusalādivibhāgapavicayamukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha taṇhā duvidhā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kusalāti kusaladhammārammaṇā. Kusala-saddo cettha bāhitikasutte (ma. ni. 2.358 ādayo) viya anavajjatthe daṭṭhabbo. Kasmā panettha taṇhā kusalapariyāyena uddhaṭā? Heṭṭhā desanāhāre vipallāsahetubhāvena taṇhaṃ uddharitvā tassā vasena saṃkilesapakkho dassito. Vicittapaṭibhānatāya pana idhāpi taṇhāmukheneva vodānapakkhaṃ dassetuṃ kusalapariyāyena taṇhā uddhaṭā. Tattha saṃsāraṃ gametīti saṃsāragāminī, saṃsāranāyikāti attho. Apacayaṃ nibbānaṃ gametīti apacayagāminī. Kathaṃ pana taṇhā apacayagāminīti? Āha ‘‘pahānataṇhā’’ti. Tadaṅgādippahānassa hetubhūtā taṇhā. Kathaṃ pana ekantasāvajjāya taṇhāya kusalabhāvoti? Sevitabbabhāvato. Yathā taṇhā, evaṃ mānopi duvidho kusalopi akusalopi, na taṇhā evāti taṇhāya nidassanabhāvena māno vutto.
其中,为了显示慢的所欲善等性质,而说“依止某种慢……”等语。对此,世尊曾这样说过:“帝释,我说慢有两种:一种是应修习的,一种是不应修习的”等。“出离所依之忧”等语,则是为了显示被称为“善”的渴爱的真实面貌而说。其中,“出离所依之忧”是指——显示巴利原文
Tattha mānassa yathādhippetaṃ kusalādibhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ mānaṃ nissāyā’’tiādimāha. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘mānamahaṃ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi asevitabbampī’’tiādi. Yaṃ nekkhammassitaṃ domanassantiādi ‘‘kusalā’’ti vuttataṇhāya sarūpadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha nekkhammassitaṃ domanassaṃ nāma –
“其中,哪六种是出离所依的忧?即:了知色的无常、变易、离欲、灭,如实地以正慧看见‘过去的色和现在的色,所有这些色都是无常、苦、变易法’之后,对无上解脱生起渴望:‘我何时才能证入并安住于圣者们如今所证入、所安住的境界呢?’如此对无上解脱生起渴望者,便生起这种渴望,以渴望为缘而产生忧。像这样的忧,就称为出离所依的忧。”(《中部》3.307)——显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamāni cha nekkhammassitāni domanassāni? Rūpānaṃtveva aniccataṃ viditvā vipariṇāmavirāganirodhaṃ ‘pubbe ceva rūpā etarahi ca, sabbete rūpā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya disvā anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpeti ‘kudāssu nāmāhaṃ tadāyatanaṃ upasampajja viharissāmi, yadariyā etarahi āyatanaṃ upasampajja viharantī’ti. Iti anuttaresu vimokkhesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpayato uppajjati pihā, pihāpaccayā domanassaṃ. Yaṃ evarūpaṃ domanassaṃ, idaṃ vuccati nekkhammassitaṃ domanassa’’nti (ma. ni. 3.307) –
如此,在六门中,当可意所缘出现时,对称为无上解脱的圣果法生起渴望;为证得它,以无常等方式修习观,却不能策励精进者,便悲伤地忧恼:‘在这半月、这月、这年内,我精进修观,却未能证得圣位。’由此生起的忧,因为是以出离、观、随念、初禅等作为修习之因而生起,故称为‘出离所依的忧’。这种被说为‘渴望’的渴爱是善的。为什么?因为离贪所得的心解脱,是以其所缘为善。意思是:离贪所得的心解脱,并非自性善,而是以‘无过失’这一含义称为善。由于它以这一目标而生起,因此以彼为所缘的渴爱,因以善法为所缘而称为善。离无明所得的慧解脱,以无过失的含义称为善。由于那个慧解脱,在‘因此,防护心者’的偈中,说到‘能舍弃一切恶趣’。——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ chasu dvāresu iṭṭhārammaṇe āpāthagate anuttaravimokkhasaṅkhātaariyaphaladhammesu pihaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā tadadhigamāya aniccādivasena vipassanaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā ussukkāpetuṃ asakkontassa ‘‘imampi pakkhaṃ imampi māsaṃ, imampi saṃvaccharaṃ, vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyabhūmiṃ sampāpuṇituṃ nāsakkhi’’nti anusocato uppannaṃ domanassaṃ nekkhammavasena vipassanāvasena anussativasena paṭhamajjhānādivasena paṭipattiyā hetubhāvena uppajjanato nekkhammassitaṃ domanassaṃ nāma. Ayaṃ taṇhā kusalāti ayaṃ ‘‘pihā’’ti vuttā taṇhā kusalā. Kathaṃ? Rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, tadārammaṇā kusalāti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, na sabhāvena kusalā, anavajjaṭṭhena kusalā. Taṃ uddissa pavattiyā tadārammaṇā pana taṇhā kusalārammaṇatāya kusalāti. Avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti anavajjaṭṭhena kusalā. Tassāti paññāvimuttiyā . Yāya vasena ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthāyaṃ ‘‘sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti vuttaṃ.
如此,为了说明长时间安住于观之后,依苦行道与迟钝神通所证得的慧解脱,从而显示其考察理趣,便开始了“其中如何简择”等论述。由于慧解脱以圣道为根本,因此先指出以第四禅为立足处的圣道法,继而为了显示成就这些的前行修习,才说“应在何处见?于第四禅中见”等语。其中的“到达究竟”,是指通过修习到达最高的第四禅。为了开显那被称为“八支具足”的第四禅心的各个支分,而说“清净”等。显示巴利原文
Iti cirataraṃ vipassanāparivāsaṃ parivasitvā dukkhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññāya adhigatāya paññāvimuttiyā vasena vicayahārasampātaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tassā ko pavicayo’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yasmā paññāvimutti ariyamaggamūlikā, tasmā catutthajjhānapādake ariyamaggadhamme uddisitvā tesaṃ āgamanapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kattha daṭṭhabbo, catutthe jhāne’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pāramitāyāti ukkaṃsagatāya catutthajjhānabhāvanāya. Yehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ vuttaṃ, tāni aṅgāni dassetuṃ ‘‘parisuddha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,由于舍与念清净而说为“清净”。正因清净,所以洁白,也就是称为“光辉”的。以断除乐等之缘的恼害,远离了贪等垢秽,故为“无秽”。正因无秽,所以“已离随烦恼”,因为垢秽确实会使心染污。由于善修习,变得柔软、达到自在,这就是它的意思。能于自在之中运作的心,便称为“柔软”。正因柔软,所以“适业”,意思是胜任作业、堪能作业。柔软的心确实是适业的,正如所说:‘比丘们,如是修习的心,就成为柔软和适业’(《增支部》1.22)。由于安住于这些清净等的状态中,故为“安住”。正因安住,所以“到达不动”,即不动摇、无扰动,这是它的意思。或者,由于柔软适业的状态,而安住于自在之中,故说为“安住”。由于为信等所摄持,而“到达不动”。信所摄持的心,不会因无信而动摇;精进所摄持的心,不会因懈怠而动摇;念所摄持的心,不会因放逸而动摇;定所摄持的心,不会因掉举而动摇;慧所摄持的心,不会因无明而动摇;已到光明的心,不会因烦恼黑暗而动摇。由这六种法所摄持,便成为不动。如此具足八支的心,成为适合显示巴利原文
Tattha upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvena parisuddhaṃ. Parisuddhattā eva pariyodātaṃ, pabhassaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Sukhādīnaṃ paccayaghātena vītarāgādiaṅgaṇattā anaṅgaṇaṃ. Anaṅgaṇattā eva vigatūpakkilesaṃ, aṅgaṇena hi cittaṃ upakkilissati, subhāvitattā mudubhūtaṃ vasibhāvappattanti attho. Vase vattamānañhi cittaṃ ‘‘mudū’’ti vuccati. Muduttā eva ca kammaniyaṃ, kammakkhamaṃ kammayogganti attho. Muduñhi cittaṃ kammaniyaṃ hoti , evaṃ bhāvitaṃ muduñca hoti kammaniyañca, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.22). Etesu parisuddhabhāvādīsu ṭhitattā ṭhitaṃ. Ṭhitattāyeva āneñjappattaṃ, acalaṃ niriñjananti attho. Mudukammaññabhāvena vā attano vase ṭhitattā ṭhitaṃ. Saddhādīhi pariggahitattā āneñjappattaṃ. Saddhāpariggahitañhi cittaṃ assaddhiyena na iñjati, vīriyapariggahitaṃ kosajjena na iñjati, satipariggahitaṃ pamādena na iñjati, samādhipariggahitaṃ uddhaccena na iñjati, paññāpariggahitaṃ avijjāya na iñjati, obhāsagataṃ kilesandhakārena na iñjati. Imehi chahi dhammehi pariggahitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ hoti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti. Abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya.
另一种解释方法:由第四禅定而安止的心,因远离了诸盖障,故为“清净”;因超越了寻、伺等,故为“洁白”;因没有了那些与得证禅那相违、为欲求所驱使而现行的、以种种忿怒等为缘的种种不善法,故为“无秽”。所谓“为欲求所驱使”,意思是依着欲求而动、沉溺于欲求、被欲求推动而生起的,以忿怒等为缘的各种不善法。由于贪等心的随烦恼离去,故为“已离随烦恼”。这两项也应依据《无秽经》和《事经》(《中部》1.57以下;70以下)来理解。由于达到了自在,故为“柔软”;由于达到了神足的状态,故为“适业”;由于修习圆满而达到了殊胜的状态,故为“安住”且“到达不动”。正如达到不动的状态称为“到达不动”,同样也就是“安住”,这是它的含义。如此,具足这八支的心,便成为适于引导的心,成为为了实证那些应以神通证得的法而生起的基础、近依。因此他说:‘他在那儿证得了八种功德,即六神通与二种殊胜。’显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhitaṃ cittaṃ nīvaraṇadūrībhāvena parisuddhaṃ. Vitakkādisamatikkamena pariyodātaṃ. Jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkānaṃ pāpakānaṃ icchāvacarānaṃ abhāvena anaṅgaṇaṃ. Icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ pavattānaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kopaapaccayānanti attho. Abhijjhādīnaṃ cittupakkilesānaṃ vigamena vigatūpakkilesaṃ. Ubhayampi cetaṃ anaṅgaṇasuttavatthasuttānaṃ (ma. ni. 1.57 ādayo; 70 ādayo) vasena veditabbaṃ. Vasippattiyā mudubhūtaṃ. Iddhipādabhāvūpagamena kammaniyaṃ. Bhāvanāpāripūriyā paṇītabhāvūpagamena ṭhitaṃ āneñjappattaṃ. Yathā āneñjabhāvappattaṃ āneñjappattaṃ hoti, evaṃ ṭhitanti attho. Evampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ cittaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti. Abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya pādakaṃ padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘so tattha aṭṭhavidhaṃ adhigacchati cha abhiññā dve ca visese’’ti.
其中,“他”指已证得第四禅的瑜伽行者。“在那里”即指作为依止处的第四禅。“证得八种”意为证得八种功德。那么,是哪八种功德呢?他答:“六神通与二殊胜”,也就是意所成神通与观智。“那心”是指第四禅心。通过“由于它清净,所以它洁白”等语句,显示了前前为后后之因。“那两者”是指,因无贪等污秽、无贪欲等随烦恼,而被称为“无秽”与“离随烦恼”的两种性质。那些污秽与随烦恼,即是“那两者”。这二者因以渴爱为本质且随顺渴爱,故属“渴爱一方”。而“动摇”是指心因不安定而生起的颤动。“不安住”指不稳固。此动摇与不安住,因为是错误执取之因,故属“邪见一方”。显示巴利原文
Tattha soti adhigatacatutthajjhāno yogī. Tatthāti tasmiṃ catutthajjhāne adhiṭṭhānabhūte. Aṭṭhavidhaṃ adhigacchatīti aṭṭhavidhaṃ guṇaṃ adhigacchati. Ko pana so aṭṭhavidho guṇoti? Āha ‘‘cha abhiññā dve ca visese’’ti. Manomayiddhi vipassanāñāṇañca. Taṃ cittanti catutthajjhānacittaṃ. ‘‘Yato parisuddhaṃ, tato pariyodāta’’ntiādinā purimaṃ purimaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa kāraṇavacananti dasseti. Tadubhayanti yesaṃ rāgādiaṅgaṇānaṃ abhijjhādiupakkilesānañca abhāvena ‘‘anaṅgaṇaṃ vigatūpakkilesa’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Tāni aṅgaṇāni upakkilesā cāti taṃ ubhayaṃ. Tadubhayaṃ taṇhāsabhāvattā taṇhāya anulomanato ca taṇhāpakkho. Yā ca iñjanāti yā ca cittassa asamādānena phandanā. Aṭṭhitīti anavaṭṭhānaṃ. Ayaṃ diṭṭhipakkhoti yā iñjanā aṭṭhiti ca, ayaṃ micchābhinivesahetutāya diṭṭhipakkho.
通过“四根”等语句,也从感受等角度阐明第四禅。如是具足八支的第四禅心,为了证得更高的神通,便成为适合引导的心。而这适合引导的品质,唯通过十四种方式熟练掌握自在的人才具备。这种自在,唯获得八等至者拥有,并非仅得色界禅那者所能获得。为了说明无色等至的作意方法,他说:“他作意上等至为寂静”等。此处,“上等至”指空无边处等至。“作意为寂静”是指,由于支的寂静及所缘的寂静,而将其作意为“寂静”。因为无论从哪个角度将无色等至作意为寂静,色界禅那都显现为不寂静。因此他说:“他作意上……之后,……便安立了。”“厌倦与违逆想”是指,对于称为“违逆想”的五种识想,心生不喜而安立。通过“他完全地”等语句,以一分显示无色等至。就引导神通而言,“色想”即色界之想,仅是神通引导所需,并不像无色界等至那样寂静,这是其意趣。“差别”即种种想,指在种种所缘中名为“差别”的心纷乱转起。“超越”是指,如此在那里见到过患后,便……显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattāri indriyānī’’tiādinā vedanātopi catutthajjhānaṃ vibhāveti. Evaṃ aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgataṃ catutthajjhānacittaṃ upari abhiññādhigamāya abhinīhārakkhamaṃ hoti. Sā ca abhinīhārakkhamatā cuddasahi ākārehi ciṇṇavasibhāvasseva hoti. So ca vasibhāvo aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino, na rūpāvacarajjhānamattalābhinoti āruppasamāpattiyā manasikāravidhiṃ dassento ‘‘so uparimaṃ samāpattiṃ santato manasikarotī’’tiādimāha. Tattha uparimaṃ samāpattinti ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ. Santato manasikarotīti aṅgasantatāyapi ārammaṇasantatāyapi ‘‘santā’’ti manasikaroti. Yato yato hi āruppasamāpattiṃ santato manasikaroti, tato tato rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ avūpasantaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tenevāha – ‘‘tassa uparimaṃ…pe… saṇṭhahatī’’ti. Ukkaṇṭhā ca paṭighasaññāti paṭighasaññāsaṅkhātāsu pañcaviññāṇasaññāsu anabhirati saṇṭhahati. ‘‘So sabbaso’’tiādinā ekadesena āruppasamāpattiṃ dasseti. Abhiññābhinīhāro rūpasaññāti rūpāvacarasaññā nāmetā yāvadeva abhiññatthābhinīhāramattaṃ, na pana arūpāvacarasamāpattiyo viya santāti adhippāyo. Vokāro nānattasaññāti nānattasaññā nāmetā nānārammaṇesu vokāro, tattha cittassa ākulappavattīti attho. Samatikkamatīti evaṃ tattha ādīnavadassī hutvā tā samatikkamati. Paṭighasaññā cassa abbhatthaṃ gacchatīti assa ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ adhigacchantassa yogino dasapi paṭighasaññā vigacchanti. Iminā paṭhamāruppasamāpattimāha.
“如此入定者”是指,依前文所述的方法,在色界禅那中,经由心一境性并进一步超越而入定者。“入定者”是指,以寂静而住的无色界定而入定者。“光明”是指先前的色界禅那光明。“消失”是说,在证入无色界禅那时,那色界禅那光明便隐没。“所见”亦同,指色界禅那眼所见的景象也随之消失。“此定”即如前所述之色界定与无色界定。“具足六支”是说,具足六种资益性质的支。“应观察”是指应当反复省察、屡屡思惟,这是它的意思。为了连同观察的对象一起显示观察的方式,故说“无贪俱”等。其中,“于一切世间”指于一切可爱、可意的众生世间与行世间。藉此说明已断除爱欲。同样地,通过“无瞋”等,说明已断除瞋恚、懈怠、掉举、诳惑、散乱及忘念。然后,为再从止与观两边分别说明那六支,又说了“无贪俱”等。这一切都容易理解。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ samāhitassāti evaṃ iminā vuttanayena rūpāvacarajjhāne cittekaggatāyapi samatikkamena samāhitassa. Samāhitassāti āruppasamādhinā santavuttinā samāhitassa. Obhāsoti yo pure rūpāvacarajjhānobhāso. Antaradhāyatīti so rūpāvacarajjhānobhāso arūpāvacarajjhānasamāpajjanakāle vigacchati. Dassanañcāti rūpāvacarajjhānacakkhunā dassanañca antaradhāyati. So samādhīti so yathāvutto rūpārūpasamādhi. Chaḷaṅgasamannāgatoti upakārakaparikkhārasabhāvabhūtehi chahi aṅgehi samannāgato. Paccavekkhitabboti pati avekkhitabbo, punappunaṃ cintetabboti attho. Paccavekkhaṇākāraṃ saha visayena dassetuṃ ‘‘anabhijjhāsahagata’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbaloketi sabbasmiṃ piyarūpe sātarūpe sattaloke saṅkhāraloke ca. Tena kāmacchandassa pahānamāha. Tathā ‘‘abyāpanna’’ntiādinā byāpādakosajjasārambhasāṭheyyavikkhepasammosānaṃ pahānaṃ. Puna tāni cha aṅgāni samathavipassanāvasena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yañca anabhijjhāsahagata’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyaṃ.
54 至此,已从定的方面显示了名为“慧解脱”的阿拉汉果的前行预备道。现在,为了显示阿拉汉果的定,而说“那个定”等。其中,“那个定”即是正定。前文所说的圣道之定所生的果定,应通过现在所说的五种观察智——也就是所观察的五个方面——以五种方式来了知,即:“此定是现法乐住”等。在“此定是现法乐住”等描述中,阿拉汉果定于入定安止和住定的刹那有乐,所以是“现法乐住”。前一定为后一定乐的缘,所以是“未来有乐异熟”。由于远离了烦恼,所以是“圣的”。由于没有欲漏、有漏、无明漏,所以是“无漏的”。由于被佛等大丈夫所修习,所以是“非鄙劣者所修习的”。由于诸支的寂静以及一切烦恼躁动的寂静,所以是“寂静的”。由于能带来不会厌足的满足,所以是“胜妙的”。由于获得了烦恼的止息,或由于是以烦恼止息的状态而获得,所以是“得止息的”。又由于是止息了烦恼的阿拉汉所获得的,所以也是“得止息的”。由于是依心一境性而证得的,或由于就是证得了心一境性本身,所以是“证得心一境性的”。它不像有功用、有漏……显示巴利原文
54. Ettāvatā ‘‘paññāvimuttī’’ti vuttassa arahattaphalassa samādhimukhena pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ dassetvā idāni arahattaphalasamādhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so samādhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha so samādhīti yo so sammāsamādhi. Pubbe vuttassa ariyamaggasamādhissa phalabhūto samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo idāni vuccamānehi pañcahi paccavekkhaṇañāṇehi attano paccavekkhitabbākārasaṅkhātena pañcavidhena veditabbo. ‘‘Ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho’’tiādīsu arahattaphalasamādhi appitappitakkhaṇe sukhattā paccuppannasukho. Purimo purimo pacchimassa pacchimassa samādhisukhassa paccayattā āyatiṃ sukhavipāko. Kilesehi ārakattā ariyo. Kāmāmisavaṭṭāmisalokāmisānaṃ abhāvā nirāmiso. Buddhādīhi mahāpurisehi sevitattā akāpurisasevito. Aṅgasantatāya sabbakilesadarathasantatāya ca santo. Atittikaraṭṭhena paṇīto. Kilesapaṭippassaddhiyā laddhattā, kilesapaṭippassaddhibhāvena vā laddhattā paṭippassaddhiladdho. Passaddhaṃ passaddhīti hi idaṃ atthato ekaṃ. Paṭippassaddhikilesena vā arahatā laddhattāpi paṭippassaddhiladdho. Ekodibhāvena adhigatattā, ekodibhāvameva vā adhigatattā ekodibhāvādhigato. Appaguṇasāsavasamādhi viya sasaṅkhārena sappayogena paccanīkadhamme niggayha kilese vāretvā anadhigatattā nasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagatoti.
无论他从哪一方面入此定,或从哪一方面出定,达到正念圆满后,他便正念地入定、正念地出定;或者,依照预先限定的时间,正念地入定、正念地出定。因此,当他于其中如此观察:“此定既是现法乐住,未来也有乐异熟”时,他自身便生起不依他人的智慧,这是一个方面。同理,也适用于其他各个方面。如此,应当依据这五种应观察的方面,以五种方式来证知此定。显示巴利原文
Yato yato bhāgato tañca samādhiṃ samāpajjanto, tato vā vuṭṭhahanto sativepullappatto satova samāpajjati satova vuṭṭhahati, yathāparicchinnakālavasena vā sato samāpajjati sato vuṭṭhahati. Tasmā yadettha ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhantassa paccattameva aparappaccayañāṇaṃ uppajjati, ayameko ākāro. Esa nayo sesesupi. Evametesaṃ pañcannaṃ paccavekkhitabbākārānaṃ vasena samādhi pañcavidhena veditabbo.
再者,通过“而哪种定……”等语句,显示了阿拉汉果中止与观的区分。其中,因定中之乐被认作“乐”,所以说:“凡是现法乐住的定,以及凡是未来有乐异熟的定,这是止。”而圣的、无漏等性质,则是由慧力成就的,因此说:“凡是圣的定……乃至……这是观。”显示巴利原文
Puna ‘‘yo ca samādhī’’tiādinā arahattaphale samathavipassanāvibhāgaṃ dasseti. Tattha samādhisukhassa ‘‘sukha’’nti adhippetattā ‘‘yo ca samādhi paccuppannasukho, yo ca samādhi āyatiṃ sukhavipāko, ayaṃ samatho’’ti vuttaṃ. Ariyanirāmisādibhāvo pana paññānubhāvena nipphajjatīti āha – ‘‘yo ca samādhi ariyo…pe… ayaṃ vipassanā’’ti.
如此,区分说明阿拉汉果定之后,现在为以定的区分显示其前方便道,故说“彼定”。此处,“彼定”乃指于彼阿拉汉果定之前方便道中所说之色界第四禅定。“以五种方式”者,应当以接下来所述之五种分类而了知。于“喜遍满”等语:于二禅中,遍满喜所生之慧,名为“喜遍满”;于三禅中,遍满乐所生之慧,名为“乐遍满”;遍满他人之心而生起之他心智,名为“心遍满”;于光明遍满中生起之天眼智,名为“光明遍满”;观察智名为“观察相”。此义亦如论中所说:“于二禅中慧为喜遍满,于三禅中慧为乐遍满,对他心智为心遍满,天眼为光明遍满,从他们定出起者之观察智为观察相”(《分别论》804)。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ arahattaphalasamādhiṃ vibhāgena dassetvā idāni tassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ samādhivibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘so samādhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha so samādhīti yo so arahattaphalasamādhissa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāyaṃ vutto rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasamādhi, so samādhi. Pañcavidhenāti vakkhamānena pañcappakārena veditabbo. ‘‘Pītipharaṇatā’’tiādīsu pītiṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā nāma. Sukhaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā nāma. Paresaṃ ceto pharamānā uppajjatīti cetopariyapaññā cetopharaṇatā nāma. Ālokapharaṇe uppajjatīti dibbacakkhupaññā ālokapharaṇatā nāma. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇānimittaṃ nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā, tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā, paracitte ñāṇaṃ cetopharaṇatā, dibbacakkhu ālokapharaṇatā, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhitassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimitta’’nti (vibha. 804).
这里,为显示止与观的差别,而说“什么是喜遍满”等语。而且在此,以慧为开端而作教导,即依慧而作注释。在“慧为喜遍满性”等中,因他们必定与定俱行,故于这些中依定而举出止。是故,喜遍满性、乐遍满性、心遍满性,特以定之威势成就,故被称为“止”;其余者则以智之力成就,故被称为“观”。显示巴利原文
Idha samathavipassanāvibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yo ca pītipharaṇo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha ca paññāsīsena desanā katāti paññāvasena saṃvaṇṇanā katā. Paññā pītipharaṇatātiādīsu samādhisahagatā evāti tattha samādhivasena samatho uddhaṭo. Tasmā pītisukhacetopharaṇatā visesato samādhivipphāravasena ijjhantīti tā ‘‘samatho’’ti vuttā. Itarāni ñāṇavipphāravasenāti tāni ‘‘vipassanā’’ti vuttāni.
55 现在,为依所缘而分别显示彼定,故说“十遍处”等语。此处,“遍处”者,即称为遍处禅之遍处,且因其为诸行者殊胜快乐之所依处,并属意境、法境,故称“遍处”。“地遍”:即已作遍作之地轮,亦指于彼生起之遍作相与似相,以及依彼相而生起之禅那。此中,此处所指为禅那。“空遍”:即于遍处除去后之虚空中生起的第一无色禅。“识遍”:即以第一无色禅之识为所缘的第二无色禅。关于纯粹修止所生之地遍等,则说:“此八遍处为止”。其余二遍处,作为观之依止而生起,故说为“观”。显示巴利原文
55. Idāni taṃ samādhiṃ ārammaṇavasena vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘dasa kasiṇāyatanānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kasiṇajjhānasaṅkhātāni kasiṇāni ca tāni yogino sukhavisesānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, manāyatanadhammāyatanabhāvato ca āyatanāni cāti kasiṇāyatanāni. Pathavīkasiṇanti kataparikammaṃ pathavīmaṇḍalampi, tattha pavattaṃ uggahapaṭibhāganimittampi, tasmiṃ nimitte uppannajjhānampi vuccati. Tesu jhānaṃ idhādhippetaṃ. Ākāsakasiṇanti kasiṇugghāṭimākāse pavattapaṭhamāruppajjhānaṃ. Viññāṇakasiṇanti paṭhamāruppaviññāṇārammaṇaṃ dutiyāruppajjhānaṃ. Pathavīkasiṇādike suddhasamathabhāvanāvasena pavattite sandhāya ‘‘imāni aṭṭha kasiṇāni samatho’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesakasiṇadvayaṃ vipassanādhiṭṭhānabhāvena pavattaṃ ‘‘vipassanā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“如此”:依此方式。“一切圣道”:由于包含正见等支,故称为一切圣道;依四念住等前行道的分类,它又有多种分类,是为完整无余的圣道。“依任何方式”:在无贪等状态及现法乐住等状态中,凡以任何被说明的方式。“依那种方式”:在那些状态中,凡能依止的方式或依观的方式相配合的,便依那种方式,通过止与观,简择圣道之后,与之结合。“它们”:指止的所缘与观的法。“为三法所摄”:即为三种随观所摄,意谓被纳入其数量之中。为哪三种所摄?答道:无常性、苦性、无我性。因与无常性俱起,故观被称为“无常性”。其余二者,亦依同理理解。显示巴利原文
Evanti iminā nayena. Sabbo ariyamaggoti sammādiṭṭhiādibhāvena abhinnopi ariyamaggo satipaṭṭhānādipubbabhāgapaṭipadābhedena anekabhedabhinno niravaseso ariyamaggo. Yena yena ākārenāti anabhijjhādīsu, paccuppannasukhatādīsu ca ākāresu yena yena ākārena vutto. Tena tenāti tesu tesu ākāresu ye ye samathavasena, ye ca ye ca vipassanāvasena yojetuṃ sambhavanti, tena tena ākārena samathavipassanāhi ariyamaggo vicinitvā yojetabbo. Teti samathādhiṭṭhānavipassanādhammā. Tīhi dhammehi saṅgahitāti tīhi anupassanādhammehi saṅgahitā, gaṇanaṃ gatāti attho. Katamehi tīhīti? Āha ‘‘aniccatāya dukkhatāya anattatāyā’’ti. Aniccatāya sahacaraṇato vipassanā ‘‘aniccatā’’ti vuttā. Esa nayo sesesupi.
“那位修习止观者,修习三解脱门”:那位为证得圣道而精勤的瑜伽行者,时而入定以修止,时而观照以增修观,当他如此修习时,便培育了名为无相解脱门等的三种随观,使之增上。“修习三蕴”:即使三种随观次第殊胜,亦即增长三蕴:圣戒蕴、定蕴、慧蕴。然而,由于圣八支道为此三蕴所摄,故说:“修习三蕴的人,即是在修习圣八支道”。显示巴利原文
So samathavipassanaṃ bhāvayamāno tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayatīti so ariyamaggādhigamāya yuttappayutto yogī kālena samathaṃ samāpajjanavasena kālena vipassanaṃ sammasanavasena vaḍḍhayamāno animittavimokkhamukhādisaṅkhātā tisso anupassanā brūheti. Tayo khandhe bhāvayatīti tisso anupassanā uparūparivisesaṃ pāpento sīlakkhandho samādhikkhandho paññākkhandhoti ete tayo khandhe vaḍḍheti. Yasmā pana tīhi khandhehi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo saṅgahito, tasmā ‘‘tayo khandhe bhāvayanto ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvayatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
今为说明哪些人、于何处修学时,哪些解脱门特为出离之门,以及它们是对治哪些烦恼的对治法,并与这三解脱门一同显示,故说“贪行人”等。其中,“以无相解脱门”:指以无常随观。此随观由破除常相等而“无相”;由于是能断除贪等的解脱——得“解脱”之称的圣道——之入口、门径,故称“无相解脱门”。“于增上心学”:即在定中修学。“不亲近能生乐受的触”:即对能生乐受之缘——触,不依渴爱而亲近。“遍知乐受”:即“此乐受由变易等而为苦”如此遍知,由此超越对有的贪着。通过“驱除贪垢”等种种说法,以他们方式阐明断贪。对“瞋行人”等句,亦应依同理而解其义。显示巴利原文
Idāni yesaṃ puggalānaṃ yattha sikkhantānaṃ visesato niyyānamukhāni yesañca kilesānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāni tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni, tehi saddhiṃ tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘rāgacarito’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha animittena vimokkhamukhenāti aniccānupassanāya. Sā hi niccanimittādisamugghāṭanena animitto, rāgādīnaṃ samucchedavimuttiyā vimokkhoti laddhanāmassa ariyamaggassa mukhabhāvato dvārabhāvato ‘‘animittavimokkhamukha’’nti vuccati. Adhicittasikkhāyāti samādhismiṃ. Sukhavedanīyaṃ phassaṃ anupagacchantoti sukhavedanāya hitaṃ sukhavedanākāraṇato phassaṃ taṇhāya anupagacchanto. Sukhaṃ vedanaṃ parijānantoti ‘‘ayaṃ sukhā vedanā vipariṇāmādinā dukkhā’’ti parijānanto, savisayaṃ rāgaṃ samatikkanto. ‘‘Rāgamalaṃ pavāhento’’tiādinā tehi pariyāyehi rāgasseva pahānamāha. ‘‘Dosacarito puggalo’’tiādīsupi vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo.
对于慧增上者,由于破除了相续、聚集、作用、所缘等密集,诸行中无我空性便明显显现,因此无我随观特别以慧为增上,故说「空解脱门是慧蕴」。同样,由于诸行自性坏灭、刹那短暂,已生起的诸法就在各处坏灭,这对正确入定者变得明显,因此无常随观特别以定为增上,故说「无相解脱门是定蕴」。同样,对于戒行圆满、多修忍辱、战胜所生的苦与不乐而住的修行者,诸行的苦性变得显著,因此苦随观以戒为增上,故说「无愿解脱门是圣戒蕴」。如此一来,三解脱门已经包含了三蕴,所以说「那位修习三解脱门的人,就在修习三蕴」。又因为圣八支道已被三蕴所摄,所以说修习三蕴的人「修习圣八支道」。因此,为了显示它们对圣八支道的摄受,而说了“yā ca sammāvācā”等句。显示巴利原文
Paññādhikassa santatisamūhakiccārammaṇādighanavinibbhogena saṅkhāresu attasuññatā pākaṭā hotīti visesato anattānupassanā paññāpadhānāti āha – ‘‘suññatavimokkhamukhaṃ paññākkhandho’’ti. Tathā saṅkhārānaṃ sarasapabhaṅgutāya ittarakhaṇattā uppannānaṃ tattha tattheva bhijjanaṃ sammā samāhitasseva pākaṭaṃ hotīti visesato aniccānupassanā samādhippadhānāti āha – ‘‘animittavimokkhamukhaṃ samādhikkhandho’’ti. Tathā sīlesu paripūrakārino khantibahulassa uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ aratiñca abhibhuyya viharato saṅkhārānaṃ dukkhatā vibhūtā hotīti dukkhānupassanā sīlappadhānāti āha – ‘‘appaṇihitavimokkhamukhaṃ sīlakkhandho’’ti. Iti tīhi vimokkhamukhehi tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ saṅgahitattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘so tīṇi vimokkhamukhāni bhāvayanto tayo khandhe bhāvayatī’’ti. Yasmā ca tīhi ca khandhehi ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa saṅgahitattā tayo khandhe bhāvayanto ‘‘ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvayatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā tehi tassa saṅgahaṃ dassento ‘‘yā ca sammāvācā’’tiādimāha.
再进一步,为了显示三蕴就是止观本身,而说了“sīlakkhandho”等句。其中,应知圣戒蕴以忍辱为增上,且定对它有很大助益,故属于止的这一分。「有支」:即再生有的支分。「二足」:就是两足。因为一般而言,十五种行法大多被戒与定所摄。所谓「身已修」:是由于增上行仪戒的圆满,身得以修习。「戒已修」:是由于根本梵行戒的圆满,戒得以修习。或者,「身已修」:是通过根律仪而修习了五门之身。「戒已修」:是通过其余的戒而戒已修。在正确地修习身时,便能究竟断除身恶行,成就无过失的举止。同样,当圆满成就无上戒时,便能无余地断除邪语与邪命。而且,当心与慧被修习时,正念、正定、正见、正思惟的修习必定已臻圆满,因为它们与心、慧本质相同,并且是那二者的原因。为了阐明这个意义,而说了“kāye bhāviyamāne”等句。显示巴利原文
Puna tiṇṇaṃ khandhānaṃ samathavipassanābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlakkhandho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sīlakkhandhassa khantipadhānattā, samādhissa bahūpakārattā ca samathapakkhabhajanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhavaṅgānīti upapattibhavassa aṅgāni. Dve padānīti dve pādā. Yebhuyyena hi pañcadasa caraṇadhammā sīlasamādhisaṅgahitāti. Bhāvitakāyoti ābhisamācārikasīlassa pāripūriyā bhāvitakāyo. Ādibrahmacariyakasīlassa pāripūriyā bhāvitasīlo. Atha vā bhāvitakāyoti indriyasaṃvarena bhāvitapañcadvārakāyo. Bhāvitasīloti avasiṭṭhasīlavasena bhāvitasīlo. Sammā kāyabhāvanāya sati accantaṃ kāyaduccaritappahānaṃ anavajjañca uṭṭhānaṃ sampajjati. Tathā anuttare sīle sijjhamāne anavasesato micchāvācāya micchājīvassa ca pahānaṃ sampajjati. Cittapaññāsu ca bhāvitāsu sammāsatisammāsamādhisammādiṭṭhisammāsaṅkappā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gatā eva honti taṃsabhāvattā tadubhayakāraṇattā cāti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘kāye bhāviyamāne’’tiādinā.
「证得五种证得」:这是就位别的差异,将圣道的证得分为五种而作显示。实际上,圣道能在单一心识刹那中,迅速、一次性地自己证知四圣谛,它不像世间定那样需要作自在转起的准备,因此称为「速证得」;由于对所应断的烦恼彻底解脱而断除,故称「解脱证得」;由于证得了比世间戒蕴等更为殊胜的圣戒蕴等,故称「大证得」;由于证得了那些果报广大的圣戒蕴等法,故称「广证得」;由于对自己应作的一切事都无余地完成,故称「无余证得」。那么,这些证得具体指什么呢?为了显示“哪些由止的威力,哪些由观的威力”这一分别,而说了“tattha samathena”等句。显示巴利原文
Pañcavidhaṃ adhigamaṃ gacchatīti ariyamaggādhigamameva avatthāvisesavasena pañcadhā vibhajitvā dasseti. Ariyamaggo hi khippaṃ sakiṃ ekacittakkhaṇeneva catūsu saccesu attanā adhigantabbaṃ adhigacchatīti na tassa lokiyasamāpattiyā viya vasibhāvanākiccaṃ atthīti khippādhigamo ca hoti. Pajahitabbānaṃ accantavimuttivasena pajahanato vimuttādhigamo ca. Lokiyehi mahantānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ adhigamanabhāvato mahādhigamo ca. Tesaṃyeva vipulaphalānaṃ adhigamanato vipulādhigamo ca. Attanā kattabbassa kassaci anavasesato anavasesādhigamo ca hotīti. Ke panete adhigamā? Keci samathānubhāvena, keci vipassanānubhāvenāti imaṃ vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha samathenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
56 就这样,大长老以“因此,对于已守护心者”这首偈颂,透过阿拉汉果解脱之门来阐明简择理趣的汇集。他以说法的善巧,从多方面解析其前行道、修行次第与修行利益,展示了简择理趣。现在,为了进一步以十种如来力阐明此理趣,他说道:“其中,他开示……”等等。
“以教诫而不欺骗声闻弟子”:意为对于因听闻佛法而得“声闻”之名的可教化者,他不会欺骗、也不会诈诱,因为在菩提树下,他以圣道已彻底断除了导致欺骗的恶法。
“三种的”:指三类、三种方式。
“你们应做此”:意为你们应当实践此皈依、持守净戒等,并安住其中。
“以此方便而做”:意为依此仪轨,净化皈依、圆满戒律等,从而成就。
“当你们正在做此时”:意为当你们正在遵行此皈依、净戒等时,这一切将为见法、来世福报与涅槃,带来利益与安乐,你们应当成就这些。显示巴利原文
56. Iti mahāthero ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthāya vasena arahattaphalavimuttimukhena vicayahārasampātaṃ niddisanto desanākusalatāya anekehi suttappadesehi tassā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhāvanāvisesānaṃ bhāvanānisaṃsānañca vibhajanavasena nānappakārato vicayahāraṃ dassetvā idāni dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānampi vasena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yo desayatī’’tiādimāha. Ovādena sāvake na visaṃvādayatīti attano anusiṭṭhiyā dhammassa savanato ‘‘sāvakā’’ti laddhanāme veneyye na vippalambheti na vañceti, visaṃvādanahetūnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ ariyamaggena bodhimūle eva suppahīnattā. Tividhanti tippakāraṃ, tīhi ākārehīti attho. Idaṃ karothāti imaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ sīlādiñca upasampajja viharatha. Iminā upāyena karothāti anenapi vidhinā saraṇāni sodhentā sīlādīni paripūrentā sampādetha. Idaṃ vo kurumānānanti idaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ sīlādiñca tumhākaṃ anutiṭṭhantānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasamparāyanibbānānaṃ vasena hitāya sukhāya ca bhavissati, tāni sampādethāti attho.
如此显示了教诫的方式之后,为了用如来力来分别阐释“以教诫而不欺骗声闻弟子”这句话,他接着说:“他如此被教诫……”等等。其中,“如此”:是指那样的方式,即前面所说的“你们应做此”、“以此方便而做”等开示的方式。“被教诫”:指通过佛法开示而被教导。“被教导”:是其同义词。“如此而行者”:指依照所教导的方式去实践的人。“彼地”:指为证得而受教诫的境地,即见地(入流道)与修习地(其余三道)。“无有是处”:指不存在这种可能性。这里将“原因”称为“处”,因为果报依止于它而生起。在第二个文句中,“地”:指应通过成就圣戒蕴而证得的、属于有成的境地。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ovadanākāraṃ dassetvā yaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘ovādena sāvake na visaṃvādayatī’’ti, taṃ tathāgatabalehi vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘so tathā ovadito’’tiādimāha. Tattha tathāti tena pakārena ‘‘idaṃ karotha, iminā upāyena karothā’’tiādinā vuttappakārena. Ovaditoti dhammadesanāya sāsito. Anusiṭṭhoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Tathā karontoti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā karonto. Taṃ bhūminti yassā bhūmiyā adhigamatthāya ovadito, taṃ dassanabhūmiñca bhāvanābhūmiñca. Netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ na vijjati. Kāraṇañhi tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Dutiyavāre bhūminti sīlakkhandhena pattabbaṃ sampattibhavasaṅkhātaṃ bhūmiṃ.
接下来,因为世尊的四无所畏同样具有真实不颠倒的本质,属于初果智的特殊对象范围,所以为了将它们作为该种智的对象来显示,而开示了“你是正自觉者……”等内容。其中,“你是正自觉者”:当他宣称“我是正自觉者,我已现证了一切法”时,即是说“你是正自觉者”。“这些法未被觉了——无有是处”:意为若有人如法地、有凭有据、有理有节地指责道:“你声称的这些法,其实你并未觉了”,像善星那样胡言乱语的人虽然不计其数,但能够这样如法诘难的人,是绝不可能存在的。其余的文句,其解读方式也是同样的道理。“为彼义故,法被开示”:为了断除贪欲等烦恼,针对某种烦恼便讲述相应的不净观等法门。“如是行者”:指按照那样去修习的人。“殊胜证得”:指证得神通、无碍解等殊胜的成就。显示巴利原文
Idāni yasmā bhagavato catuvesārajjānipi aviparītasabhāvatāya paṭhamaphalañāṇassa visayaviseso hoti, tasmā tānipi tassa visayabhāvena dassetuṃ ‘‘sammāsambuddhassa te sato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sammāsambuddhassa te satoti ahaṃ sammāsambuddho, mayā sabbe dhammā abhisambuddhāti paṭijānanena sammāsambuddhassa te sato. Ime dhammā anabhisambuddhāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti ‘‘ime nāma tayā dhammā anabhisambuddhā’’ti koci sahadhammena sahetunā sakāraṇena vacanena, sunakkhatto (dī. ni. 3.1 ādayo; ma. ni. 1.146 ādayo) viya vippalapantā pana appamāṇaṃ. Tasmā sahadhammena paṭicodessatīti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ na vijjati. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Yassa te atthāya dhammo desitoti rāgādīsu yassa yassa pahānatthāya asubhabhāvanādidhammo kathito. Takkarassāti tathā paṭipannassa. Visesādhigamanti abhiññāpaṭisambhidādivisesādhigamaṃ.
“障碍法”:能造成障碍的事物即是障碍;因为这些法以障碍为性,故称障碍法。或者,与障碍相连、能感得障碍之果报、或以障碍为用,亦名障碍法。这些障碍法依业、烦恼等分类,共有五种。“非出离法”:指除圣道以外的一切法。显示巴利原文
Antarāyikāti antarāyakaraṇaṃ antarāyo, so sīlaṃ etesanti antarāyikā. Antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyappayojanāti vā antarāyikā. Te pana kammakilesādibhedena pañcavidhā. Aniyyānikāti ariyamaggavajjā sabbe dhammā.
“具见者”:指具备道智之见的须陀洹圣弟子。“强加伤害”:指极度伤害。此亦仅举一端而已;诸如祭祀鬼神、布施亡者骨骸等,他亦绝不行之。“凡夫”:因能生起众多烦恼、业行等,故名凡夫。对此有开示——显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā sampanno sotāpanno ariyasāvako. Suhatanti ativadhitaṃ. Idampi ekadesakathanameva. Matakapetādidānampi so na karoti eva. Puthujjanoti puthūnaṃ kilesābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“因能生起众多烦恼等故,名为凡夫;
由于凡夫一词内摄众人,因此说‘众人即是凡夫’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano itī’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1007; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.130);
关于‘母亲’等词:生育己身者称为母亲,赐予生命者称为父亲。此处所说的‘人’,特指身为人类的漏尽阿拉汉。那么,圣弟子难道还会夺取其他众生的生命吗?这也是绝不可能的‘非处’。即使有人对已投生他方世界、不再知觉自己圣弟子身份的圣弟子这样说:‘你去杀掉这只蝼蚁,然后就能统治整个轮围界,成为转轮王吧!’他也决不会去夺取那蝼蚁的生命。倘若有人威胁道:‘你若不杀它,我们便砍下你的头!’那么,他们顶多砍下他的头,他也决不会去杀害那个众生。这是为了显示凡夫状态有过患,且过患极其深重;圣者状态有大力量,且力量如此强大,而作如此开示的。其中深意在于:凡夫的生命状态实在可怜,因为竟会造下杀母等无间重罪;而圣者的生命状态则有大威势,他决不会去造作这些恶业。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mātara’’ntiādīsu janikā mātā. Janako ca pitā. Manussabhūto khīṇāsavo arahāti adhippeto. Kiṃ pana ariyasāvako aññe jīvitā voropeyyāti? Etampi aṭṭhānaṃ. Sacepi bhavantaragataṃ ariyasāvakaṃ attano ariyasāvakabhāvaṃ ajānantampi koci evaṃ vadeyya ‘‘idaṃ kunthakipillikaṃ jīvitā voropetvā sakalacakkavāḷagabbhe cakkavattirajjaṃ paṭipajjāhī’’ti, neva so naṃ jīvitā voropeyya. Athāpi evaṃ vadeyyuṃ – ‘‘sace imaṃ na ghātessasi, sīsaṃ te chindissāmā’’ti, sīsamevassa chindeyyuṃ, neva so taṃ ghāteyya. Puthujjanabhāvassa pana mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ ariyabhāvassa ca baladīpanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sāvajjo vata puthujjanabhāvo. Yatra hi nāma mātughākādīnipi ānantariyāni karissati, mahābalova ca ariyabhāvo, yo etāni kammāni na karotīti.
‘破僧’:指破坏和合共住、处于同一结界内的比丘僧团,以五种因缘而令僧团破裂。对此已有说明:‘优波离,僧团以五种方式破裂:以羯磨,以诵戒,以主张,以宣告,以收取筹票。’显示巴利原文
Saṅghaṃ bhindeyyāti samānasaṃvāsakaṃ samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitaṃ pañcahi kāraṇehi saṅghaṃ bhindeyya. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañcahupāli, ākārehi saṅgho bhijjati kammena uddesena voharanto anussāvanena salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458).
此处,“以羯磨”指以表白、羯磨等四种羯磨中的任一种羯磨。“以诵戒”指以五种巴帝摩卡诵戒中的任一种诵戒。“以宣称”即如此宣说——以种种理由显示“非法是法”等十八种导致分裂之事。“以告白”即这样在耳边悄声说:“你们难道不知道我出身高贵而出家吗?难道不知道我是多闻者吗?像我这样的人竟会对教法产生增益法、增益律的邪执,你们心中连这样的念头都不应生起,我难道不畏惧恶趣吗?”以这种方式,在近耳处说出言语。“以收取筹票”即如此告白后,令他们心坚固、不动摇,然后说“取此筹票吧”,将筹票给予他们。显示巴利原文
Tattha kammenāti apalokanādīsu catūsu kammesu aññatarakammena. Uddesenāti pañcasu pātimokkhuddesesu aññatarena uddesena. Voharantoti kathayanto, tāhi tāhi upapattīhi ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’tiādīni aṭṭhārasabhedakaravatthūni dīpayanto. Anussāvanenāti ‘‘nanu tumhe jānātha mayhaṃ uccakulā pabbajitabhāvaṃ bahussutabhāvañca, mādiso nāma uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ gāheyyāti kiṃ tumhākaṃ cittampi uppādetuṃ yuttaṃ, kimahaṃ apāyato na bhāyāmī’’tiādinā nayena kaṇṇamūle vacībhedaṃ katvā anussāvanena. Salākaggāhenāti evaṃ anussāvetvā tesaṃ cittaṃ upatthambhetvā anivattidhammaṃ katvā ‘‘gaṇhatha imaṃ salāka’’nti salākaggāhena.
在此,只有羯磨或诵戒才是关键,而宣称、告白与收取筹票只是前方便。因为宣称者通过阐明十八事来令在场的人生起意乐;即便告白后收取了筹票,僧团也仍然没有分裂。只有当四位或更多比丘如此取筹之后,另行举行别众羯磨或别众诵戒,才叫作僧团分裂。因此,一位具见者可能分裂僧团或引发僧团纷争,这样的事是不存在的。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca kammameva uddeso vā pamāṇaṃ, vohārānussāvanasalākaggāhāpanaṃ pana pubbabhāgo . Aṭṭhārasavatthudīpanavasena hi voharantena tattha rucijananatthaṃ anussāvetvā salākāya gāhitāyapi abhinno eva hoti saṅgho. Yadā pana evaṃ cattāro vā atirekā vā salākaṃ gāhetvā āveṇikaṃ kammaṃ vā uddesaṃ vā karonti, tadā saṅgho bhinno nāma hoti. Evaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo saṅghaṃ bhindeyya saṅgharājiṃ vā janeyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti.
“恶心”:指以杀心所染污的心。“令其出血”:指在活着的身体上,哪怕引出只够一只小苍蝇吸食的血量。至此,已经显示了杀母等五种无间业。这些业是凡夫所作,而非圣弟子所作。又,“恶心”:指以破坏心所染污的心。“塔”指支提。“破坏”即对其加以毁坏。显示巴利原文
Duṭṭhacittoti vadhakacittena paduṭṭhacitto. Lohitaṃ uppādeyyāti jīvamānakasarīre khuddakamakkhikāya pivanamattampi lohitaṃ uppādeyya. Ettāvatā hi mātughātādīni pañcānantariyakammāni dassitāni honti. Yāni puthujjano karoti, na ariyasāvako. Duṭṭhacittoti vināsacittena paduṭṭhacitto. Thūpanti cetiyaṃ. Bhindeyyāti nāseyya.
「指向其他导师」(aññaṃ satthāraṃ):意谓认为“这位是我的导师,有能力行导师之事”,纵于来世亦认取外道师(titthakara)为导师。「会宣称」(apadiseyya):即他会执取:“此是我的导师”,然此事决无可能。「在此外寻觅其他应供者」(ito bahiddhā aññaṃ dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyeseyya):谓于教法之外,向外寻访其他沙门或婆罗门,心想“此人当为应供者,供养彼将获大果报”,而前往依止。「依好奇占卜仪式而信清净」(kutūhalamaṅgalena suddhiṃ pacceyya):指相信凭藉名为“好奇”的所见、所闻、所觉知仪式,能令自身清净洁白,即以为“若行此事,彼事将成”。显示巴利原文
Aññaṃ satthāranti ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā satthu kiccaṃ kātuṃ samattho’’ti bhavantarepi aññaṃ titthakaraṃ. Apadiseyyāti ‘‘ayaṃ me satthā’’ti evaṃ gaṇheyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Ito bahiddhā aññaṃ dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyeseyyāti sāsanato bahiddhā aññaṃ bāhirakaṃ samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā ‘‘ayaṃ dakkhiṇāraho, imasmiṃ katā kārā mahapphalā bhavissantī’’ti adhippāyena tasmiṃ paṭipajjeyyāti attho. Kutūhalamaṅgalena suddhiṃ pacceyyāti ‘‘iminā idaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ pavattattā kutūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena attano suddhiṃ vodānaṃ saddaheyya.
57 「女人成为转轮王,此事无有」:女人由于缺少隐于鞘中的阴部等相,诸相不能圆满;且因无女宝,具足七宝之圆满不得成就;同时,其自体(attabhāva)亦不能较一切男子更为超胜,故有此说。「女人……成为帝释、成为大梵天、成为佛陀,此事无有」:因为帝释位等三种地位最为殊胜,而女性性别则为下劣,是故他们地位于女性亦被遮除。岂非可言:犹如女性性别不存在于梵天界,男性性别亦不存在于梵天界,因此不应说“男人成为大梵天”耶?并非不可说。何以故?以此世间男子能投生于彼故。诸女子在此世间修习禅那,命终后投生为梵众天之同伴,而非大梵天。然而男子并非无处不生。虽说彼处两种性别俱不存在,但彼处诸梵天唯现男性身形,不现女性身形,故如此说,并无过咎。「女人成为如来」:且不论具足一切知德、能度脱一切世间之佛陀境界,即令仅是发愿,女人亦不可成就。显示巴利原文
57.Itthī rājā cakkavattī siyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti yasmā itthiyā kosohitavatthaguyhādīnaṃ abhāvena lakkhaṇāni na paripūranti, itthiratanābhāvena ca sattaratanasamaṅgitā na sampajjati. Sabbamanussānampi ca na adhiko attabhāvo hoti, tasmā ‘‘itthī…pe… vijjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā sakkattādīni tīṇi ṭhānāni uttamāni, itthiliṅgañca hīnaṃ, tasmā tassā sakkattādīnipi paṭisiddhānīti. Nanu ca yathā itthiliṅgaṃ, evaṃ purisaliṅgampi brahmaloke natthi, tasmā puriso mahābrahmā siyāti na vattabbanti? No na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Idha purisassa tattha nibbattanato. Itthiyo hi idha jhānaṃ bhāvetvā kālaṃ katvā brahmapārisajjānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjanti, na mahābrahmānaṃ. Puriso pana katthaci na uppajjatīti na vattabbo. Samānepi tattha ubhayaliṅgābhāve purisasaṇṭhānāva tattha brahmāno, na itthisaṇṭhānā, tasmā suvuttametaṃ. Itthī tathāgatoti ettha tiṭṭhatu tāva sabbaññuguṇe nibbattetvā lokānaṃ tāraṇasamattho buddhabhāvo, paṇidhānamattampi itthiyā na sampajjati.
「人身」(manussattaṃ)、「性别成就」(liṅgasampatti)、「因」(hetu)、「得见导师」(satthāradassana)。
「出家」(pabbajjā)、「德行成就」(guṇasampatti)、「发愿」(adhikāra)、「意欲」(chandatā)。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Manussattaṃ liṅgasampatti, hetu satthāradassanaṃ; Pabbajjā guṇasampatti, adhikāro ca chandatā; Aṭṭhadhammasamodhānā, abhinīhāro samijjhatī’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.59) –
这些便是发愿成就的原因。女人连发愿尚且无法圆满成就,更何况是成佛呢?因此说:“女人成为如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者,这是不可能的。”因为具足一切行相的福德累积,能感得具足一切行相的有身,所以唯有男子能成为阿拉汉、正自觉者。显示巴利原文
Imāni hi paṇidhānasampattikāraṇāni. Iti paṇidhānamattampi sampādetuṃ asamatthāya itthiyā kuto buddhabhāvoti ‘‘itthī tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho siyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbākāraparipūro puññussayo sabbākāraparipūrameva attabhāvaṃ nibbattetīti purisova arahaṃ hoti sammāsambuddho.
「一个世界界」:指一万个世界,即名为「生田」的那个世界。如来入胎等事件发生时,此世界会震动。而「教令田」则为百俱胝十万轮围世界的范围,在这些世界中,世界同时坏灭与生成,且《阿吒那胝》等护卫经的教令力在此处产生作用。「境界田」则没有限量。因为对于佛陀们而言,如所说:「智慧所及即是所知的范围,所知所及即是智慧的范围;智慧以所知为限,所知以智慧为限。」因此,并无佛陀不能触及的境界。如此,在这三种田中,结集于三藏里的佛陀教法中,并没有经典说除这个轮围世界外,佛陀还可以出现在其他轮围世界,然而确有经典说佛陀不会同时出现。显示巴利原文
Ekissā lokadhātuyāti dasasahassilokadhātuyā, yā jātikhettanti vuccati. Sā hi tathāgatassa gabbhokkantikālādīsu kampati. Āṇākhettaṃ pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaṃ. Yā ekato saṃvaṭṭati ca vivaṭṭati ca, yattha ca āṭānāṭiyaparittādīnaṃ (dī. ni. 3.277 ādayo) āṇā pavattati. Visayakhettassa parimāṇaṃ natthi. Buddhānañhi ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ tāvatakaṃ neyyaṃ, yāvatakaṃ neyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, neyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ neyya’’nti (mahāni. 69; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato avisayo nāma natthi. Iti imesu tīsu khettesu tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhe tepiṭake buddhavacane ‘‘ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā uppajjantī’’ti suttaṃ natthi, na uppajjantīti pana atthi.
「不前不后」:意为并非同时出现,也不是一前一后,而是或前或后地出现。其中,「前」应理解为入胎之前。因为从入胎那一刻起,通过震动一万个世界,便已占取了这片领域,因此不再有其他佛陀诞生。而「后」则是指佛陀在诸界中般涅槃之后。以此,在下方世界不会再出现其他佛陀,但上方世界则不在此限。显示巴利原文
Apubbaṃacarimanti apure apacchā ekato na uppajjanti, pure vā pacchā vā uppajjantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha gabbhokkantito pubbe pureti veditabbaṃ. Tato paṭṭhāya hi dasasahassicakkavāḷakampanena khettapariggaho kato nāma hoti, aññassa buddhassa uppatti natthi. Dhātuparinibbānato paraṃ pana pacchā, tato heṭṭhāpi aññassa buddhassa uppatti natthi, uddhaṃ na vāritā.
问:为何佛陀不会同时或前后相继出现呢?因为那样便不稀有。佛陀世尊乃是稀有之人。正如经中所说:「诸比丘,有一人出现于世,是为稀有之人。」(《增支部》1.171)如果许多佛陀同时出现,便不稀有了。再者,教法也没有差别。一位佛陀所教导的法,如四念处等,另一位佛陀也必然教导同样的法。而且还会引起争论。如果许多佛陀同时出现,犹如有多位师长,弟子们便会这样争论:「我们的佛陀更为庄严……」「不,我们的更庄严。」何必再追问其他原因?这就是法性:在一个世界界中,两位如来不会同时出现。(《弥兰陀问经》5.1.1)显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana apubbaṃ acarimaṃ na uppajjantīti? Anacchariyattā. Acchariyamanussā hi buddhā bhagavanto. Yathāha – ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati acchariyamanusso’’tiādi (a. ni. 1.171). Yadi ca aneke buddhā ekato uppajjeyyuṃ, anacchariyā bhaveyyuṃ. Desanāya ca visesābhāvato. Yañhi satipaṭṭhānādibhedaṃ dhammaṃ eko deseti, aññenapi so eva desetabbo siyā, vivādabhāvato ca. Bahūsu hi buddhesu ekato uppannesu bahūnaṃ ācariyānaṃ antevāsikā viya ‘‘amhākaṃ buddho pāsādiko’’tiādinā tesaṃ sāvakā vivadeyyuṃ. Kiṃ vā etena kāraṇagavesanena, dhammatāvesā yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve tathāgatā ekato na uppajjantīti (mi. pa. 5.1.1).
就像苦楝种子、药西瓜种子等,不会结出甘甜的果实,只会结出不悦、不甜的果实;同样地,身恶行等也不会带来甘甜的果报,只会带来不甜的果报。又像甘蔗种子、稻谷种子等,会结出甘甜、美味的果实,不会结出不悦、苦涩的果实;同样地,身善行等会带来甘甜的果报,不会带来不甜的果报。对此,也有如是之说:显示巴利原文
Yathā nimbabījakosātakibījādīni madhuraṃ phalaṃ na nibbattenti, asātaṃ amadhurameva phalaṃ nibbattenti, evaṃ kāyaduccaritādīni madhuravipākaṃ na nibbattenti amadhurameva nibbattenti. Yathā ca ucchubījasālibījādīni madhuraṃ sādurasameva phalaṃ nibbattenti na asātaṃ kaṭukaṃ. Evaṃ kāyasucaritādīni madhurameva vipākaṃ nibbattenti na amadhuraṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
「种下怎样的种子,便收获怎样的果实;
行善者得善果,作恶者得恶果。」(相应部1.256; 导论122)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yādisaṃ vapate bījaṃ, tādisaṃ harate phalaṃ; Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpaka’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.256; netti. 122);
因此说:“由于三种恶行”等等。显示巴利原文
Tasmā ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ duccaritāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
“某位沙门或婆罗门”:指任何一个仅凭出家形式而称为沙门,或仅凭出身而称为婆罗门的人。此人“恶欲”,为了博取尊敬而故作奇特,故称“诈伪者”。他依于资具而发出种种言语,故称“谄媚者”。他为了获取资具而运用各种暗示,故称“占相者”。他“以诈伪、谄媚、占相为先行”,即是将诈伪等状态置于首位,装成感官寂静、内心寂静的样子而行。“五盖”:指爱欲等五种盖。他“不舍断、不彻底断除”这些盖;它们即是“心的杂染”。因为诸盖确实会染污心,令心变得染污、受到压迫和热恼,所以称为“心的杂染”。它们是“削弱智慧”,也指这些盖。因为诸盖一旦生起,便会阻碍尚未生起的智慧生起,所以称为“削弱智慧”。“未现起念”:指在四念处中未现起正念。“未修习”:即未令增长。“无上正等正觉”:指立足于阿拉汉果的智慧,即了知一切的一切知智。显示巴利原文
Aññataro samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vāti yo koci pabbajjāmattena samaṇo vā jātimattena brāhmaṇo vā. Pāpiccho sambhāvanādhippāyena vimhāpanato kuhako. Paccayasannissitāya payuttavācāya vasena lapako. Paccayanibbattakanimittāvacarato nemittako. Kuhanalapananemittakattaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvāti kuhanādibhāvameva purakkhatvā santindriyo santamānaso viya caranto. Pañca nīvaraṇeti kāmacchandādike pañca nīvaraṇe. Appahāya asamucchinditvā, cetaso upakkileseti nīvaraṇe. Nīvaraṇā hi cittaṃ upakkilesenti kiliṭṭhaṃ karonti vibādhenti upatāpenti ca. Tasmā ‘‘cetaso upakkilesā’’ti vuccanti. Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇeti nīvaraṇe. Nīvaraṇā hi uppajjamānā anuppannāya paññāya uppajjituṃ na denti. Tasmā ‘‘paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā’’ti vuccanti. Anupaṭṭhitassatīti catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu na upaṭṭhitassati. Abhāvayitvāti avaḍḍhayitvā. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ.
在后一节中,“某位沙门或婆罗门”是针对一切知菩萨而说的。此处,“远离一切过失”指远离了与波罗蜜相对立的一切过失,以此显示波罗蜜已圆满的状态。这里的四念处即是“观”,觉支即是“道”,无上正等正觉即是阿拉汉果。或者,四念处是“观”,觉支是“混合”,正等正觉即是阿拉汉果。其余部分,应依前段所述的对立面来理解。“在这里,那智慧”指在如前所述的处与非处的课题中,正确运作的、关于“这是处,这是非处”的智慧。“从因”指从这种处与非处的因。“在处”指在那转向的刹那之后紧接着。“无差别”指没有局限,即没有丝毫遗漏。显示巴利原文
Pacchimavāre aññataro samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vāti sabbaññubodhisattaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha sabbadosāpagatoti sabbehi pāramitāpaṭipakkhabhūtehi dosehi apagato. Etena paripūritapāramibhāvaṃ dasseti. Satipaṭṭhānāni vipassanā, bojjhaṅgo maggo, anuttarā sammāsambodhi arahattaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānāni vā vipassanā, bojjhaṅgā missakā, sammāsambodhi arahattameva. Sesaṃ anantaravāre vuttapaṭipakkhato veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ ettha ñāṇanti yaṃ etasmiṃ yathāvutte ṭhāne ca ṭhānaṃ, aṭṭhāne ca aṭṭhānanti pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Hetusoti tassa ṭhānassa aṭṭhānassa ca hetuto. Ṭhānasoti taṅkhaṇe eva āvajjanasamanantaraṃ. Anodhisoti odhiabhāvena, kiñci anavasesetvāti attho.
因此,「趣向处非处」等,即众生如此趣向于处与非处的状态。「一切」:指具有坏灭、衰退、离染、止息性质的有为法,而它们正是安立‘有情’这一概念的所依。在这些有情中,有些行法者往生天界,有些行非法者往生恶趣,还有些走上消尽业力的圣道者,则趋向涅槃。显示巴利原文
Iti ṭhānāṭṭhānagatātiādīsu evaṃ ṭhānāṭṭhānabhāvaṃ gatā. Sabbeti khayavayavirajjananirujjhanasabhāvā saṅkhatadhammā, te eva ca sattapaññattiyā upādānabhūtā keci saggūpagā ye dhammacārino, keci apāyūpagā ye adhammacārino, keci nibbānūpagā ye kammakkhayakaraṃ ariyamaggaṃ paṭipannā.
58 现在,为阐明前述义理,而宣说「一切有情将死」等两首偈颂。他亲自解说其义:「一切有情,即圣者与凡夫。」其中,「寿尽即死尽」:寿命的尽头,即是名为死亡的终结。「随业而去」:此处,有情各随所造之业而去,这便是业力各得其所的意思。「业果现前、不相离」:所谓「福非福果所依」,即是业的果报必然现前而被体验,已造并累积的业,绝不会不将果报给予造业者,这便是此句的义趣。显示巴利原文
58. Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sabbe sattā marissantī’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tassa atthaṃ ‘‘sabbe sattāti ariyā ca anariyā cā’’tiādinā sayameva niddisati. Tattha jīvitapariyanto maraṇapariyantoti jīvitassa pariyanto nāma maraṇasaṅkhāto anto. Yathākammaṃ gamissantīti ettha yadetaṃ sattānaṃ yathākammaṃ gamanaṃ, ayaṃ kammassakatāti attho . Kammānaṃ phaladassāvitā ca avippavāso cāti ‘‘puññapāpaphalūpagā’’ti iminā vacanena kammānaṃ phalassa paccakkhakāritā, katūpacitānaṃ kammānaṃ attano phalassa appadānābhāvo ca dassitoti attho.
所谓「业即是行,他们有恶的业行」,故称「恶业行者」。为了解释其义,故说「非福行」。他们拥有非福行,故为「非福行者」。或者,此处为表示‘从……’的格,「因恶行的缘故」即此义。同理,「福行」等处也应如此理解。接着,通过「恶业行者堕地狱」等说法,以恶趣与善趣二端来明示中道。同样,通过「这是杂染」等语句,从轮回与出离、过患与味著,以及因与果的角度,在该偈颂中显示了三种义理分别。又通过「恶业行者堕地狱,这是杂染」等,从清净的角度来显示偈颂的意义。显示巴利原文
Kammameva kammantaṃ, pāpaṃ kammantaṃ etesanti pāpakammantā, tassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apuññasaṅkhārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Apuñño saṅkhāro etesanti apuññasaṅkhārā. Pāpakammantāti vā nissakkavacanaṃ, pāpakammantahetūti attho. Tathā puññasaṅkhārātiādīsupi. Puna ‘‘nirayaṃ pāpakammantā’’tiādinā antadvayena saddhiṃ majjhimapaṭipadaṃ dasseti. Tathā ‘‘ayaṃ saṃkileso’’tiādinā vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena ādīnavassādanissaraṇavasena hetuphalavasena ca gāthāyaṃ tayo atthavikappā dassitā. Puna ‘‘nirayaṃ pāpakammantāti ayaṃ saṃkileso’’tiādinā vodānavasena gāthāya atthaṃ dasseti.
59 “以彼”:指由于种种所执取的对象,如色有、无色有等。“三十六”:欲爱依色等境的不同而有六种,同样,有爱与无有爱也各有六种,合为十八种。这十八种爱,于内色等有十八种,于外色等有十八种,如是合为三十六种。“以彼彼”:即“这是净的、乐的”等。显示巴利原文
59.Tenatenāti tena tena ajjhositavatthunā rūpabhavaarūpabhavādinā. Chattiṃsāti kāmataṇhā tāva rūpādivisayabhedena cha, tathā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā cāti aṭṭhārasa. Tā eva ajjhattikesu rūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bāhiresu rūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti evaṃ chattiṃsa. Yena yenāti ‘‘subhaṃ sukha’’ntiādinā.
净化有三种,是依三蕴而说。为显明此义,故说“爱欲杂染”等句。又说“一切有情将死”等,是为了以道之差分阐明偈颂意义。“于处处导向”:即导向那涅槃本身,义为有导向涅槃的作用或习性。显示巴利原文
Vodānaṃ tividhaṃ khandhattayavasenāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘taṇhāsaṃkileso’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Puna ‘‘sabbe sattā marissantī’’tiādi paṭipadāvibhāgena gāthānamatthaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha gāminīti tattha tattheva nibbāne gāminī, nibbānassa gamanasīlāti attho.
复次,为显明导向各处与导向一切处之道的差别,而说“三类聚集”等。“往”(yanti)者,即地狱等去处。能随其所应引导众生至彼彼处,故称“一切处导向”。世尊于名为“道”的非福业、福业及令业灭尽之业,有能分别其生起之智。此即“一切处导向道智”,是如来力之一。依此智,世尊如实了知一切道。显示巴利原文
Puna tatthatatthagāminīsabbatthagāminīnaṃ paṭipadānaṃ vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tayo rāsī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yanti yaṃ nirayādi. Taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ yathārahaṃ gametīti sabbatthagāminī. Paṭipadāsaṅkhāte apuññakamme puññakamme ca kammakkhayakaraṇakamme ca vibhāgaso bhagavato pavattanañāṇaṃ. Idaṃ sabbatthagāminī paṭipadāñāṇaṃ nāma tathāgatabalaṃ. Iminā hi ñāṇena bhagavā sabbampi paṭipadaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti.
如何了知呢?譬如全村居民共杀一头猪或一只鹿,虽然所有人的思都以其他有情的命根为所缘,但他们在造业累积的刹那,所造的业便各不相同。其中,有人主动积极地去做,有人被他人逼迫说“你也来做”而做,还有人虽装作赞同,却并不阻止,只是随顺而行。就在他们造业累积的那一刹那,如来便了知:“此人以此方式累积业,将投生地狱;此人将投生畜生道;此人将投生鬼界。”对于将投生地狱者,如来亦了知:“此人将投生八大地狱;此人将投生十六小地狱。”对于将投生畜生道者,如来亦了知:“此人将成为无足者;此人将成为二足者;此人将成为四足者;此人将成为多足者。”对于将投生鬼界者,如来亦了知:“此人将成为被火灼烧、常感口渴者;此人将成为常受饥渴者;此人将成为靠他人施舍而活者。”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Sakalagāmavāsikesupi ekaṃ sūkaraṃ vā migaṃ vā mārentesu sabbesaṃ cetanā parassa jīvitindriyārammaṇāva hoti, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva nānā hoti. Tesu hi eko ādarena karoti, eko ‘‘tvampi karohī’’ti parehi nippīḷito karoti , eko samānacchando viya hutvā appaṭibāhamāno vicarati. Tesu eko teneva kammena niraye nibbattati, eko tiracchānayoniyaṃ, eko pettivisaye, taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇe eva ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa niraye nibbattissati, esa tiracchānayoniyaṃ, esa pettivisaye’’ti jānāti. Niraye nibbattanakampi ‘‘esa aṭṭhasu mahānirayesu nibbattissati, esa soḷasasu ussadesū’’ti jānāti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbattanakampi ‘‘esa apādako bhavissati, esa dvipādako, esa catuppādako, esa bahuppādako’’ti jānāti. Pettivisaye nibbattanakampi ‘‘esa nijjhāmataṇhiko bhavissati, esa khuppipāsiko, esa paradattūpajīvī’’ti jānāti.
而且,对于这些业,如来亦了知:“这些业中,此业将牵引结生;此业软弱无力,不会牵引结生,在结生已给定的情况下,仅成为生存期间的一种残余果报。”同样,全村居民共同行布施时,所有人的思皆以施物为所缘,但他们在造作累积善业的刹那,业已出现差别。因为其中有人将投生天界,有人将投生人界。就在他们造业累积的刹那,如来便了知:“此人以此方式累积业,将投生人界;此人将投生天界。”对于这些,如来更了知:“此人将投生他化自在天;彼人将投生地居天;此人将成为大天王;彼人则将投生为在第二或第三阶层辅佐其的仆役。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tesu ca kammesu idaṃ kammaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhissati, idaṃ nākaḍḍhissati dubbalaṃ dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkamattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti. Tathā sakalagāmavāsikesu ekato dānaṃ dadamānesu sabbesampi cetanā deyyadhammārammaṇāva hoti, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇe eva nānaṃ hoti. Tesu hi keci devaloke nibbattanti, keci manussaloke, taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇe eva ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa manussaloke nibbattissati, esa devaloke’’ti jānāti. Tatthapi ‘‘esa paranimmitavasavattīsu nibbattissati, esa bhummadevesu nibbattissati, esa jeṭṭhakadevarājā hutvā, esa tassa dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ vā ṭhānantaraṃ karonto paricārako hutvā nibbattissatī’’ti jānāti.
并且,对于这些业,如来亦了知:“这些业中,此业能牵引结生;此业不能,它软弱无力,在结生已给定的情况下,仅成为生存期间的一种残余果报。”同样,在着手修观的人中,如来亦了知:“此人以此方式开展观,将成为阿拉汉;彼人将成为不来者;彼人将成为一来者;彼人将成为入流者,或成为一种子者、家家者、七返有者。此人将无法证得圣道,只能停留在以行相为所缘的观中;彼人将停留在把握缘的阶段;彼人将停留在把握名色、把握无色的阶段;此人只能辨别四大种;彼人则连任何一点观察都做不了。”再者,对于修习遍业处者,如来亦了知:“此人将一直停留在遍业处的准备阶段;彼人能生起取相,却不能达到安止定;彼人既能生起安止定,也能证得禅那,却不能证得更高的殊胜成就;彼人还能证得更高的殊胜成就。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tesu ca kammesu idaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhituṃ sakkhissati, idaṃ na sakkhissati dubbalaṃ dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkamattaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti. Tathā ‘‘vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentesu ca esa iminā nīhārena vipassanāya āraddhattā arahā bhavissati, esa anāgāmī, esa sakadāgāmī, esa sotāpanno, ekabījī kolaṃkolo sattakkhattuparamo, esa maggaṃ pattuṃ na sakkhissati lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāyameva ṭhassati, esa paccayapariggahe, esa nāmarūpapariggahe, arūpapariggahe ca ṭhassati, esa mahābhūtamattameva vavatthapessati, esa kiñci sallakkhetuṃ na sakkhissatī’’ti jānāti. ‘‘Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontesupi esa parikammamatte eva ṭhassati, esa nimittaṃ uppādetuṃ sakkhissati, na appanaṃ. Esa appanampi uppādessati, esa jhānaṃ adhigamissati, na uparivisesaṃ. Esa uparivisesampi adhigamissatī’’ti jānāti.
多界(anekadhātu)者,具足眼界、地界等众多界,故称多界,即有多界之义。世间(loka)者,指蕴、处、界等世间。说眼界(cakkhudhātu)等,是为显示多界世间中诸界各自的体相。于此,以自性义及无有情义而称为界。眼即是界,故为眼界。其余词句亦然。欲界(kāmadhātu):欲有二种——烦恼欲与事物欲。就烦恼欲而言,与欲相应的界是欲界,此乃欲寻思之名。就事物欲而言,欲界法属于欲,此处略去后分词,彼欲即是界,故为欲界。与嗔相应的界是嗔界(byāpādadhātu),此乃嗔恚寻思之名。嗔即是界,嗔界,是以十种嗔事为所缘而生起的嗔心之名。与害相应的界是害界(vihiṃsādhātu),即害寻思。或者,害即是界,害界,是残害有情的心的名称。出离界、无嗔界、无害界……显示巴利原文
Anekadhātūti anekā cakkhādayo pathavādayo ca dhātuyo etassāti anekadhātu, bahudhātūti attho. Lokoti khandhāyatanādiloko. Cakkhudhātūtiādi yāhi dhātūhi ‘‘anekadhātū’’ti loko vutto, tāsaṃ sarūpato dassanaṃ. Tattha sabhāvaṭṭhena nissattaṭṭhena ca dhātu. Cakkhu eva dhātu cakkhudhātu. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Kāmadhātūti ettha dve kāmā kilesakāmo ca vatthukāmo ca. Kilesakāmapakkhe kāmapaṭisaṃyutto dhātu kāmadhātu, kāmavitakkassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vatthukāmapakkhe pana kāmāvacaradhammā kāmo uttarapadalopena, kāmo ca so dhātu cāti kāmadhātu. Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto dhātu byāpādadhātu, byāpādavitakkassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Byāpādova dhātu byāpādadhātu, dasaāghātavatthuvisayassa paṭighassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto dhātu vihiṃsādhātu, vihiṃsāvitakko. Vihiṃsā eva vā dhātu vihiṃsādhātu, parasattavihesanassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Nekkhammaabyāpādaavihiṃsādhātuyo nekkhammavitakkādayo sabbakusaladhammā mettākaruṇā cāti veditabbaṃ. Rūpadhātūti rūpabhavo, sabbe vā rūpadhammā. Arūpadhātūti arūpabhavo, arūpadhammā vā. Nirodhadhātūti nirodhataṇhā. Saṅkhāradhātūti sabbe saṅkhatadhammā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyaṃ.
种种界:由于诸界彼此特征各异,故此世间称为种种界。因此经中说:“眼界是一种……乃至……涅槃界是另一种。”正如这种智慧依眼界等的分类,从有执取的行世间了知多界、种种界世间;同样地,也依无执取的行世间了知。因为独觉佛与两位上首弟子,唯能了知有执取行世间的差别,且仅是部分,并非全面。他们不了知无执取行世间的差别。然而,世尊则了知:“由于此界偏盛,这棵树的树干是白色;由于彼界偏盛,那棵树的树干是黑色;这棵光滑,那棵粗糙;这棵的树皮厚,那棵的树皮薄。由于此界偏盛,这棵树的叶子在颜色、形状等方面如是;由于彼界偏盛,那棵树的花呈青、黄、红、白色,或香或臭;由于彼界偏盛,那棵树的果实小、大、长、圆、外形美丽或丑陋、光滑或粗糙、香或臭、苦、甜、辣、酸、涩。由于此界偏盛,这棵树的刺锐利、极锐利、直、弯、黑、青、白。”如是以无执取的行世间,世尊也了知多界、种种界的状况。因为这种力唯属一切知佛,不共其余。显示巴利原文
Aññamaññavilakkhaṇattā nānappakārā dhātuyo etasminti nānādhātu, loko. Tenevāha – ‘‘aññā cakkhudhātu yāva aññā nibbānadhātū’’ti, yathā ca idaṃ ñāṇaṃ cakkhudhātuādibhedena upādinnakasaṅkhāralokassa vasena anekadhātunānādhātulokaṃ pajānāti, evaṃ anupādinnakasaṅkhāralokassapi vasena taṃ pajānāti. Paccekabuddhā hi dve ca aggasāvakā upādinnakasaṅkhāralokasseva nānattaṃ jānanti, tampi ekadeseneva, na nippadesato. Anupādinnakasaṅkhāralokassa pana nānattaṃ na jānanti. Bhagavā pana ‘‘imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya imassa rukkhassa khandho seto hoti, imassa kāḷo, imassa maṭṭho, imassa pharuso, imassa bahalo, imassa tanuttaco. Imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya imassa rukkhassa pattaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena evarūpaṃ nāma hoti, imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannattā imassa rukkhassa pupphaṃ nīlaṃ hoti pītakaṃ lohitakaṃ odātaṃ sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ, imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya phalaṃ khuddakaṃ mahantaṃ dīghaṃ vaṭṭaṃ susaṇṭhānaṃ dussaṇṭhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ pharusaṃ sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ tittaṃ madhuraṃ kaṭukaṃ ambilaṃ kasāvaṃ hoti, imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya imassa rukkhassa kaṇṭako tikhiṇo hoti, atikhiṇo ujuko kuṭilo kaṇho nīlo odāto hotī’’ti evaṃ anupādinnasaṅkhāralokassāpi vasena anekadhātunānādhātubhāvaṃ jānāti. Sabbaññubuddhānaṃ eva hi etaṃ balaṃ, na aññesaṃ.
60 「凡任何界」:指任何一种自性是下劣等的界。因为「意乐」就是指性向之界,所以「意乐」是性向以下劣等状态而转起。而那种意乐,也就是那个人对种种事物的决意和耽着,因此说:「他们意乐,即对那个事物决意、耽着。」为了分别说明意乐所涉及的范围,所以说「有些偏于色」等。这部分很容易理解。「种种意乐智」:即对于以下劣等不同状态而存在的种种意乐的智慧。显示巴利原文
60.Yaṃ yadeva dhātunti yaṃ kiñci hīnādisabhāvaṃ. Yasmā adhimutti nāma ajjhāsayadhātu, tasmā adhimuccanaṃ ajjhāsayassa hīnādisabhāvena pavattanaṃ. Taṃ pana tassa taṃ taṃ adhiṭṭhahanaṃ abhinivisanañca hotīti āha – ‘‘adhimuccanti, taṃ tadeva adhiṭṭhahanti abhinivisantī’’ti. Adhimuccanassa visayaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘keci rūpādhimuttā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva. Nānādhimuttikatāñāṇanti hīnādivasena nānādhimuttikatāya ñāṇaṃ.
「他们随其意乐而存在」:那些下劣意乐或殊胜意乐的有情,如其意乐而存在。「他们采纳种种业行」:他们按照与意乐相符的方式,实行那些自身应采纳、应作的种种业。从等起角度区分这些业行时,说:「他们采纳六种业」等。在此,应这样连接:某些人以贪的方式采纳业。其余诸句也是如此。「此业被区分」:此业先从等起角度被分为六种,再从流转与还灭的角度区分时,成为二种。显示巴利原文
Te yathādhimuttā ca bhavantīti te hīnādhimuttikā paṇītādhimuttikā sattā yathā yathā adhimuttā honti. Taṃ taṃ kammasamādānaṃ samādiyantīti adhimuttianurūpaṃ taṃ taṃ attanā samādiyitabbaṃ kattabbaṃ kammaṃ karonti, tāni kammasamādānāni samuṭṭhānavasena vibhajanto ‘‘te chabbidhaṃ kamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha keci lobhavasena kammaṃ samādiyantīti sambandhitabbaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Taṃ vibhajjamānanti taṃ samuṭṭhānavasena chabbidhaṃ puna pavattinivattivasena vibhajjamānaṃ duvidhaṃ.
「因贪、因嗔、因痴而造业」:这是指十不善业道之业。此业因染污而黑,故称「黑」;因令生于恶趣,具有黑报,故称「黑报」。「因信而造业」:这是指十善业道之业。此业因无染污而白,故称「白」;因令生于天界,具有白报,故称「白报」。「因贪、因嗔、因痴、因信而造业」:这是「黑白混杂业」;有「黑白报」,即苦乐报。因为造了混杂业,以不善之力生于畜生道中成为吉祥之象,以善之力在生存中享受快乐;或者以善之力生于王族,却因不善而感受痛苦。「因精进、因慧而造业」:此业是「非黑非白业」,有「非黑非白报」,即能灭尽诸业的四道之思。何以故?若此业是黑,则应招致黑报;若是白,则应招致属于白生之白报。然而,由于不给予这两种果报中的任何一种,故称为非黑非白报。这就是此处的意思。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ lobhavasena dosavasena mohavasena ca kammaṃ karotīti dasaakusalakammapathakammaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tañhi saṃkiliṭṭhatāya kāḷakanti kaṇhaṃ. Apāyesu nibbattāpanato kāḷakavipākanti kaṇhavipākaṃ. Yaṃ saddhāvasena kammaṃ karotīti dasakusalakammapathakammaṃ. Tañhi asaṃkiliṭṭhattā paṇḍaranti sukkaṃ. Sagge nibbattāpanato paṇḍaravipākattā sukkavipākaṃ. Yaṃ lobhavasena dosavasena mohavasena saddhāvasena ca kammaṃ karoti, idaṃ kaṇhasukkanti vomissakakammaṃ. Kaṇhasukkavipākanti sukhadukkhavipākaṃ. Missakakammañhi katvā akusalavalena tiracchānayoniyaṃ maṅgalahatthibhāvaṃ upapanno kusalena pavatte sukhaṃ anubhavati, kusalena rājakule nibbattopi akusalena dukkhaṃ vedayati. Yaṃ vīriyavasena paññāvasena ca kammaṃ karoti, idaṃ kammaṃ akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ akaṇhaasukkavipākanti kammakkhayakarā catumaggacetanā. Tañhi yadi kaṇhaṃ bhaveyya, kaṇhavipākaṃ dadeyya. Yadi sukkaṃ bhaveyya, sukkaupapattipariyāpannaṃ vipākaṃ dadeyya. Ubhayavipākassa pana appadānato akaṇhaasukkavipākanti ayamettha attho.
在业的领受中,第一种是裸形者的行道,即沉迷于诸欲;第二种是烦恼炽盛者、即使哭泣的泣面者,却修习清净梵行;第三种是裸形者不沉迷于诸欲;第四种是即使得不到资具、具有禅那与观乐的人,修习教法梵行。像这样的种类之「业的领受」,也指任何其他类似类型的业。关于「以此人」等,是显示世尊之智在此业报中运作的方式。其中,「已累积的」:指业已按能产生果报的方式被造作、已累积。「未异熟的」:指果报尚未成熟。「现起于异熟」:指已为给予果报创造了机会。「而不能进入破邪见」:指不能证得名为破邪见的圣道,即由于破除烦恼行而应进入的圣道。「世尊不教导他」:指对于被异熟障覆盖的人,世尊不以使其证悟谛理为主要目的而教导,但为了熏习,也会为那样的人说法,如同对阿阇世等人那样。显示巴利原文
Kammasamādāne paṭhamaṃ acelakapaṭipadā kāmesu pātabyatā, dutiyaṃ tibbakilesassa assumukhassāpi rudato parisuddhabrahmacariyacaraṇaṃ, tatiyaṃ kāmesu apātabyatā acelakapaṭipadā, catutthaṃ paccaye alabhamānassāpi jhānavipassanāsukhasamaṅgino sāsanabrahmacariyacaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ evaṃ jātiyaṃ kammasamādānanti yaṃ aññampi evaṃpakāraṃ kammaṃ. Iminā puggalenātiādi tasmiṃ kammavipāke bhagavato ñāṇassa pavattanākāradassanaṃ. Tattha upacitanti yathā kataṃ kammaṃ phaladānasamatthaṃ hoti, tathā kataṃ upacitaṃ. Avipakkanti na vipakkavipākaṃ. Vipākāya paccupaṭṭhitanti vipākadānāya katokāsaṃ. Na ca bhabbo abhinibbidhā gantunti kilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ abhinibbijjhanato abhinibbidhāsaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggaṃ adhigantuṃ na ca bhabbo. Taṃ bhagavā na ovadatīti taṃ vipākāvaraṇena nivutaṃ puggalaṃ bhagavā saccapaṭivedhaṃ purakkhatvā na ovadati, vāsanatthaṃ pana tādisānampi dhammaṃ deseti eva, ajātasattuādīnaṃ viya.
“已累积的”指已开始造作。因此说:“还未达到圆满”。以此显示不可能成为邪定性。“在达到圆满之前”:在达到圆满——即能够产生果报之前,便先证得。在成为邪定性之前,便立即生起不具足果法的状态。因此说:“在达到可调伏性之前便超越”。另一种读法是“在达到不确定性之前便超越”,含义相同。“未完成”指业未圆满,或指那些未圆满的人。显示巴利原文
Upacitanti kātuṃ āraddhaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘na ca tāva pāripūriṃ gata’’nti. Tena micchattaniyāmassa asamatthataṃ dasseti. Purā pāripūriṃ gacchatīti pāripūriṃ phalanipphādanasamatthataṃ gacchati purā adhigaccheyya. Micchattaniyatatāya sajjukaṃ phaladhammassa abhājanabhāvaṃ nibbattayati purā. Tenevāha – ‘‘purā veneyyattaṃ samatikkamatī’’ti. ‘‘Purā aniyataṃ samatikkamatī’’tipi pāṭho, so evattho. Asamatteti kamme asampuṇṇe, te asampuṇṇe vā.
61 如此,说明了与烦恼障相混杂的业障之后,现在为了显示纯粹的业障,而说:“对于这个人”等等。其义理如前所述。显示巴利原文
61. Evaṃ kilesantarāyamissakaṃ kammantarāyaṃ dassetvā idāni amissakaṃ kammantarāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa ca puggalassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ vuttanayameva.
“一切”:指在此力分别中所说的一切业。“柔和、中等、增上性”:即柔和、中等、强烈的状态。其意趣是:由于业的柔和等状态,其果报的柔和、中等、强烈状态便得以了知。在“现法受”等之中,于此世、即此蕴身中应受的果报,称为“现法受”。于下一世、即无间的蕴身中应受的果报,称为“次生受”。于其他蕴身中,即从此以后的任何蕴身中应受的果报,称为“后后受”。因为在一个速行心路中,七种思中的第一思名为现法受,最后一思名为次生受,中间五思名为后后受。“果报差别智”:是关于果报差异——即果报种种差别的智慧。然而,此业报成熟的原因有:趣成就、趣失坏,依报成就、依报废坏,时成就、时失坏,精勤成就、精勤失坏。这些原因之间的关系,应依据“有一些不善业被趣成就所障碍而不得成熟”等经句(《分别论》810)来了知。显示巴利原文
Sabbesanti imasmiṃ balaniddese vuttānaṃ sabbesaṃ kammānaṃ. Mudumajjhādhimattatāti mudumajjhatibbabhāvo. Kammānañhi muduādibhāvena taṃvipākānaṃ mudumajjhatikkhabhāvo viññāyatīti adhippāyo. Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyantiādīsu diṭṭhadhamme imasmiṃ attabhāve veditabbaṃ phalaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ. Upapajje anantare attabhāve veditabbaṃ phalaṃ upapajjavedanīyaṃ. Aparasmiṃ attabhāve ito aññasmiṃ yasmiṃ kasmiñci attabhāve veditabbaṃ phalaṃ aparāpariyavedanīyaṃ. Ekajavanavārasmiñhi sattasu cetanāsu paṭhamacetanā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ nāma. Pariyosānacetanā upapajjavedanīyaṃ nāma. Majjhe pañca cetanā aparāpariyavedanīyaṃ nāma. Vipākavemattatāñāṇanti vipākavemattatāya vipākavisese ñāṇaṃ. Imassa pana kammavipākassa gatisampatti gativipatti, upadhisampatti upadhivipatti, kālasampatti kālavipatti, payogasampatti payogavipattiyo kāraṇaṃ. So ca nesaṃ kāraṇabhāvo ‘‘atthekaccāni pāpakāni kammasamādānāni gatisampattipaṭibāḷhāni na vipaccantī’’tiādipāḷivasena (vibha. 810) veditabbo.
62 为了以《无间力分别》中所说的「业之领受」一词,将禅那等也包含在内而加以说明,因此说「如此已受持的业」等等。在有学与凡夫的相续中生起的禅那等,即成为业。其中,「如此已受持的」是指在如「白、有白报、现世乐、未来乐报」等类别中所受持的业。「染污」是指由对立之法所导致的不清净状态。「清净」是指从对立之法中净化。「出起」指出于熟练的清净及有分的出起。所谓「如此染污」等,意思是:世尊以这种方式了知禅那等的染污、清净与出起的智慧,即是无障智,于他全无障碍。显示巴利原文
62. Anantarabalaniddese vuttakammasamādānapadeneva jhānādīni saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā samādinnānaṃ kammāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sekkhaputhujjanasantānesu pavattāni jhānādīni kammaṃ honti. Tattha tathā samādinnānanti ‘‘sukkaṃ sukkavipākaṃ paccuppannasukhaṃ, āyatiṃ sukhavipāka’’nti evamādippakārehi samādinnesu kammesu. Saṃkilesoti paṭipakkhadhammavasena kiliṭṭhabhāvo. Vodānaṃ paṭipakkhadhammehi visujjhanaṃ. Vuṭṭhānaṃ paguṇavodānaṃ bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānañca. Evaṃ saṃkilissatītiādīsu ayamevattho – iminā ākārena jhānādi saṃkilissati vodāyati vuṭṭhahatīti jānanañāṇaṃ bhagavato anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, na tassa āvaraṇaṃ atthīti.
「禅那有多少种」等提问,是为了通过分类来显示禅那等而开始的。「四种禅那」是依四法方式,指色界禅那。「十一种」是依「有色者观色」等(《长部》2.129等),指八种解脱及三种空解脱等。「八种」是从这些中除去出世解脱后所剩下的八种。「七种」是从那些中除去灭尽定后所剩下的七种。「三种」是依经的方式,指空解脱等三种。「两种」是依阿毗达摩的方式,由于无相解脱不可能存在,故为所剩下的两种。于此,依次的七种在安止的刹那,以镇伏的方式从敌对法中解脱,并以信解所缘而称为解脱。然而,灭尽定由于完全从想与受中解脱,称为出离式的解脱。出世间的解脱则因以各自道断除烦恼的方式而解脱,故称为解脱。应当了知这一差别。显示巴利原文
Kati jhānānītiādi jhānādayo vibhāgena dassetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Cattāri jhānānīti catukkanayavasena rūpāvacarajjhānāni sandhāyāha. Ekādasāti ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.129, 174; 3.339, 358; ma. ni. 2.248; 3.312) aṭṭhannaṃ tiṇṇañca suññatavimokkhādīnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhāti tesu ṭhapetvā lokuttare vimokkhe aṭṭha. Sattāti tesu eva nirodhasamāpattiṃ ṭhapetvā satta. Tayoti suttantapariyāyena suññatavimokkhādayo tayo. Dveti abhidhammapariyāyena animittavimokkhassāsambhavato avasesā dve. Ettha ca paṭipāṭiyā satta appitappitakkhaṇe vikkhambhanavasena paccanīkadhammehi vimuccanato , ārammaṇe adhimuccanato ca vimokkhā. Nirodhasamāpatti pana sabbaso saññāvedayitehi vimuttattā apagamavimokkho nāma. Lokuttarā ca taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi samucchedavasena vimuttattā vimokkhoti ayaṃ viseso veditabbo.
于诸定中,依四法方式与五法方式,初禅之定称为「有寻有伺定」。依五法方式,第二禅之定称为「无寻唯伺定」。依四法方式及五法方式,其余诸禅之定称为「无寻无伺定」。显示巴利原文
Samādhīsu catukkanayapañcakanayesu paṭhamajjhānasamādhi savitakko savicāro samādhi nāma. Pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhi avitakko vicāramatto samādhi nāma. Catukkanaye pañcakanayepi sesajhānesu samādhi avitakko avicāro samādhi nāma.
在诸等至中,依次证得的八种等至,既有「定」的名,也有「等至」的名。为什么呢?因为有心一境性。灭尽定由于没有心一境性,所以不名为「定」。想等至等,如前已说。显示巴利原文
Samāpattīsu paṭipāṭiyā aṭṭhannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ ‘‘samādhī’’tipi nāmaṃ ‘‘samāpattī’’tipi. Kasmā? Cittekaggatāsabbhāvato. Nirodhasamāpattiyā tadabhāvato na ‘‘samādhī’’ti nāmaṃ. Saññāsamāpattiādi heṭṭhā vuttameva.
「退分定」:从还不熟练的初禅等出定的人,其想与作意会趋入欲贪等,这便是初禅等定具有退分性质的原因。因为经中说「初禅的染污是欲贪和嗔恚」,所以对第二禅等也应如此理解。所谓「鸡」,是指厌恶非圣者而以此为乐。「鸡修习者」:这是就人而说诸禅那,即指前两种初禅和第二禅。任何人证得初禅或第二禅后,心想「这已经足够了」而心生退缩,不再向上精进,那么那四种禅那便都称为「鸡禅那」,具备这些禅那的人则称为鸡修习者。其中,前两种禅那因为敌人近在眼前、势力强大,又没有殊胜分,因此以染污的状态来说明;后两种禅那虽然没有殊胜分,但因为敌人微弱,所以以清净的状态来说明。应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Hānabhāgiyo samādhīti appaguṇehi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhitassa saññāmanasikārānaṃ kāmādianupakkhandanaṃ paṭhamajjhānādisamādhissa hānabhāgiyatā. ‘‘Paṭhamajjhānassa kāmarāgabyāpādā saṃkileso’’ti vuttattā dutiyajjhānādivasena yojetabbaṃ. Kukkuṭaṃ vuccati ajaññājigucchanamukhena tapparamatā. Kukkuṭajhāyīti puggalādhiṭṭhānena jhānāni vuttāni, dve paṭhamadutiyajjhānānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo paṭhamaṃ dutiyaṃ vā jhānaṃ nibbattetvā ‘‘alamettāvatā’’ti saṅkocaṃ āpajjati, uttari na vāyamati, tassa tāni jhānāni cattāripi ‘‘kukkuṭajhānānī’’ti vuccanti, taṃsamaṅgino ca kukkuṭajhāyī. Tesu purimāni dve āsannabalavapaccatthikattā visesabhāgiyatābhāvato ca saṃkilesabhāvena vuttāni. Itarāni pana visesabhāgiyatābhāvepi mandapaccatthikattā vodānabhāvena vuttānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「殊胜分定」:从熟练的初禅等出定后,想与作意进入第二禅等,以及熟练清净的有分心生起,这被称为「出起」。因为每一较低的熟练禅那,都是较高禅那的近因,所以清净分也称为「出起」。依于有分心而从一切禅那出起,因此有分与清净都称为出起。然而,由于以出起自在力,能在所限定的时间内从等至出定,所以这里把等至出起善巧称为「出起」。显示巴利原文
Visesabhāgiyo samādhīti paguṇehi paṭhamajjhānādīhi vuṭṭhitassa saññāmanasikārānaṃ dutiyajjhānādipakkhandanaṃ, paguṇavodānaṃ bhavaṅgavuṭṭhānañca ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tasmā vodānampi ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgavasena sabbajhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti bhavaṅgañca vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ. Yasmā pana vuṭṭhānavasibhāvena yathāparicchinnakālaṃ samāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā samāpattivuṭṭhānakosallaṃ idha ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
63 「属于那定」:指紧接在如来十力解说中,以禅那等名目所说的定。「资具」:指所需的条件。「诸根」:指信根、念根、慧根。「诸力」:即前述诸根与惭、愧俱起。单独提及精进,是为了显示精进于诸力有大助力;因为依凭精进的支撑,信等诸力才不为对立面所动摇。故说:“依精进之力,诸力得以生起。”「它们的」:指这些根的。「软、中等、上等之性」:不清澈为软;不太清澈为中等;极清澈为上等而强而有力,称为“利”。显示巴利原文
63.Tassevasamādhissāti tassa anantarabalaniddese jhānādipariyāyehi vuttasamādhissa. Parivārāti parikkhārā. Indriyānīti saddhāsatipaññindriyāni. Balānīti hirottappehi saddhiṃ tāniyeva. Vīriyassa visuṃ gahaṇaṃ balānaṃ bahūpakāradassanatthaṃ. Vīriyupatthambhena hi saddhādayo paṭipakkhena akampanīyā honti. Tenevāha – ‘‘vīriyavasena balāni bhavantī’’ti. Tesanti indriyānaṃ. Mudumajjhādhimattatāti avisadaṃ mudu. Nātivisadaṃ majjhaṃ. Ativisadaṃ adhimattaṃ balavaṃ ‘‘tikkha’’nti vuccati.
为显示世尊的说法是随顺所化众生之根性而展开,故说“其中世尊”等语。其中,“以略说与广说”:指对略说的义理进行广说。或者,“略说”指仅总说。“以略说与广说”:即通过总说与详释。“以广说”:即通过总说、详释及再详释。“柔和”:意谓轻巧,不以地狱恐怖、轮回恐怖等恐吓方式施加重压。“柔和而利”:指不过于锐利。若以悚惧之事激发悚惧等方式施加重压,则唯是锐利的方式。“开示止”:指偏重于止而教导,并非同样偏重观——这是它的意趣。因为仅凭止,是不可能证悟真理的。“止与观”:指止与观平衡并行。“观”:指极度偏重于观而教导。正因为此处所说的利根等,实则即指顿悟者等,故有“为利根者开示出离”等说。其中,“于增上慧学”即指增上慧学。显示巴利原文
Veneyyānaṃ indriyānurūpaṃ bhagavato desanāpavattīti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṃkhittavitthārenāti saṃkhittassa vitthārena. Atha vā saṃkhittenāti uddiṭṭhamattena. Saṃkhittavitthārenāti uddesena niddesena ca. Vitthārenāti uddesaniddesapaṭiniddesehi. Mudukanti lahukaṃ apāyabhayavaṭṭabhayādīhi santajjanavasena bhāriyaṃ akatvā. Mudutikkhanti nātitikkhaṃ. Saṃvegavatthūhi saṃvegajananādivasena bhāriyaṃ katvā. Samathaṃ upadisatīti samathaṃ adhikaṃ katvā upadisati, na tathā vipassananti adhippāyo. Na hi kevalena samathena saccappaṭivedho sambhavati. Samathavipassananti samadhuraṃ samathavipassanaṃ. Vipassananti sātisayaṃ vipassanaṃ upadisati. Yasmā cettha tikkhindriyādayo ugghaṭitaññuādayova, tasmā ‘‘tikkhindriyassa nissaraṇaṃ upadisatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adhipaññāsikkhāyāti adhipaññāsikkhaṃ.
「此处之智」:即关于诸根软、中、上等差别之智,这被称为“对其他众生、其他补特伽罗根器上下差异之差别智”,应如此关联理解。为显明该智的运作方式,故说“此者达到了此地……”等语。其中,“此者达到了此地与修习”:谓这位补特伽罗,如此已达、正达或当达此地的杂染、习气与清净有分,因时态的选定并无绝对限制,如“duddha”一词所示。在此刻、此时,这位补特伽罗适于这种软、中、利的差别教导。“如是界者”:依低劣等性质而有如此志向、如此胜解。“此者的意趣”:这位补特伽罗具有此类常见或断见,或如实智、随顺忍类型的意趣。由有四种意趣,众生安住于其中,故名意趣。而世尊了知众生此意趣时,乃至在他们尚未生起对各种恶见的观智及业自作智之际,亦皆能了知。此义经中亦曾说:“虽正在行欲,亦了知:‘此补特伽罗是重欲者,为欲意趣、欲胜解者。’虽正在行欲,亦了知:‘此补特伽罗是重出离者,为出离意趣、出离胜解者。’正在行出离……嗔恨……无嗔……昏沉睡眠……到了知……”显示巴利原文
Yaṃ ettha ñāṇanti ettha indriyānaṃ mudumajjhādhimattatāya yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, idaṃ vuccati parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇanti sambandhitabbaṃ. Tassa ñāṇassa pavattanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ bhūmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayaṃ imaṃ bhūmiṃ bhāvanañca gatoti ayaṃ puggalo evamimaṃ saṃkilesavāsanaṃ vodānaṃ bhavaṅgañca gato gacchati gamissati ca, kālavacanicchāya abhāvato, yathā duddhanti. Imāya velāya imasmiṃ samaye imāya mudumajjhatikkhabhedāya anusāsaniyā. Evaṃdhātukoti hīnādivasena evaṃajjhāsayo evaṃadhimuttiko. Ayañcassa āsayoti imassa puggalassa ayaṃ sassatucchedappakāro, yathābhūtañāṇānulomakhantippakāro vā āsayo. Idañhi catubbidhaṃ āsayanti ettha sattā vasantīti āsayoti vuccati. Imaṃ pana bhagavā sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānanto tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ vipassanāñāṇakammassakataññāṇānañca appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti eva. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo kāmagaruko kāmāsayo kāmādhimutto’ti. Kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo nekkhammagaruko nekkhammāsayo nekkhammādhimutto’ti. Nekkhammaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti… byāpādaṃ… abyāpādaṃ… thinamiddhaṃ… ālokasaññaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo thinamiddhagaruko thinamiddhāsayo thinamiddhādhimutto’’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.113).
「此随眠」:指这位补特伽罗尚未断除的欲贪等随眠烦恼。唯有未断除且强而有力的烦恼,方称随眠。
「对其他众生」:指主要的众生。
「对其他补特伽罗」:指余下的众生,意为较下劣的众生。又或者,这两个词实为同义,仅为针对所化导者的差别而作两种表述。
「根之上下差异差别智」:paropariyatta一词由para(上)和apara(下)合成,将a变为o,意为上下性;其差别性即vemattatā。因此,此词组意为:对于信根等诸根的上下差异及差别性之智,即根之上下差异差别智。应如此理解其词析。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ anusayoti ayaṃ imassa puggalassa kāmarāgādiko appahīnoyeva anusayitakileso. Appahīnoyeva hi thāmagato kileso anusayo. Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ sattānaṃ, hīnasattānanti attho. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ veneyyavasena dvidhā vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇanti parabhāvo ca aparabhāvo ca paropariyattaṃ a-kārassa okāraṃ katvā, tassa vemattatā paropariyattavemattatā. Saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattavemattatāya ñāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattavemattatāñāṇanti padavibhāgo veditabbo.
「其中,凡」:指通过随念种种宿住的方式而生起的世尊之智,这便是第八如来力,应如此连系理解。
「种种」:多种多样,或以种种方式展现。
「宿住」:以所欲忆念的自他紧接的前一生为起点,随后在各处所住的生命相续。
「随念」:即如“一生、二生……”这般按生起次第追循而忆念;或者说,随逐而忆念,只要将心转向,立刻便能忆念。这便是词义。因为世尊无须任何加行,仅凭转向就能记起。
所谓「即如」:这是一个引出例端之介词。
「乃至一生」:指以一个结生为始、以死亡为终、包含在一期生命中的蕴相续。此理亦适用于“二生”等等。显示巴利原文
Tattha yanti yaṃ anekavihitassa pubbenivāsassa anussaraṇavasena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ, idaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ tathāgatabalanti sambandho. Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ, anekehi vā pakārehi pavattitaṃ. Pubbenivāsanti anussarituṃ icchitaṃ attano paresañca samanantarātītaṃ bhavaṃ ādiṃ katvā tattha tattha nivutthasantānaṃ. Anussaratīti ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti evaṃ jātipaṭipāṭiyā anugantvā sarati, anudeva vā sarati, citte abhininnāmitamatte eva saratīti attho. Bhagavato hi parikammakiccaṃ natthi, āvajjanamatteneva sarati. Seyyathidanti āraddhappakāranidassanatthe nipāto. Ekampi jātinti ekampi paṭisandhimūlaṃ cutipariyosānaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhasantānaṃ. Esa nayo dvepi jātiyotiādīsupi.
在“诸多坏劫”等经文中,逐渐衰减的劫称为“坏劫”,逐渐增长的劫称为“成劫”,应该这样来理解。在这里,以坏劫一词就包含了坏住劫,因为坏住劫是以坏劫为根源的;以成劫一词也就包含了成住劫。这样一来,经中所说的“比丘们,有这四种劫的不可计数。哪四种?坏、坏住、成、成住”(《增支部》4.156),所有这些含义就都被完整包含在内了。“我于彼处”等经文所显示的,是随念的方式。其中,“我于彼处”:指的是在那个坏劫中,或者在那一个有、胎、趣、识住、有情居、有情聚中。“有如是名”:名字叫帝须,或者叫弗沙。“有如是种姓”:种姓是婆伽婆,或者乔达摩。“有如是容貌”:肤色是白的,或者是黑的。“有如是食”:以白米饭为食,或者以树上现有的果实为食。“有如是苦乐感受”:以各种方式,感受属于身体的、属于心的,或者分为有染着与无染着等类别的苦与乐。“有如是寿量边际”:像这样,寿命最长的限度是一百岁,或者寿命最长的限度是八万四千劫。“我从彼处死后,生于此处”:我从那个有、或者那个有情聚死后,又转生到了某一个有情聚中。或者也可以理解为,我在那个有或有情聚中存在过。接下来,在彼处“有如是名”等的含义,就和已经解释过的一样。显示巴利原文
Anekepi saṃvaṭṭakappetiādīsu pana parihāyamāno kappo saṃvaṭṭakappo, vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappoti veditabbo. Tattha saṃvaṭṭena saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī gahito taṃmūlattā, vivaṭṭena ca vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Evañhi sati yāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyāni. Katamāni cattāri? Saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī vivaṭṭo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī’’ti (a. ni. 4.156) vuttāni , tāni sabbāni pariggahitāni honti. Amutrāsintiādi saraṇākāradassanaṃ. Tattha amutrāsinti amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe, amumhi bhave vā yoniyaṃ vā gatiyaṃ vā viññāṇaṭṭhitiyaṃ vā sattāvāse vā sattanikāye vā. Evaṃnāmoti tisso vā phusso vā. Evaṃgottoti bhaggavo vā gotamo vā. Evaṃvaṇṇoti odāto vā sāmo vā. Evamāhāroti sālimaṃsodanāhāro vā pavattaphalabhojano vā. Evaṃsukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedīti anekappakārena kāyikacetasikānaṃ sāmisanirāmisappabhedānaṃ vā sukhadukkhānaṃ paṭisaṃvedī. Evamāyupariyantoti evaṃ vassasataparamāyupariyanto vā caturāsītikappasahassaparamāyupariyanto vā. So tato cuto amutra udapādinti so tato bhavato, sattanikāyato vā cuto puna amukasmiṃ nāma sattanikāye udapādiṃ. Atha vā tatrāpi bhave vā sattanikāye vā ahosiṃ. Evaṃnāmotiādi vuttatthameva.
64 在“天眼”等释义中:因其与天眼相似,故名为“天”。要知道,诸天由善行业所生的净色眼,因不受胆汁、痰、血等障碍,远离随烦恼而清净,能于极远处亦清晰取境。而此处由精进修习力所生的智眼,也具有同样的特性,因此因与天眼相似而称为“天”;或者,由于依天住而得,或因自身即依天住,故称“天”;或者,因借由光明遍而有大威光,故称“天”;或者,因能见穿壁等类,有广大行境,故称“天”。这一切含义,当依声明论的教授来理解。就观察功能而言,称为“眼”。因其能如肉眼般执行眼的作用,故亦称“眼”。能见众生之死与生,成为见解清净之因,故说为“清净”。何以故?若只见死,不见生,便会执取断见;若只见生,不见死,便会执取新有情忽然而有的见解。然而,若能同时照见死与生二者,则因超越此二种恶见,这种见便成为见解清净之因。而世尊正是显示巴利原文
64.Dibbenātiādīsu dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devatānañhi sucaritakammanibbattampi pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ upakkilesavimuttattā dūrepi ārammaṇaggahaṇasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idampi vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ ñāṇacakkhu tādisamevāti dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ, dibbavihāravasena vā paṭiladdhattā, attanā ca dibbavihārasannissitattāpi dibbaṃ, ālokapariggahena mahājutikattāpi dibbaṃ, tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanena mahāgatikattāpi dibbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabbaṃ. Dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu. Cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhu. Cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddhaṃ. Yo hi cutimattameva passati, na upapātaṃ, so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo upapātamattameva passati na cutiṃ, so navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Yo pana tadubhayaṃ passati, so yasmā duvidhampi taṃ diṭṭhigataṃ ativattati. Tasmāssa taṃ dassanaṃ diṭṭhivisuddhihetu hoti. Tadubhayañca bhagavā passati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cutūpapātadassanena diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttā visuddha’’nti.
或因为远离了十一种随烦恼,名为“清净”。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā visuddhaṃ. Yathāha –
“阿那律,我如此了知‘疑是心的随烦恼’后,便断除了疑——这一心的随烦恼。‘不作意是心的随烦恼……昏沉睡眠是……惊悚是……掉举是……粗重是……过度精进是……不足精进是……欲求是……种种想是……过度审察诸色是心的随烦恼’,我如此了知后,便断除了过度审察诸色——这一心的随烦恼。”(《中部·根本五十经·清净经》3.242)如这些等。显示巴利原文
‘‘So kho ahaṃ anuruddhā ‘vicikicchā cittassa upakkileso’ti iti viditvā vicikicchaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahiṃ. ‘Amanasikāro cittassa upakkileso… thinamiddhaṃ… chambhitattaṃ… uppilaṃ… duṭṭhullaṃ… accāraddhavīriyaṃ… atilīnavīriyaṃ… abhijappā… nānattasaññā… atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkileso’ti iti viditvā atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ cittassa upakkilesaṃ pajahi’’nti (ma. ni. 3.242) evamādi.
因此,这也因为远离了十一种随烦恼而称为清净。由于超越了人类通常的活动范围而观见色相,故称“超越人的”;或者,由于超越了肉眼,故称“超越人的”。以那清净、超越人的天眼。显示巴利原文
Tadevaṃ ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā visuddhaṃ. Manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanena atikkantamānusakaṃ, maṃsacakkhuṃ atikkantattā vā atikkantamānusakaṃ. Tena dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena.
“看见众生”如同一个人以肉眼看另一个人,他看见、观照着众生。“正在死去和正在转生”在此需说明:在死亡那一刹那或结生那一刹那,即使以天眼也无法看见。然而,那些临近死亡、即将死去的人,以及那些已得结生、刚刚出生的人,才被称为这里所指的“正在死去和正在转生”者。他所看见的正是这样正在死去、正在转生的人。“卑劣”指由于具足愚痴的等流,作者在出身、种姓、家族、财富等方面被轻视、被看不起。“殊胜”指由于具足无痴的等流,与前者相反。“美丽”指由于具足无嗔的等流,具有可爱、可意、赏心悦目的容貌。“丑陋”指由于具足嗔恚的等流,具有不可爱、不可意、不赏心悦目的容貌,也就是英俊或畸形的意思。“善趣”指往生到好的去处,或由于具足无贪的等流,成为富裕、大富者。“恶趣”指往生到苦的去处,或由于具足贪欲的等流,成为贫穷、缺衣少食的人。“依照所造的业而投生”指依照他们各自所累积的业,投生到相应之处。在此,前面所说的“正在死去”……显示巴利原文
Satte passatīti manusso manussaṃ maṃsacakkhunā viya satte passati oloketi. Cavamāne upapajjamāneti ettha cutikkhaṇe upapattikkhaṇe vā dibbacakkhunāpi daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā. Ye pana āsannacutikā idāni cavissanti, ye ca gahitapaṭisandhikā sampati nibbattā, te ‘‘cavamānā upapajjamānā’’ti adhippetā. Te evarūpe cavamāne upapajjamāne. Hīneti mohanissandayuttattā hīnajātikulabhogādivasena hīḷite paribhūte. Paṇīteti amohanissandayuttattā tabbiparīte. Suvaṇṇeti adosanissandayuttattā iṭṭhakantamanāpavaṇṇayutte. Dubbaṇṇeti dosanissandayuttattā aniṭṭhākantāmanāpavaṇṇayutte abhirūpe virūpe vāti attho. Sugateti sugatigate, alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane. Duggateti duggatigate, lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapānabhojane. Yathākammūpageti yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ upacitaṃ, tena tena upagate. Tattha purimehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttaṃ. Iminā pana padena yathākammūpagañāṇakiccaṃ. Yathākammūpagañāṇaanāgataṃsañāṇāni ca dibbacakkhupādakāneva dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhanti.
在“身恶行”等词中:“恶行”指卑劣的行为,或因烦恼的腐坏而称为恶行。由身体所造的恶行,或从身体发起的恶行,称为身恶行。同样,语恶行、意恶行也应如此理解。“具足”指成为具备者。“毁谤圣者”指对佛陀等圣者,乃至在家须陀洹,以最根本之事或毁坏功德的方式,进行毁谤、辱骂、指责者。“邪见者”指持有颠倒见解者。“受持邪见业”指以邪见为因而受持的种种业。他们还会令他人也受持那些以邪见为根本的身业等。在此,虽然通过提及语恶行和意恶行,已经包含了毁谤圣者与邪见,但再次单独说出它们,是为了显示其大罪过。因为毁谤圣者有大罪过,与无间业相似。正如所说:……显示巴利原文
Kāyaduccaritenātiādīsu duṭṭhu caritaṃ, duṭṭhaṃ vā caritaṃ kilesapūtikattā duccaritaṃ. Kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā pavattaṃ duccaritaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Evaṃ vacīmanoduccaritānipi daṭṭhabbāni. Samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā. Ariyānaṃupavādakāti buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ, antamaso gihisotāpannānampi antimavatthunā vā guṇaparidhaṃsanena vā upavādakā akkosakā garahakā. Micchādiṭṭhikāti viparītadassanā. Micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti micchādiṭṭhihetubhūtasamādinnanānāvidhakammā. Ye ca micchādiṭṭhimūlakesu kāyakammādīsu aññepi samādapenti. Tattha vacīmanoduccaritaggahaṇena ariyūpavādamicchādiṭṭhīsu gahitāsupi tesaṃ puna vacanaṃ mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Mahāsāvajjo hi ariyūpavādo ānantariyasadiso. Yathāha –
舍利弗,正如一位戒具足、定具足、慧具足的比丘,能在现法中证得阿拉汉;舍利弗,我说,若不舍那种语、不舍那种心、不舍那种见,他便如此具足而原封不动地坠入地狱。显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi , sāriputta, bhikkhu sīlasampanno samādhisampanno paññāsampanno diṭṭheva dhamme aññaṃ ārādheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ, sāriputta, vadāmi taṃ vācaṃ appahāya taṃ cittaṃ appahāya taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvā yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ niraye’’ti (ma. ni. 1.149).
再者,没有什么比邪见更具大罪过了。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhito ca mahāsāvajjataraṃ nāma aññaṃ natthi. Yathāha –
“诸比丘,我不见其他任何一法,有如此大的罪过,诸比丘,那就是邪见。诸比丘,邪见是诸罪中之最。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi evaṃ mahāsāvajjataraṃ, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, micchādiṭṭhi. Micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310).
“身坏”指对所执取五蕴的舍弃。“死后”指紧跟着执取新生的五蕴。或者,“身坏”指命根的断绝,“死后”指死殁之后。“恶道”等这一切都是地狱的异名。地狱称为“恶道”,是因为它远离了那些被视为福德、能带来天界与解脱的法;或者因为没有快乐的因。“恶趣”是苦的去处与皈依处,或者由于瞋恚深重,是由恶业所生的趣处。“堕落”指造恶者无力地堕入其中。“地狱”指其中没有任何可称为乐味的东西。显示巴利原文
Kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā. Paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe. Atha vā kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassa upacchedā. Paraṃ maraṇāti cutito uddhaṃ. Apāyantiādi sabbaṃ nirayavevacanaṃ. Nirayo hi saggamokkhahetubhūtā puññasammatā ayā apetattā, sukhānaṃ vā āyassa abhāvā apāyo. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati, dosabahulatāya vā duṭṭhena kammunā nibbattā gati duggati. Vivasā nipatanti tattha dukkaṭakārinoti vinipāto. Natthi ettha assādasaññito ayoti nirayo.
或者,以“恶道”一词指畜生道,因为畜生道是恶道——已远离了善趣。但它并非恶趣,因有如龙王等具大威力者存在。以“恶趣”一词指饿鬼界,因为它既是恶道又是恶趣,既远离了善趣,又是苦的去处。但它并非堕落,因为不同于阿修罗的堕落;且有大神力的饿鬼也会生起宫殿。以“堕落”一词指阿修罗身,因为如前所述,它具有恶道与恶趣的意义,且由于从快乐的聚合中堕落,故称堕落。以“地狱”一词指无间地狱等种种地狱。“再生”的意思是往生彼处,即在那里出生。由相反的一面,应知白分。显示巴利原文
Atha vā apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoniṃ dīpeti, tiracchānayoni hi apāyo, sugatito apetattā. Na duggati, mahesakkhānaṃ nāgarājādīnaṃ sambhavato. Duggatiggahaṇena pettivisayaṃ dīpeti, so hi apāyo ceva duggati ca sugatito apetattā, dukkhassa ca gatibhūtattā. Na tu vinipāto asurasadisaṃ avinipatitattā. Petamahiddhikānañhi vimānānipi nibbattanti. Vinipātaggahaṇena asurakāyaṃ dīpeti, so hi yathāvuttenatthena apāyo ceva duggati ca sukhasamussayehi vinipātattā vinipātoti vuccati. Nirayaggahaṇena avīciādianekappakāraṃ nirayameva dīpeti. Upapannāti upagatā, tattha abhinibbattāti adhippāyo. Vuttavipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
然而,此中有一差别:这里以“善趣”一词也包含了人趣。以“天”一词唯指天趣。其中,“善趣”即美好的趣。“天”则是因藉由色等所缘而极为妙好。一切皆因会破坏、会毁坏而称为“世间”,这是词义。由某劫、百劫中所累积的业,此人现在或未来当生天或堕恶道,这综合显示了第八、第九佛力智的作用。对于“百劫”等也是如此。因此说:“这是世尊的两种智。”显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana viseso – ettha sugatiggahaṇena manussagatimpi saṅgaṇhāti. Saggaggahaṇena devagatiṃ eva. Tattha sundarā gatīti sugati. Rūpādīhi visayehi suṭṭhu aggoti saggo. So sabbopi lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti ayaṃ vacanattho. Amukāya kappakoṭiyaṃ upacitaṃ tenāyaṃ etarahi, anāgate vā saggūpago apāyūpago cāti aṭṭhamanavamabalañāṇakiccaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā dassitaṃ. Tathā kappasatasahassevātiādīsupi. Tenevāha – ‘‘imāni bhagavato dve ñāṇānī’’ti.
“魔罗在菩提树下被摧伏”意为烦恼魔罗在菩提树下被摧伏、被断除。这摧伏、断除烦恼魔罗即是世尊的第十力。因此说:“尽一切漏的智”。又因以阿罗汉道断尽一切漏并连同习气时,世尊便证得一切知智,故说“证得一切知性”等。显示巴利原文
Nihato māro bodhimūleti nihato samucchinno kilesamāro bodhirukkhamūle. Idaṃ bhagavato dasamaṃ balanti idaṃ kilesamārassa hananaṃ samucchindanaṃ bhagavato dasamaṃ balaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘sabbāsavaparikkhayaṃ ñāṇa’’nti. Yasmā pana yadā arahattamaggena savāsanā sabbe āsavā khepitā, tadā bhagavatā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ adhigataṃ nāma, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ sabbaññutā pattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
以上是诸阿阇梨共许的解释。然而有异说者如此言:“并无别别独立的所谓十力智,因曾说‘证得一切知性,了知一切法’,故此仅是就一切知智而作分类。”此说应知不然。因为十力智与一切知智实为不同。十力智唯了知各自特定之事务,而一切知智则了知他们及其余一切。就十力智而言:第一力唯知因与非因;第二力唯知业之差别;第三力唯知界差别之因;第四力唯知意乐与随眠;第五力唯知业异熟之差别;第六力唯知禅那等及其染净;第七力唯知根之利钝;第八力唯知过去世之蕴相续;第九力唯知有情之死与生;第十力唯知真理之判别。而一切知智则了知这些所应知及更超越者。然而,一切知智并不能遍行所有这些功能。若一切知智是禅那,便不能入定;若是神通,便不能显现神变;若是道,便不能断除烦恼。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ tāvettha ācariyānaṃ samānatthakathā. Paravādī panāha – ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiekkaṃ natthi, yasmā ‘sabbaññutā pattā viditā sabbadhammā’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedo’’ti, taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇañhi sakasakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tampi tato avasesampi jānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti. Dutiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, tatiyaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva, catutthaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, pañcamaṃ kammavipākantarameva, chaṭṭhaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, sattamaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakkhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutūpapātameva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca pajānāti. Etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ sabbaṃ na karoti . Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti.
复次,应如是反问异说者:“所谓十力智,是有寻有伺、无寻唯伺、无寻无伺?是欲界系、色界系、无色界系?是世间、出世间?”了知者将言:“依次第,前七力为有寻有伺,其后二力为无寻无伺,漏尽智则或许有寻有伺、或许无寻唯伺、或许无寻无伺。”同样,依次第,前七力是欲界系,其后二力是色界系,最后一力是出世间。而一切知智则唯是有寻有伺、唯是欲界系、唯是世间,此处应作如是确定。显示巴利原文
Apica paravādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāmetaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ avitakkavicāramattaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ kāmāvacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacaraṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’nti. Jānanto ‘‘paṭipāṭiyā satta savitakkasavicārānī’’ti vakkhati, tato parāni dve avitakkaavicārānīti, āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ siyā savitakkasavicāraṃ, siyā avitakkavicāramattaṃ, siyā avitakkaavicāranti. Tathā paṭipāṭiyā satta kāmāvacarāni, tato dve rūpāvacarāni, avasāne ekaṃ lokuttaranti vakkhati. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana savitakkasavicārameva kāmāvacarameva lokiyamevāti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
第三,「理趣摄」的注释。显示巴利原文
3. Yuttihārasampātavaṇṇanā
65 如此,经由种种理路详细展开了「择摄」之后,现在为了显示「理趣摄」等,于是展开了对“其中,何为理趣摄?”等的阐述。在此,“因此,守护心者”这一偈颂的词义,前文已作详细解释。守护心者以正思惟为行境,这是合理的,也就是所谓“理趣”的含义。因为,若有人能以正念为门闩,关闭包括意门在内的六根门而安住,那么欲寻等邪思惟便全无生起的机会,唯有出离寻等正思惟才会成为他的行境与心的所行处。这一道理是完全相合的。所谓“理趣”,即与道理连接、吻合、一致之义。以正思惟为行境者将获得正见。按前文所述之理,以正思惟为行境者,因其寻不颠倒,故必得正见。以正见——也就是观智——为先行而安住者,将进一步以道智无有迷乱地透彻洞察五蕴的不断生灭。如此透彻洞察时,由于见到五蕴本性为苦,他便因此舍弃一切被称为恶趣的有与生命形态,由此超越一切的堕落怖畏与轮回怖畏。以上所说的一切义理,皆完全相合、合乎道理。显示巴利原文
65. Evaṃ nānānayehi vicayahārasampātaṃ vitthāretvā idāni yuttihārasampātādīni dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassā’’ti gāthāya padattho vitthāritoyeva. Rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaro bhavissatīti yujjatīti manacchaṭṭhāni dvārāni satikavāṭena pidahitvā viharantassa kāmavitakkādīnaṃ micchāsaṅkappānaṃ avasaro eva natthīti nekkhammavitakkādiko sammāsaṅkappo eva tassa gocaro pavattiṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatīti ayamattho yujjati. Yuttiyā ghaṭeti saṃsandati sametīti attho. Sammāsaṅkappagocaro sammādiṭṭhi bhavissatīti vuttanayena sammāsaṅkappagocaro puggalo aviparītameva vitakkato sammādiṭṭhi bhavissati. Sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ purakkhatvā viharanto maggañāṇena pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ asammohato paṭivijjhissati. Tathā paṭivijjhanto ca dukkhasabhāvattā duggatisaṅkhātā sabbā bhavagatiyo jahissati, tato eva sabbaṃ vinipātabhayaṃ saṃsārabhayañca samatikkamissatīti sabbopi cāyamattho yutto evāti.
第四,「近依摄」的注释。显示巴利原文
4. Padaṭṭhānahārasampātavaṇṇanā
66 由于自身所具足的成就,便如同能妥善安立思惟一般。由于守护根门是圆满善行的亲因,因此说:「守护心者」这一表述,是三种善行的近依。它的意思是:「守护心者」这句话,即是三种善行的近依之语。对于多修习出离寻等正思惟的人,断除欲贪等盖障变得容易,因此出离寻等是「止」的亲因,故说:「正思惟为所行境者」是「止」的近依。若人安立于“业自性”的正见与“有因缘的名色”的正见,观察那被执为“我”和“我所”而流转的轮回之苦,为超越它而着手修习「观」,那么正见就是观的特殊因缘,因此说:「以正见为先行者」是「观」的近依。由于策励修习生灭随观,便能趣入正性决定,故此为证得初道的因,因此说:「知生灭者」是「见地」的近依。通过光明想等作意来制服昏沉睡眠,这是「精进」的亲近因缘,因此说:「克服昏沉睡眠的比丘」是「精进」的近依。虽然在圣道的刹那,断除烦恼与修习同时发生,因为它们属于同一证悟;然而,若应断的烦恼尚未断除,修习便不可能圆满。因此,这里犹如以“断”为特征那样来表述。显示巴利原文
66. Sakasampattiyā viya susaṃvihitasaṅkappo bhavati. Indriyesu guttadvāratā sucaritapāripūriyā āsannakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘rakkhitacittassāti tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Tassattho – ‘‘rakkhitacittassā’’ti idaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ padaṭṭhānavacananti. Nekkhammasaṅkappādibahulassa kāmacchandādinīvaraṇappahānaṃ sukaranti nekkhammasaṅkappādayo samathassa āsannakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘sammāsaṅkappagocaroti samathassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Kammassakatāsammādiṭṭhiyaṃ sappaccayanāmarūpadassanasammādiṭṭhiyañca ṭhito attādhīnaṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ passanto tadatikkamanupāyaṃ vipassanaṃ ārabhatīti sammādiṭṭhivipassanāya visesakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāroti vipassanāya padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Udayabbayadassanaṃ ussukkāpento sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamatīti taṃ paṭhamamaggādhigamassa kāraṇanti āha – ‘‘ñatvāna udayabbayanti dassanabhūmiyā padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Ālokasaññāmanasikārādīhi thinamiddhassa abhibhavanaṃ vīriyassa āsannakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘thinamiddhābhibhū bhikkhūti vīriyassa padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Yadipi ariyamaggakkhaṇe pahānabhāvanā samānakālā ekābhisamayassa icchitattā, tathāpi pahātabbassa pahānābhāve bhāvanāpāripūrī natthīti pahānanimittā viya katvā bhāvanā vuttā ‘‘sabbā duggatiyo jaheti bhāvanāya padaṭṭhāna’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘sabbā duggatiyo jahe’’ti idaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ yogīnaṃ ussāhajananatthaṃ ānisaṃsakittanaṃ hotīti bhāvanāya visesakāraṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbā…pe… padaṭṭhāna’’nti.
第五,「相摄」的注释。显示巴利原文
5. Lakkhaṇahārasampātavaṇṇanā
67 「守护根门」是指在诸根上以正念防护,依靠念力令出离寻等变得增盛,因此才会说:“因此,对于守护心者,正思惟行境,此是念根。”这两句的义理是:此处“因此,对于守护心者,正思惟行境”一句中,以“守护心”和“正思惟行境”作为原因来转称,此「念根」便包含了「五根」,这是因为它们要么以“根”的相状,要么以“令解脱成熟”的状态为同一相的缘故——这便是意趣所在。至于“包含”这一说法,在此处以“道相”来理解“包含”是容易的,故暂且搁置;为显示出于原因的包含,才说出“从正见生起正思惟”等语。意思是:正是因此包含而获得了「圣八支道」之后,也顺带说明了“解脱”与“解脱智见”。显示巴利原文
67. Indriyesu guttadvāratā satisaṃvaro, satibalena ca nekkhammavitakkādibahulo hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaroti idaṃ satindriya’’nti. Tassattho – ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaro’’ti ettha rakkhitacittatāya ca sammāsaṅkappagocaratā kāraṇūpacārena idaṃ satindriyaṃ, gahitāni bhavanti pañcindriyāni indriyalakkhaṇena vimuttiparipācanabhāvena vā ekalakkhaṇattāti adhippāyo. Gahito bhavatīti ettha maggalakkhaṇena gahaṇaṃ suviññeyyanti taṃ ṭhapetvā kāraṇato gahaṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sammādiṭṭhito hi sammāsaṅkappo pabhavatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tato eva gahito bhavati ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti vatvā vimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanānipi vuttāni.
第六,「四阵列摄」的注释。显示巴利原文
6. Catubyūhahārasampātavaṇṇanā
68 「守护」:意为被守护,故称守护。这是从字词角度所作的解释。然而,当从义理角度作解释时,其实也就囊括了字词的解释,因此说:“守护者,即被普遍地保护——这便是它的语源。”在此,“iti”一词表示起始或类别,由此,这语源即是说“像这样”或“如此一类”。因此,「心」是指思量者:它能汇集自类相续,故名为「心」;依种种缘而生,故名为「心」;以种种色彩缤纷的状态为义,故名为「心」;以造作种种行为为义,故名为「心」。而「正思惟」是指正确地思量。应如此理解其语源。显示巴利原文
68. Rakkhīyatīti rakkhitaṃ. Idaṃ padavasena nibbacanaṃ. Yasmā pana atthavasena nibbacane vutte padavasena nibbacanaṃ vuttameva hoti, tasmā ‘‘rakkhitaṃ paripālīyatīti esā niruttī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha iti-saddo ādyattho, pakāre vā. Tena evamādikā evaṃpakārā vā esā niruttīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tasmā cintetīti cittaṃ. Attano santānaṃ cinotīti cittaṃ, paccayehi citanti cittaṃ, cittavicittaṭṭhena cittaṃ, cittakaraṇaṭṭhena cittaṃ. Sammā saṅkappetīti sammāsaṅkappotiādinā nirutti veditabbā.
这便是世尊在此处的意趣。世尊通过“他应成为守护心者”等语句,宣说了根律仪等以及断除恶趣的道理,这也是他在这段偈颂中的真实意图。「拘迦利」等,是对因缘的说明。在此,“hi”字表示原因。它所表达的是:因为拘迦利(《相应部》1.181;《增支部》10.89;《经集·拘迦利经》)未守护自心,对诸上首弟子心生恼怒,从而投生红莲地狱。因此,想要断除诸恶趣的人,便应成为「守护心者」。这是说:世尊指出,若人以正念为防护、具足此心,便能断除一切恶趣——这便是义理所在。而经文中所说“应以正念守护心”,正是显示了这种教法次第的衔接。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ ettha bhagavato adhippāyoti ‘‘rakkhitacitto assā’’tiādinā indriyasaṃvarādayo duggatipahānañca vadato bhagavato ettha gāthāyaṃ adhippāyo. Kokāliko hītiādi nidānaniddeso. Tattha hi-saddo kāraṇe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā kokāliko (saṃ. ni. 1.181; a. ni. 10.89; su. ni. kokālikasutta) arakkhitacittatāya aggasāvakesu cittaṃ padosetvā padumanirayaṃ upapanno, tasmā duggatiyo jahitukāmo rakkhitacitto assāti bhagavā satiārakkhena cetasā samannāgato sabbā duggatiyo jahatīti attho. Suttamhi vuttaṃ ‘‘satiyā cittaṃ rakkhitabba’’nti desanānusandhidassanaṃ.
7. 引转宝摄颂注释显示巴利原文
7. Āvaṭṭahārasampātavaṇṇanā
69 所谓“出离寻增盛”,是指依靠遍处或慈心等而获得的心一境性,这种定被称为「心箧」。将心安住于此箧中,或仅将所得任一程度的定,从杂染法中守护起来,如此则名为「守护心者」。因此说:“所以,‘对于守护心者,正思惟行境’——这指的是奢摩他。”所谓“以慧增上为观者”,即说:“‘以正见为先导’——这指的是观。”当以圣道彻底了知苦谛时,观察诸行生灭的智慧便达到顶峰,因此说:“‘了知了生灭’——这便是苦的遍知。”而“凡是具有集起性质的法,这一切皆具灭尽性质”,这句话正显示了道智的运转。这四者即是四圣谛,借此四圣谛来完成旋转开示。在此,应当这样看待:前半部分通过建立前两种圣谛,以异分法旋转;后半部分则以同分法旋转。显示巴利原文
69. Nekkhammasaṅkappabahulo kasiṇavasena mettādivasena vā laddhāya cittekaggatāsaṅkhātāya cittamañjūsāya cittaṃ ṭhapetvā samādhiṃyeva vā yathāladdhaṃ saṃkilesato rakkhitacitto nāma hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘tasmā rakkhitacittassa sammāsaṅkappagocaroti ayaṃ samatho’’ti. Paññāpadhānā vipassanāti āha – ‘‘sammādiṭṭhipurekkhāroti ayaṃ vipassanā’’ti. Ariyamaggena dukkhasacce pariññāte udayabbayadassanaṃ matthakappattaṃ nāma hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘ñatvāna udayabbayanti dukkhapariññā’’ti. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti hi maggañāṇassa pavattidassanāti. Imāni cattāri saccānīti catusaccadhammavasena āvaṭṭanaṃ niṭṭhapeti. Tattha purimena saccadvayaṭṭhapanena visabhāgadhammavasena, pacchimena sabhāgadhammavasena āvaṭṭananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
8. 分别宝摄颂注释显示巴利原文
8. Vibhattihārasampātavaṇṇanā
70 “应以善品、不善品来解说”——“守护心者”即指念的防护。此防护依六门而得六种:眼门防护……乃至意门防护。“正思惟”有三种:出离思惟、无瞋思惟、无害思惟。“正见”有八种:对苦的智……(中略)……对此缘性、缘已生法的智。“生灭智”有五十种:以无明集而有色集……(中略)……观察变异相者亦见识蕴之灭。“克服惛沉睡眠”依四种道而有四种。其中,念的防护有世间与出世间二种。世间念防护唯属欲界;出世间念防护依见道与修道之别而有二种,此二种又各依四念处之别而有四种。正思惟等亦同此理。显示巴利原文
70.Kusalapakkhokusalapakkhena niddisitabboti rakkhitacittassāti satisaṃvaro, so chabbidho dvāravasena cakkhudvārasaṃvaro yāva manodvārasaṃvaroti. Sammāsaṅkappo tividho – nekkhammasaṅkappo, abyāpādasaṅkappo, avihiṃsāsaṅkappoti. Sammādiṭṭhi aṭṭhavidhā dukkhe ñāṇaṃ…pe… idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu ñāṇanti. Udayabbayañāṇaṃ paññāsavidhaṃ avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo…pe… vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ passantopi viññāṇakkhandhassa vayaṃ passati. Thinamiddhābhibhavanaṃ catubbidhaṃ catumaggavasena. Tattha satisaṃvaro lokiyalokuttaravasena duvidho. Tesu lokiyo kāmāvacarova, lokuttaro dassanabhāvanābhedato duvidho. Ekameko cettha catusatipaṭṭhānabhedato catubbidho. Esa nayo sammāsaṅkappādīsupi.
然而,此处有一差别:正思惟依初禅亦可视作属于色界。近因的分类,当依“近因宝摄颂”中所说的方法来说明。不善品中,“不防护”有八种:眼不防护……(中略)……身不防护、掉举身不防护、语不防护、意不防护。“邪思惟”依欲寻等而有三种。“无智”分为八种,即“对苦的无智”等。作为正见对立面的邪见,应知有六十二种。惛沉睡眠依其生起之地而有五种。如此,当知不善品中的分类。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana viseso – sammāsaṅkappo paṭhamajjhānavasena rūpāvacarotipi nīharitabbo. Padaṭṭhānavibhāgo padaṭṭhānahārasampāte vuttanayena vattabbo . Akusalapakkhe asaṃvaro cakkhuasaṃvaro…pe… kāyaasaṃvaro, copanakāyaasaṃvaro, vācāasaṃvaro, manoasaṃvaroti aṭṭhavidho. Micchāsaṅkappo kāmavitakkādivasena tividho. Aññāṇaṃ ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā aṭṭhavidhā vibhattaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhipaṭipakkhato micchādiṭṭhi dvāsaṭṭhividhena veditabbā. Thinamiddhaṃ uppattibhūmito pañcavidhanti evaṃ akusalapakkhe vibhatti veditabbā.
9. 转换宝摄颂注释显示巴利原文
9. Parivattanahārasampātavaṇṇanā
71 转换宝中,并未如引转宝中所说那般对止与观进行拣择,而说“以修习止与观”。此处的止与观,当知是世间止观。所谓“依对立面”,是指以“无守护之心”这一偈颂的对立面为义;或者,是指以分别宝中所解说那些不善品的对立面为义。显示巴利原文
71. Parivattanahāre āvaṭṭahāre vuttanayena samathavipassanāniddhāraṇaṃ akatvā ‘‘samathavipassanāya bhāvitāyā’’ti āha. Lokiyā cettha samathavipassanā daṭṭhabbā. Paṭipakkhenāti ‘‘arakkhitena cittenā’’ti gāthāya paṭipakkhenāti adhippāyo. Atha vā vibhattihāre niddiṭṭhassa akusalapakkhassa paṭipakkhenāti attho.
10. 异名宝摄颂注释显示巴利原文
10. Vevacanahārasampātavaṇṇanā
72 应知,「意(mānasaṃ)」「心(hadayaṃ)」「净白(paṇḍaraṃ)」「识(viññāṇaṃ)」「识蕴(viññāṇakkhandho)」「意识界(manoviññāṇadhātu)」等,皆是「心」的异名。「思惟(takko)」「寻(vitakko)」「思量(saṅkappo)」「安止(appanā)」「极安止(byappanā)」「心之投向(cetaso abhiniropanā)」等,是「正思惟」的异名。「慧(paññā)」「了知(pajānanā)」「简择(vicayo)」「审察(pavicayo)」等(《法集论》16),是「正见」的异名。「惛沉(thinaṃ)」「昏沉(thiyanā)」「昏沉状态(thiyitattaṃ)」「心不适业(cittassa akallatā)」「不作业性(akammaññatā)」「覆盖(onāho)」「遍覆(parināho)」「内收(antosaṅkoco)」,这些是「惛沉」的异名。「心的显示巴利原文
72. ‘‘Mānasaṃ hadayaṃ paṇḍaraṃ viññāṇaṃ viññāṇakkhandho manoviññāṇadhātū’’ti (dha. sa. 6) ca cittassa vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Takko vitakko saṅkappo appanā byappanā cetaso abhiniropanā’’ti ca sammāsaṅkappassa. ‘‘Paññā pajānanā vicayo pavicayo’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 16) sammādiṭṭhiyā. ‘‘Thinaṃ thiyanā thiyitattaṃ cittassa akallatā akammaññatā onāho parināho antosaṅkoco’’ti thinassa. ‘‘Akallatā akammaññatā kāyālasiyaṃ supyaṃ supyanā supitatta’’nti (dha. sa. 1163) middhassa. ‘‘Bhikkhako bhikkhū’’tiādinā (pārā. 45) bhikkhupadassa. ‘‘Duggati apāyo vinipāto vaṭṭadukkhaṃ saṃsāro’’tiādinā duggatiyā vevacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
11. 施设论说(Paññattihārasampāta)的解说显示巴利原文
11. Paññattihārasampātavaṇṇanā
73 被以决意而守护的念所守护的心,正如该念的所依之处,因此才说:「‘已护心(rakkhitacittassa)’这一施设,是以念为近因(padaṭṭhānapaññatti)。」其余在「施设论说」此节,以及下文的「进入消尽论说(otaraṇasodhanahārasampāta)」等节中,并无新意,皆按前说之法理解即可。显示巴利原文
73. Adhiṭṭhahitvā rakkhantiyā satiyā rakkhiyamānaṃ cittaṃ tassā adhiṭṭhānaṃ viya hotīti katvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘rakkhitacittassāti padaṭṭhānapaññatti satiyā’’ti. Sesaṃ imasmiṃ paññattihārasampāte ito paresu otaraṇasodhanahārasampātesupi apubbaṃ natthi. Heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
14. 确立论说(Adhiṭṭhānahārasampāta)的解说显示巴利原文
14. Adhiṭṭhānahārasampātavaṇṇanā
76 在确立论说这一节中,所谓的「正见」,即是「于苦的智」等。依此开显:即依四谛、因与因所生、缘与缘所生等所摄之境的范围,显示了其中的种种差别;之后,又以「于彼彼处如实知见(yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ)」这一句,正依其余未尽之境来显明差别。其中,「谛之到达(saccāgamananti)」的意思,是对境以谛而到达、以不颠倒而到达,也就是证得。「随转到达(paccāgamana)」也是一种读法,意思是次第到达诸境,即一一证得诸境。至于此处应在「资具安立论说(parikkhārasamāropanahārasampātesu)」中宣说的内容,由于与前说之法相同,故十分明了。显示巴利原文
76. Adhiṭṭhānahārasampāte sammādiṭṭhi nāma yaṃ dukkhe ñāṇantiādinā catusaccahetuhetusamuppannapaccayapaccayuppannasaṅkhātassa visayassa vasena vemattataṃ dassetvā puna yaṃ tattha tattha yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇadassananti pāḷipāḷiatthānaṃ avasiṭṭhavisayavaseneva vemattataṃ dīpeti. Tattha yaṃ saccāgamananti yaṃ saccato aviparītato visayassa āgamanaṃ, adhigamoti attho. ‘‘Yaṃ paccāgamana’’ntipi pāṭho, tassa yaṃ paṭipāṭivisayassa āgamanaṃ, taṃtaṃvisayādhigamoti attho . Sesamettha parikkhārasamāropanahārasampātesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ pubbe vuttanayattā uttānameva.
混合论说的解说显示巴利原文
Missakahārasampātavaṇṇanā
就此而言,对论说的解释,也应当通过这种方式来了知——显示巴利原文
Api cettha hārasampātaniddeso imināpi nayena veditabbo –
诸法以意为前导,以意为最胜,皆为意所成;
若以净信之心,或言语或造作;
于是,快乐便追随他,如影不离身形。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manoseṭṭhā manomayā; Manasā ce pasannena, bhāsati vā karoti vā; Tato naṃ sukhamanveti, chāyāva anapāyinī’’ti. (dha. pa. 2);
那么,什么是教示之摄的成就?在“诸法以意为前导”这句中,依蕴的分别,“意”指识蕴;依处的分别,指意处;依界的分别,指识界;依根的分别,指意根。哪些法是前导?有六种法为前导:对于善法,善根为前导;对于不善法,不善根为前导;对于增上之法,增上为前导;对于一切心的生起,诸根为前导。而在这部经中,意正是所要彰显的主体。如同军队以国王为先锋,同样地,诸法以意为前导。于此,意作为前导有三种方式:出离思、无嗔思、无害思。其中,无贪以出离思而为意前导;无嗔以无嗔思而为意前导;无痴以无害思而为意前导。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamā dhammāti manoti khandhavavatthānena viññāṇakkhandhaṃ deseti. Āyatanavavatthānena manāyatanaṃ , dhātuvavatthānena viññāṇadhātuṃ, indriyavavatthānena manindriyaṃ. Katame dhammā pubbaṅgamā? Cha dhammā pubbaṅgamā, kusalānaṃ kusalamūlāni, akusalānaṃ akusalamūlāni, sādhipatikānaṃ adhipati, sabbacittuppādānaṃ indriyāni. Api ca imasmiṃ sutte mano adhippeto. Yathā balaggassa rājā pubbaṅgamo, evamevaṃ dhammānaṃ mano pubbaṅgamo. Tattha tividhena mano pubbaṅgamo nekkhammachandena abyāpādachandena avihiṃsāchandena. Tattha alobhassa nekkhammachandena manopubbaṅgamaṃ, adosassa abyāpādachandena manopubbaṅgamaṃ, amohassa avihiṃsāchandena manopubbaṅgamaṃ.
“意最胜”意为:意是那些法中最殊胜、最卓越、最高、最上、为根本、为前导、为上首的,因此称为“意最胜”。“意所成”意为:由意所造,由意所幻化,由意所生,意是它们的缘,因此称为“意所成”。那些法由欲所集起,由无浊的思惟所生起,由触所和合,也就是受蕴、想蕴、行蕴。“若以净信之意”:这里指信、信解、信受、净信。正是由于具足、成就、到达了这种净信,所以称为“以净信”,这指的是意业。“或说”指语业,“或行”指身业。如此便开示了十善业道。显示巴利原文
Manoseṭṭhāti mano tesaṃ dhammānaṃ seṭṭhaṃ visiṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ pavaraṃ mūlaṃ pamukhaṃ pāmokkhaṃ, tena vuccati ‘‘manoseṭṭhā’’ti. Manomayāti manena katā, manena nimmitā, manena nibbattā, mano tesaṃ paccayo, tena vuccati ‘‘manomayā’’ti. Te pana dhammā chandasamudānitā anāvilasaṅkappasamuṭṭhānā phassasamodhānā vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho. Manasā ce pasannenāti yā saddhā saddahanā okappanā abhippasādo. Iti iminā pasādena upeto samupeto upagato samupagato sampanno samannāgato, tena vuccati ‘‘pasannenā’’ti idaṃ manokammaṃ . Bhāsati vāti vacīkammaṃ. Karoti vāti kāyakammaṃ. Iti dasakusalakammapathā dassitā.
“从彼”:因十种善业已造作、已累积。“彼”:指那已积福德、已行善、已作庇护之人。“乐”:有两种,身乐与心乐。“跟随”:即随逐。显示巴利原文
Tatoti dasavidhassa kusalakammassa katattā upacitattā. Nanti yo so katapuñño katakusalo katabhīruttāṇo, taṃ puggalaṃ. Sukhanti duvidhaṃ sukhaṃ kāyikaṃ cetasikañca. Anvetīti anugacchati.
于此,有人未断随眠,于诸结缚法中观察乐味;当他于诸结缚法中观察乐味时,便依所见、所闻而希求成就之生存。如是,无明与有爱便紧随此人。当他依所见、所闻而希求成就之生存时,于能生净信之事物,心便生起净信、信受、确立。他具净信心,以身、语、意奉行三种福业事:布施所成、持戒所成、修习所成。他于现法、或于往生、或于其余诸转起中,领受其果报。如是,以无明为缘而有行,以行为缘而有识,以识为缘而有名色,以名色为缘而有六处,以六处为缘而有乐受之触,以触为缘而有受。如是存续时,彼乐便随逐于彼。当他的受如此辗转流转时,便生起渴爱;以渴爱为缘而有取……乃至……这就是集起。显示巴利原文
Idhassu puriso appahīnānusayo saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādaṃ anupassati, so saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādaṃ anupassanto yathādiṭṭhaṃ yathāsutaṃ sampattibhavaṃ pattheti. Iccassa avijjā ca bhavataṇhā ca anubaddhā honti, so yathādiṭṭhaṃ yathāsutaṃ sampattibhavaṃ patthento pasādanīyavatthusmiṃ cittaṃ pasādeti saddahati okappeti. So pasannacitto tividhaṃ puññakiriyavatthuṃ anutiṭṭhati dānamayaṃ sīlamayaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ kāyena vācāya manasā. So tassa vipākaṃ paccanubhoti diṭṭheva dhamme upapajje vā aparāpare vā pariyāye. Iti kho panassa avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṃ, saḷāyatanapaccayā sukhavedanīyo phasso, phassapaccayā vedanāti evaṃ santaṃ taṃ sukhamanveti. Tassevaṃ vedanāya aparāparaṃ parivattamānāya uppajjati taṇhā. Taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṃ…pe… samudayo hotīti.
其中,意、以意为前导的那些法与乐,这些称为五蕴,即苦谛。他们之前因——无明与有爱,是集谛。为遍知他们、为断除他们,世尊宣说法,即为遍知苦、为断除集。那用以遍知、用以断除者,即是道。那道所行之处,即是灭。此四谛亦应通过处、界、根之门来确立。其中,以集为乐味,以苦为过患,以道与灭为出离;乐的随逐是果;以净信心而发起身、语之努力是方便;由于诸法以意为前导,欲求自乐者应以净信心发动语业与身业,这是世尊的教令。这是教示之结合成就。显示巴利原文
Tattha yaṃ mano, ye ca manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, yañca sukhaṃ, ime vuccanti pañcakkhandhā, te dukkhasaccaṃ. Tesaṃ purimakāraṇabhūtā avijjā bhavataṇhā ca samudayasaccaṃ. Tesaṃ pariññāya pahānāya bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti, dukkhassa pariññāya samudayassa pahānāya. Yena parijānāti, yena pajahati, ayaṃ maggo. Yattha ca maggo pavattati, ayaṃ nirodho. Imāni cattāri saccāni evaṃ āyatanadhātuindriyamukhenāpi niddhāretabbāni. Tattha samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇaṃ, sukhassa anvayo phalaṃ, manasā pasannena kāyavacīsamīhā upāyo, manopubbaṅgamattā dhammānaṃ attano sukhakāmena pasannena manasā vacīkammaṃ kāyakammañca pavattetabbanti ayaṃ bhagavato āṇatti. Ayaṃ desanāhārasampāto.
其中,什么是审察结合成就?由能思量、能了别所缘故,名为‘意’。以思量为相,于相应法中作增上故,为前导;由无作者、无命、无我之义故,为‘法’。如村中村长,以增上义故,意于其中为最胜,故称‘意最胜’。由作为俱生等缘之意所生故,为‘意所成’。‘以净信’:由无浊,于所缘中安立故;‘或说’:由语表之表达及如是领受故;‘或作’:由身表之动转及如是领受故。‘从彼’:由已造作、无他故,说‘从彼’。‘乐’:由快乐、适意、可意故,说‘乐’。‘随逐’:由已作已积集、异熟尚未成熟故,说‘随逐’。‘如影不离’:由依因转起、无有舍离故,说‘如影不离’。这就是由逐词审察而得的审察结合成就。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo vicayahārasampāto? Mananato ārammaṇavijānanato mano. Mananalakkhaṇe sampayuttesu ādhipaccakaraṇato pubbaṅgamo īhābhāvato nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena dhammā. Gāmesu gāmaṇi viya padhānaṭṭhena mano seṭṭho etesanti manoseṭṭhā. Sahajātādipaccayabhūtena manasā nibbattāti manomayā. Akālussiyato, ārammaṇassa okappanato ca pasannena vacīviññattivipphārato tathā sādiyanato ca bhāsati. Copanakāyavipphārato tathā sādiyanato ca karoti. Tathā pasutattā anaññattā ca ‘‘tato’’ti vuttaṃ. Sukhanato sātabhāvato iṭṭhabhāvato ca ‘‘sukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Katūpacitattā avipakkavipākattā ca ‘‘anvetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāraṇāyattavuttito asaṅkantito ca ‘‘chāyāva anapāyinī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ anupadavicayato vicayahārasampāto.
其中,什么是合理结合成就?由于意对法有增上作用,故其为前导是合理的。正因如此,由于诸法随顺于意,故法以意为最胜是合理的。由于诸法由作为俱生等缘之意所生,故为意所成是合理的。由净信心所等起的身业、语业具有善性,是合理的。已积集的善业如影随形般随逐于乐,是合理的。这就是合理结合成就。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo yuttihārasampāto? Manassa dhammānaṃ ādhipaccayogato pubbaṅgamatā yujjati. Tato eva tesaṃ manassa anuvattanato dhammānaṃ manoseṭṭhatā yujjati. Sahajātādipaccayavasena manasā nibbattattā dhammānaṃ manomayatā yujjati. Manasā pasannena samuṭṭhānānaṃ kāyavacīkammānaṃ kusalabhāvo yujjati. Yena kusalakammaṃ upacitaṃ, taṃ chāyā viya sukhaṃ anvetīti yujjati. Ayaṃ yuttihārasampāto.
其中,什么是近因结合成就?意是意之伺察的近因。以意为前导的诸法,是一切善品的近因。‘或说’即正语,‘或作’即正业,这些是正命的近因。正命是正精进的近因。正精进是正念的近因。正念是正定的近因。‘以净信心’中,净信即信根,是戒的近因。戒是定的近因。定是慧的近因,应如此连结乃至解脱知见。这就是近因结合成就。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto? Mano manopavicārānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā sabbassa kusalapakkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Bhāsatī’’ti sammāvācā, ‘‘karotī’’ti sammākammanto, te sammāājīvassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammāājīvo sammāvāyāmassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammāvāyāmo sammāsatiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sammāsati sammāsamādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Manasā pasannenā’’ti ettha pasādo saddhindriyaṃ, taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlaṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Samādhi paññāyāti yāva vimuttiñāṇadassanā yojetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ padaṭṭhānahārasampāto.
其中,什么是‘结合成就’?在‘意为前导诸法’这句中,由于说‘意为前导’,依增上相,心与欲、精进、观等有着同一相,故也说诸法以欲为前导、以精进为前导、以观为前导。同样,依根相,信等与心同一相,故也说它们以信等为前导。所谓‘以净信心’,是指意具有净信,这是由他们所发起身业、语业无有过失的相。同样,心具有念等,也是由如理作意等所引发,故为同一相,因此他们无有过失相。‘乐随逐’:说‘乐随逐’,是以业为缘同一相故,因此也说作为乐之缘的可意色等随逐。这就是‘结合成就’。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo lakkhaṇo hārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti manopubbaṅgamatāvacanena dhammānaṃ chandapubbaṅgamatāpi vīriyapubbaṅgamatāpi vīmaṃsāpubbaṅgamatāpi vuttā hoti ādhipateyyalakkhaṇena chandādīnaṃ manasā ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā nesaṃ saddhādipubbaṅgamatāpi vuttā hoti indriyalakkhaṇena saddhādīnaṃ manasā ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Manasā ce pasannenā’’ti yathā manassa pasādasamannāgamo taṃsamuṭṭhānānaṃ kāyavacīkammānaṃ anavajjabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Evaṃ cittassa satiādisamannāgamopi nesaṃ anavajjabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ yonisomanasikārasamuṭṭhānabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Sukhamanvetī’’ti sukhānugamanavacanena sukhassa paccayabhūtānaṃ manāpiyarūpādīnaṃ anugamo vutto hoti tesampi kammapaccayatāya ekalakkhaṇattāti. Ayaṃ lakkhaṇahārasampāto.
其中,什么是‘四阵列结合成就’?在‘意为前导’等句中,对‘意’等词所作的语言学解释与语法,应当通过词义的解释来了解。这些词义,依照前面所说的方法,已容易了知。世尊在此处的意趣是:那些希求乐的人,应当以净信心发起身业、语业与意业。在修集福德业时,自己先作前导,再正确地引导他人,这便是此段说法的缘起。如同‘六门增上王’(《法句经注》2.181 伊罗跋陀龙王的故事)、‘心所随转之法’(《法集论》双论母 62; 1205-1206)、‘心是一法,一切皆随其而行’(《相应部》1.62)这类同义经文,显示这段说法在义理上的连贯,便是教说的系属。至于句子与句子间的连贯,则容易了知。这就是‘四阵列结合成就’。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo catubyūho hārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādīsu ‘‘mano’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ nibbacanaṃ niruttaṃ, taṃ padatthaniddesavasena veditabbaṃ. Padattho ca vuttanayena suviññeyyova. Ye sukhena atthikā, tehi pasannena manasā kāyavacīmanokammāni pavattetabbānīti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Puññakiriyāya aññesampi pubbaṅgamā hutvā tattha tesaṃ sammā upanetāro imissā desanāya nidānaṃ. ‘‘Chadvārādhipatī rājā (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.181 erakapattanāgarājavatthu), cittānuparivattino dhammā (dha. sa. dukamātikā 62; 1205-1206), cittassa ekadhammassa, sabbeva vasamanvagū’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62) evamādisamānayanena imissā desanāya saṃsandanā desanānusandhi. Padānusandhiyo pana suviññeyyāvāti. Ayaṃ catubyūho hārasampāto.
其中,什么是‘回转论式’?在‘意为前导诸法’这句经文中,那三种善根就是八种正性的因。那些正性,即是八支圣道。那与意同时生起的名色,这便是‘苦’。未断除的、先前已成熟的无明与有爱,这便是‘集’。它们被断除的所在,这便是‘灭’。如此,这四项便是四圣谛。这就叫作‘回转论式’。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo āvaṭṭo hārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti tattha yāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tāni aṭṭhannaṃ sammattānaṃ hetu. Ye sammattā, ayaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Yaṃ manosahajanāmarūpaṃ, idaṃ dukkhaṃ. Asamucchinnā purimanipphannā avijjā bhavataṇhā, ayaṃ samudayo. Yattha tesaṃ pahānaṃ, ayaṃ nirodhoti imāni cattāri saccāni. Ayaṃ āvaṭṭo hārasampāto.
何谓“分别论式”?“意为主导,诸法随行,若以净心,则乐从之”——这句经文不应只按字面意思去理解。为什么这样说呢?如果有一位沙门或婆罗门,对一个杀生者、邪见者、邪行者生起净信之心,并以此净心去虚赞对方并不具备的功德,或做出恭敬的举动,那么,他并不会因此得到快乐。相反,唯有苦会跟随他,犹如车轮紧随着拉车牛的脚一般。因此,这句经文应当作分别解说:若以净心而说、而做,那样的语业、身业能带来乐的果报。这是什么缘故呢?因为处于正性的人,其业能带来乐的果报;处于邪性的人,其业能带来苦的果报。那么,这种“净信”应当如何看待呢?我说,这其实不是真正的净信,而是貌似净信的邪胜解。这就称为分别论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo vibhattihārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manasā ce pasannena, tato naṃ sukhamanvetī’’ti nayidaṃ yathārutavasena gahetabbaṃ. Yo hi samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā pāṇātipātimhi micchādiṭṭhike micchāpaṭipanne sakaṃ cittaṃ pasādeti, pasannena ca cittena abhūtaguṇābhitthavanavasena bhāsati vā nipaccakāraṃ vāssa yaṃ karoti, na tato naṃ sukhamanveti. Dukkhameva pana taṃ tato cakkaṃva vahato padamanveti. Iti hi idaṃ vibhajjabyākaraṇīyaṃ. Yaṃ manasā ce pasannena bhāsati vā karoti vā, tañce vacīkammaṃ kāyakammañca sukhavedanīyanti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Sammattagatehi sukhavedanīyaṃ micchāgatehi dukkhavedanīyanti. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ pasādo daṭṭhabbo? Nāyaṃ pasādo, pasādapatirūpako pana micchādhimokkhoti vadāmi. Ayaṃ vibhattihārasampāto.
何谓“转起论式”?即“意为主导,诸法随行”等经文的用例。若以染污心而说或做,苦便会随之而来。因为这句经文正是它的正对反表述。这就称为转起论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo parivattano hārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamātiādi. Yaṃ manasā paduṭṭhena bhāsati vā karoti vā dukkhassānugāmī. Idañhi suttaṃ etassa ujupaṭipakkho. Ayaṃ parivattano hārasampāto.
何谓“同义论式”?“意为主导”:这里的“意”即心、意处、意根、意识、意识界,这些都是同义语。“主导”即前行者、先去者、先导者,这些都是同义语。“诸法”即我、自性,这些都是同义语。“最胜”即最上、首要、殊胜,这些都是同义语。“意所成”即意所生、意所发起,这些都是同义语。“净”即相信、信解,这些都是同义语。“乐”即怡悦、乐受,这些都是同义语。“随之”即跟随、追随,这些都是同义语。这就称为同义论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo vevacano hārasampāto? ‘‘Manopubbaṅgamā’’ti mano cittaṃ manāyatanaṃ manindriyaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ manoviññāṇadhātūti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Pubbaṅgamā purecārino puregāminoti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Dhammā attā sabhāvāti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Seṭṭhaṃ padhānaṃ pavaranti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Manomayā manonibbattā manosambhūtāti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Pasannena saddahantena okappentenāti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Sukhaṃ sātaṃ vedayitanti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Anveti anugacchati anubandhatīti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Ayaṃ vevacano hārasampāto.
其中,什么是「施设论式」?「意为前导」:是对意的作用的施设。「法」:是自性施设,也是善业道施设。「意最胜」:是首要施设。「意所成」:是俱生施设。「以净心」:是具有信根的施设,也是对无信的遮止施设。「或说或作」:是对正语、正业两种的施设。「乐随之」:是业果相续的施设,也是业不虚耗的施设。这就是施设论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo paññattihārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamāti ayaṃ manaso kiccapaññatti. Dhammāti sabhāvapaññatti, kusalakammapathapaññatti. Manoseṭṭhāti padhānapaññatti. Manomayāti sahajātapaññatti. Pasannenāti saddhindriyena samannāgatapaññatti, assaddhiyassa paṭikkhepapaññatti. Bhāsati vā karoti vāti sammāvācāsammākammantānaṃ nikkhepapaññatti. Tato naṃ sukhamanvetīti kammassa phalānubandhapaññatti, kammassa avināsapaññattīti. Ayaṃ paññattihārasampāto.
其中,什么是「进入论式」?「意」:指识蕴。「法」:指受蕴、想蕴、行蕴。「或说或作」:指身表和语表。这两者所依的四大种,即是色蕴。如此,便是以诸蕴进入。再者,「意」:指行作识。由执取‘意’一词,无明缘行即已被包含;紧接着,行缘识……乃至整个苦聚的生起。如此,便是以缘起进入。这就是进入论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo otaraṇo hārasampāto? Manoti viññāṇakkhandho. Dhammāti vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā. Bhāsati vā karoti vāti kāyavacīviññattiyo. Tāsaṃ nissayā cattāro mahābhūtāti rūpakkhandhoti ayaṃ khandhehi otaraṇo. Manoti abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇanti manoggahaṇena avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā gahitāti. Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ…pe… samudayo hotīti ayaṃ paṭiccasamuppādena otaraṇoti. Ayaṃ otaraṇo hārasampāto.
其中,什么是「净化论式」?仅说「意」:既非句清净,也非起始清净。至于「意为前导」:则为句清净,但尚未达到起始清净。同样,从「法」乃至「乐」:是句清净,而非起始清净。唯有说到「乐随之」时:既是句清净,亦是起始清净。这就是净化论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo sodhano hārasampāto? Manoti ārambho neva padasuddhi, na ārambhasuddhi. Manopubbaṅgamāti padasuddhi, na ārambhasuddhi. Tathā dhammāti yāva sukhanti padasuddhi, na ārambhasuddhi. Sukhamanvetīti pana padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi cāti. Ayaṃ sodhano hārasampāto.
其中,什么是“决意论式”?“诸法意先导,意最胜,意所成”:这是统一性。“若以净心”:这是差异性;同样,“若以净心”也是统一性。“或说或作”:这是差异性;同样,“若以净心”也是统一性。此净信有两种:从内而言,因镇伏嗔恚而有;从外而言,因信解而有。再者,它既是成就福有之因,也是增长之因——这又是一种差异性。因此,此经应依两方面决意:从因上,谓“具净信之心者”;从果上,谓“乐受果报之感受者”。这就是决意论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo adhiṭṭhāno hārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, manoseṭṭhā manomayāti ekattatā. Manasā ce pasannenāti vemattatā, tathā manasā ce pasannenāti ekattatā. Bhāsati vā karoti vāti vemattatā, tathā manasā ce pasannenāti ekattatā. So pasādo duvidho ajjhattañca byāpādavikkhambhanato, bahiddhā ca okappanato. Tathā sampattibhavahetubhūtopi vaḍḍhihetubhūtovāti ayaṃ vemattatā. Tayidaṃ suttaṃ dvīhi ākārehi adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ hetunā ca yo pasannamānaso, vipākena ca yo sukhavedanīyoti. Ayaṃ adhiṭṭhāno hārasampāto.
其中,什么是“资具论式”?“诸法意先导”中,“意”指善识。与智相应者,有无贪、无嗔、无痴三种相应因;与智不相应者,有无贪、无嗔两种相应因。一切善识共通以如理作意为因,以四成就轮为缘。同样,听闻正法,以及善识以布施等方式转起时,所施之物等亦是缘。在此,“法”指受等所缘,即可爱所缘等。同样,三种识的受等为净信之缘;可信赖之事与善行,为乐果之缘。这就是资具论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo parikkhāro hārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamāti ettha manoti kusalaviññāṇaṃ. Tassa ca ñāṇasampayuttassa alobho adoso amohoti tayo sampayuttā hetū, ñāṇavippayuttassa alobho adosoti dve sampayuttā hetū. Sabbesaṃ avisesena yonisomanasikāro hetu, cattāri sampatticakkāni paccayo. Tathā saddhammassavanaṃ, tassa ca dānādivasena pavattamānassa deyyadhammādayo paccayo. Dhammāti cettha vedanādīnaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇādayo. Tathā tayo viññāṇassa, vedanādayo pasādassa, saddheyyavatthukusalābhisaṅkhāro vipākasukhassa paccayoti. Ayaṃ parikkhāro hārasampāto.
其中,什么是“集合论式”?“诸法意先导”中,“意”指福德心,此心有三种:布施所成、持戒所成、修习所成。其中,布施所成者,以无贪为近因;持戒所成者,以无嗔为近因;修习所成者,以无痴为近因。一切共同以净信为近因,如《中部》所说:“由信生已,往诣亲近”(应广分别)。善心是可爱乐报的近因。如理作意是善心的近因,因为如理作意者,得以安立善心、修习善心,对未生之恶不善法,生起令其不生的意欲;对已生之善法,策励令其增长。如此修习四正勤时,四念住乃至八圣道分即达修习圆满——此即通过修习而集合。并且,由修习故,舍断亦得成就。这就是集合论式。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo samāropano hārasampāto? Manopubbaṅgamā dhammāti manoti puññacittaṃ, taṃ tividhaṃ – dānamayaṃ, sīlamayaṃ, bhāvanāmayanti. Tattha dānamayassa alobho padaṭṭhānaṃ, sīlamayassa adoso padaṭṭhānaṃ, bhāvanāmayassa amoho padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbesaṃ abhippasādo padaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘saddhājāto upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto payirupāsatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.183) suttaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Kusalacittaṃ sukhassa iṭṭhavipākassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yonisomanasikāro kusalacittassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yoniso hi manasi karonto kusalacittaṃ adhiṭṭhāti kusalacittaṃ bhāveti, so anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya chandaṃ janeti, uppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ…pe… padahati. Tassevaṃ catūsu sammappadhānesu bhāviyamānesu cattāro satipaṭṭhānā yāva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchatīti ayaṃ bhāvanāya samāropanā. Sati ca bhāvanāya pahānañca siddhamevāti. Ayaṃ samāropano hārasampāto.
施与者福德增长,自制者不积怨恨;
善者舍离恶法,因贪嗔痴灭尽而证寂灭。」(《长部》2.197;《优陀那》75;《藏释》16)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati, saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyati; Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṃ, rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbuto’’ti. (dī. ni. 2.197; udā. 75; peṭako. 16);
其中,“施与者福德增长”说的是布施所成就的福德事。“自制者不积怨仇”说的是持戒所成就的福德事。“善者舍弃恶”说的是对贪、嗔、痴的断除,由此称为修习所成就的福德事。“因贪嗔痴灭尽,彼得寂灭”指无余依般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Tattha dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu vuttaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu vuttaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti lobhassa ca dosassa ca mohassa ca pahānamāha. Tena bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu vuttaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti anupādāparinibbānamāha.
“施与者福德增长”指无贪善根。“自制者不积怨仇”指无嗔善根。“善者舍弃恶”指无痴善根。“因贪嗔痴灭尽,彼得寂灭”指出离这些烦恼。显示巴利原文
Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti alobho kusalamūlaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti adoso kusalamūlaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti amoho kusalamūlaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti tesaṃ nissaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ.
“施与者福德增长”是戒蕴的近因。“自制者不积怨仇”是定蕴的近因。“善者舍弃恶”是慧蕴与解脱蕴的近因。凭借布施断除粗重的烦恼,凭借持戒断除中等的烦恼,凭借智慧断除微细的烦恼。“因贪嗔痴灭尽,彼得寂灭”则显示了所作已办的境地。显示巴利原文
Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti sīlakkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti samādhikkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti paññākkhandhassa vimuttikkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Dānena oḷārikānaṃ kilesānaṃ pahānaṃ, sīlena majjhimānaṃ, paññāya sukhumānaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti katāvībhūmiṃ dasseti.
「施与者福德增长……舍弃恶」这部分显示有学地;「因贪嗔痴灭尽,彼得寂灭」则宣说最上果。显示巴利原文
Dadato puññaṃ…pe… jahāti pāpakanti sekkhabhūmi dassitā. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti aggaphalaṃ vuttaṃ.
同样,「施与者福德增长……不积怨仇」这一句开示世间善根;「善者舍弃恶」这一句开示出世间善根;「因贪嗔痴灭尽,彼得寂灭」这一句开示出世间善根的果。显示巴利原文
Tathā dadato puññaṃ…pe… na cīyatīti lokiyakusalamūlaṃ vuttaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti lokuttarakusalamūlaṃ vuttaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti lokuttarassa kusalamūlassa phalaṃ vuttaṃ.
「施与者……不积怨仇」显示凡夫地;「善者舍弃恶」显示有学地;「因贪嗔痴灭尽,彼得寂灭」显示无学地。显示巴利原文
Dadato…pe… na cīyatīti puthujjanabhūmi dassitā. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti sekkhabhūmi dassitā. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti asekkhabhūmi dassitā.
“施与者……不积怨仇”一句,说的是通往天界的行道。“善者舍弃恶”一句,说的是有学解脱。“因贪瞋痴灭尽,彼得寂灭”一句,说的是无学解脱。显示巴利原文
Dadato …pe… na cīyatīti saggagāminī paṭipadā vuttā. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti sekkhavimutti. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti asekkhavimutti vuttā.
“施与者……不积怨仇”一句,宣说的是布施论、戒论、生天论等世间法的教导。“善者舍弃恶”一句,宣说的是配合观察世间过患所开示的殊胜法教。“因贪瞋痴灭尽,彼得寂灭”一句,宣说的是这一法教的果。显示巴利原文
Dadato…pe… na cīyatīti dānakathaṃ sīlakathaṃ saggakathaṃ lokiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ desanamāha. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti loke ādīnavānupassanāya saddhiṃ sāmukkaṃsikaṃ dhammadesanamāha. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti tassā desanāya phalamāha.
“施者福德增长”一句,说的是法施与财施。“由防护而不积集怨仇”一句,说的是通过远离杀生等而给予众生无畏施。同样地,所有学处都可以如此展开。而且,依此戒的防护,立足戒者调御自心,他的止便达圆满。如是安住于止之后,以观善巧,此善巧者便断除恶:断除贪、断除瞋、断除痴,以圣道断除一切不善的恶法。如此修行者,“贪瞋痴灭尽,他已涅槃”——由于贪等烦恼完全灭尽,便证得了两种解脱。这就是此偈颂的释义。显示巴利原文
Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti dhammadānaṃ āmisadānañca vadati. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā sattānaṃ abhayadānaṃ vadati. Evaṃ sabbānipi sikkhāpadāni vitthāretabbāni. Tena ca sīlasaṃyamena sīle patiṭṭhito cittaṃ saṃyameti, tassa samatho pāripūriṃ gacchati. Evaṃ so samathe ṭhito vipassanākosallayogato kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṃ rāgaṃ jahāti, dosaṃ jahāti, mohaṃ jahāti, ariyamaggena sabbepi pāpake akusale dhamme jahāti. Evaṃ paṭipanno ca rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti rāgādīnaṃ parikkhayā dvepi vimuttiyo adhigacchatīti ayaṃ suttaniddeso.
其中,何为教导之收摄?于此经中教导了什么呢?两种善趣——天与人;天的五种欲功德、人的五种欲功德;天的五取蕴、人的五取蕴——这称为苦圣谛。以这些为因,前前生起的渴爱即是集圣谛。它们又被称为‘味’与‘患’。这一切由前两句「Dadato…pe… na cīyatī」所解说。「Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṃ」说的是道。「Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbuto」说的是两种涅槃界:有余依与无余依。此为出离。至于果等,则当随其因缘而了知。这就是教导之收摄。显示巴利原文
Tattha katamo desanāhārasampāto? Imasmiṃ sutte kiṃ desitaṃ? Dve sugatiyo devā ca manussā ca, dibbā ca pañca kāmaguṇā, mānusakā ca pañca kāmaguṇā, dibbā ca pañcupādānakkhandhā, mānusakā ca pañcupādānakkhandhā. Idaṃ vuccati dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ. Tassa kāraṇabhāvena purimapurimanipphannā taṇhā samudayo ariyasaccaṃ. Tayidaṃ vuccati assādo ca ādīnavo ca. Sabbassa purimehi dvīhi padehi niddeso ‘‘dadato…pe… na cīyatī’’ti. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti maggo vutto. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti dve nibbānadhātuyo saupādisesā ca anupādisesā ca. Idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ. Phalādīni pana yathārahaṃ veditabbānīti. Ayaṃ desanāhārasampāto.
择摄:「Dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī」——以此第一句,说明了三种福行事:施所成、戒所成、修所成;亦说明了十种应施物的施舍;同样也说明了六种所缘,如色等。「Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatī」——以此第二句,说明了无怨恨、无敌对、无嗔害的修行方式。「Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṃ」——以此第三句,说明了智慧的生起、无明的灭尽,以及一切圣八支道、一切菩提分法。「Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbuto」——由贪的灭尽,即离贪,得心解脱;由痴的灭尽,即离无明,得慧解脱。这就是择摄。显示巴利原文
Vicayoti ‘‘dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti iminā paṭhamena padena tividhampi dānamayaṃ sīlamayaṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu vuttaṃ. Dasavidhassapi deyyadhammassa pariccāgo vutto. Tathā chabbidhassapi rūpādiārammaṇassa. ‘‘Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatī’’ti dutiyena padena averā asapattā abyāpādā ca paṭipadā vuttā. ‘‘Kusalo ca jahāti pāpaka’’nti tatiyena padena ñāṇuppādo aññāṇanirodho sabbopi ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo sabbepi bodhipakkhiyā dhammā vuttā . ‘‘Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbuto’’ti rāgakkhayena rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, mohakkhayena avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti vuttāti. Ayaṃ vicayo hārasampāto.
理摄:安住于布施的人圆满两种——舍断悭吝与福德流注,此为义理。安住于戒防护的人圆满两种——近行定与安止定,此为义理。舍断恶法的人遍知苦、作证灭、修习道,此为义理。当贪嗔痴完全灭尽时,于无余涅槃界般涅槃,此为义理。这就是理摄。显示巴利原文
Yuttīti dāne ṭhito ubhayaṃ paripūreti macchariyappahānañca puññābhisandañcāti atthesā yutti. Sīlasaṃyame ṭhito ubhayaṃ paripūreti upacārasamādhiṃ appanāsamādhiñcāti atthesā yutti. Pāpake dhamme pajahanto dukkhaṃ parijānāti, nirodhaṃ sacchikaroti, maggaṃ bhāvetīti atthesā yutti. Rāgadosamohesu sabbaso parikkhīṇesu anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyatīti atthesā yuttīti. Ayaṃ yuttihārasampāto.
足处摄:“施者福德增长”这一句,是施舍依处的足处。“自制者怨仇不积集”是谛依处的足处。“善者舍断恶”是慧依处的足处。“贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃”是寂止依处的足处。这就是足处摄。显示巴利原文
Padaṭṭhānanti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti cāgādhiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti saccādhiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti paññādhiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti upasamādhiṭṭhānassa padaṭṭhānanti. Ayaṃ padaṭṭhāno hārasampāto.
相摄:“Dadato”(施者)一词,显示了爱语、利行、同事,应知它们以四摄事性而具有同一相。“Saṃyamato”(自制者)显示了忍辱、慈、无害、怜悯等,应知以不产生怨恨之相而具有同一相。“Veraṃ na cīyatī”(怨仇不积集)显示了惭、愧、少欲、知足等,以怨不增长之相而具有同一相。同理,无惭、无愧等以不应被尊重之相而具有同一相。“Kusalo”(善者)以善巧显示了正思惟等,以道支等之相而具有同一相。“Jahāti pāpakaṃ”(舍断恶)显示了遍知、现观等,以现观之相而具有同一相。“Rāgadosamohakkhayā”(贪嗔痴灭尽)显示了其余烦恼等的灭尽,以应被灭尽之相而具有同一相。这就是相摄。显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇoti ‘‘dadato’’ti etena peyyavajjaṃ atthacariyaṃ samānattatā ca dassitāti veditabbā saṅgahavatthubhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Saṃyamato’’ti etena khantimettāavihiṃsāanuddayādayo dassitāti veditabbā verānuppādanalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Veraṃ na cīyatī’’ti etena hirīottappaappicchatāsantuṭṭhitādayo dassitā verāvaḍḍhanena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā ahirīkānottappādayo acetabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Kusalo’’ti etena kosalladīpanena sammāsaṅkappādayo dassitā maggaṅgādibhāvena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Jahāti pāpaka’’nti etena pariññābhisamayādayopi dassitā abhisamayalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Rāgadosamohakkhayā’’ti etena avasiṭṭhakilesādīnampi khayā dassitā khepetabbabhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti ayaṃ lakkhaṇo.
四阵列摄:在这首偈颂中,“Dadato”(施者)表明世尊的意趣为何?那些希求大受用的人,将会行布施,以断除贫穷;那些希求无怨的人,将会断除五种怨;那些欣乐善法的人,将会修习八支道;那些希愿般涅槃的人,将会舍断贪嗔痴。这便是世尊的意趣。应如此开示语词、因缘、连结。这就是四阵列摄。显示巴利原文
Catubyūhoti dadatoti gāthāyaṃ bhagavato ko adhippāyo? Ye mahābhogataṃ patthayissanti, te dānaṃ dassanti dāliddiyappahānāya. Ye averataṃ icchanti, te pañca verāni pajahissanti. Ye kusaladhammehi chandakāmā, te aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvessanti. Ye nibbāyitukāmā, te rāgadosamohaṃ pajahissantīti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Evaṃ nibbacananidānasandhayo vattabbāti. Ayaṃ catubyūho.
转摄:不施者的悭吝、不防护者的怨仇,以及未舍断恶的不善——以这些对立面而说,这就是集。由无贪、无嗔、无痴,通过布施等而断除这些,这就是三善根。以八种正行为它们的缘,这就是道。贪嗔痴等的灭尽,这就是灭。这就是转摄。显示巴利原文
Āvaṭṭoti yañca adadato macchariyaṃ, yañca asaṃyamato veraṃ, yañca akusalassa pāpassa appahānaṃ, ayaṃ paṭipakkhaniddesena samudayo. Tassa alobhena ca adosena ca amohena ca dānādīhi pahānaṃ, imāni tīṇi kusalamūlāni. Tesaṃ paccayo aṭṭha sammattāni, ayaṃ maggo. Yo rāgadosamohānaṃ khayo, ayaṃ nirodhoti. Ayaṃ āvaṭṭo.
“分别”:施者福德增长——若有人因怖畏而施、因贪欲而施、因希求微利而施,他的福德绝不增长。若施予刑具、刀杖,是以恼害他人为目的,他的非福才增长。然而,若以善心,出于悲悯或恭敬,施予食物、饮料、衣服、车乘、花鬘、香、涂油、床座、住所、灯明;或施予一切众生无畏;或以慈心、利益意乐、出离想而说法——这样,福德才增长。“自制者怨仇不积集”——绝非指因怖畏而停止的那种防护能令无怨增长。为什么呢?那些没有能力、因害怕而停止的人,怖畏现法利益的损失,心想:“国王们会抓住我,砍断我的手……乃至活活刺穿在矛尖”,通过这样的防护也能积聚无怨。然而,真正如此防护的人,不会积聚怨恨。再者,还有这样的受持:杀生有恶的果报,现世与后世皆然;如是了知一切不善之后,他便从中远离,通过这样的防护来积聚无怨。这里所说的“防护”即是戒,有四种:思戒、心所戒、律仪戒、不犯戒。“善者舍断恶”——应理解为舍断恶的三十七菩提分法。这就是分别。显示巴利原文
Vibhattīti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti ekaṃsena yo bhayahetu deti, rāgahetu deti, āmisakiñcikkhahetu deti, na tassa puññaṃ vaḍḍhati. Yañca daṇḍadānaṃ satthadānaṃ paraviheṭhanatthaṃ apuññaṃ assa pavaḍḍhati. Yaṃ pana kusalena cittena anukampanto vā apacāyamāno vā annaṃ deti, pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālāgandhavilepanaṃ seyyāvasathaṃ padīpeyyaṃ deti, sabbasattānaṃ vā abhayadānaṃ deti, mettacitto hitajjhāsayo nissaraṇasaññī dhammaṃ deseti. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti ekaṃsena abhayūparatassa cīyati, kiṃkāraṇaṃ? Yaṃ asamattho, bhayūparato diṭṭhadhammikassa bhāyati ‘‘mā maṃ rājāno gahetvā hatthaṃ vā chindeyyuṃ…pe… jīvantampi sūle uttāseyyu’’nti, tena saṃyamena averaṃ cīyati. Yo pana evaṃ samāno veraṃ na cīyati. Yo pana evaṃ samādiyati, pāṇātipātassa pāpako vipāko diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāye ca, evaṃ sabbassa akusalassa, so tato āramati, iminā saṃyamena veraṃ na cīyati. Saṃyamo nāma sīlaṃ. Taṃ catubbidhaṃ cetanā sīlaṃ, cetasikaṃ sīlaṃ, saṃvaro sīlaṃ, avītikkamo sīlanti. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti pāpapahāyakā sattattiṃsa bodhipakkhiyā dhammā vattabbāti. Ayaṃ vibhatti.
“轮转”:施者福德增长,不施者福德也增长,但那并非布施所生的福德。自制者怨仇不积集,非自制者怨仇亦不积集,这是由布施、对治力与修习力所成就的。善者舍断恶,不善者则不舍断。由贪嗔痴的灭尽,他证得涅槃;若贪嗔痴未灭尽,则无有涅槃。这就是轮转。显示巴利原文
Parivattanoti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati, adadatopi puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati, na dānamayikaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyati asaṃyamatopi veraṃ na cīyati, yaṃ dānena paṭisaṅkhānabalena bhāvanābalena. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakaṃ, akusalo pana na jahāti. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbuto, tesaṃ aparikkhayā natthi nibbutīti. Ayaṃ parivattano.
“异名”:布施者,福德增长,即由施舍而积集善法。随喜者,福德亦增长;由心净信,亦得增长;由服务承事,亦得增长。自制者,即由戒律仪、由柔和而自制。怨仇不积集,即恶不增长、不善不增长。善者,即贤智者、聪慧者、具慧者、观察者。舍断,即断除、根绝。这就是异名。显示巴利原文
Vevacanoti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati. Pariccāgato kusalaṃ upacīyati. Anumodatopi puññaṃ pavaḍḍhati cittappasādatopi veyyāvaccakiriyāyapi. Saṃyamatoti sīlasaṃvarato soraccato. Veraṃ na cīyatīti pāpaṃ na vaḍḍhati, akusalaṃ na vaḍḍhati. Kusaloti paṇḍito nipuṇo medhāvī parikkhako. Jahātīti samucchindati samugghāṭeti. Ayaṃ vevacano.
“施设”:布施者,福德增长——这是对舍离贪的施设,是对确立无贪的施设。自制者,怨仇不积集——这是对镇伏嗔的施设,是对确立无嗔的施设。善者,舍断恶——这是对根绝愚痴的施设,是对修习无痴的施设。这也就是对断除贪嗔痴的施设,是对修习无贪、无嗔、无痴的施设。由贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃——这是对止息烦恼的施设,是对证得涅槃的施设。这就是施设。显示巴利原文
Paññattīti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti lobhassa paṭinissaggapaññatti, alobhassa nikkhepapaññatti. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti dosassa vikkhambhanapaññatti, adosassa nikkhepapaññatti. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti mohassa samugghātapaññatti, amohassa bhāvanāpaññatti. Rāgadosamohassa pahānapaññatti, alobhādosāmohassa bhāvanāpaññatti. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhipaññatti, nibbānassa sacchikiriyapaññattīti. Ayaṃ paññatti.
“入处”:布施者,福德增长——所谓布施,乃由信等诸根而生起,这是以根为入处。自制者,怨仇不积集——所谓自制,即是戒蕴,这是以蕴为入处。善者,舍断恶——所谓舍断恶,乃由三种解脱而生起,而他们之方便,即是三解脱门,这是以解脱门为入处。由贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃——这是解脱蕴,同时也是法界、法处,这是以界和处为入处。这就是入处。显示巴利原文
Otaraṇoti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti dānaṃ nāma saddhādīhi indriyehi hotīti ayaṃ indriyehi otaraṇo. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti saṃyamo nāma sīlakkhandhoti ayaṃ khandhehi otaraṇo. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti pāpappahānaṃ nāma tīhi vimokkhehi hoti. Tesaṃ upāyabhūtāni tīṇi vimokkhamukhānīti ayaṃ vimokkhamukhehi otaraṇo. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti vimuttikkhandho. So ca dhammadhātu dhammāyatanañcāti ayaṃ dhātūhi ca āyatanehi ca otaraṇoti. Ayaṃ otaraṇo.
“净化”:“施与者”等语句,仅仅是言辞上的清净,还未达到序说层面的清净。至于“由贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃”这一句,则既是言辞的清净,也是序说的清净。这便是净化。显示巴利原文
Sodhanoti dadatotiādikā padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti ayaṃ padasuddhi ca ārambhasuddhi cāti. Ayaṃ sodhano.
“安立”:“施与者”——这是单一性的说明;而布施、舍离、法施、财施、无畏施等八种布施则可广分别明,这是差别性的说明。“自制者”——这是单一性;而巴帝摩卡律仪、念律仪等,则是差别性。“善者舍断恶”——这是单一性;而舍断有身见、舍断疑等,则是差别性。“由贪嗔痴灭尽,他已涅槃”——这是单一性;而有余涅槃界、无余涅槃界,则是差别性。这便是安立。显示巴利原文
Adhiṭṭhānoti dadatoti ayaṃ ekattatā, cāgo pariccāgo dhammadānaṃ āmisadānaṃ abhayadānaṃ, aṭṭha dānāni vitthāretabbāni. Ayaṃ vemattatā. Saṃyamoti ayaṃ ekattatā. Pātimokkhasaṃvaro satisaṃvaroti ayaṃ vemattatā. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti ayaṃ ekattatā. Sakkāyadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati vicikicchaṃ pajahatītiādikā ayaṃ vemattatā. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti ayaṃ ekattatā. Saupādisesā nibbānadhātu anupādisesā nibbānadhātūti ayaṃ vemattatāti. Ayaṃ adhiṭṭhāno.
“资助”:欢悦是布施的缘,无贪是布施的因;惭与愧等是自制的缘,如理作意与无嗔是自制的因;定与如实知见是舍断恶的缘,三随观是舍断恶的因;道正见是涅槃的因,正思维等是涅槃的缘。这便是资助。显示巴利原文
Parikkhāroti dānassa pāmojjaṃ paccayo. Alobho hetu, saṃyamassa hirottappādayo paccayo. Yonisomanasikāro adoso ca hetu, pāpappahānassa samādhi yathābhūtañāṇadassanañca paccayo. Tisso anupassanā hetu, nibbutiyā maggasammādiṭṭhi hetu, sammāsaṅkappādayo paccayoti. Ayaṃ parikkhāro.
「安立理趣」:布施者福德增长,这是布施所成的福行事,是戒的近因。自制者不积怨仇,这是戒所成的福行事,是定的近因。依于戒,即使由禅那,贪等烦恼亦不积集;以戒为缘可能生起的诸漏、损害与热恼,于彼亦不现起。善者舍断诸恶,这是遍知断,是修习所成的福行事。由贪、嗔、痴灭尽而寂灭——即贪灭、嗔灭、痴灭。其中,贪,即那种贪、深贪、心的染着、贪求、贪求性、贪求态、贪欲、贪不善根。嗔,即那种嗔、嗔怒性、嗔怒态、嗔恚、心的恼害、嗔不善根。痴,即那种无智、无见、未通达、未正觉、未现观、愚钝、愚昧、无正知、痴不善根。像这样,这些贪等的灭尽、消散、舍断、寂止、寂静,即是有余涅槃界与无余涅槃界,这便是「安立理趣」。显示巴利原文
Samāropanohārasampātoti dadato puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, taṃ sīlassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṃyamato veraṃ na cīyatīti sīlamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu, taṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlena hi jhānenapi rāgādikilesā na cīyanti. Yepissa tappaccayā uppajjeyyuṃ āsavā vighātapariḷāhā, tepissa na honti. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti pahānapariññā, taṃ bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti rāgassapi khayā dosassapi khayā mohassapi khayā. Tattha rāgoti yo rāgo sārāgo cetaso sārajjanā lobho lubbhanā lubbhitattaṃ abhijjhā lobho akusalamūlaṃ. Dosoti yo doso dussanā dussitattaṃ byāpādo cetaso byāpajjanā doso akusalamūlaṃ. Mohoti yaṃ aññāṇaṃ adassanaṃ anabhisamayo asambodho appaṭivedho dummejjhaṃ bālyaṃ asampajaññaṃ moho akusalamūlaṃ. Iti imesaṃ rāgādīnaṃ khayo nirodho paṭinissaggo nibbuti nibbāyanā parinibbānaṃ saupādisesā nibbānadhātu anupādisesā nibbānadhātūti. Ayaṃ samāropano hārasampāto.